Reference Book On Contract Act Foundations

MS EDUCONZ PVT. LTD.
LAW& AUDIT
What is Law?
Law means a ‘set of rules’ which governs our behaviours and relating in a civilized society. So
there is no need of Law in a uncivilized society.
Why Should One Know Law?

One should know the law to which he is subject because ignorance of law is no excuse.
Sources of Mercantile Law in India
English Indian Status Judicial Customs and

Mercantile Law Decisions Usages
STUDY NOTE – 1 : INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872
Section 1:- Commencement and applicability:-
Short Title Extent and commencement
The Indian Applicable to First day of

contract Act whole Indian September
1872 except the state 1872(1st Sept.
of Jammu & 1872)
Kashmir
¾ Prior to this English law of contract was followed in India.

¾ It has XI chapter.
¾ Law of contract creates jus in personem and not in jus in rem.
¾ The Indian Contract Act consists of the following two parts:
(a) General principals of the Law of Contract.
(b) Special kinds of contracts.
¾ The general principals of the Law of Contract are contained in Sections 1 to 75 of the
Indian Contract Act. These principles apply to all kinds of contracts irrespective of their
nature.
¾ Special contracts are contained in Sections 124 to 238 of the Indian Contract Act. These
special contracts are Indemnity, Guarantee, Bailment, pledge and Agency.
Note: In our discussion on this part of the book, unless otherwise stated, the sections mentioned
are those of the Indian Contract Act, 1872.
Contracts as Defined by Eminent Jurists

1. “Every agreement and promise enforceable at law is a contract.” – Pollock
2. “A Contract is an agreement between two or more persons which is intended to be
enforceable at law and is contracted by the acceptance by one party of an offer made to
him by the other party to do or abstain from doing some act.” – Halsbury
3. “A contract is an agreement creating and defining obligation between the parties” –
Salmond
SUJEET JHA 1 9213188188
MS EDUCONZ PVT. LTD. LAW& AUDIT
DEFINITIONS (Sec 2)
1. Offer(i.e. Proposal) [section 2(a)]:-When one person signifies to another his
willingness to do or to abstain from doing anything, with a view to obtaining the
assent of that other person either to such act or abstinence, he is said to make a
proposal.
2. Acceptance 2(b):- When the person to whom the proposal is made, signifies his
assent there to , the proposal is said to be accepted.
3. Promise 2(b) :- A Proposal when accepted becomes a promise. In simple words,

when an offer is accepted it becomes promise.
4. Promisor and promise 2(c) :- When the proposal is accepted, the person making the
proposal is called as promisor and the person accepting the proposal is called as
promisee.
5. Consideration 2(d):- When at the desire of the promisor, the promisee or any other
person has done or abstained from doing something or does or abstains from doing
something or promises to do or abstain from doing something, such act or
abstinence or promise is called a consideration for the promise.
Price paid by the one party for the promise of the other Technical word meaning QUID-
PRO-QUO i.e. something in return.
6. Agreement 2(e) :- Every promise and set of promises forming the consideration for
each other. In short, agreement = offer + acceptance.
7. Contract 2(h) :- An agreement enforceable by Law is a contract.
8. Void agreement 2(g):- An agreement not enforceable by law is void.
9. Voidable contract 2(i):- An agreement is a voidable contract if it is enforceable by Law

at the option of one or more of the parties there to (i.e. the aggrieved party), and it is
not enforceable by Law at the option of the other or others.
10. Void contract :- A contract which ceases to be enforceable by Law becomes void
when it ceases to be enforceable.
SUJEET JHA 2 9213188188

ESSENTIALS OF A VALID CONTRACT
“All agreements are contracts, if they are made –

¾ by free consent of the parties, competent to contract,
¾ for a lawful consideration and
¾ with a lawful object, and
¾ not hereby expressly declared to be void.” - Sec.10.
ESSENTIALS OF VALID CONTRACT
Offer + acceptance = Promise

+
consideration
=
Agreement
+
enforceability By Law
Contract
1. Proper offer and proper acceptance with intention to create legal relationship.
Cases;- A and B agree to go to a movie on coming Sunday. A does not turn in resulting
in loss of B’s time B cannot claim any damages from B since the agreement to watch a
movie is a domestic agreement which does not result in a contract.
¾ In case of social agreement there is no intention to create legal relationship and
there the is no contract (Balfour v. Balfour)
¾ In case of commercial agreements, the law presume that the parties had the
intention to create legal relations.
¾ [an agreement of a purely domestic or social nature is not a contract ]
2. Lawful consideration :- consideration must not be unlawful, immoral or opposed to

the public policy.
3. Capacity:- The parties to a contract must have capacity (legal ability) to make valid
contract.
Section 11:- of the Indian contract Act specify that every person is competent to
contract provided.
(i) Is of the age of majority according to the Law which he is subject, and
(ii) Who is of sound mind and
(iii) Is not disqualified from contracting by any law to which he is subject.
¾ Person of unsound mind can enter into a contract during his lucid interval.
¾ An alien enemy, foreign sovereigns and accredited representative of a foreign
state. Insolvents and convicts are not competent to contract.
4. Free consent :- consent of the parties must be genuine consent means agreed upon
samething in the same sense i.e. there should be consensus – ad – idem. A consent is
SUJEET JHA 3 9213188188

said to be free when it is not caused by coercion, undue influence, fraud,

misrepresentation or mistake.
5. Lawful object
• The object of agreement should be lawful and legal.
• Two persons cannot enter into an agreement to do a criminal act.
• Consideration or object of an agreement is unlawful if it
(a) is forbidden by law; or
(b) is of such nature that, if permitted, would defeat the provisions of any
law; or
(c) is fraudulent; or
(d) Involves or implies, injury to person or property of another; or
(e) Court regards it as immoral, or opposed to public policy.
6. Possibility of performance:
• The terms of the agreement should be capable of performance.
• An agreements to do act, impossible in itself cannot be enforced.
Example : A agrees to B to discover treasure by magic. The agreement is void because
the act in itself is impossible to be performed from the very beginning.
7. The terms of the agreements are certain or are capable of being made certain [29]
Example : A agreed to pay Rs.5 lakh to B for ultra-modern decoration of his drawing
room. The agreement is void because the meaning of the term “ ultra – modern” is not
certain.
8. Not declared Void

• The agreement should be such that it should be capable or being enforced by law.
• Certain agreements have been expressly declared illegal or void by the law.
9. Necessary legal formalities

• A contract may be oral or in writing.
• Where a particular type of contract is required by law to be in writing and
registered, it must comply with necessary formalities as to writing, registration
and attestation.
• If legal formalities are not carried out then the contract is not enforceable by law.
Example : A promise to pay a time. Barred debt must be in writing.
Agreement is a wider term than contract where as all contracts are agreements. All
agreements are not contracts.
All Contracts are Agreements, but all Agreements are not Contracts
The various agreements may be classified into two categories:

Agreement not enforceable by law Agreement enforceable by law
Any essential of All essentials of

a valid contract a valid contract
is not available. are available
SUJEET JHA 4 9213188188

Conclusion:
Thus we see that an agreement may be or may not be enforceable by law, and so all agreement
are not contract. Only those agreements are contracts, which are enforceable by law, In short.
Contracts = Agreement + Enforceability by Law
Hence, we can conclude “All contracts are agreement, but all agreements are not contracts.”
Distinction between Contract & Agreement

Basis Contract Agreement
1. Section : Sec. 2(h) Sec. 2(e)
2. Definition : A contract is an agreement Every promise or every set of
enforceable by law. promises forming consideration for
each other is an agreements.
3. Enforceability : Every contract is enforceable Every promise is not enforceable.
4. Interrelationship A contract includes an agreement. An agreement does not include a
contract.
5. Scope : The scope of a contract is limited, as Its scope is relatively wider, as it
it includes only commercial includes both social agreement and
agreements. commercial agreements.
6. Validity : Only legal agreements are called An agreement may be both legal
contracts. and illegal.
7. Legal : Every contract contains a legal It is not necessary for every
Obligation obligation. agreement to have legal obligation.
Types of contracts :-
(1) (2) (3) (4)

On the Basis On the Basis of On the Basis of On the Basis
of creation Validity execution of Liability
a. Express contract a. Valid contract a. Executed contract a. Bilateral contract
b. Implied contract b. Void contract b. Executed contract b. Unilateral
c. Tacit contract c. Voidable contract c. Partly executed and contract
d. Quasi contract d. Unenforceable party executory
e. E contract contract
e. Illegal contract
(a) Express contract :- A contract made by word spoken or written. According to sec 9 in
so for as the proposal or acceptance of any promise is made in words, the promise is said
to be express.
Example : A says to B ‘will you purchase my bike for Rs.20,000?” B says to A “Yes”.
(b) Implied contract:- A contract inferred by

The conduct of person or
The circumstances of the case.
SUJEET JHA 5 9213188188

By implies contract means implied by law (i.e.) the law implied a contract through
parties never intended. According to sec 9 in so for as such proposed or acceptance is
made otherwise than in words, the promise is said to be implied.
Example:
A stops a taxi by waving his hand and takes his seat. There is an implied contract that A
will pay the prescribed fare.
(c) Tacit contract: - A contract is said to be tacit when it has to be inferred from the
conduct of the parties. Example obtaining cash through automatic teller machine, sale
by fall hammer of an auction sale.
(d). Quasi Contracts are contracts which are created -

• Neither by word spoken
• Nor written
• Nor by the conduct of the parties.
• But these are created by the law.
Example:
If Mr. A leaves his goods at Mr. B’s shop by mistake, then it is for Mr. B to return the
goods or to compensate the price. In fact, these contracts depend on the principle that
nobody will be allowed to become rich at the expenses of the other.
(e). e – Contract: An e – contract is one, which is entered into between two parties via the
internet.
(a) Valid contract:- An agreement which satisfies all the requirements prescribed by law
On the basis of creation
(b) Void contract (2(j)):- a contract which ceases to be enforceable by law because void
when of ceased to be enforceable
When both parties to an agreement are:-
Under a mistake of facts [20]
Consideration or object of an agreement is unlawful [23]
Agreement made without consideration [25]
Agreement in restrain of marriage [26]
Restraint of trade [27]
Restrain legal proceeding [28].
Agreement by wage of wager [30]
(c) Voidable contract 2(i) :- an agreement which is enforceable by law at the option of
one or more the parties but not at the option of the other or others is a voidable
contract.
Result of coercion, undue influence, fraud and misrepresentation.
(d) Unenforceable contract: - where a contract is good in substance but because of some
technical defect i.e. absence in writing barred by imitation etc one or both the parties
cannot sue upon but is described as unenforceable contract.
Example: Writing registration or stamping.
Example: An agreement which is required to be stamped will be unenforceable if the

same is not stamped at all or is under stamped.
SUJEET JHA 6 9213188188
(e) Illegal contract:- It is a contract which the law forbids to be made. All illegal
agreements are void but all void agreements or contracts are not necessary illegal.
Contract that is immoral or opposed to public policy are illegal in nature.
Unlike illegal agreements there is no punishment to the parties to a void agreement.
Illegal agreements are void from the very beginning agreements are void from the very
beginning but sometimes valid contracts may subsequently becomes void.
(a) Executed contract :- A contract in which both the parties have fulfilled their obligations
under the contract.
Example: A contracts to buy a car from B by paying cash, B instantly delivers his car.
(b) Executory contract:- A contract in which both the parties have still to fulfilled their
obligations.
Example : D agrees to buy V’s cycle by promising to pay cash on 15th July. V agrees to
deliver the cycle on 20th July.
(c) Partly executed and partly executory:- A contract in which one of the parties has
fulfilled his obligation but the other party is yet to fulfill his obligation.
Example : A sells his car to B and A has delivered the car but B is yet to pay the price.
For A, it is excuted contract whereas it is executory contract on the part of B since the
price is yet to be paid.
On the basis of liability for performance:-
(a) Bilateral contract:- A contract in which both the parties commit to perform their
respective promises is called a bilateral contract.
Example : A offers to sell his fiat car to B for Rs.1,00,000 on acceptance of A’s offer by
B, there is a promise by A to Sell the car and there is a promise by B to purchase the car
there are two promise.
(b) Unilateral contract:- A unilateral contract is a one sided contract in which only one
party has to perform his promise or obligation party has to perform his promise or
obligation to do or forbear.
Example :- A wants to get his room painted. He offers Rs.500 to B for this purpose B says to A
“ if I have spare time on next Sunday I will paint your room”. There is a promise by A to pay Rs
500 to B. If B is able to spare time to paint A’s room. However there is no promise by B to Paint
the house. There is only one promise.
Difference Between Void and Voidable Contract
Matter Void contract Voidable contract
Definition It means contract which cease to
It means an agreement enforceable
be enforceable. by law by one or more parties.
Nature Valid when made subsequentlyIt remains voidable until cancelled by
becomes unenforceable. party.
Rights or remedy No legal remedy. Aggrieved party has remedy to
cancel the contract.
Performance of Party can’t demand performance If aggrieved party does not cancel it
contract of contract within reasonable time, performance
SUJEET JHA 7 9213188188

can be demanded.
Reason Due to change in law or If consent is not obtained freely.
circumstances
Damages Not available Can demand in certain cases.
Difference between Void and illegal Agreement

Matter Void agreement Illegal agreement
What Void agreement is not prohibited It is prohibited by law.
by law.
Effect on collateral Enforced Not enforced.
transaction
Punishment No Yes
Void ab initio May not be void ab initio Always void initio
Contract of record:
It is either a judgment of a court of a Recognizance.
A Judgment is an obligation imposed by a Court upon one or more persons in favour of
another or others. In real sense, it is not a contract, as it is not based upon any agreement
between two parties.
Recognizance is a Bond by which a person undertakes before a Court of Magistrate to
observe some condition e.g. to appear on summons.
Contracts of record derive their binding force from the authority of the Court.
Contract under Seal:

(a) A contract under Seal is one which derives its binding force from its form alone.
(b) It is in writing and signed, sealed and delivered by the parties.
(c) It is also called a Deed or a Specialty contract.
SUJEET JHA 8 9213188188

OFFER
Offer(i.e. Proposal) [section 2(a)]:-When one person signifies to another his willingness to do
or to abstain from doing anything, with a view to obtaining the assent of that other person either
to such act or abstinence, he is said to make a proposal.
To form an agreement, there must be at least two elements – one offer and the other acceptance.
Thus offer is the foundation of any agreement.
“When one person signifies to another his willingness –

• to do or to abstain from doing anything,
• with a view to obtaining the assent of that other to such act or abstinence, he is said to
make a proposal.”
The person who makes an offer is called “Offeror” or “ Promisor” and the person to whom the
offer is made is called the Offeree” or “Promisee”.
Example
Mr. A says to Mr. B, “Will you purchase my car for Rs.1,00,000?” In this case, Mr. A is making
an offer to Mr. B. Here A is the offeror and B is the offeree.
Essentials elements of an offer:-

(1) There must be two parties.
(2) The offer must be communicated to the offeree.
(3) The offer must show the willingness of offeror. Mere telling the plan is not offer.
(4) The offer must be made with a view to obtaining the assent of the offeree.
(5) A statement made jokingly does not amount to an offer.
(6) An offer may involve a positive act or abstinence by the offeree.
(7) Mere expression of willingness does not constitute an offer.

A tells B’ that be desires to marry by the end of 2008, if does not constitute an offer
of marriage by A’ to B’ A further adds will you marry me. Then it become offer.
Legal Rules as to valid offer:-

1. Offer must be communicated to the offeree: The offer is completed only when it has
been communicated to the offeree. Until the offer is communicated, it cannot be
accepted. Thus, an offer accepted without its knowledge, does not confer any legal rights
on the acceptor.
Example:
A’s nephew has absconded from his home. He sent his servant to trace his missing
nephew. When he servant had left, A then announced that anybody who discovered the
missing boy, would be given the reward of Rs.500. The servant discovered the missing
boy without knowing the reward. When the servant came to know about the reward, he
brought an action against A to recover the same. But his action failed. It was held that the
SUJEET JHA 9 9213188188

servant was not entitled to the reward because he did not know about the offer when the
discovered the missing boy.
[Lalman Shukla v. Gauri Datt (1913) All LJ 489]
2. The offer must be certain definite and not vague unambiguous and certain.
Example:
A offered to sell to B. ‘a hundred tons of oil’. The offer is uncertain as there is nothing to
show what kind of oil is intended to be sold.
3. The offer must be capable of creating legal relation. A social invitation is not create
legal relation.
Example:
A invited B to a dinner and B accepted the invitation. It is a mere social invitation. And
A will not be liable if he fails to provide dinner to B.
4. Offer may be express and implied

The offer may be express or implied; An offer may be express as well as implied. An
offer which is expressed by words, written or spoken, is called an express offer. The
offer which is expressed by conduct, is called an implied offer [Section 9].
5. Communication of complete offer

Example:
A offered to sell his pen to B for Rs.1,000. B replied, “I am ready to pay Rs.950”. On
A’s refusal to sell at this price, B agreed to pay Rs.1,000. held, there was not contract at
the acceptance to buy it for Rs.950 was a counter offer, i.e. rejection of the offer of A.
Subsequent acceptance to pay Rs.1,000 is a fresh offer from B to which A was not bound
go give his acceptance.
6. Counter offer – A counter offer amounts to rejection of the original offer
7. Cross offer do not conclude a contract
8. An offer must not thrust the burden of acceptance on the offeree.

Example:
A made a contract with B and promised that if he was satisfied as a customer he would
favorably consider his case for the renewal of the contract. The promise is too vague to
create a legal relationship.
¾ The acceptance cannot be presumed from silence.
¾ Acceptance is valid only if it is communicated to the offeror.
9. Offer must be distinguished from invitation to offer.

Example:
Menu card of restaurant is an invitation to put an offer.
Example ;
Price – tags attached with the goods displayed in any showroom or supermarket is also
an invitation to proposal. If the salesman or the cashier does not accept the price, the or
the cashier does not accept the price, the interested buyer cannot compel him to sell, if he
wants to buy it, he must make a proposal.
Example:
Job or tender advertisement inviting applications for a job or inviting tenders is an
invitation to an offer.
Example:
SUJEET JHA 10 9213188188

An advertisement for auction sale is merely an invitation to make an offer and not an
offer for sale. Therefore, an advertisement of an auction can be withdrawn without any
notice. The persons going to the auction cannot claim for loss of time and expenses if the
advertisement for auction is withdrawn.
10. Offeror should have an intention to obtain the consent of the offeree.
11. An answer to a question is not a offer.
Offer Invitation to offer

¾ Show his readiness to enter into a ¾ Person invites offer to make an offer to
contract, it is called as an offer him.
¾ Purpose of entering contract ¾ Purpose of enter offer
¾ Results in a contract ¾ Results in offer.
Example Example
Application filled in by a prospective Issue of prospectus by a Company, an
applicable to the Institution, a student seeking education Institution.
admission in educational Institution.
KINDS OF OFFER
Express Implied Specific General Cross offer Counter Standing

offer offer offer offer offer Open and
Continuou
s offer
I. Express offer - When the offeror expressly communication the offer the offer is said
to be an express offer the express communication of the offer may be made by
Spoken word
Written word
II. Implied offer – when the offer is not communicate expressly. An offer may be implied
from:-
The conduct of the parties or
The circumstances of the case
III. Specific:- It means an offer made in

(a) a particular person or
(b) a group of person: It can be accepted only by that person to whom it is made
communication of acceptance is necessary in case of specific offer.
IV. General offer: - It means on offer which is made to the public in general.
• General offer can be accepted by anyone.
• If offeree fulfill the term and condition which is given in offer then offer is
accepted.
• Communication of acceptance is not necessary is case of general offer
SUJEET JHA 11 9213188188

Example
Company advertised that a reward of Rs.100 would be given to any person who would
suffer from influenza after using the medicine (Smoke balls) made by the company
according to the printed directions.
One lady, Mrs, Carlill, purchased and used the medicine according to the printed
directions of the company but suffered from influenza, She filed a suit to recover the
reward of Rs.100. The court held that there was a contract as she had accepted a general
offer by using the medicine in the prescribed manner and as such as entitled to recover
the reward from the company.
Carlill v Carbilic Smoke Ball Co. 1893
V. Cross offer:- When two parties exchange identical offers in ignorance at the time of
each other’s offer the offer’s are called cross offer.
Two cross offer does not conclude a contract. Two offer are said to be cross offer if
1. They are made by the same parties to one another
2. Each offer made in ignorance of the offer made by the
3. The terms and conditions contained in both the offers’ are same.
Example : A offers by a letter to sell 100 tons of steel at Rs.1,000 per ton. On the same
day, B also writes to A offering to buy 100 tons of steel at Rs.1,000 per ton.
When does a contract come into existence: - A contract comes into existence when any of the
parties, accept the cross offer made by the other party.
VI Counter offer :- when the offeree give qualified acceptance of the offer subject to
modified and variations in the terms of original offer. Counter offer amounts to rejection
of the original offer.
Legal effect of counter offer:-
(1) Rejection of original offer
(2) The original offer is lapsed
(3) A counter offer result is a new offer.
In other words an offer made by the offeree in return of the original offer is called as a
counter offer.
Example:
A offered to sell his pen to B for Rs.1,000. B replied, “ I am ready to pay Rs.950.” On
A’s refusal to sell at this price, B agreed to pay Rs.1,000. Held, there was not contract as
the acceptance to buy it for Rs.950 was a counter offer, i.e. rejection of the offer of A.
Subsequent acceptance to pay Rs.1,000 is a fresh offer from B to which A was not bound
to give his acceptance.
VII Standing, open and continuous offer:- An offer is allowed to remain open for
acceptance over a period of time is known as standing, open or continually offer. Tender
for supply of goods is a kind of standing offer.
Example:
When we ask the newspaper vendor to supply the newspaper daily. In such case, we do
not repeat our offer daily and the newspaper vendor supplies the newspaper to us daily.
The offers of such types are called Standing Offer.
SUJEET JHA 12 9213188188

LAPSE OF AN OFFER
An offer should be accepted before it lapses (i.e. comes to an end). An offer may come to an end
in any of the following ways stated in Section 6 of the Indian Contract Act:
1. By communication of notice of revocation: An offer may come to an end by

communication of notice of revocation by the offeror. It may be noted that an offer can
be revoked only before its acceptance is complete for the offeror. In other words, an
offeror can revoke his offer at any time before he becomes before bound by it. Thus, the
communication of revocation of offer should reach the offeree before the acceptance is
communicated.
2. By lapse of time; Where time is fixed for the acceptance of the offer, and it is not
acceptance within the fixed time, the offer comes to an end automatically on the expiry
of fixed time. Where no time for acceptance is prescribed, the offer has to be accepted
within reasonable time. The offer lapses if it is not accepted within that time. The term
‘reasonable time’ will depend upon the facts and circumstances of each case.
3. By failure to accept condition precedent: Where, the offer requires that some condition
must, be fulfilled before the acceptance of the offer, the offer lapses, if it is accepted
without fulfilling the condition.
4. By the death or insanity of the offeror: Where, the offeror dies or becomes, insane, the
offer comes to an end if the fact of his death or insanity comes to the knowledge of the
acceptor before he makes his acceptance. But if the offer is accepted in ignorance of the
fact of death or insanity of the offeror, the acceptance is valied. This will result in a valid
contract, and legal representatives of the deceased offeror shall be bound by the contract.
On the death of offeree before acceptance, the offer also comes to an end by operation of
law.
5. By counter – offer by the offeree: Where, a counter – offer is made by the offeree, and
then the original offer automatically comes to an end, as the counter – offer amounts to
rejections of the original offer.
6. By not accepting the offer, according to the prescribed or usual mode: Where some
manner of acceptance is prescribed in the offer, the offeror can revoke the offer if it is
not accepted according to the prescribed manner.
7. By rejection of offer by the offeree: Where, the offeree rejects the offer, the offer
comes to an end. Once the offeree rejects the offer, he cannot revive the offer by
subsequently attempting to accept it. The rejection of offer may be express or implied.
8. By change in law: Sometimes, there is a change in law which makes the offer illegal or
incapable of performance. In such cases also, the offer comes to an end.
SUJEET JHA 13 9213188188

ACCEPTANCE
Acceptance 2(b):- When the person to whom the proposal is made, signifies his assent there
to , the proposal is said to be accepted.
Legal Rules for the Acceptance
1. Acceptance must be absolute and unqualified

Example: A offers to sell his house to B for Rs. two lakhs. B accepts the offer and
promises to pay the price in four installments. This is not pay the acceptance as the
acceptance is with variation in the terms of the offer.
2. Acceptance must be communicated: Mere mental acceptance is no acceptance, But

there is no requirement of communication of acceptance of general offer.
Example The manager of Railway Company received a draft agreement relating to the
supply of coal. The manager marked the draft with the words “Approved” and put the
same in the drawer of his table and forgot all about it. Held, there was no contract
between the parties as the acceptance was not communicated. It may however, be
pointed out that the Court construed a conduct to parties as railway company was
accepting the supplies of coal from time to time.
3. Manner of acceptance
General rule say that it must be as per the manner prescribed by offeror. If no mode is
prescribed in which it can be accepted, then it must be in some usual and reasonable
manner.
4. If there is deviation in communication of an acceptance of offer, offeror may reject

such acceptance by sending notice within reasonable time. If the offeror doesn’t send
notice or rejection, he accepted acceptance of offer.
Example: A offers B and indicates that the acceptance be given by telegram. B sends his
acceptance by ordinary post. It is a valid acceptance unless A insists for acceptance in the
prescribed manner.
5. Acceptance of offer must be made by offeror.

Example : A applied for the headmastership of a school. He was selected by the
appointing authority but the decision was not communicated to him. However, one of
members in his individual capacity informed him about the selection. Subsequently, the
appointing authority cancelled its decision. A sued the school for breach of contract. The
Court rejected the A’s action and held that there was no notice of acceptance.
“Information by unauthorized person is as insufficient as overhearing from behind the
door”.
6. Acceptance must be communicated to offeror
7. Time limit for acceptance

• If the offer prescribes the time limit, it must be accepted within specified time.
• If the offer does not prescribe the time limit, it must be accepted within reasonable
time.
Example : A applied (offered) for shares in a company in early June. The allotment
(Acceptance) was made in late November. A refused to take the shares. Held, A was
entitled to do so as the reasonable time for acceptance had elapsed.
SUJEET JHA 14 9213188188

8. Acceptance of offer may be expressly (by words spoken or written); or impliedly (by
acceptance of consideration); or by performance of conditions (e.g.in case of a general
offer)
9. Mere silence is not acceptance of the offer

Example A offers to B to buy his house for Rs.5 lakhs and writes “If I hear no more
about it within a week, I shall presume the house is mine for Rs.5 lakhs. “B does not
respond. Here, no contract is concluded between A and B.
10. However, following are the two exceptions to the above rule. It means silence
amounts as acceptance of offer.
• Where offeree agrees that non – refusal by him within specified time shall amount
to acceptance of offer.
• When there is custom or usage of trade which specified that silence shall amount to
acceptance.
11. Acceptance subject to the contract is no acceptance

If the acceptance has been given ‘subject to the contract” or subject to approval by
certain persons, it has not effect at all. Such an acceptance will not create binding
contract until a formal contract is prepared and signed by all the parties.
General Rules as to Communication of Acceptance
1. In case of acceptance by post
Where the acceptance is given by post, the communication of acceptance is complete as
against the proposer when the letter of acceptance is posted. Thus, mere posting of letter
of acceptance is sufficient to conclude a contract. However, the letter must be properly
addressed and stamped.
2. Delayed or no delivery of letter

Where the letter of acceptance is posted by the acceptor but it never reaches the offeror,
or it is delayed in transit, it will not affect the validity of acceptance. The offeror is
bound by the acceptance.
3. Acceptance by telephones telex or tax

If the communication of an acceptance is made by telephone, tele-printer, telex, fax
machines, etc, it completes when the acceptance is received by the offeror. The contract
is concluded as soon as the offeror receives not hears the acceptance.
4. The place of Contract

In case of acceptance by the post, the place where the letter is posted is the place of
contract. Where the acceptance is given by instantaneous means of communication
(telephone, fax, tele-printer, telex etc.), the contract is made at the place where the
acceptance is received,
5. The time of Contract

In case of acceptance by post, the time of posting the letter of acceptance to the time of
contract. But in case of acceptance by instantaneous means of communication, the time
of contract is the time when the offeror gets the communication, the time of contract is
the time when offeror gets the communication of acceptance.
6. Communication of acceptance in case of an agent.
Where the offer has been made through an agent, the communication of acceptance is
completed when the acceptance is given either to the agent or to the principal. In such a
SUJEET JHA 15 9213188188
case, if the agent fails to convey the acceptance received from offeree, still the principal
is bound by the acceptance.
7. Acceptance on loudspeakers
Acceptance given on loudspeaker is not a valid a acceptance.
Particulars Offer Acceptance

When • Communication of a • As against the offerer/
Communication is proposal is complete when Proposer: When it is put in
complete [Sec.4] it comes to the knowledge a course of transmission to
of the person to whom it is him so as to be out of the
made. power of the Acceptor.
• Example : A proposes by • As against the
letter, to sell his Tonga to B Offeree/Acceptor: When it
at Rs.10,000. comes to the knowledge of
Communication of the the Proposer. (See separate
proposal is complete when question above)
B receives the letter.
When Revocation can • Offer/proposal may be • Acceptance may be revoked
be made [Sec.5] revoked at any time before at any time before the
the communication of its communication of acceptor,
acceptance is complete, as but not afterwards.
against the proposer, but • Example: T sends to S by
not afterwards. post, an offer to sell his
• Example: U sends a letter cycle. S sends his
to Y proposing to sell his acceptance via post, S could
land. Y sends his revoke his acceptance, upto
acceptance by post. U can any time before or at the
revoke the offer at any time moment when he posts his
before or at the moment letter of acceptance, but not
when Y posts his letter of afterwards.
acceptance, but not
afterwards.
When communication • As against the offeror: • As against the Offeree:
of revocation is When it is put into a course When it comes to his
complete [Sec.4] of transmission to the knowledge.
person to whom it is made, • Example : Communication
so as to be out of the power of revocation is complete
of the person who makes it. only when H receives the
• Example : S proposes to H telegram.
by letter. H sends his • When H revokes his
acceptance by letter. acceptance, it is complete
Suddenly, S sends a when he dispatches the
telegram revoking his offer. telegram.
Revocation is complete as
against S when the telegram
is dispatched; H’s
revocation of acceptance is
complete when S receives
such telegram.
Accepted is lighted match, while offer is a train of gun powder
Sir willian Anson.
SUJEET JHA 16 9213188188
CAPACITY TO CONTRACT
Parties unable to Enter into a contract
Minor A person of unsound mind Person disqualified by law
Lunatic Idiot Drunken and Intoxicated
Alien enemy Foreign Sovereign Convict Corporation and Company Insolvent
1. Who is competent to make a contract:-

Section 11. Every person is competent to contract who is of age of majority according to the
Law to which he is subject, who is of sound mind and not is disqualified from contracting by
any Law to which he is subject.
Age of majority:- According to section 3 of Indian majority Act-1875 every person domiciled
in Indian attains majority on the completion of 18 years of age.
Exception: - 21 years- in the following cases.

a. Where a guardian of a minor’s person or property is appointed under the Guardian and wards
Act, 1890.
b. Where minor’s property has passed under the superintendence of the court of words.
Position of Agreements by Minor:-
1. Validity: - An agreement with a minor is void-ab-initio

[ Mohoribibee v. Dharmodas Ghose]
Example :
Mr. D, a minor, mortgaged his house for Rs.20000 to a money – lender, but the
mortgagee, i.e. the money – lender, paid him a sum of Rs.8000. Subsequently, the minor
sued for setting aside the mortgage. Held that the contract was void, as Mr. D was minor
and therefore he is not liable to pay anything to the lender.
2. A minor’s has received any benefit under a void contract, he cannot be asked to return
the same.
3. If a minor has received any benefit under a void contract, he cannot be asked to return
the same.
4. Fraudulent representation by a minor- no difference in the status of agreement. The

contract remains void.
5. A minor with the consent of all the partners, be admitted to the benefits of an existing
partnership.
6. Contracts entered into by minors are void-ab-initio. Hence no specific performance

can be enforced for such contracts.
SUJEET JHA 17 9213188188

7. Minor’s parent/guardians are not liable to a minor’s creditor for the breach of
contract by the minor.
8. A minor can act as an agent but not personally liable. But he cannot be principal.
9. A minor cannot become shareholder of a the company except when the shares are
fully paid up and transfer by share.
10. A minor cannot be adjudicated as insolvent.
11. Can enter into contracts of Apprenticeship, Services, Education, etc:

(a) A minor can enter into contract of apprenticeship, or for training or instruction in
a special art, education, etc.
(b) These are allowed because it generates benefits to the Minor.
12. Guarantee for and by minor

A contract of guarantee in favour of a minor is valid. However, a minor cannot be a
surety in a contract of guarantee. This is because, the surety is ultimately liable under a
contract of guarantee whereas a minor can never be held personally liable.
13. Minor as a trade union member

Any person who has attained the age of fifteen years may be a member for registered
trade union, provided the rules of the trade union allow so. Such a member will enjoy all
the rights of a member.
EXCEPTION
• Contract for the benefit of a minor.
• Contract by Guardian
Benefit of a minor by his guardian or manager of his estate.
a. within the scope of the authority of the guardian.

b. Is for the benefit of the minor.
• Contract for supply of Necessaries.

Example :
Food, clothes, bed, shelter, shoes, medicines and similar other things required for the
maintenance of his life or for the life of his dependents, expenses for instruction in grade
or arts; expenses for moral religions or intellectual education, funeral expenses of his
deceased family members, marriage expenses of a dependent female member in the
family; expenses incurred in the protection of his property or personal liberty, Diwali
pooja expenses, etc. have been held by courts to be necessaries of life. However, the
things like earrings for a male, spectacles for a blind person or a wild animal cannot
be considered as necessaries.
• Liability for tort: A minor is liable for a tort, i.e., civil wrong committed by him.
Example :
A, a 14 – year – old boy drives a car carelessly and injures B. He is liable for the accident
i.e., tort.
SUJEET JHA 18 9213188188

A person of unsound mind
Lunatic Idiot Drunken and Intoxicated
Person of Unsound Mind

A person who is usually of unsound mind, but occasionally of sound mind can make a contract
when he is of sound mind. Similarly, a person who is usually of sound mind, but occasionally of
unsound mind, may not make a contract when he is of unsound mind.
⇒ At time of entering into a contract, a person must be sound mind. Law presumes that
every person is of sound mind unless otherwise it is proved before court. An agreement
by a person of unsound mind is void. The following are categories of a person
considered as person of a unsound mind.
⇒ An idiot
An idiot is a person who is congenital (by birth) unsound mind. His incapacity is
permanent and therefore he can never understand contract and make a rational judgment
as to its effects upon his interest. Consequently, the agreement of an idiot is absolutely
void ab initio. He is not personally liable even for the payment of necessaries of life
supplied to him.
⇒ Delirious persons
A person delirious from fever is also not capable of understanding the nature and
implications of an agreement. Therefore, he cannot enter into a contract so long as
delirium lasts.
⇒ Hypnotized persons
Hypnotism produces temporary incapacity till a person is under the effect of artificial
induced sleep.
⇒ Mental decay
There may be mental decay or senile mind the to old age or poor health. When such
person is not capable of understanding the contract and its effect upon his interest, he
cannot enter into contract.
⇒ Lunatic is not permanently of unsound mined. He can enter into contract during lucid
intervals i.e., during period when he is of sound mind.
Generally of Occasionally of Capacity to Example

Contract
Unsound Sound Mind Can enter into a A patient in a lunatic asylum,
Mind Contract when he who is at intervals of sound
is of Sound Mind. mind, may contract during
those intervals.
Sound Mind Unsound Mind Cannot make a A sane man, who is delirious
Contract when he from fever or who is so drunk
is of Unsound that he cannot understand terms
Mind. of a contract or form a
judgment, cannot contract
SUJEET JHA 19 9213188188

while such delirium or

drunkenness lasts.
⇒ Drunken person
An agreement made by intoxicated person is void.
Person Disqualified by law
Alien enemy Foreign Sovereign Convict Corporation and Company Insolvent
Person Disqualified by Law
⇒ Body corporate or company or corporation

Contractual capacity of company is determined by object clause of its memorandum of
association. Any act done in excess of power given is ultra – virus and hence void.
⇒ Alien enemy
• An ‘alien’ is a person who is a foreigner to the land. He may be either an ‘alien
friend’ or an ‘alien enemy. If the sovereign or state of the alien is at peace with the
country of his stay, he is an alien friend. An if a war is declared between the two
countries he is termed as an alien enemy.
• During the war, contract can be entered into with alien enemy with the permission of
central government.
(Discuss in class)
⇒ Convict can’t enter into a contract while he is undergoing imprisonment. But he can
enter into a contract with permission of central government while undergoing
imprisonment. After the imprisonment is over, be becomes capable of entering into
contract. Thus the incapacity is only during the period of sentence.
⇒ Insolvent
When any person is declared as an insolvent, his property vests in receiver and therefore,
he can’t enter into contract relating to his property. Again he becomes capable to enter
into contract when he is discharged by court.
⇒ Foreign sovereigns, diplomatic staff and representative of foreign staff can enter into
valid contract. However, a suit cannot be filed against them, in the Indian counts without
the prior sanction of the central Government.
Third party to a contract cannot sue or a stranger to a contract cannot sue.
Only those persons, who are parties to a contract, can sue and be sued upon the contract.
This Rule is called “Doctrine of privities of contract.” Exception.
i. Trust:- In case of trust a beneficiary can sue upon the contract.

Example:
SUJEET JHA 20 9213188188
A transferred certain properties to B to be held by him in trust for the benefit of C. In this
case, C although not a party to the trust, can sue for the benefits available to him under
the trust.
This exception to the rule of Privity of contract has been recognised in a well known case
of khwaja Mohd. Khan v. Hussaini Begum (1910) 32 All 410.
ii. Family settlement / Marriage contract:- In case of family settlement members who
were not originally party to the contract can also sue upon it.
A female members cone force a provision for marriage expenses made on partition of
HUF.
Example:
H sued her father – in – law K to recover Rs.15,000 being arrears of allowance called Pin
money payable to her by K under an agreement between K and H’s father, consideration
being H’s marriage to K’s son D. Both H and D were minors at the time of marriage.
Held, the promise can be made enforceable by H.
Provision of marriage expenses of female members of a Joint Hindu Family, entitles the
female member to sue for such expenses on a partition between male members.,
Two brothers, on partition of family joint properties, agreed to invest in equal shares for
their mother’s maintenance. Held, the mother was entitled to require her sons to make
the investment.
iii. Acknowledgement of liability:- Where a person admits his Liability thereafter if he

refused be will be stopped from denying his liability.
Example
X receives money from Y for paying it to Z. X admits the receipt of that amount to Z. Z
can recover the amount from X, even though the money is due from Y.
iv. Assignment of contract. Assignee (the person to whom benefits of contract are
assigned) can enforce upon the contract..
v. Contract entered into through an agent.
vi. Covenants running with land.
Stranger to consideration:- “Stranger to contract” must be distinguished from a

stranger to consideration need not necessarily be provided by the promises if may flow
from a third party also such a person is ‘ stranger to consideration,.
( Chinnaya Vs Ramayya).
SUJEET JHA 21 9213188188

CONSIDERATION
MEANING
1.(a) Consideration is a quid pro quo i,e something in return it may be –

(i) some benefit right, interest, loss or profit that may accrue to one party or,
(ii) some forbearance, detriment, loss or responsibility suffered on undertaken by the
other party [currie V mussa]
(b) According to Sir Frederick Pollock, “consideration is the price for which the promise
of the other is bought and the promise thus given for value is enforceable.
2. Definition [Sec 2(d)]:- when at the desire of the Promisor, the promise or any other
person.
(a) has done or abstained from doing , or [Past consideration]
(b) does or abstains from doing, or [Present consideration]
(c) promises to do or abstain from doing something [Future consideration ] such act or
abstinence or promise is called a consideration for the promise.
3. Example
(i) ‘P’ aggress to sell his car to ‘Q’ for Rs.50,000 Here ‘Q’s Promise to pay Rs50,000 is
the consideration for P’s promise and ‘P’s promise to sell the car is the consideration for
‘Q’s promise to pay Rs.50,000.
(ii) ‘A’ promises his debtor ‘B’ not to file a suit against him for one year on ‘A’s
agreeing to pay him Rs.10,000 more. Here the abstinence of ‘A’ is the consideration for
‘B’s Promise to pay.
Legal Rules for valid consideration
1. Consideration must move at the desire of the promisor.

D constructed a market at the instance of District collector. Occupants of shops
promised to pay D a commission on articles sold through their shops. Held, there
was no consideration because money was not spent by Plaintiff at the request of
the Defendants, but at instance of a third person viz. the Collector and, thus the
contract was void.
Durga Prasad v. Baldeo
2. Consideration may move from the promisee or any other person who is not a
party to the contract. [Chinnaya’s Vs Ramayya]
A owed Rs.20,000 to B. A persuaded C to sign a Pro Note in favour of B. C
promised B that he would pay the amount. On faith of promise by C, B credited
the amount to A’s account. Held, the discharge of A’s account was consideration
for C’s promise.
National Bank of Upper India v. Bansidhar
3. Consideration may be past, present, Future:
• Under English law, Past consideration is no consideration.
• Present consideration :- cash sale
SUJEET JHA 22 9213188188
• Future or executory consideration:- A Promises to B to deliver him 100

bags of sugar at a future date . B promise to pay first on delivery.
4. Consideration should be real and not illusory. Illusory consideration renders

the transaction void consideration is not valid if it is.
(i) Physically impossible (ii) Legally not permissible
(iii) Uncertain (iv) illusory (fulfillment of a pre existing
obligation)
5. Must be legal:-
Consideration must not be unlawful, immoral or opposed to public policy.
6. consideration need not be adequate. A contract is not void merely became of

the fact that the consideration is inadequate. The law simply requires that contract
should be supported by consideration. So long as consideration exists and it is of
some value, courts are not required to consider its adequacy.
Example:
A agreed to sell a watch worth Rs.500 for Rs.20, A’s consent to the agreement
was freely given. The consideration, though inadequate. Will not affect the
validity of the contract. However, the inadequacy of the consideration can be
considered in order to know whether the consent of the promisor was free or not .
[Section 25 Explanation II]
7. The performance of an act what one is legally bound to perform is not

consideration for the contract mean’s something other than the promisor’s
existing obligation –
A contract not supported by consideration is void .
Ex. Nudo Pacto non oritur action, i,e, an agreement without consideration is void.
Ex
ceptions to the Rule “ No consideration . No contract”.
1. Written and registered agreements arising out of love and affection:- [25 (1)]
• Expressed in writing and registered under law for the time being in force for
registration of document
• Natural love and affection
• Between parties standing in a near relation to each other
Example:- An elder brother, on account of natural love and affection, promised to pay
the debts of his younger brother. Agreement was put to writing and registered. Held,
agreement was valid.
Exception: - Rajlukhy Dabee Vs Bhootnath Mukharjee

Example: A Hindu husband by a registered document, after referring to quarrels and
disagreements between himself and his wife, promised to pay his wife a sum of money
for her maintenance and separate residence. Held that the promise was unenforceable
since natural love and affection was missing.
2. Promise to compensate [25(2)]

• Promise to compensate wholly or in part
• Who has already voluntarily done something for the promisor
SUJEET JHA 23 9213188188
• Something which the promisor was legally compellable to do.

Example:- A finds B’s purse and give to him. B Promise to give A Rs.500. This is a
valid contract.
3. Promise to pay a time – barred debt. [Sec 25(3)]

• A debt barred by limitation con not recovered. Hence, a promise to pay a such a
debt is without any consideration.
• Can be enforced only when – in writing and sighed by Debtor or his authorized
agent.
Example : A owes B Rs.10,000 but the debt is barred by Limitation Act. A signs a
written promise to pay B Rs.8,000 on account of debt. This is a valid contract.
4. Completed gift- gift do not require any consideration.
5. Agency (185) – According to the Indian contract Act. No consideration is necessary to

create an agency.
6. Bailment (148)- consideration is not necessary to effect a valid bailment of goods. It is

Called Gratuitous Bailment.
7. Remission (63).
8. Charity- If a person promises to contribute to charity and on this faith the promises
undertakes a liability to the extent not exceeding the promised subscription, the contract
shall be valid.
SUJEET JHA 24 9213188188

FREE CONSENT
According to section 13. Two persons are said to have consented when they agree upon same
thing in the same sense.
In English law, this is called ‘consensus – ad – idem’
Effect of absence of consent:

⇒ When there is no consent at all, the agreement is void – ab – initio’.
It is not enforceable at the option of either party
Example 1:-
X have two car one Maruti car and one Honda city car. Y does not know that X has two
cars Y offers to buy car at Rs.50,000. Here, there is no identity of mind in respect of the
subject matter. Hence there is no consent at all and the agreement is void – ab – inito.
Example 2:-
An Illiterate woman signed a gift deed thinking that it was a power of attorney – no
consent at all and the agreement was void – ab – inito [ Bala Devi V S. Manumdats ]
Free consent
⇒ Consent is said to be free when it is not caused by [ Section 14]
(a) coercion [Section 15]
(b) Undue influence [Section 16]
(c) Fraud [Section 17]
(d) Misrepresentation [ Section 18]
(e) Mistake [Section 20, 21,22]
Effect of absence of Free Consent :- If consent coercion, undue influence, fraud ,

Misrepresentation the contract is voidable at the option of party whose consent was not free [19,
19A]
Coercion [Section 15]

(a) Committing any act which is forbidden by the IPC
(b) Threatening to commit any act which is forbidden by the IPC.
(c) Unlawful detaining of any property or
(d) Threatening to detain any property.
Essential elements of coercion
Above four [a – d]
(e) coercion need not necessary proceed from party to contract.
(f) Coercion need not necessary be directed against the other contracting party.
(g) It is immaterial whether the IPC is or is not in force at the time or at the place where
the coercion is employed [Bay of Bengal caption]
Effect of threat to file a suit:- A threat to file a suit (whether civil or court) does not amount
to coercion unless the suit is on false charge. Threat to file a suit on false charge is an act
forbidden by the IPC and thus will amount to an act of coercion.
SUJEET JHA 25 9213188188

Effect of Threat to commit suicide:- Threat to commit suicide amounted to coercion and the
release deed was example discussed in class.
Therefore voidable. [Chikham Ammiraju v seshama]
Duress V Coercion
English Law - Duress does not include detaining of property or threat to detain property.
- Duress can be employed only by a party to the contract or his agent.
Effect:- when coercion is employed to obtain the consent of a party the contract is
voidable at the option of the party where consent was obtained by coercion.
A threat to strike by employees in support of their demands is not regarded as coercion. This is
because the threat to strike is not an offence under the I.P.C. it is a right given under the
Industrial Disputes Act.
Detaining property under mortgage: Detention of property by a mortgage until the payment of
loan does not amount to coercion.
Undue influence [Section 16]
Meaning of undue influence :- dominating the will of the other person to obtain an unfair
advantages over the others.
(a) where the relation subsisting between the parties must be such that one party is in
position to dominate the will of the other.
(b) The dominant party use his position.
(c) Obtain an unfair advantage over the other .
Presumption of domination of will:-

Circumstances Examples
Where he holds a real or apparent authority Master and servant, parent and child, Income
over the other Tax officer and assesses principal and a
Where he stands in a Trust fiduciary (benefit) Temporary Teacher.
relation to the other Trustee and beneficiary spiritual Guru and his
Mental Capacity of a person is temporarily or disciples, solicitors and clients. Guardian and
permanent effected by reason of age, illness or wards
mental or bodily distress Relationship between medical attendant and
ward.
Example :-
A Poor Hindu widow agreed to pay interest at 100% P. a because she need the money to
established her right of maintenance. It was held that the lender was in position to
dominate the will of widow.
No. Presumption of Domination of will:-

¾ Landlord and Tenant
¾ Creditor and Debtor
¾ Husband and wife (other than Pardanashin)
¾ Principal and Agent
SUJEET JHA 26 9213188188

Effect of undue Influence:-[Section 19A]

When consent to an agreement is caused by undue influence, the contract is voidable at the
option of the party whose consent was so caused.
Burden of Proof:- A contract is presumed to be induced by undue influence if the following

two condition:-
¾ A party has the position to dominate the will of the others
¾ The transaction is unconscionable (unreasonable)
In such a case dominant party is under the burden to prove the undue influence was not
employed.
[Unconscionable transactions:- if transaction appears to unreasonable the dominant party to

prove that there is no undue influence. ]
¾ Any other transaction:- weaker party to prove the influence was employed]
Where some transaction is entered into in the ordinary course of business, but due to certain
contingencies, one party is able to make the other party agree to certain terms and conditions
then it is not undue influence.
Example :
A applies to a banker for a loan at a time when there is stringency in the money market.
The banker declines to make the loan except at an unusually high rate of interest. A
accepts the loan on these terms. This is a transaction in the ordinary course of business,
and the contract is not induced by undue influence.
Example :
A spiritual guru induced his chela to donate all his property to the ashram and said that in
return of it, he will certainly get salvation. The chela did the same. Held, that this is a
case, of undue influence so it becomes void.
Contract with Pardanashin woman;-
Induced by undue influence

Burden of Proof – Full disclosure is made to pardanashin women
Pardanashin Women - Understand the contract
- Receipt of competent independent advice .
Rebutting presumption:-
¾ Dominant party – full disclosure

¾ Price was adequate
¾ Receipt of competent independent advice before entering into contract – weaker party.
SUJEET JHA 27 9213188188

Undue influence Vs Coercion

Similarities: - Voidable at the option of aggrieved party:-
Coercion (15) Undue Influence (16)

Meaning – using or threat to use physical - Involves use of moral force (mental
force pressure)
- obtain the consent of party (intention) - Obtain an unfair advantage (intention)
- Punishment under IPC - Not criminally liable
- Parties – Stranger - Between the parties to the contract
- Relationship – Immaterial - One party dominate the other party
- Voidable at the option of aggrieved - Voidable or court set aside
party - Benefit – order of court – Back
- Benefit - Back
Fraud (17)
⇒ The term fraud means a take representation of facts made willfully with a view to deceive
the other party.
⇒ Sec.17- fraud means any act committed by a party to a contract or with his connivance or
by his agent with intent to deceive another party there to or his agent or to induce to enter
into contract.
Essentials of fraud :-
(a) By a party to the contract
(b) There must be representation – [an opinion a statement of expression – does not
fraud].
(c) The representation must be false.
(d) Before conclusion of contract.
(e) The misrepresentation must be made willfully.
(f) The misrepresentation must be made with a view to deceive the other party.
(g) The other party must have actually been deceived.
(h) The other party have suffered a loss.
Fraud – definition include

⇒ The suggestion, as to fact, of that which is not true by one who does not believe it to be
true.
⇒ The active concealment of a fact by one having knowledge or belief of the fact.
Ex. A furniture dealer conceals the crakes in furniture by polish work.
⇒ A promise made without any intention of performing it.

⇒ Any other act fitted to deceive.
SUJEET JHA 28 9213188188
⇒ Any such act or omission as the law specially declared to be fraudulent.
Ex:- T bought a cannon from H. It was defective, but H had plugged it. T did not examine the
cannon, but it burst when he used it. Held as the plug had not deceived T, he was liable
to pay for the cannon.
Ex.: Where the representation was true at the time of when it was made but becomes untrue
before the contract is entered into and this fact is known to the party who made the
representation. If must be corrected. If it is not so corrected it will amount to be fraud.
When the silence amount to fraud:-

(a) General rule:- Mere (only) Silence as to facts likely to affect the willingness of a person
to enter into a contract is not fraud.
EXCEPTION
where the circumstances of the case are such that regarding being had to them. It is duty of the
person keeping silence to speak. Such duty arises in the following two cases.
(1) Duty to speak exists where the parties stand in a fiduciary relationship, e.g. father and
son, guardian and ward, trustee and beneficiary etc. or where contract is a contract of
ubberima fidei (requiring utmost good faith), e.g. contracts of insurance.
Ex.:- A sells by auction to B a horse which A knows to be unsound. B’ is A’s daughter and has
just come of age. Here the relation between the parties would make it A’s duty to tell B
is the horse is unsound.
(2) When silence itself equivalent to speech. B says to A “ if you do not deny it I shall
assume that the horse is sound”. A say nothing – A’s silence equivalent to speech. A can
held liable to fraud.
[Half Truth is worse than a blatant: - Example – company pay dividend – in class room]
Effect of Fraud:-
Sec. 19: A contract induced by fraud is voidable at the option of the
party defrauded. Till the exercise of such option, the Contract is valid.
1. Rescinds of contract
2. Right to insist upon performance
3. Right to claim damages – if he suffered loss.
Exception : The contract is not voidable in the following cases.
¾ When the party who consent was caused by silence amount to fraud and be has the means
of discovering the truth with ordinary diligence. [ Ex class room]
¾ When the party give the consent in ignorance of fraud.
¾ When the party after become aware of fraud takes a benefit.
¾ When the parties can’t be restored to their original position.
¾ Where interests of third parties intervene before the contract is avoided.
SUJEET JHA 29 9213188188

Misrepresentation (section 18)

Misrepresentation is when a party (person) asserts something which is not true though he
believes is to be true. In other words misrepresentation is a falls representation made innocently.
An agreement is said to be influenced by misrepresentation if all the following conditions are
satisfied.
(a) The party makes a representation of a fact [The representation by a stranger (By
anyone with his connivance or by agent) to the contract does not affect the validity
of the contract.
(b) The misrepresentation was made innocently i.e. if was not made with a view to
deceive the other party.
(c) The other party has actually acted believing the misrepresent to be true.
Misrepresentation include:-
¾ Unjustified statement of facts – positive assertion – Believe true really not true no basis
misrepresentation
¾ Breach of duty.
¾ Inducing other to make mistake as to qualify or nature of subject matter.
Effect of Misrepresentation:-
(1) Right to Rescind contract:-

Can’t do
¾ Discovering the truth with ordinary diligence.
¾ Give consent in ignorance of misrepresentation
¾ Become aware of misrepresentation takes a benefit
¾ Where an innocent third party before the contract is rescinds acquires consideration
some interest in the property passing under the contract.
¾ Where the parties can’t be restored to their original position.
(2) Right to insist upon performance.
Ex.:- Unlike Fraud he cannot sue for damage.
Fraud (17) Misrepresentation (18)

Meaning :- wrongful representation is made Meaning - innocently without any intention to
Willfully to deceive the party. Deceive the other party.
Knowledge of falsehood. - The person making the wrong

- The person making the wrong statement believes it to be true.
statement does not believe it to be true.
- Right to claim damage - Can’t claim damage
Means of discovering of truth - In case of misrepresentation the

- In case of fraud the contract is voidable contract is not voidable if the aggrieved
even though the aggrieved party had party had the means of discovering the
the means of discovering the truth with truth with ordinary diligence….
ordinary diligence.
Exception :- Silence
SUJEET JHA 30 9213188188
MISTAKE
Mistake Erroneous Belief about some facts
Mistake of Fact Mistake of Law [21]
Unilateral [22] Bilateral [20] Mistake of Indian Mistake of foreign

Law Law
One party Under Both parties under
Mistake of fact Mistake of facts the contract is valid same as mistake fact
The contract is valid the contract is void void
[Not voidable and void] Both parties under

mistake
Exception: - Where contract is not valid (void)
1. Identity of persons contract with
Ex. :- A woman, falsely misrepresenting herself to be wife of a well known Baron obtained two
pearl necklaces from a firm of jewelers on the pretext of showing them to her husband
before buying. She pledged them with a broker who took them in good faith. Held that
there was no contract between jeweler and woman and even an innocent buyer or a
broker did not get a good title. Broker must return necklaces to jeweler. Jeweler intended
to deal not with her but with quite a different person, i.e., wife of a Baron.
2. as the nature of the contract

Ex.:- illiterate man sign Bill of exchanges by means of false, representation that it was a mere
guarantee. It was held that he was not liable for bill of exchange because never intended
to sign the bill of exchange
Bilateral Mistakes:-
Subject matter Possibility
Existence Quantity Quality Prices Identity Title Legal Physical
SUJEET JHA 31 9213188188

EVERY AGREEMENT OF WHICH THE OBJECT OR

CONSIDERATION IS UNLAWFUL IS VOID [SEC 23]
(a) It is forbidden by law – law would also include the rules regulations, notifications etc.
under or issued under the authority given by a statute.
Ex.:- A sold liquor without license to B. The sale is unlawful as the sale of liquor without
license is forbidden by the law, i.e., The Excise Act. Hence, A cannot recover the price.
Ex.:- a Hindu already married and his wife alive entered into a marriage agreement with Y an
unmarried girl. The agreement is void because the second marriage is forbidden by
Hindu Law.
(b) If it defeats the Provisions of any Law.

- not directly prohibited by any Law
Ex.:- A’s estate is sold for arrears of revenue under the provision defaulter is prohibited from
purchasing the state upon an understanding with A becomes the purchaser and agrees to
convey the estate to A . Upon receiving from him the price which B has paid. The
agreement is void.
(c) If it is Fraudulent
Ex.: Object or consideration of an agreement is fraudulent. An agreement with such an object
or consideration is unlawful and void.
(d) If it involves or Implies injury to a person or property of another.

Ex. :- Where it create injury to a person or to the property of another. An agreement with such
an object or consideration is unlawful and void.
(e) If the court regards it as immoral.

⇒ X gave Rs. 10,000 to Y a married woman to obtain a divorce from her husband. X
agrees to marry when divorce taken. X would not recover the amt.
1. Partially unlawful Object or consideration [Sec. 24]: An Agreement is void if -

(a) any part of a single consideration for one or more objects is unlawful; or
(b) any one or any part of one of several consideration for a single object, is unlawful.
2. Example: B is a licensed manufactured of permitted chemicals. A promise B to

supervise B’s business and combine it with the production of some contraband items
together with the permitted items. B promises to pay A, Salary of Rs.10,000 p.m.
Agreement is void, object of A’s promise and consideration for B’s promise being
partially unlawful.
3. Lawful Consideration enforceable: When there are several distinct promises made for
one and the same consideration and one or more of them are of such nature that law will
not enforce it, only such of the promises as are unlawful cannot be enforced. Other which
are lawful, can be enforced.
4. Test of Severability:
(a) If illegal part cannot be severed from legal part of a covenant, contract is
altogether void.
SUJEET JHA 32 9213188188
(b) If it is possible to severe them, whether the illegality be due to Statute or

Common Law, bad part alone may be rejected and good retained.
In case of pre – existing civil liability, the dropping of criminal proceedings need not
necessarily be a consideration for the agreement to satisfy that liability.
Union Carbide Corpn. v. UOI
Illegal agreement – Void – ab – intio
- Punishable by the criminal Law of the country or by any special legislation regulation
effect of illegal agreement.
- Collateral transactions – illegal
- No action can be taken for the recovery of money paid or property transferred.
- If illegal part can’t be separated from the legal part.

Whole agreement is altogether illegal. [Sec.57]
- If separated
- Legal part – enforces illegal part – reject.
- Reciprocal promises – In respect of reciprocal promises the agreement as to illegal

promise is void.
Agreement opposed to public policy:-
Alternative promises: where in alternative promises one part is illegal, only the legal pent can be
enforced. [Sec. 58]
Champerty & Maintenance : (Refer Class Note)
SUJEET JHA 33 9213188188

VOID AGREEMENT
2(g)- Void agreement is an agreement which is not enforceable by Law – void – ab – inito.
(1) Agreement by or with person’s incompetent to contract [10, 11]

(2) Agreement entered into through a mutual mistake [20]
(3) Object or consideration – unlawful [23]
(4) Consideration or object partially, unlawful [24]
(5) Without consideration [25]
(6) Restraint of marriage [26]
(7) Restraint of trade [27]
(8) Legal proceeding [28]
(9) Consideration identified [29]
(10) Wagering agreement [30]
(11) Impossible agreement [56]
(12) An agreement to enter into an agreement in the future.
Agreement in Restraint of marriage [26]
Every agreement in restraint of marriage of any person other than a minor, is void, Any
restraint of marriage whether total or partial is opposed to public policy.
Ex. A promised to marry else except Mr. B, and in default pay her a sum of Rs.1,00,000. A
married someone else and B sued A for recovery of the sum. Held, the contract was in
restraint of marriage, and as such void.
Ex. The consideration under a Sale Deed was for marriage expenses of a minor girl aged 12.
Held the sale was a void transaction being opposed to public policy.
Ex. Two co-widows – agreement – is one of them remarried – she shout forfeit her eight to
her share in the deceased husband’s property was not void because no restraint was
imposed upon either of the two widows from remarrying.
Ex. Wife to divorce herself and to claim maintenance from the husband on his marrying a
second wife was not void because no restraint was impose upon husband from marrying
a second wife.
Agreement in Restrain of trade [27]
Every agreement by which anyone is restrained from exercised a Lawful profession, trade
or business of any kind is void .
Burden for Proof :-

Party supporting the contract:- must show that the restraint is reasonably necessary to protect
public interest. Party challenging the contract:- restraints is injurious to the public.
Ex. : In Patna, 29 out of 30 manufacturers of combs agreed with R to supply combs only to
him and not to anyone else. Under the agreements R was free to reject the goods if he
found no market for them. Held, the agreement amounted to restraint of trade and void.
SUJEET JHA 34 9213188188

Exception to Sec. 27
(1) Sale of goodwill: - Seller of goodwill of a business may agree with the buyer to restrain
from carrying on business.
(a) Must relate to same business
(b) Restriction shall apply within specified Local limits.
(c) Restriction shall apply within a reasonable time period
(d) The specified local limits – depends on nature of business.
(a) Restriction on existing partner [11(2)]

- Not carry on business other than business of the firm till he is partner.
(b) Restriction on outgoing partner [36]

- Not carry on a similar business after retirement
- Local limits + specified period – local limit – nature of business
(c) Sec. 54: Upon or in anticipation of dissolution of Firm. Partners may agree that some or all
of them will not carry on business similar to that of the Firm within specified periods or local
limits.
(d) Sec. 55(2) : Partner may agree with due buyers of Goodwill, not to use the Firm name or
carry on Firm’s business or solicit clients of the Firm.
(e) Sec. 55(3): Upon sale of Firm’s Goodwill, a partner may agree that he will not carry on any
business similar to Firm’s within specified periods or local limits.
Exception under judicial interpretations :-
(a) Trade combination.

- Traders may from associations among them to regulate the business or to fix
prices.
- Such agreement like opening and closing of business venture, licensing of
traders, supervision and control of dealers, etc. are valid even if they are in
restraint of trade.
- But, a Combination that tends to create monopoly; or when two enter into an
agreement to avoid competition, they are against public policy and hence void.
(b) Sale dealing agreement: - Agreements to deal in the products of a single manufacturer
or to sell the whole produce to a single dealer are valid if their terms are reasonable.
Ex.: .( Discuss in class)
Agreement – buyer of goods for Delhi market not to sell them in Chennai is valid.
- Not to sell any other firm – valid.
(c) Service agreement.

- Agreement: Employers may enter into agreements with employees – (i) not to
engage in other work during the tenure of his employment; or (ii) not to engage in
similar work after his termination.
- During Employment: The first restraint is always valid, e.g. doctors may be paid
non practicing allowances to avoid practicing when they are employed in a
hospital.
- After termination of service: The second restraint is valid only is it is to protect
the trade interests or the employer. It may be imposed to prevent the outgoing
SUJEET JHA 35 9213188188

employee from using trade secrets he had learnt during his tenure, to the
detriment of his previous employer.
- Valid Agreements : Requiring employees to serve the organization for a few
years after training leaving; or execution of a bond requiring employees leaving
the organization to pay compensation to the employer are valid.
- Use of Personal Skills: The employer cannot prevent the employees from using
his personal skills and knowledge to his benefit; e.g. an employer cannot restrain
an employee to act in theatre plays or in perforating an art.
Agreement in Restraint of legal proceedings [28]
⇒ Agreement restricting enforcement of rights:

- An agreement by which any party is restricted absolutely from enforcing his legal rights
under any contract is void.
- Agreements Limiting period of limitation:- An agreement which limits the time within
which an action way be brought is void.
- A partial restrain is not void, eg.
Ex. 1: A clause in a contract that any dispute arising between the parties shall be subject to
jurisdiction of a court at a particular place only, is valid.
Ex. 2: An agreement is not void merely because if provides that any dispute arising between two
or prove person shall be referred to arbitration.
- That has arises.
- Which may arise
- Which has already arisen?
Ex. 3: An agreement not to go in appeal to higher court against the judgment of a lower court
not amount to restart of legal proceeding.
An agreement the meaning of which is not certain (Sec 29):
1. An agreement is called an uncertain agreement when the meaning of that agreement is

not certain or capable of being certain. Such agreements are declared void u/s 29.
2. Areas of uncertainty: Uncertainty may relate to – (a) Subject Matter of Contract; or (b)
Terms of contract.
(a) Subject Matter: There may be uncertainty as regards – (i) existence; (ii) quantity
(iii) quality; (iv) price; or (v) title to the subject matter.
(b) Terms of Contract: There may be uncertainty as regards – (i) existence (ii)
quality; (iv) price; or (v) title and other terms in the contract.
Example:
1. A says to B “I shall sell my house; will you buy?” A says, “Yes, I shall buy”. Due to
uncertainty of price, the agreement is void and unenforceable. There is binding contract.
2. A agreed to pay a certain sum, when he was able to pay. Held, the agreement was void
for uncertainty.
3. D agrees to sell his white horse, for Rs.5,000 or Rs.10,000.
SUJEET JHA 36 9213188188

WAGERING AGREEMENT [30] :-
An agreement between two persons under which money or money’s worth is payable by one
person to another on the happen or non happening of a future uncertain event is called a
wagering agreement.
- X promise to pay Rs. 1000 to Y if it is rained on a particular day, and Y promise to pay
Rs.1000 to X if it did not.
- Wagering agreement is promise to give money or money’s worth upon the
determination of uncertain event.- Sir Willian Anson.
Essential elements of wagering agreements
(1) The must be a promise to pay money or money’s worth
(2) Performance of a promise must depend upon determination of uncertain event. It

might have already happened but the parties are not aware about it.
(3) Mutual chancels of Gains or Loss.
(4) Neither party to have control over the events
(5) Neither party should have any other interest in event.
(6) One party is to win and one party is to lose.
Ex. 1:- Agreement to settle the difference between the contract price and market price of certain
goods or shares on a particular day.
Ex. 2: A lottery is wagering agreement. Therefore, an agreement to buy and sell lottery tickets
is a wagering agreement. Section 294 – A of the Indian Penal Code declares that drawing
of lottery is an offence. However, the government may authorize lotteries. The persons
authorized to conduct lotteries are exempt from the punishment. But, the lotteries still
remain a wagering transaction.
Ex. 3: However, if the crossword puzzle prizes depend upon sameness of the competitor’s
solution with a previously prepared solution kept with the organizer or newspaper editor,
is a lottery and, therefore, a wagering transaction.
Ex. 4: However, when any transaction in any commodity or in shares with an intention of
paying or getting difference in price, the agreement is a wager.
Agreement not held as wagers:-
⇒ Prize in terms of Prize competition Act, 1955 not exceeding Rs.1000 is not wagering
agreement.
⇒ Horse race [500] – An agreement to contribute a plate or prize.
SUJEET JHA 37 9213188188

⇒ Contract of insurance utmost in good faith eg. Favour in public policy.

⇒ Share market transaction A commercial transaction should always be distinguished
from a pure speculative transaction. A commercial transaction is done with an intention
of delivery of goods (commodity or security) and payment of price. Therefore, it is not
wagering agreement.
⇒ Crossword competition involving skill for its solution. If skill plays an important role in
the result of a competition and prize depend upon the result, the competition is not
Involve applications of skill and prizes are awarded to the participants on the basis of
merit of their solutions and not on chance. Therefore, such competitions are valid and
are not wagers.
⇒ Athletic Competitions also fall in the category of games of skill. Therefore, these are
also not wagers.
Example: A and B, two wrestlers, agreed to enter into a wrestling contest in Ahmedabad on a
certain day. They further agreed that a party failing to appear on the fixed day was to forfeit
Rs.500 and the winning party will receive a sum of Rs.1,000. Held, it was not a wagering
agreement.
⇒ Contribution to chit fund is not wager – contributions made by the members are
refunded by draw of lots.
Effects of wagering agreements:-
⇒ Agreement is void.
⇒ No suit can be filled for any recovery of the amount won on any wager.
⇒ It is not illegal. Any agreement collateral to wagering agreement is valid.
⇒ However, it is illegal in state of Maharashtra and Gujarat.
ILLEGAL AGREEMENT
⇒ Agreement which is prohibited by law is illegal agreement.
Example Agreement to commit crime.
⇒ Effects of illegal agreement:

• It is always void.
• Any collateral transaction to illegal agreement is also void.
• No action is allowed on illegal agreement.
Void Agreement Illegal agreement

Meaning Not enforceable by Law Forbidden by any law
One in another All void agreement is not All illegal agreement are void
illegal
Reason 10,29,56 Against the provisions of law
Punishment Not liable to punished Party are criminally liable
Void – ab – initio A valid – collateral – is not Illegal, collateral – illegal

void
SUJEET JHA 38 9213188188
CONTINGENT CONTRACT
MEANING
A ‘contingent contract’ is a contract, to do or not to do something. If some event, collateral to

such contract does or does not happen
⇒ A contract to pay B Rs.10,000 if B house is burnt.
⇒ A promise to pay B Rs.1,00,000 if a certain, ship does not return within a year.
Essential features of a contingent contract :-
(a) It is a contract to do or not to do something
(b) Dependent on happening or non happening of an event
(c) Such on event is a collateral event (i.e. it is collateral) to the contract i.e. the event
must not depend upon the mere will of party.
(d) The event is uncertain
Rules regarding contingent contract.
CONTINGENT UPON
Happening of Non – Future Happening of Non – Impossible

Uncertain Happening of conduct of Specified Happening of Events
Future Event Uncertain a living Uncertain Event Specified
Future Event person within Fixed time Uncertain Event
within Fixed
Time
[Sec. 32] [Sec. 33] [Sec. 34] [Sec.35] [Sec. 35] [Sec.36]
(1) Contracts contingent upon the happing of an event enforced – such event has
happened [32]
Void – such event because impossible [happening of such event]
Ex.:- A contract to pay B a sum of money when B marries e dies without being married to B
contract – void
(2) Non happening of a future event:- [33]

Enforced :- when the happening of such events becomes impossible.
Void:- such event has happened.
Ex.:- A agrees to pay B sum of money if a certain ship does not return. This ship is sunk. The
contract can be enforced when the ship sinks.
SUJEET JHA 39 9213188188

(3) Happening of an event within a specified time [35]

Enforce :- when such event has happened within the specific time.
Void :- When the happening of such event because impossible before the expiry of
specified time.
When such event has not happened within specified time.
A promise to pay B sum of money if a certain ship return within a Year.
Enforce :- ship returns within the year .
Void :- If the ship is burnt within the year / not come within the year.
(4) Non – happening of an event within a fixed time [35]

Enforce :- When the happening of such event because impossible before the expiry of
specified time.
⇒ When such event has not happened within the specified .
Void:- When such event has happened within the specified period.
(5) Future conduct of a living person. [34]

Enforced:- When such person acts in the manner as desired in the contract.
Void :- When such person does anything which makes the desired future conduct of such
person – impossible – dependent upon certain contingency.
- A agrees to pay B a sum of money if B marries C . C married D. The marriage of B to C
must now considered impossible, although it is possible that D may die any that C may
afterwards marry B.
(6) Impossible events [36]
- Such an agreement can not be enforced since it is void whether the impossibility of the
event was known to the parties or not is immaterial.
• A agrees to pay B Rs.1,000 if two parallel straight lines should enclose a space.
Agreements are void.
• A agrees to pay B Rs.1,000 if B will marry A’s daughter C and C was dead at the time
of the agreement. Agreement is void.
Wagering agreement Contingent agreement

1. Defined Not defined u/s 30 Defined o/s 31
2. Meaning Promise to give money or To do or not to do something

money’s with upon the if some event. Collateral to
determinative of an uncertain such contract does or does not
event. happen
3. Nature of uncertain event Contingent nature Not be a wagering nature
4. Void / valid. Void Valid
5. Interest No other interest in the subject Have real interest outcome of

matter of the agreement the uncertain gain.
except within of loss of
wagering amt.
A wagering agreement is A contingent contract the not
essentially of a contingent be a wagering nature.
nature. Not consist a reciprocal
Consists of reciprocal promises future event is fully
promises futures event is the collateral.
sole determine factor
SUJEET JHA 40 9213188188
PERFORMANCE
Sec 37:- That the parties to a contract must either perform or offer to perform, their respective
promises unless such performance is dispensed with or excused under the provisions of
contract Act, or of any other law.
Performance: - Two types
1. Actual performance – actually performed – liability of such a party comes to an end.
2. Attempted performance or tender of performance refusal to accept offer of

performance by promise [38]
Offer Does not
Promisor promisee attempted performance
of performance accept
Promisor is not responsible for non performance and they can sue the promisee for breach of
contract – nor he (promisor) thereby lose his rights under the contract.
Essential of
Valid tender
Of exact
amount and in
Reasonable
Unconditional At a proper For whole legal tender At proper opportunity to
money
place obligation time Promisee
A. Tender or offer of performance to be valid must satisfy the following conditions:-

(i) It must be unconditional
Ex :- ‘X’ offers to ‘Y’ the principal amount of the loan. This is not a valid tender
since the whole amount of principal and interest is not offered.
(ii) It must be made at a proper time and place.
Ex:- If the promisor wants to deliver the goods at 1 am. This is not a valid tender
unless it was so agreed;
(iii) Reasonable opportunity to examine goods.
Ex:- Delivery of something to the promise by the promisor promise must have
reasonable opportunity of inspection.
(iv) It must be for the whole obligation :- goods and amount.
Ex:- ‘X’ a debtor, offer’s to pay ‘Y’ the debt due in installments and tenders the
first installment. This is not a valid tender minor deviation – not invalid [Behari
lal v ram gulam]
(v) It must be made to the promise or his duty authorized agent.
Ex:- It must be person who is willing to person his part of performance.
(vi) In case of payment of money, tender must be of the exact amount due and it must
be in the legal tender.
SUJEET JHA 41 9213188188

Type of Tender
Tender of goods and services
When a promisor offers to delivery of goods or service to the promise, it is said to be
tender of goods or services, if promisee does not accept a valid tender, It has the
following effects:
(i) The promisor is not responsible for non – performance of the contract.
(ii) The promisor is discharged from his obligation under the contract. Therefore,
he need not offer again.
(iii) He does not lose his right under the contract. Therefore, he can sue the promise.
Tender of money
Tender of money is an offer to make payment. In case a valid tender of money is not
accepted, it will have the following effects:
(i) The offeror is not discharged from his obligation to pay the amount.
(ii) The offeror is discharged from his liability for payment of interest from the date
of the tender of money.
Effect of refusal of party to perform promise Wholly Sec 39.
Promisor – Refuse – Promise – wholly

Promisee can put – can end of the contract or – he can continue the contract if he
has given his consent either by words or – by conducts in its continuance.
Result – claim damages. [compensation]

Ex:-
(Refer Class Notes)
Who can demand performance?
1. Promisee – stranger can’t demand performance of the contract.
2. Legal Representative – legal representative can demand Exception performance.

- contrary intention appears from the contract
- contract is of a personal nature.
3. Third party – Exception to “stranger to a contract”
Person by whom promise is to be performed Sec 40.
[who will perform the contract ]
1. Promisor himself :- include personal skill, taste or art work.

Ex:- ‘A’ promises to paint a picture for ‘B’ as this promise involves personal skill of ‘A’. If
must be performed by ‘A’.
2. Promisor or agent :- [does not involves personal skill]
3. Legal Representative [does not involve personal skill and taste]
SUJEET JHA 42 9213188188

4. Third person [Sec 41] :- Acceptance of promise from the third party:-
If the promisor accepts performance of a contract by a third party, he can’t after wards
enforce the performance against the promisor although the promisor had neither
authorized not ratified the act of the third party.
[In other meaning once the promise accepts the performe from a third person, he cannot
compel the promisor the perform the contract again]
Performance of Joint Promises:-
Two or more person make a promise
¾ Performed by all the joint promisor [42]

¾ All the joint promisor – liable
¾ Thus in India the liability of joint promisors is joint as well as several.
In England, however the liability of the joint promisors is only joint and not several and
accordingly all the joint promisors must be sued jointly.
¾ Liability of joint promisor [43]
1. Liability – joint as well as several [unless express A + B + C 900 D. D may compel

either A, B or C or any of two of them or all of them.
2. Where a joint promisor has been compelled to perform the whole promise, be may
compel every other joint promisor to contribute equally with himself to the performance
of the promise (unless a contrary intention appears from the contract).
C – 9000 – D A + B – C
3000 3000
3. If any one of the joint promisors make default in such contribution, the remaining joint
promisors must bear the loss arising from such default in equal shares
A + B + C – 9000 (A) – Insolvent

B + C = 4500 + 4500 = 9000
Sec 44:- Release of one joint promisor :- where one of the joint promisors is released other joint
promisors shall continue to be liable.
[In English law if one joint promisor – discharge then all the joint promisors discharge]
Sec 45:- Rights to claim performance of joint [Devolution of joint rights]

1. During their joint lives – all the joint promisors .
2. After the death of any of them – The representative of such deceased promise jointly
with the surging promise
3. With the representatives of all jointly.

Ex:- ‘A’ in consideration of Rs 50,000 lent to him by ‘B’ and ‘ C’ promises ‘B’ and ‘C’
jointly to replace them that sum with interest on a day specifies.
- ‘B’ dies. The right to claim performance rests with ‘B’ representatives jointly with ‘c’
during ‘C’ life.
- And after ‘C’s death with the representatives of ‘B’ and ‘C’ jointly .
SUJEET JHA 43 9213188188

Time place and manner of performance [46 – 50]

1. No time is specified for performance [Sec 46]
¾ Time of performance is not specified + promisor agreed to perform without, a demand
from the promise the performance must be made within a reasonable time. Reasonable
time – in each particulars case – a question of fact.
2. Time specified but hour not mentioned [47].

Time of performance specified + promisor agreed to perform without application by the
promisee
¾ Performance must perform on the day fixed during the usual business hours and at the
place at which the promise ought to be performed.
3. Where Time is fixed and application to be made [48]

¾ Proper place and within the usual hour of business
¾ Promisee to apply for performance
4. Performance of promise where no place is specified and no application is to be made by

the promise [49]
¾ It is the duty of the promisor to apply to the promise to appoint a reasonable place for the
performance and perform it at such appointed place.
5. Performance in manner or at time prescribed or sanctioned by promise [50]

¾ In such prescribed manner and
¾ Prescribed time
Ex:- ‘A’ desires ‘B’ who owes him Rs 10,000 to send him a promissory note for Rs 10,000
by Post. The debt is discharged as soon as ‘B’ puts into the post a letter containing the
promissory note duly addressed to ‘A’.
Performance of reciprocal promises
Reciprocal Promise :- Promises which form the consideration or part of consideration for each
other as called reciprocal promises.
1. Mutual and Independent:- Such promises all to be performed by each party independently
without waiting for the other party to perform his promise can’t excuse himself on the
ground of non-performance by the default party.
deliver on Paying
X Y Y 6th may
the goods 10th may the price
Y – Price – non Payment
X – goods delivered
2. Mutual and Dependent:- Sue damage . The performance of promise by one party depended
on the prior performance of the promise by other party.
[The party at fault becomes liable to pay compensation to the other party may sustain by the
non performance of the contract – [54]
3. Mutual and concurrent: - when reciprocal promises are to be performed simultaneously a

promisor need not perform his part unless the promise is ready and willing to perform [51]
SUJEET JHA 44 9213188188

deliver Pay
A B
the goods The Pr ice
Order of performance of reciprocal promises [52]
¾ Where the order in which reciprocal promises one to be performed is expressly fixed by
the contract – they must be performed in that order.
¾ Order is not expressly fixed – nature of transaction requires
Ex :- ‘A’ and ‘B’ contract that ‘A’ shall build a house for ‘B’ at a fixed price ‘A’ promise
to build the house must be performed before its promise to pay for it.
Sec 53 :- One party preventing – voidable at the option of the other party so prevented.
- Compensation for loss
Sec 54 :- Legal and illegal

Legal – valid, illegal – void
Sec 58:- alternative promise, one branch being illegal legal branch alone can be enforced.
A – B – 1000 rupees
Deliver – rice + smuggled goods
Time as the essence of the contract (Sec 55):-
Where time is essence – the concerned parties must perform their respective promises within the
specified time.
Time are fact :- time is specified for the performance of the contract is not by itself sufficient to
prove that time is essence of the contract.
- Intention of the parties.
Time is generally considered to be the essence of the contract :-
(a) where the parties have expressly agreed to treat as the essence of the contract.
(b) Delay operates as an injury to the party and
(c) Nature and necessities of the contracts requires it to be performs within the specified
time.
- Delivery of the goods – considered – essence of the contract payment of the price
– No
[However in case of sale and purchase of an immoral property, the time is
presumed to not the essence of the contract]
Time is essence of the contract – party tails to perform

- In time – the contract becomes voidable at the option the other party.
Time is not essence – only claim damages for delay in performance
SUJEET JHA 45 9213188188

Assignment of contract :- (a) by – operation of law

- Death
- Insolvency
(b) By an act of parties
Assignment is a made of transferring rights.

tranfer rights
Assignment another person
and int erest
Rules regarding assignment
(a) The liabilities or obligations under a contract can’t be assigned
(b) The rights and benefits under a contract which not of a personal nature can be assigned.
(c) An actionable claim can always be assigned
Succession Assignment
Meaning Deceased person Person – another person
- Legal represent
Time On the death of a person During the life time of a person
Voluntary Act Not voluntary automatic by Voluntary
operation of law
Written No. required Required assignment deed
document
Scope Liability and rights Rights
Appropriation of Payments :- [ Sec 59 – 61]
¾ Appropriation means application of payments – The question of appropriation of

payments arises when a debtor owes several debts to the same creditor and make a
payment that is not sufficient to discharge the whole indebtness.
1. Appropriation of Payments
Sometimes, a debtor owes several distinct debts to the same creditor and he makes a
payment which is insufficient to satisfy all the debts. In such a case, a question arises as
to which particular debt the payment is to be appropriated. Section 59 to 61 of the Act
lay down following rules as to appropriation of payments which provide an answer to
this question.
⇒ Appropriation as per express instructions
Every debtor who owes several debts to a creditor has a right to instruct his creditor
to which particular debt, the payment is to be appropriated or adjusted. Therefore,
where the debtor expressly states that the payment is to be applied to the discharge
of a particular debt, the payment must be applied accordingly.
Example : A owes B three distinct debts of Rs.2,000, 3,000 and 5,000. A sends
Rs.5,000 and instructs B that the payment should be appropriated against the third
debt. He is bound to appropriate the payment against the third debt only.
SUJEET JHA 46 9213188188
2. Application of payment where debt to be discharge is not indicated [60]

If section 60 is attracted, the creditor shall have the discretion to apply such payment for
any lawful debt which is due to him from the person making the payment.
Example: A owes to B, among other debts, the sum of Rs.520. B writes to A and
demands payment of this sum. A sends to B Rs.520. This payment is to be applied to the
discharge of the debt of which B had demanded payment.
3. Application of payment where neither party appropriates [61]

The payment shall be applied in discharge of the debts in order of time whether they are
or are not based by the limitation Act 1963, if the debt are of equal standing (i.e. payable
on the same date) the payment shall be applied in discharge of each of these debt
proportionately.
¾ First interest then principle

¾ Director of payer not receiver.
¾ Right primary of the debtor
[whatever is paid, paid according to the intention of paying it]
¾ [Quickquid soivitur , sovitur secundum modem solventies]

Example: A owes B, the following debts:
Amount of Positions of
the debt the debt
Rs.2,000 Time barred
Rs.1,000 Time barred
Rs.2,000 Due on 10th June
Rs.3,000 Due on 20th September
A sends Rs. 1,500 in the month of June. He neither expressly intimates nor circumstance
of the case imply as to which debt the amount is to be applied. Moreover, B also does not
appropriate the payment at his own discretion. Therefore, the payment will be
appropriated in order of time. However, here in this case two debts are of equal standing.
The payment will, therefore, be appropriated in order of time but to all equal standing
debts. In this case, Rs.1,500 will be appropriated towards the first two debts of equal
standing proportionately, i.e. in the ratio of 2:1.
SUJEET JHA 47 9213188188

DISCHARGE OF A CONTRACT
Discharge of a contract means termination of contractual relation between the parties to a
contract in other words a contract is discharged when the rights and obligations created by it are
extinguished (i.e. comes to an end).
Mode of
discharge of
contract
1. By 6. By 4. By lapse 5. By breach of
performance impossibility of of Time contract
• Actual performance • Actual
• Attempted • Anticipatory
2. By mutual 3. By Operation of law

agreement 1. Death
(By implied consent) 2. Merger
1. Novation – Sec 62 3. Insolvency
2. Rescission – Sec 62 4. Unauthorized alteration
3. Alteration – Sec 62
4. Remission – Sec 63
5. Waiver
6. Merger
Discharge by performance
fulfillment of obligations by a party to the contract within the time and in the manner prescribed
in the contract.
(a) Actual performance – no party remains liable under the contract. Both the
parties performed.
(b) Attempted performance or tender.:- Promisor offers to perform his obligation

under the contract but the promise refuses to accept the performance. It is called
as attempted performance or tender of performance
¾ But the contract is not discharged.
SUJEET JHA 48 9213188188

Discharge by mutual agreement
(a) Novation [Sec 62] – Novation means substitution of a new contract in the place
of the original contract new contract entered into in consideration of discharge of
the old contract. The new contract may be.
¾ Between the same parties (by change in the terms and condition)
¾ Between different parties (the term and condition remains same or changed)
Following conditions are satisfied :-

(1) All the parties must consent to novation
(2) The novation must take place before the breach of original contract.
(3) The new contract must be valid and enforceable.
Example:
o A owes B Rs.50,000. A enters into an agreements with B and gives B a mortgage
of his estate for Rs.40,000 in place of the debt of Rs.50,000. (Between same
parties)
o A owes money Rs.50,000 to B under a contract. It is agreed between A, B & C
that B shall henceforth accept C as his Debtor instead of A for the same amount.
Old debt of A is discharged, and a new debt from C to B is contracted. (Among
different parties)
(b) Rescission [62]:- Rescission means cancellation of the contract by any party or all
the parties to a contract. X promises Y to sell and deliver 100 bales of cotton on 1st
oct his go down and Y promises to par for goods on 1st Nov. X does not supply the
goods. Y may rescind the contract.
(c) Alteration [62] :- Alteration means a change in one or more of the terms of a
contracts with mutual consent of parties the parties of new contracts remains the
same.
Ex:- X Promises to sell and delivers 100 bales of cotton on 1st oct. and Y promises to
pay for goods on 1st Nov. Afterwards X and Y mutually decide that the goods shall
be delivered in five equal installments at is godown . Here original contract has been
discharged and a new contract has come into effect.
(d) Remission [63]:- Remission means accepting a lesser consideration than agreed in
the contract. No consideration is necessary for remission. Remission takes place
when a Promisee-
(a) dispense with (wholly or part) the performance of a promise made to him.
(b) Extends the time for performance due by the promisors
(c) Accept a lesser sum instead of sum due under the contract
(d) Accept any other consideration that agreed in the contract
¾ A promise to paint a pictured for B. B after words for him to do so. A is no longer
bound to perform the promise.
(e) Waiver:- Intentional relinquishment of a night under the contract.
SUJEET JHA 49 9213188188

(f) Merger :- conversion of an inferior right into a superior right is called as merger.
(Inferior right end)
Basis Novation Alteration

1. Meaning It is substitution of an existing It is alteration to some of the
contract with new one. terms and conditions of the
original Contract.
2. Change in parties It is made by – (a) change in Terms of the contract may be
the terms of the contract or (b) altered by mutual agreements
change in the Contracting by the same contracting
Parties. parties. So, there is no change
in the parties.
3. New Contract A New Contract comes into It is not essential to substitute
existence in place of the old a new contract in place of the
one. old contract.
4. Performance Old contract need not be Old contract as per the altered
performed New contract must terms shall be performed.
be performed.
Discharge by operation of law
(a) Death :- involving the personal skill or ability, knowledge of the deceased party one
discharged automatically. In other contract the rights and liability passed to legal represent.
Example : A promises to perform a dance in B’s theatre. A dies. The contract comes to an
end.
(b) Insolvency:- when a person is declared insolvent. He is discharged from his liability up to
the date of insolvency.
Example: A contracts to sell 100 bags of sugar to B. Due to heavy loss by a major fire
which leaves nothing to sell, A applies for insolvency and is adjudged insolvent. Contract
is discharged.
(c) By unauthorized material alteration – without the approval of other party – comes to an
end – nature of contract substance or legal effect.
Example : A agrees upon a Promissory Note to pay Rs.5,000 to B. B the amount as
Rs.50,000. A is liable to pay only Rs.5,000.
(d) Merger: When an inferior right accruing to a party in a contract mergers into a superior
right accruing to the same party, then the contract conferring inferior right is discharged.
Example: A took a land on lease from B. Subsequently, A purchases that land. A becomes
owner of the land and ownership rights being superior to rights of a lessee, the earlier
contract of lease stands terminated.
5. Rights and liabilities vest in the same person: Where the rights and liabilities under a
Contract vest in the same person, the contract is discharged.
Example: A Bill of Exchange which was accepted by A, reaches A’s hands after being
negotiated and endorsed through 4 other parties. The contract is discharged.
SUJEET JHA 50 9213188188

Discharge by Lapse of time
Where a party fails to take action against the other party within the time prescribe under the
limitation Act, 1963. All his rights to come end. Recover a debt – 3 Years recover an
immovable property – 12 years
Ex.:- On 1st July 20X1 X sold goods to Y to Rs 1,00,000 and Y had made no payment till
August 20X4. state the legal position on 1st Aug 20X4
(a) If no. credit period allowed Ans. (Refer Classroom)
(b) If 2 month credit period allowed.
Discharge by Breach of contract
Failure of a party to perform his part of contract
(a) Anticipatory Breach of contract :- Anticipatory breach of contract occurs when the
part declares his intention of not performing the contract before the performance is due .
(i) Express repudiation: - 5 agrees to supply B 100 tunes of specified category of
iron on 15.01.2006 on 31.12.2005. 5 express his unwillingness to supply the iron to
B.
(ii) Party disables himself: - Implied by conduct.
Ex.:- 5 agrees to sell his fiat car to B on 15.01.2006 on 31.12.05 5 sells his fiat car
to T.
(b) Actual Breach of contract :- If party fails or neglects or refuses to perform his
obligation on the due date of performance or during performance. It is called as actual
breach.
During performance – party has performed a part of the contact.

Consequences of Breach of contract:- The aggrieved party (i.e. the party not at face it ) is
discharged from his obligation and get rights to proceed against the party at fault. The various
remedial available to an aggrieved party.
Discharge by Impossibility performance
(a) Effect of Initial Impossibility

(b) Effect of supervening. Impossibility
(a) Initial Impossibility – at the time of making contract

¾ Both parties know – put life into deed body – void .
¾ Both don’t know – void.
¾ One know – compensate to other party
(b) Effect of super vanity Impossibility:-

¾ Where an act becomes impossible after the contract is made – void
¾ Becomes unlawful, beyond the control of promisor – void
¾ Promisor alone knows about the Impossibility – compensate loss.
¾ When an agreement is discovered to be void or where a contract becomes void
SUJEET JHA 51 9213188188
Sing
Benefit must refund X Y. y
Ad .1000
Cases when a contract is discharged on the group of super vent Impossible

(a) Distraction of subject matter - Failure of the ultimate purpose of contract – king
coronate process.
(b) Death of personal Incapacity Example : (Refer Classroom)
(c) Declaration of war Example : (Refer Classroom)
(d) change of Law Example : (Refer Classroom)
(e) Non existence or Non occurrence of a particular state of thing necessary for performance.
Example : (Refer Classroom)
No Super Impossibility – does not become void

¾ Difficulty of performance – coal – transport
¾ Commercial Impossibility
¾ Default of a third party
¾ Strikes, knockout and civil disturbance.
¾ Partial Impossibility – coronation of king and to sailing around the lake by boat.
SUJEET JHA 52 9213188188

REMEDIES FOR THE BREACH OF CONTRACT
Remedy means course of action available to an aggrieved party when other party breaches the
contract.
Remedies for
Breach of contract
1. 2.Suit for 3.Suit for 4.Suit for 5.Quantum

Rescission damage specific Injunction Meruit
of contract performance
RESCISSION OF CONTRACT – SEC 39
⇒ It means right to party to cancel contract.

⇒ In case of breach of contract, other party may rescind contract.
Effect of Rescission of Contract
⇒ Aggrieved party is not required to perform his part of obligation under contract.
⇒ Aggrieved party claims compensation for any loss.
⇒ Party is liable to restore benefit, if any.
When can Court Grant Rescind Contract?
Court can rescind the contract in the following situation:

⇒ Contract is voidable.
⇒ Contract is unlawful.
SUIT FOR DAMAGES
⇒ It means monetary compensation allowed for loss.
⇒ Purpose is to compensate aggrieved party and not to punish party as fault.
⇒ In India, rules relating to damages are based on English judgment of Hadley vs

Baxendale.
The facts of case were – H’s mill was stopped due to the breakdown of the shaft. He delivered
the shaft to common carrier to repair it and agree to pay certain sum of repair it and agree to pay
certain sum of money for doing this work. H has informed to B that delay would result into loss
of profit. B delivered the shaft after reasonable time after repair. H filed suit for loss of profit. It
was held that B is not liable for loss of profit. The court laid down rule that damage can be
recovered if party has breach of contract.
SUJEET JHA 53 9213188188

KINDS OF DAMAGES
The following are the different kinds of damages:

⇒ Ordinary damages
These are the damages which are payable for the loss arising naturally and directly as
result of breach of contract. It is also known as proximate damage or natural damage.
⇒ Special damages
These are damages which are payable for loss arising due to some special circumstances.
It can be recovered only if special circumstances which result in special loss in case of
breach of contract and party have notice of such damage.
Example: A sends sample of his products for exhibition to an agent of a railway

company for carriage to “New Delhi” for an exhibition. The consignment note stated:
“Must be at New Delhi, Monday Certain.” Due to negligence of the company, the goods
reached only after the exhibition was over. Held, the company was liable for the loss
caused by late arrival of the products because the company’s agent was aware of the
special circumstances.
⇒ Exemplary or punitive or vindictive damages
These damages are allowed not to compensate party but as mean of punishment to
defaulting party. The court may award these damages in the case of:
• Breach of contract to marry – loss based on mental injury.
• Wrongful dishonor of cheque – smaller amount, larger the damage.
⇒ Nominal damages
Where party suffers no loss, the court may allow nominal damages simply to establish
that party has proved his case and won. Nominal damage is very small in amount.
⇒ Damages for inconvenience
If party has suffered physical inconvenience, discomfort for mental agony as result of
breach of contract, party can recover the damage for such inconvenience.
Example: A photographer agreed to take photographs at a wedding ceremony but failed
to do so. The bride brought an action for the breach of contract. Held, she was entitled to
damages for her injured feelings.
⇒ Liquidated damages and penalty

Party may specify amount at the time of entering into contract. The amount so specified
may be (a) liquidated damage, or (b) penalty.
If specified sum represent, fair and genuine pre – estimate damages likely to result due to
breach, it is called liquidated damage.
But if specified sum is disproportionate to the damages, it is called as penalty.
As regard the payment of liquidated damages and penalty court can’t’ increase amount of
damages beyond the amount specified in the contract.
SUJEET JHA 54 9213188188
Example : A gives B, a bond for the repayment of Rs.1,000 with interest at 12 per cent,
at the end of six months, with a stipulation that, in case of default, the interest shall be
payable at the rate of 75 per cent, from the date of default. This is a stipulation by way of
penalty, and B is only entitled to recover from A such compensation as the Court
considers reasonable.
⇒ Forfeiture of security deposit

Any clause in contract entitling the aggrieved party to forfeit security deposit in the
nature of penalty and court may award reasonable compensation.
⇒ Payment of interest
• It is permissible.
• If interest is in nature of penalty, court may grant relief.
• If no rate of interest is specified in contract party shall be liable to pay as per the
law in force or as per custom or usage of trade.
⇒ Cost of suit or decree

The court has also discretion to award cost of suit for damages in addition to the
damages for breach of contract.
Suit for Specific Performance
It means, demanding an order from court that promise agreed in contract shall be carried out.
⇒ When is specific performance allowed?

• Where actual damages arising from breach is not measurable.
• Where monetary compensation is not adequate remedy.
⇒ When specific performance is not allowed?

• When damages are an adequate remedy.
• Where performance of contract requires numbers of minute details and therefore
not possible for court to supervise.
• Where contract is of personal in nature.
• Where contract made by company beyond its power. (ultra – vires)
• Where one party to contract is minor
• Where contract is inequitable to either party.
Example : A agree to sell B, an artist painting for Rs.30,000. Later on, he refused to sell
it. Here B can file suit against A for specific performance of the contract.
Suit for Injunction
⇒ It means stay order granted by court. This order prohibits a person to do particular act.
⇒ Where there is breach of contract by one party and order, of specific performance is not
granted by court, injunction may be granted.
Example: Film actress agreed to act exclusively for W for a year and for no one else.
During the year she contracted to act for Z.
SUJEET JHA 55 9213188188

QUASI CONTRACT
[Contracts implied in law or implied contract]
It means a contract which lacks one or more of the essentials of a contract.
Quasi contract are declared by law as valid contracts on the basis of principles of equity i.e. no
person shall be allowed to enrich himself at the expense of another the legal obligations of
parties remains same.
Nature of Quasi contracts:-

(a) A quasi contract does not arise from any formal agreement but is imposed by law.
(b) Every quasi contract based upon the principle of equity and good conscience.
(c) A quasi contract is always a right to money and generally though not always to a
liquidated sum of money.
(d) A suit for its breach may be filed in the same way as in case of a complete contract.
(e) The right grouted to a party under a quasi contract is not available to him against the
whole world but against particular person(s) only.
(f) A suit for breach of a quasi contract may be filed in the same way as in case of an
ordinary contract
(g) Although there is no contract between the parties under a quasi contracts, yet they are put
in the same position as if he were a contract between them .
Provisions relating to various quasi contracts are contained in section 68 to sec 72 of the
contract Act, 1872.
TYPES OF QUASI CONTRACTS

Sec. 68 Sec. 69 Sec. 70 Sec. 71 Sec.72
Supply of Reimbursement Obligation to pay for Responsibility of Person receiving
Necessaries of money due benefit out of non – Finder of Goods goods are money
gratuitous act by mistake
Sec. 68: If a person, incapable of entering into a contract, or anyone whom he is legally
bound to support, is supplied by another person, with necessaries suited to his condition in life,
the person who has furnished such supplies is entitled to be reimbursed from the property of
such incapable person.
1. Meaning of Necessaries:
(a) Necessaries normally include articles required to maintain a particular person in
the state, degree and station in life in which he is.
(b) They are essentials to run a life.
SUJEET JHA 56 9213188188

(c) An item will not be considered necessary, if a person already has sufficient
supply of things of such kind.
(d) Necessaries include Services rendered to a person.
(e) What constitutes necessaries depends on the circumstances of each case.
2. Only property liable: person not liable:

(a) It is only the property (movable and immovable) of the incapable person they
shall be liable.
(b) He cannot be held liable personally.
(c) Where he doesn’t own any property, nothing shall be payable.
3. Example: (i) A supplies B, a lunatic, with necessaries suitable to his condition in life. A
is entitled to be reimbursed from B’s property. (ii) A who supplies the wife and children
of B, a lunatic, with necessaries suitable to their condition in life, is entitled to be
reimbursed from B’s Property.
Payment By a person who is interested in a transaction [69]
Condition of section [69]
Sec. 69; A person, who is interested in the payment of money and pays such money, which
another is bound by low to pay, is entitled to be reimbursed by the other.
(a) one party is legally bound to make a payment

(b) Some other persons make such payment
(c) The person making such payment is not legally bound to make such payment
(d) The person making such payment is interested in paying such amount
Legal effect of sec 69.:- If all the conditions of sec 69 are satisfy the person who is interested in
paying such amount shall be entitled to recover the payment made by him.
Ex.:- The goods belonging to A were wrongfully attached in order to realize arrears of
Government revenue due by G. A paid the amount to save the goods from sale at was held that
A was entitled to recover the amount from G.
Obligation of person enjoying benefit of non-gratuitous act [70]
Conditions of section 70.
Sec.70 : Where a person, lawfully does anything for another person, or delivers anything to him;
not intending to do so gratuitously, and such other person enjoys the benefits thereof, then he is
bound to make compensation to the other in respect of, or to restore the thing so done or
delivered.
(a) A person has lawfully done something for another person or delivered something to
another person.
(b) Such person must have acted voluntarily and non – gratuitously.
(c) The other person has enjoyed the benefit of the act done for him or the thing delivered to
him.
Legal effect of sec 70.
SUJEET JHA 57 9213188188

¾ If the conditions of sec70 are satisfied, there will be quasi contract between the parties.
¾ Consequently, the party who has done something or delivered a thing shall be entitled to
recover its value from the person who obtained the benefit of the same.
Ex.:- A a trades man leaves goods at B’s house by mistake, B treat the goods as his own, He is
bound to pay A for them.
¾ A saves B’s property from fire. A is not entitled to compensation from B if the
circumstances show that be intended to act gratuitously.
Finder of Goods [71]

A person who finds goods belonging to another and takes them into custody, is subject to the
same responsibility as a Bailee.
A finder of goods has same rights and duties at that of bailee.

¾ Duty to take reasonable care of the goods
¾ Duty not to use the goods for his own purpose.
¾ Duty not to mix the goods with own goods
Right to recover expenses, reward, sell the goods
Ex.:- X a guest found a diamond ring at a birthday party of Y. X told Y and other guests about
it. He has performed his duty to find the own. If he is not able to find the owner he can retain the
ring as bales.
Money paid under a mistake or conversion [72]
Sec. 72: A person to whom money has been paid, or anything delivered by mistake or under
coercion, must repay or return it.
Conditions of Sec. 72
(a) A person has (i) paid money to another person or
(ii) Delivered something to another person
(b) Such person must have acted
¾ Under a mistake or under coercion.
Legal effect – quasi contract, recover its value from the person who obtained the benefit of
same.
Example: (i) A and B jointly owe Rs.1,000 to C.A alone pays the full amount to C and B not
knowing this fact, pays Rs.1,000 again to C.C is bound to repay the amount to B. (ii) A Railway
Company refuses to deliver certain goods to the Consignee except upon payment of an illegal
charge for carriage. The Consignee pays the sum charged in order to take delivery of goods. He
is entitled to recover so much of the charge as was illegally excessive.
(c) A + B . – 100 – A – 100, B – 100, B – return.
Compensation for failure to discharge obligation created by quasi contract [73]
When an obligation created by quasi contract is not discharged the injured party is entitled to
reline the same compensation from the party in default as if such person had, contracted to
discharge is and broken his contract.
SUJEET JHA 58 9213188188

Quantum meruit: - [as much as is earned]
One party preventing the other:- If a party prevents the other party from completing his
obligation under the contract the aggrieved party may claim payment on quantum merit for the
part of contract already performed by him.
(a) In case of void agreement or contract that becomes
¾ Any person who has received any advantage under such agreement or contract is bound
to restore if or to make compensation for it, to the person from who received it.
Ex.:(1)- A – B – 10000 – to marry c (A’s daughter) – C – death of the time of
performance of contract – B must repay A Rs 1000.
Ex.(2):- A – B decline 250 quince of rice before the 1st of May. A delivers 130 qu. Only
before that day and none after. B retains the 130 qu. after the first of May. He is bound to
pay A for them.
Ex(3):-A singer – two nights in every week during the next two month and B any ages to
pay her Rs 100 for each night’s performance on the sixth night, A willfully absent
perfect. B must pay a for the five night on which she had sung.
(b) In case of Act preventing the completing of contract:-
If a party does not complete the contract or prevents the other party to complete the contract the
aggrieved party can sue or quantum meruit.
Ex.c:- owner – P write a book to be published as series in his magazine. After a few
series were published the publication of the magazine was stopped. It was held that P
could claim payment on quantum meruit for the part already published.
(c) In case of divisible contract :-

(1) If the contract is divisible and
(2) If the party not at default has enjoyed benefit of the point performance.
(3) the contract is party performed
If the above condition an satisfied, the party at fault may claim on payment on quantum meruit
for the part of contract performed by him be con recover such proportion of the contract price as
the work done, by him bears to the work under the contracts.
(d) In case of indivisible contract performed completely but Badly.
¾ Contract is indivisible
¾ Lump sum consideration
¾ Completely performed
¾ Performed badly
The party at fault may recover the contract price (Lump sum price) less the deduction made for
done badly.
Ex.:- X agreed to decorate Y’s flat for a lump sum of Rs20,000. X did the complete work but Y
complained of faulty work man stop. It costs Y another Rs3000 to remedy the defect. X could
recover only Rs 17000 from Y.
SUJEET JHA 59 9213188188

(e) In case of Non – gratuitous Act – Three condition
(i) The thing must have been done or delivered lawfully.

(ii) The person who has done or delivered the thing must not have intended to do so gratuitously
And
(iii) The person from whom the act is done must have enjoyed the benefit of the act.
Ex.:- A, a tradesman leaves goods at B’s shop be mistake B treats the good as his own. He is
bound to pay A for them.
Difference between Quasi Contract and Contract
Matter Quasi – contract Contract

Intentionally Form It is not intentionally formed It is intentionally formed by
but law imposes upon the parties.
parties.
Essentials of contract A quasi – contract does not A contract possesses all the
possess all the essential of a essentials of a valid contract.
valid contract.
Obligations Obligations are implied upon Obligations are mutually
by the law. created by the parties.
Foundation It is founded upon the It is founded upon general
principle of equity. principal of law of contracts.
SUJEET JHA 60 9213188188

SPECIAL CONTRACT
Contract of Indemnity
1. INTRODUCTION TO CONTRACT OF INDEMNITY
¾ Indemnity Meaning –
• To make good the loss incurred by another person
• To compensate the party who has suffered some loss
• To protect a party from incurring a loss
¾ ‘Contract of indemnity Definition

A contract is called as a ‘contract of indemnity’ if –
One party promises to save the other from loss caused to him by the conduct of the
promisor himself, or by the conduct of any other person.
¾ Modes of contract of indemnity

Expressed:
When a person expressly promises to compensate the other from loss.
Implied :
When the contract is to be inferred from the conduct of the parties or from the
circumstances of the case.
¾ Essential elements of a contract of indemnity

Contract :
All the essentials of a valid contract must also be present in the contract of indemnity
Example:- X asks Y to beat Z and promises to indemnify Y against the consequences. Y
beats Z and is fined Rs.1,000. Y cannot claim this amount from X because the object of
the agreement was unlawful.
Loss to one party
A person can indemnify another person only if such other person incurs some loss or it
has become certain that he will incur some loss.
Indemnity by the promisor
The purpose of contract of indemnity is to protect the indemnity holder from any loss
that may be caused to the indemnity holder.
Reason for loss
The contract of indemnity must specify that indemnity holder shall be protected from the
loss caused due to –
• Action of the promisor himself; or
• Action of any other person; or
• Any act, event or accident which is not in the control of the parties.
2. RIGHTS OF INDEMNITY HOLDER (Sec. 125)
¾ Right to recover damages

The indemnity holder has the right to recover all the damages which he is compelled to
pay in any suit in respect of any matter covered by the contract of indemnity.
¾ Right to recover costs

SUJEET JHA 61 9213188188
The indemnity holder has the right to recover all the costs which he is compelled to pay
in bringing or defending such suit.
Condition:
(a) The indemnifier authorised him to bring or defend the suit; or
(b) The indemnity holder did not contravene the orders of the indemnifier; and The
indemnity holder acted as it would have been prudent for him to act in the absence of
any contract of indemnity.
¾ Right to recover sums paid

The indemnity holder has the right to recover all the sums which he has paid under the
terms of a compromise of such suit.
(a) The indemnifier authorised him to compromise the suit; or
(b) The indemnifier holder did not contravene the orders of the indemnifier; and the
indemnity holder acted as it would have been prudent for him to act in the absence of
any contract of indemnity.
Contract of guarantee
3. MEANING OF CERAIN TERMS (Sec. 126)
¾ Meaning of ‘contract of guarantee’

A ‘contract of guarantee’ is a contract to –
• Perform the promise; or
• Discharge the liability, of a third person in case of his default.
¾ Meaning of ‘surety’
The person who gives the guarantee is called as ‘surety’
¾ Meaning of ‘principal debtor’

The person in respect of whose default the guarantee is given is called as ‘principal
debtor’.
¾ Meaning of ‘creditor’
The person to whom the guarantee is given is called as ‘creditor’.
GUARANTEE
ON MONEY
ON PERSON
Nature of payment Effective time of payment
Specific/Simple Continuing Retrospective Prospective Fidelity

Guarantee Guarantee Guarantee Guarantee Guarantee
Guarantee is for Guarantee is for Guarantee is for Guarantee is for Guarantee is on
a single a series of an existing debt a future debt or the good conduct
transaction. It transactions. or obligation. obligation. or honesty of a
ends when debt Liability extends person employed
is discharged or till the in a particular
promise is revocation of organizations.
performed. guarantee.
SUJEET JHA 62 9213188188

4. ESSENTIALS AND LEGAL RULES FOR A VALID CONTRACT OF GUARANTEE.
¾ Must have all the essentials of a valid contract

• All the essentials of a valid contract must be present in the contract of guarantee.
• Exceptions:
(a) Consideration received by the principal debtor is a sufficient consideration to the
surety for giving the guarantee.
(b) Even if principal debtor is incompetent to contract, the guarantee is valid. But, if
surety is incompetent to contract, the guarantee is void.
¾ Primary liability of some person

• The principal debtor must be primarily liable. However, even if the principal debtor
is incompetent to contract the guarantee is valid.
• The debt must be legally enforceable.
• The debt must not be a time barred debt.
¾ The contract must be conditional

• The liability of surety is secondary and conditional.
• The liability of surety arises only if the principal debtor makes a default.
¾ No misrepresentation
• The creditor should disclose all the facts which are likely to affect the surety’s
liability.
• There must not be any concealment of facts.
¾ Form of contract
A contract of guarantee may be either oral or written.
¾ Joining of other co-sureties

The guarantee by a surety is not valid if –
• A condition is imposed by a surety that some other person must also join as a co-
surety; but
• Such other person does not join as a co-surety.
5. NATURE AND EXTENT OF SURETY’S LIABILITY
¾ Surety’s liability is coextensive with liability of principal debtor

General rule –
• Surety is liable for all the debts payable by the principal debtor to the creditor.
• Accordingly, interest, damages, costs etc. may also be recovered from the surety.
Exception:-
The contract of guarantee may provide otherwise.
¾ Commencement of surety’s liability

• The liability of surety arises immediately on default by the principal debtor.
• The creditor is not required to –
(a) first sue the principal debtor; or
(b) first give a notice to the principal debtor.
¾ Surety’s liability may be limited
SUJEET JHA 63 9213188188

The surety may fix a limit on his liability up to which the guarantee shall remain
effective.
¾ Surety’s liability may be continuous

• The surety may agree to become liable for a series of transactions of continuous
nature.
• However, the surety may fix –
- a limit on his liability upto which the guarantee shall remain effective;
- a time period during which the guarantee shall remain effective.
¾ Surety’s liability may be conditional

The surety may impose certain conditions in the contract of guarantee. Until those
conditions are met, the surety shall not be liable.
6. CONTINUING GUARANTEE
¾ Meaning
A guarantee which extends to a series of transactions is called as continuing guarantee.
¾ Revocation (Sec.130)
Continuing guarantee may be revoked, at anytime, by the surety by giving a notice to the
creditor. However, revocations shall be effective only in respect of future transactions
(i.e. the liability of the surety with regard to previous transactions remains unaffected)
¾ Death of surety (sec. 131)

Death of the surety operates as a revocation of a continuing guarantee as to future
transaction.
7. RIGHTS OF SURETY (Sec.140, 141, 145, 146 and 147)
I. Rights against principal debtor

¾ Right of indemnity
• There is an implied promise by the principal debtor to indemnity the surety.
• The surety is entitled to claim from the principal debtor all the sums which he has
rightfully paid.
• The surety cannot recover such sums, which the he has paid wrongfully.
¾ Right of subrogation
On payment of a debt, the surety shall be entitled to all the rights which the creditor
could claim against the principal debtor.
II. Rights against the creditor

¾ Right of subrogation
• The surety can claim all the securities which the creditor had at the time of giving of
guarantee
• It is immaterial as to whether the surety had knowledge of such securities or not.
• If the securities are returned by the creditor to the principal debtor the surety is
discharged to the extent of value of the securities so returned.
¾ Right of set off

• Any amount recoverable by the principal debtor may be claimed as deduction.
• Any amount recoverable by the surety may be claimed as deduction.
SUJEET JHA 64 9213188188
¾ Rights to share reduction

If the principal debtor becomes insolvent, the surety may claim proportionate reduction
in his liability.
III. Rights against co-sureties

¾ Rights to contribution
General Rule
All the co-sureties shall contribute equally
Exceptions
• Under the contract of guarantee, the co-sureties may fix limits on their respective
liabilities. Even in such a case, the co-sureties shall contribute equally, subject to
maximum limit fixed by the co-sureties.
• The contract of guarantee may provide that the co-sureties shall contribute in some
other proportion.
¾ Right to share benefit of securities

If one co-surety receives any security, all the other co-sureties are entitled to share the
benefit of such security.
8. DISTINCTION BETWEEN INDEMNITY AND GUARANTEE
Basis Contract of indemnity Contract of guarantee

Meaning A contract by which one party A contract of guarantee is a
promises to save the other from contract to perform the promise,
loss caused to him is called as a or discharge the liability of a third
contract of indemnity. person in case of his default.
Parties There are only two parties, viz, the There are three parties, viz., the
indemnifier and the indemnity principal debtor, creditor and the
holder. surety.
Nature of liability The liability of the indemnifier is The liability of the surety is
primary and independent. secondary and conditional.
Number of contract In a contract of indemnity there is In the contract of guarantee, there
only one contract. are three contracts; first between
principal debtors and creditor,
second between creditor and
surety, and third between surety
and principal debtor.
Nature of contract The contract of indemnity is for the The contract of guarantee is for
reimbursement of the loss. the security of the creditor.
9. DISCHARGE OF SURETY FROM LIABILITY (Sec.130 to 144)
DISCHARGE OF SURETY
Revocation of contract of Invalidation of contract of Conduct of Creditor

guarantee guarantee
¾ Notice of revocation by surety

• Specific guarantee
A specific guarantee can be revoked only if liability of principal debtor has not
arisen.
• Continuing guarantee
SUJEET JHA 65 9213188188
A continuing guarantee can be revoked only in respect of future transactions.

¾
¾
¾ Death of surety
In case of death of surety, a continuing guarantee is automatically revoked in respect of
future transactions.
¾ Variance in terms
If –
• Any variation is made subsequent to formation of contact of guarantee; and
• Such variation is made without the consent of surety;
Then –
• The surety shall be released for such transactions as take place after such variation.
¾ Release or discharge of principal debtor

If –
• The creditor makes a fresh contract with the principal debtor whereby the principal
debtor is relieved from his liability; or –
• The creditor does any act or omission resulting in discharge of the principal debtor;
Then –
The surety is discharged.
¾ Composition with principal debtor
The surety is discharged if the creditor makes a composition with the principal debtor
without obtaining the consent of surety.
¾ Giving extension of time to principal debtor

The surety is discharged if the creditor extends the time for repayment of the debt by the
principal debtor without obtaining the consent of the surety.
¾ Loss of security by a creditor

The surety is discharged to the extent of security lost by the creditor.
SUJEET JHA 66 9213188188

BAILMENT
10. MEANING OF CONTRACT OF BAILMENT (Sec. 148)
A ‘bailment’ is the delivery of goods by one person to another for some purpose, upon a
contract that they shall, when the purpose is accomplished, be returned or otherwise disposed of
according to the directions of the person delivering them.
BAILMENT
Based on Benefit Based on Reward
Exclusive Exclusive Mutual Benefit Gratuitous Non gratuitous

benefit of Bailor benefit of Bailee of both Bailment Bailment
J, neighbour of Z lends a book to A hires furniture Neither Bailor Bailor or Bailee
K, agrees to look Y for reading. Y from B, by nor Bailee gets gets
after K’s per is benefited. payment of hire any remuneration e.g.
while he is out of charges, Both A remuneration, G gives his
station. K is and B are e.g. A lends his television set for
benefited. benefited. book to his are repair to H, a
friend. technician. H
gets paid for the
job.
11. ESSENTIALS OF A VALID CONTRACT OF BAILEMENT (Sec.148)
¾ Contract
• There must be a contract.
• The contract may be expressed or implied.
¾ Goods
Bailment can be made of goods only.
¾ Delivery
There must be delivery of goods by one person to another person.
¾ Purpose of delivery
• The goods must be delivered for some purpose.
• The purpose may be expressed or implied.
¾ Return or disposal of goods

• The delivery of goods must be conditional
• The condition shall be that the goods shall be –
- returned (either in original form or in any altered from); or
- disposed of according to the directions of the bailor, when the purpose is
accomplished.
12. MODES OF DELIVERY (Sec.149)
SUJEET JHA 67 9213188188

¾ Actual delivery
Transfer of physical possession of goods from one person to another .
¾ Symbolic delivery
• Physical possession of goods is not actually transferred.
• A person does some act resulting in transfer of possession to any other person.
Examples:
(a) Delivery of keys of a car to a friend
(b) Delivery of a railway receipt.
¾ Constructive delivery
If –
• A person is already in possession of goods of owner.
• Such person contracts to hold the goods as a bailee for a third person.
Then –
Such person becomes the bailee, and the third person becomes the bailor.
13. CLASSIFICATION OF BAILMENT
¾ Gratuitous bailment
¾ Bailment without any charges or reward, i.e. –
• No hire charges are paid by bailee; and
• No custody charges are paid by bailor.
¾ Non – gratuitous bailment

Bailment for some charges or reward, i.e.-
• Hire charges are paid by bailee; or
• Custody charges are paid by bailor.
14. DUTIES OF A BAILOR (Sec. 150, 158, 159 and 164)
¾ Disclose faults in goods [Sec. 150]:

Bailor is bound to disclose to Bailee, faults in the goods bailed, of which he has
knowledge. He should also disclose such information which – (a) materially interferes
with the use of goods, or (b) expose the Bailee to extraordinary risk.
Liability for Defects in Goods
In case of Gratuitous bailment In case of Non – Gratuitous Bailment

Bailor is liable only for those losses Bailor is liable for damages whether or not
which arise due to non – disclosed risks. he was aware of the existence of faults.
Example: A owning a motorcycle, allows B, his friend, to take it for a joy ride. A knows
that its brakes were not proper but does not disclose it to B. B meets with an accident. A
is liable to compensate B for damages. But when A had lent the motorcycle on hire, he is
liable to B even if he did not know of the failure of his brakes.
¾ Bear expenses [Sec.158]

Expenses of Bailment
In case of Gratuitous bailment In case of Non – Gratuitous Bailment

Bailor shall repay to Bailee, all Bailor is liable to repay only extra –
necessary expenses incurred by him for ordinary expenses, and not the ordinary
SUJEET JHA 68 9213188188
the purpose of Bailment. expenses.
Example: M lends his car to N and it runs out of petrol. N can recover the amount paid
for refueling (ordinary expenses). If in case, the car suffers a breakdown, N can recover
such charges as are paid by him in bringing it back to condition (extra – ordinary
expenses). He M hired the car to N, he shall be liable only for the repair charges, being
extra ordinary expenses.
¾ Indemnify the bailee for defective title

The bailor shall indemnify the bailee for any loss caused to bailee due to defective title of
bailor.
¾ Indemnify the bailee for premature termination

If –
- the bailment is gratuitous ; and
- for a specific period.
Then –
(a) the bailor may compel the bailee to return the goods before expiry of the peiod of
bailment; but
(b) the bailor shall indemnify the bailee for any loss incurred by the bailee.
¾ Receive back the goods

• It is the duty of the bailor to receive back the goods, when returned by bailee.
• If the bailor wrongfully refuses to receive back the goods, he shall be liable to pay
ordinary expenses of custody of goods incurred by the bailee.
15. DUTIES OF A BAILEE (Sec.151 to 157)
¾ Take reasonable care

• The bailee must take such case of goods as a man of ordinary prudence would take
care of his own goods.
• The bailee shall not be liable for any loss or destruction of goods, if –
(a) he is not negligent; or
(b) the loss was caused due to an act of God or other unavoidable reasons.
¾ Not to make unauthorized use of goods

• The bailee must not make any unauthorized use of the goods.
• If the bailee makes any unauthorized use of goods, then –
(a) the bailment becomes voidable at the option of the bailor; and
(b) the bailee shall be liable for any loss or damage even if such loss is caused due to
an act of God or other unavoidable reasons.
¾ Not to mix goods

Goods are mixed with bailor’s consent
The parties shall have a proportionate interest in such mixture.
Goods are mixed without bailor’s consent, but the goods are separable
• The bailee shall pay the expenses of separation.
• The bailee shall pay damage incurred by the bailor.
SUJEET JHA 69 9213188188

Goods are mixed without bailor’s consent, and goods are not separable
The bailee shall compensate the bailor for any loss caused to him.
¾ Return the goods

• The bailee must return the goods, without waiting for demand from bailor, if –
(a) the time specified in the contract has expired ; or
(b) the purpose specified in the contract is accomplished.
• If the goods are not so returned, then –
(a) the goods shall be at the risk of the bailee;
(b) the bailee shall be liable for any loss or damage, even if such loss is caused
without any fault or negligence of the bailee or due to an act of God or other
unavoidable reasons.
¾ Return accretion to goods

The bailee must return to the bailor any accretion (i.e., addition) to the goods bailed.
¾ Not to set up an adverse title

The bailee has no right to allege that the bailor had no authority to bail the goods.
16. RIGHTS OF A BAILOR (Sec. 153, 159, 163, 180, 181)
¾ Terminate the bailment

If –
The bailee does any act inconsistent with the terms and conditions of the contract of
bailment.
Then –
The bailment becomes voidable at the option of the bailor.
¾ Demand back the goods

If –
The bailment is gratuitous; and
For a specific period.
Then –
(a) the bailor may compel the bailee to return the goods before expiry of the period of
bailment; and
(b) the bailor shall indemnify the bailee for any loss incurred by the bailee.
¾ File suit against wrongdoer

The bailor has the right to sue –
• A third party who does any damages to the goods; or
• A third party who deprives the bailee from using the goods
¾ Sue the bailee

The bailor may sue the bailee to enforce his duties.
17. RIGHTS OF A BAILEE (Sec. 165, 166, 167, 170, 180)
¾ Right to compensation
The bailee has the right to be indemnified by the bailor, if –
• The bailor has no title to the goods; and
• As a consequence, the bailee suffers some loss.
SUJEET JHA 70 9213188188

¾ Return the goods

• It is the duty as well as the right of the bailee to return the goods to the bailor.
• In case of joint bailor, the goods may be returned to any of joint bailors.
¾ Recover charges incurred

Extra ordinary expenses
• The bailor is liable to pay the extraordinary expenses.
• The bailee may recover the extraordinary expenses paid by him.
Ordinary expenses
If the bailment is gratuitous, the bailor is liable to pay the ordinary necessary expenses,
i.e., the bailee has the right to recover the ordinary necessary expenses incurred by him.
¾ Suit for deciding the title

The bailee may apply to the Court for deciding the title to goods, if a person other than
the bailor claims that the goods belong to him.
¾ File suit against wrongdoer

The bailee has the right to sue –
• A third party who does any damages to the goods; or
• A third party who deprives the bailee from using the goods.
¾ Right of lien
The bailee has the right to retain the goods delivered to him until the charges due to him
are paid by the bailor.
18. DISTINCTION BETWEEN BAILEE’S PARTICULAR AND GENERAL LIEN
Basis of distinction Bailee’s particular lien Bailee’s general lien

1. Natural of right Particular lien gives right to General lien gives right to
retain only such goods in retain any goods belonging to
respect of which charges due another person for any amount
remain unpaid. due from him.
2. Condition for Particular lien can be General lien may be exercised
exercising lien exercised only when some even though no labour or skill
labour or skill has been has been expended on the
expended on the goods, goods.
resulting in an increase in
value of goods.
3. Right to whom? Every bailee is entitled to General lien can be exercised
particular lien. by only such persons as are
specified u/s 171. e.g.,
bankers, factors, wharfingers,
Attomeys of High Court,
policy brokers. Any other
bailee may exercise general
lien if there is an agreement to
this effect.
19. TERMINATION OF BAILMENT (Sec.153, 159 and 162)
Situation Explanation Example

1. Expiry of specified When bailment is for specific Z lends a moped to Y for a
SUJEET JHA 71 9213188188
period period, it terminates on the period of 3 months April –

expiry of the specified period. June. The Bailment terminates
by the end of June.
2. Accomplishment Where bailment is for a G hires tables and chairs,
of specified purpose specified purpose, it utensils, etc. from H for
terminates when such purpose organizing his son’s
is accomplished. engagement. G shall return
them once the engagement
functions are over.
3. Bailee’s act When bailee does some act J gives his car to K keeping it
inconsistent with which is inconsistent with the in K’s garage. K gives it to his
conditions terms and conditions of son for racing. J can terminate
bailment, the Bailor may the bailment.
terminate the bailment.
4. Destruction of When goods bailed are K hires a cycle from L. When
subject matter destroyed, Bailment comes to the cycle is damaged beyond
an end. repair in an accident, bailment
ends.
5. Gratuitous • Gratuitous Bailment can Note: Where premature
Bailment be terminated at any time. termination of bailment by the
• Also, a Gratuitous Bailor, causes loss to the
Bailment ends by the Bailee exceeding the benefits
death of either Bailor or derived by him, the Bailor
Bailee. (Sec162) shall indemnify the Bailee.
20. FINDER OF GOODS (Sec. 71, 168 and 169)
¾ Finder of lost goods [Sec 71]

A person, who finds goods belonging to another and takes them into his custody, is
subject to the same responsibility as a Bailee.
¾ Implied Agreement
There is an agreement, implied by law between finder and owner of goods.
¾ Duties of Finder
A finder of lost goods is treated as Bailee of goods found. His duties are –
(a) To take initiative to find the real owner of the goods,
(b) To take reasonable care of the goods found,
(c) Not to put the goods found for his personal use, and
(d) Not to mix the goods found with his own goods.
¾ Rights of Finder:
Suit for specific reward [Sec.168] Right of Sale [Sec.169]
Finder of goods is not entitled to sue If a thing which is commonly the subject of
that owner for compensation for sale is lost, and
trouble and expenses voluntarily • Owner cannot be found with reasonable
incurred in – (a) preserving the goods, diligence, [or]
or (b) finding out the owner. • Owner, if found, does not pay the lawful
However, he is entitled to – charges of the Finder.
SUJEET JHA 72 9213188188
(a) Lien: Retain the goods against the Then, Finder of Goods is entitled to sell the
owner till he receives such same when –
compensation (a) the thing is in danger of perishing, or
(b) Suit: Sue the owner for payment (b) the thing is in danger of losing the
of any specific reward offered by greater part of its value, or
the owner for the return of goods (c) The lawful charges of finder, amount to
lost, and retains the goods till 2/3rd of the value of the thing lost and
payment of such reward. found.
SUJEET JHA 73 9213188188

PLEDGE
21. MEANING OF ‘PLEDGE’, ‘PAWNOR’, ‘PAWNEE’ (Sec.172)
¾ ‘Pledge’
The bailment of goods as security for payment of a debt or performance of promise is
called ‘pledge’.
¾ ‘Pawnor’
The bailor in case of a pledge is called as ‘pawnor’.
¾ ‘Pawnee’
The bailee in case of pledge is called as ‘pawnee’.
22. ESSENTIALS A VALID CONTRACT OF PLEDGE (Sec.172)
¾ Contract
• There must be a contract
• The contract may be expressed or implied.
¾ Goods
Pledge can be made of goods only.
¾ Delivery
There must be delivery of goods by one person to another person.
¾ Purpose of delivery
• The goods must be delivered for some purpose.
• The purpose must be to deliver the goods as security for
(a) payment of a debt; or
(b) performance of a promise.
¾ Return of goods
• The delivery of goods must be conditional
• The condition shall be that the goods shall be –
- returned (either in original form or in altered form); or
- Disposed of according to the directions of the pawnor when the purpose is
accomplished.
23. RIGHTS OF PAWNEE (Sec.173 and 176)
¾ Right of Retainer [Sec.173]

Pawnee may retain the goods pledged for –
(a) payment of the debt or the performance of promise,
(b) any interest due on the debt; and
(c) all necessary expenses incurred by him with respect to possession or for preservation
of goods pledged.
¾ Retainer for subsequent advances [Sec.174]
SUJEET JHA 74 9213188188

(a) Where the Pawnee lends money to the Pawnor subsequently, after the date of pledge,
it shall be presumed that the he has a right of retainer over the goods already pledged
in respect of the subsequent lending also.
(b) This presumption can be made invalid only by an expenses provision to that effect.
¾ Reimbursement of Expenses [Sec.175]

Where the Pawnee incurs extraordinary expenses to preserve the goods pledged with
him, he is entitled to receive such amount from the Pawnor.
¾ Rights in case of default by Pawnor [Sec.176]

(a) Suit: Pawnee may institute a suit against Pawnor when there is a default in payment
of debt or performance of promise at the stipulated time.
(b) Retention / Sale of goods: Pawnee may – (a) retain the goods pledged as collateral
security, or (b) sell the goods pledged by giving a reasonable notice to the Pawnor.
(c) Surplus / Deficit on Sale : When there is a surplus on sale, Pawnee shall pay the
excess to the Pawnor. In case of deficit, Pawnor shall be liable for the balance
amount.
(d) No Notice: Where the Pawnee does not give a reasonable notice to the Pawnor, the
sale is valid, but Pawnee is liable to pay damages to Pawnor.
¾ Right against true owner of goods [Sec.178A]

(a) Where the Pawnor has acquired possession of pledged goods, under a voidable
contract u/s 19 or 19A but contract has not been rescinded at the time of pledge, the
Pawnee acquires a good title to the goods, against the true owner.
(b) The title of Pawnee is good only where – (a) he had no notice of the Pawnor’s defect
in title and (b) he acts in good faith.
Reasonable notice u/s 176 means that a notice of intended sale of the Prabhat
security by the Creditor within a certain date, so as to afford an Bank Ltd.
opportunity to the Debtor to pay the amount within the time mentioned in vs Babu
the notice. Notice of sale is essential and a clause in the agreement Ram
excluding the requirement of Notice is inconsistent with the Act & is void
and unenforceable.
24. DUTIES OF A PAWNOR (Sec.175)
¾ Pay the debt

The pawnor is liable to pay the debt or perform his promise as the case may be.
¾ Pay deficit on sale

If the pawnee sells the goods due to default by the pawnor, the pawnor must pay the
deficit.
¾ Pay extra – ordinary expenses

The pawnor is liable to pay to the pawnee any extraordinary expenses incurred by the
pawnee for preservation of goods.
¾ Disclose faults in goods

The pawnor is liable to disclose all the faults which –
SUJEET JHA 75 9213188188
(a) are material for use of the goods; or

(b) may put the pawnee to extraordinary risks.
¾ Indemnify the pawnee

If loss is caused to the pawnee due to defect in pawnor’s title to the goods, the pawnor
must indemnify the pawnee.
25. DUTIES OF PAWNEE
¾ Not to use the goods

• The pawnee has no right to use the goods
• However, he may use the goods, if he has been so authorised by the pawnor.
¾ Return the goods

The pawnee must return the goods if the pawnor pays the debt or performs his promise.
¾ Take reasonable care

The pawnee must take such care of goods pledged as a man of ordinary prudence would
take care of his own goods.
¾ Not to mix goods

The pawnee must not mix his own goods with the goods pledged.
¾ Return increase in goods

The pawnee must return to the pawnor any accretion to the goods pledged with him.
26. RIGHTS OF A PAWNOR (Sec.177)
¾ Redeem the goods pledged

Meaning of redemption
Right to recover back the goods by making payment of the debt or performance of
promise.
Time for redemption
Where time of redemption is fixed, the pawnor may exercise redemption –
(a) within the time so fixed; or
(b) even after expiry of time so fixed, provided –
• the pawnee has not sold the good; and
• the pawnee pays the pawnee all expenses arising on account of his default.
¾ Enforce pawnee’s duties

The pawnor has the right to enforce the duties of pawnee, if the pawnee fails to fulfill his
duties.
¾ Receive increase in goods

The pawnor has the right to recover from pawnee any increase in goods pledged.
¾ Right to receive notice of sale

In case of default by the pawnor to pay the debt or perform his promise, the pawnee has
the right to sell the goods, after giving a reasonable notice to the pawnor. If the pawnee
fails to give notice, the pawnor has the right to recover the loss incurred by him.
Basis Pledge Bailment

SUJEET JHA 76 9213188188
1. Purpose Pledge is bailment of goods Bailment may be for purpose

for a specific purpose, i.e. to other than by way of
provide a security for a loan or providing security for a loan
fulfillment of an obligation. or fulfillment of an obligation.
It may be for purpose like
repairs, safe custody, etc.
2. Sale of Goods Pawnee, i.e. Pledgee has a There is no right of sale to the
right of sale of goods pledged Bailee. Bailee may either – (a)
on default of Pawnor. He can retain goods, or (b) sue the
do so by giving a notice to the Bailor for non – payment of
pawnor. his dues.
3. Use of Goods Pledgee has no right of using Bailee can use the goods
goods pledged. bailed as per terms of contract.
SUJEET JHA 77 9213188188

AGENCY
27. INTRODUCTION TO CONTRACT OF AGENCY (Sec.182)
¾ Meaning of ‘agent’
An ‘agent’ is a person employed to –
• Do any act for another; or
• Represent another in dealings with third persons.
¾ Meaning of ‘principal’
‘Principal’ is the person –
• For whom an act is done by the agent; or
• Who is represented by the agent in respect of dealing with third persons.
¾ Test of agency
Where a person has the capacity to –
• Create contractual relations between the principal and a third party;
• Bind the principal by his own acts, there exists a relationship of agency.
CREATION OF AGENCY
By Operation By Express By Implied Agreement By Ratification of acts

of Law Agreement (a) Estoppel, (b) Holding Out,
(c) Necessity
28. SALIENT FEATURES OF AGENCY (Sec. 183, 184, 185 and 226)
¾ Principal is liable for the acts of agent

• The principal is liable for all the acts of an agent which are lawful and within the
scope of agent’s authority.
• The contracts entered into by the agent on behalf of the principal have the same legal
consequences as if these contracts were made by the principal himself.
¾ Who may employ an agent?

Any person may employ an agent if –
• He is of the age of majority; and
• He is of sound mind.
¾ Who can be an agent?

• Any person may become an agent.
• Even a minor or a person of unsound mind can become an agent
¾ Liability of agent
• Generally an agent is liable to the principal
• An agent is not liable to the principal if he is a minor or is of unsound mind.
¾ Requirement of consideration
No consideration is necessary for creating an agency.
SUJEET JHA 78 9213188188

29. MODES OF CREATION OF AGANCY (Sec.187, 189, 196, 214 and 237)
¾ Express agreement
• A person may employ another person as his agent by entering into an express
agreement with him.
• The agreement may be either oral or written.
¾ Implied agreement
Agency by estoppel
If –
- a person makes a representation (by his words or conduct) to a third
person that a certain person is his agent; and
- the third party believing such representation to be true, enters into a
contract with the pretended agent.
Then –
- the person making the representation is prevented from denying the truth
of agency. He may be held liable as a principal by such third party.
Agency of holding out
Such an agency comes into existence when a person by his affirmative or positive
conduct leads third persons to believe that person doing some act on his behalf is doing
with authority.
¾ Agency by necessity – Conditions

(i) There was an actual and definite necessity for acting on behalf of the principal.
(ii) The agent was not in a position to communicate with the principal.
(iii) The act was done for the purpose of protecting the interest of his principal.
(iv) The agent has exercised such reasonable care as a man of ordinary prudence
would have exercised in his own case.
(v) The act was done bonafide.
¾ Agency by operation of law
Agency by operation of law arises where the law treats one person as an agent of
another.
¾ Agency by ratification
Meaning
If –
- a person (viz., pretended agent) acts on behalf of another person (viz, the
principal)
- the pretended agent acts without the knowledge or consent of the
principal; and
- Afterwards, the principal accepts such act.
Then –
- Agency by ratification comes into existence.
Effects of ratification
• The principal is bound by the acts ratified by him as if such acts had been performed
by his authority.
• Ratification relates back to the actual date of the act that is ratified and not from the
date when the act ratified.
SUJEET JHA 79 9213188188

30. ESSENTIALS OF A VALID RATIFICATION (Sec. 197 to 200)
¾ Full knowledge
No valid ratification can be made by a person whose knowledge of the facts of the case is
materially defective. In other words, the principal must have full knowledge of all the
material facts.
¾ Whole transaction
It must be done for whole transaction in fact; ratification of the part of a transaction
operates as a ratification of the whole transaction.
¾ Act on behalf of another person

The acts done by a person (i.e. pretended agent) on behalf of another person (i.e.
pretended principal) can only be ratified.
¾ By the principal
Ratification can be made by only such person for whom the act was done.
¾ Existence of principal
The principal must be in existence at the time when the act was done in his name
¾ Contractual capacity
The principal must have contractual capacity both at the time of entering into the contract
and at the time of ratification.
¾ Lawful acts.
Only those acts which are lawful can be ratified. Void, illegal, or ultra vires acts cannot
be ratified.
¾ Acts within principal’s power

Ratification can be made only for such acts which principal had the power to do.
¾ Communication
Ratification must be communicated to the third party so as to bind him
¾ Within reasonable time

Ratification must be made within reasonable time of the act purported to be ratified.
31. KINDS OF AGENTS.
A. Based on Authority
1. Special Agent 2. General Agent 3. Universal Agent
(a) Appointed to perform a (a) Appointed to do all acts (a) Appointed to do all acts for
particular transaction, e.g. connected with a the Principal.
sale of a house property. particular trade, business (b) Authority is unlimited
(b) Agent has limited or employment. (c) All acts of Agent bind his
authority (b) Authority is wide and Principal provided that his
(c) Agent cannot bind continues till agency is acts are legal and agreeable
Principal for acts other terminated. as per law of land.
SUJEET JHA 80 9213188188
than for which he is (c) Principal may limit his

employed. authority.
(d) Principal is bound by all
acts unless it is beyond
authority of Agent.
B. Based on Nature of work

1. Commercial or Mercantile Agents 2. Non – Mercantile Agents.
(a) One who is authorised to sell goods or (a) Not engaged in business of selling or
consign goods for the purpose of sale buying goods, but act in their
or to buy gods or to raise money on the respective professional capacities. i.e.
security of goods. render professional services for their
(b) Includes Banker, Factor, Auctioneer, Principal
Broker, Commission Agent, & Del (b) Includes Solicitors, Attorneys, C & F
Credere Agent. Agents, Insurance Agents, etc.
32. DUTIES OF AN AGENT (Sec. 209 to 218)
1. To conduct the business in accordance with the directions given by the principal
2. To work with reasonable diligence, care and skill.
3. To render proper accounts to the principal on demand.
4. To communicate with his principal in case of difficulty and seek his instructions.
5. Not to deal on his own account unless all the material facts have been disclosed to
the principal and consent of the principal has been obtained.
If the agent, without the knowledge of the principal, deals in the business of agency
on his own account, the principal has the following rights:
(a) He may repudiate the transaction, if the agent dishonestly conceals any material
facts or the dealings of the agent prove to be disadvantageous to him.
(b) He may claim from the agent the agency business other than the agreed
remuneration.
6. Not to make any secret profit out of the agency business other than the agreed
remuneration
7. To remit to the principal all the sums received in the principal’s accounts in
accordance with the terms and conditions of contract of agency.
8. Not to delegate authority or appoint sub – agent.
9. To protect and preserve the interest on behalf of the principal’s representative in case
of his death or insolvency of the principal.
10. Not to use information obtained in the course of the agency against the principal.
33. RIGHTS OF AN AGENT (Sec. 217 to 225)
1. To retain money out of the sums received in agency business for advances made or
expenses incurred and remuneration due to him.
2. To receive the agreed remuneration. If the remuneration is not fixed, then he has the
right to recover such remuneration as is usual and customary in such business.
3. Right of lien on principal’s goods, papers and other property until the amount due to
him in respect of the same is paid.
4. An agent has the right to be indemnified by the principal against the consequences of
all lawful acts done in exercise of the authority conferred on him.
5. An agent has the right to be indemnified by the principal against consequences of
acts done in good faith that caused an injury to third person.
SUJEET JHA 81 9213188188
6. To claim compensation for injury caused because of principal’s neglect or want of

skill.
34. WHEN AN AGENT IS PERSONALLY LIABLE? (Sec. 230 and 231)
¾ General Rule – No personal liability [ Sec.230]

In the absence of contract to contrary, an Agent cannot –
(a) personally enforce contracts entered into by him, on behalf of his Principal,
(b) be held personally liable for them.
This is because the Agent merely acts on behalf of his Principal. Thus, he enjoys
immunity from being personally sued.
Exceptions, i.e. Agent personally as well as Joint & Severally Liable

The Agent is personally liable in the following cases –
1. Foreign Principal [Sec.230] : Where the contract is made by an Agent for the sale
or purchase of goods for a merchant resident abroad.
2. Undisclosed Principal [Sec.230]: Where the Agent does not disclose the name of his
Principal.
3. Principal cannot be sued [Sec.230]: Where the Principal, though disclosed, cannot
be sued, e.g. Principal becoming of unsound mind, subsequent to appointment of
agent.
4. Acting for a Principal not in existence: Where the Agent acts for a Principal who is
not in existence at the time of making contracts, he shall be personally held liable e.g.
contracts entered into by Promoters before incorporation of a Company are made in
their personal capacity and hence personally liable.
5. Agency coupled with interest [Sec.202] : Where the Agent has an interest in the
subject matter of agency.
6. Agent guilty of Fraud [Sec.238] : Where an Agent is guilty of fraud or
misrepresentation in matters that are outside the scope of his authority, he is
personally liable, and do not affect his Principal.
7. Agent exceeds authority & act not ratified: Where an Agent acts either without
any authority or exceeds his authority, he shall be held personally liable when the
principal does not ratify his acts.
8. Agent receives or pays money: Where an Agent receives or pays money by mistake
or fraud to a third party, he shall be personally liable to such third party. Also ha can
personally sue the third party if the fraud or mistake is accountable to such third
party.
9. Express Agreement for personal liability: Where an Agent expressly aggress to be
personally bound.
10. Execution of Contract in his own name: Where an Agent executes a contract in his
own name, without disclosing that he is acting as Agent for a Principal, he shall be
personally liable, e.g. An Agent signs a Negotiable Instrument without making it
clear that he is signing it as an Agent only, he shall be held personally liable on the
same. He would be personally liable as Maker of P/N, even though he may be
described as Agent.
11. Trade custom or usage: Where trade usage or custom makes an Agent personally
liable.
12. Agent with special interest: An Agent with special interest or with a beneficial
interest, e.g. a Factor or Auctioneer, can sue and be sued personally. [Subramanya vs
Narayana]
SUJEET JHA 82 9213188188

13. Action against Agent or Principal [Sec 233] : Where the Agent is personally liable,
a person dealing with him may hold - (a) either him or (b) his Principal or (c) both of
them liable. The liability of Principal and Agent is “joint and several”.
14. Exclusive liability [Sec. 234]
Where a person has made a contract with an Such Third person cannot later on, shift
Agent and – the liability on to –
• Induces such Agent to act upon it in the • The Agent, or
belief that only his principal would be • The principal, respectively.
held liable,
• Induces the principal to act upon it in the
belief that only his Agent would be held
liable.
35. AGENCY COUPLED WITH INTERST (Sec 202)
• When agency is created for securing some benefit to the agent over and above his
remuneration as an agent, it is called as agency coupled with interest.
• The interest should exist at the time of creation of agency. If the interest arises after the
creation of agency then it would not be called as agency coupled with interest.
• Agency coupled with interest cannot be terminated to the prejudice of such interest.
• Agency coupled with interest does not terminate even on the death or insanity of the
principal.
• Thus, such agency is irrevocable to the extent of such interest.
36. IRREVOCABLE AGENCY (Sec.202 and 204)
¾ Agency coupled with interest

Such agency cannot be terminated to the extend of such interest
¾ Part exercise of authority by the agent

Where the agent has partly exercised the authority, the principle cannot revoke the
authority so far as regard such acts and obligation as arise from already done in the
agency
¾ Personal liability incurred by agent

Where the agent has incurred personal liability, the agency is irrevocable
37. DELEGATION OF AUTHORITY (Sec.190)
¾ General rule
The general rule is that an agent cannot lawfully employ another act, which he has
expressly or impliedly undertaken to perform personally.
¾ Exceptions
(a) There is a custom or usage of trade to that effect.
(b) Where power of the agent to delegate can be inferred from the conduct of the
both the principle and the agent.
(c) When the principal is aware of the intention of the agent to appoint sub agent by
the does not object to it.
(d) When principle permits appointment of a sub-agent.
(e) If the nature of the agency is such that the sub-agent is necessary.
SUJEET JHA 83 9213188188

(f) Where the acts to be done is purely ministerial not involving confidence or use of
discretion.
(g) Where unforeseen emergencies arise rendering appointment of a sub-agent
necessary.
38. LEGAL RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE PRINCIPLE AND SUB-AGENT AND

AGENT (Sec.190, 192 and 193)
¾ If sub-agent is properly appointment

(a) Principal is bound to the third parties for the acts of sub-agent.
(b) The agent is responsible to the principal for the acts of sub-agent.
(c) The sub-agent is responsible to the agent for the acts done by him.
(d) The sub – agent is not responsible to the principle, except in case of fraud or willful
wrong.
¾ If sub – agent is not properly appointed.

(a) Principal is not bound to the third parties for the acts of sub – agent.
(b) The agent is responsible to the principle and third parties for the acts of sub – agent.
(c) The sub – agent is responsible to the agent for the acts done by him.
(d) The sub – agent is not responsible to the principle.
39. LIABILITY OF PRINCIPAL TO THIRD PARTIES FOR THE ACTS OF AGENT

(Sec. 226 to 228)
¾ Principal is liable for the acts of agent

• The principal is liable for all the acts of an agent which are lawful and within the
scope of agent’s authority.
• The contracts entered into by the agent on behalf of the principal have the same legal
consequences as if these contracts were made by the principal himself.
¾ When agent exceeds his authority

Whether the acts done within the authority are separable from the acts done beyond
authority.
If yes – The principal is not bound for excess acts done by the agent.
If no – The principal is not bound by the transaction and the principal can repudiate the
whole transaction.
40. TERMINATION OF AGENCY (Sec.201 to 210)
A. By the acts of parties

¾ By agreement
The principal and the agent may mutually agree to terminate the agency, at anytime.
¾ By revocation
• When the agency is coupled with interest, the principal cannot revoke the agency to
the prejudice of such interest.
• The principal can revoke the authority at anytime before, the authority has been
exercised so as to bind the principal.
• The principal cannot revoke the authority given to his agent after the authority has
been partly exercised.
SUJEET JHA 84 9213188188
• When agency if for fixed period, the principal must make compensation to the agent
for premature revocation of agency without sufficient cause.
• Revocation may be expressed or implied from the conduct of the principal
¾ By the agent renouncing the business of agency

• Renunciation may be expressed or implied from the conduct of the agent.
• When agency is for fixed period, the agent must make compensation to the principal
for premature renunciation of agency without sufficient cause.
B. By operation of law
1. Completion of business of agency
2. Death or insanity of the principal or agent
3. Where the principal or the agent, being a company is dissolved
4. Destruction of subject matter of agency
5. Principal becoming insolvent
6. Expiration of period where agency was for a fixed period.
SUJEET JHA 85 9213188188

STUDY NOTE – 2 : THE SALE OF GOODS ACT, 1930
SECTION 1:
COMMENCEMENT AND APPLICABLE
APPLICABILITY OF THE ACT
⇒ This act extends to whole of India, except the State of Jammu and Kashmir.
⇒ This act came into force w.e.f. 1 July 1930.
⇒ The ‘contract of sale’ includes both a sale as sell as an agreement to sell.
⇒ The word Indian was omitted the title of the Act in 1963 (22 sept.)
⇒ This Act does not deal with the sale of immovable property.
⇒ The transaction relating to immovable properties, e.g., the sale, lease, gifts, etc.,
are governed by a separate Act known as ‘Transfer of Property Act, 1882’. This
Act is beyond the scope of this book.
DEFINITIONS (Sec. 2)
Buyer – Sec 2 (1)

⇒ A person, who buys or agrees to buy the goods.
Delivery Sec (2)

⇒ It means voluntary transfer of possession from one person to another.
Delivery State Sec 2(3)

Goods are said to be in delivered state, when they are in such state that the Buyer
would be bound to take the delivery of them in accordance with the contract.
Documents of title to Goods 2(4)

A document of the title to goods may be described as any document used as proof
of the possession or control of goods, authorizing or purporting to authorize,
either by endorsement or by delivery, the possessor of the document to transfer or
receive goods thereby represented.
Section 2(4) of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 recognizes the following as
documents of title to goods:
(i) Bill of lading,

(ii) Dock warrant,
(iii) Warehousekeeper’s certificate,
(iv) Wharfinger’s certificate,
(v) Railway receipt,
(vi) Multi – modal transport document,
(vii) Warrant or order for the delivery of goods, and
SUJEET JHA 86 9213188188

(viii) Any other document used in the ordinary course of business as document of
title (as described in the preceding paragraph).
Document of Title v. Document showing the title :
A document of title enables a person named therein to transfer the property by mere
endorsement and delivery, whereas a document showing title does not confer any right to
transfer by way of endorsement and delivery.
For example, a share certificate shows that the person named therein is entitled to the
shares represented by it, but does not allow transfer of the shares by mere endorsement
and delivery of the certificate.
Goods – Sec 2 (7)

⇒ Goods mean every kind of movable property.
⇒ Other than actionable claims and money, and it includes.
⇒ stock and shares, growing crops, grass and things attached to or forming part of
land which are agreed to be severed before sale or under the contract of sale.
⇒ You may notice that ‘money’ and ‘actionable claims’ have been expressly
excluded from the term ‘goods’. ‘Money’ means the legal tender. ‘Money’ does
not include old coins and foreign currency. They can, therefore, be sold or
bought as goods. Sale and purchase of foreign currency is, however, also
regulated by the foreign Exchange Management Act,
⇒ ‘Actionable claims’, like debts, are things which a person cannot make use of, but
which can be claimed by him by means of a legal action. Actionable claims
cannot be sold or purchased like goods, they can only be assigned, as per the
provisions of Transfer of property Act.
⇒ Grass, growing crops, trees to be cut and their log wood to be delivered, malba of
a building to be demolished, etc. are goods. Similarly, things like goodwill,
copyright, trade mark, patents, water, gas electricity are all goods and may be the
subject matter of a contract of sale.
Seller – Sec 2 (13)

⇒ A person, who sells or agrees to sell the goods,.
Agreement to sell
⇒ Where transfer of property in goods takes place at future date.
Sale
⇒ Where transfer of property in goods takes place at the time of contract.
SUJEET JHA 87 9213188188

ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS OF VALID CONTRACT OF SALES
The following are the essentials of valid contract of sale:
⇒ There must be two parties, one seller and other buyer.

• Seller and buyer must be different.
• Part owner can sell goods to another part owner.
• Partners are not regarded as separate persons for the purpose of sale of the
partnership property. They are the joint owners of the goods and as such they
cannot be both sellers and buyers [State of Gujarat v. Ramanlal S & W.
(1965)]. But, a partner may buy goods from the firm or sell goods to the firm.
⇒ There must be movable goods as subject matter of contract.
⇒ There must be a transfer of property in goods. It means general property.

(i.e. ownership)
⇒ There must be price involved. Price means money consideration for sale of
goods.
• Exchange of goods for goods is barter.
• If Exchange is for partly goods and partly for money it is sale.
⇒ All essential elements of valid contract must be observed.
⇒ The contract of sale can be entered into, expressly or impliedly.
Formation. The contract of sale may provide for any of the following methods.
• Immediate delivery of goods.
• Immediate payment of price but delivery at some future date.
• Immediate payment of price and immediate delivery of goods.
• Delivery or payment or both made in installments.
• Delivery or payment or both will be made at future date.
TRANSFER OF “PROPERTY IN GOODS”
⇒ Property means general property in goods and not merely special property in goods. It
means ownership of goods. Special property in goods means possession of goods.
⇒ Cases where property in goods is not transferred:

• Bailment
• Creating charge or pledge
SUJEET JHA 88 9213188188

Difference Between Sale and Agreement to Sell
Immediate transfer of ownership to buyer Ownership remains with the seller

It is executed contract It is an executory contract
It creates right in rem for buyer It provides right in personam for buyer and seller
Seller can use for price – if not buyer Seller can sue for damages
Risk passes to buyer Risk doesn’t passes to buyer
Buyer can get goods even if seller has Buyer can get proportionate share in money but
becomes insolvent can’t get goods
Delivery to receiver if buyer becomes Delivery can be refused by seller if buyer
insolvent before the payment of price becomes insolvent.
Difference between Sale and Hire Purchase
Metter Sale Hire Purchase

Meaning Property in goods is transferred Agreement where hirer uses goods
from seller to buyer immediately by paying regular installment and
having option to purchase goods on
payment of last installment
Applicable Act Sale of goods Act, 1930 Hire Purchase Act, 1972
Parties Buyer and seller Hirer and Hire vendor
How it made? Orally or in writing Only in writing – Valid
Transfer of ownership Immediately buyer becomes When hirer paid last installment
owner of goods
Risk of loss Ownership not transferred hire
Risk of loss passes to buyer
vendor is liable
Return of goods Buyer can’t return goods Anytime terminate agreement and
return
Legal effect of Buyer remain liable to pay Each installment paid is treated as
Installment unpaid installment only hire charges
Sale tax Payable immediately When all installment is paid
Difference between Sale and Bailment
Sale Bailment
Transfer of property in goods for price Delivery of goods for specific purpose that it
will be returned to bailor or disposed of as per
his direction
Property is transferred It remains with bailor.
Consideration is in form of price, i.e., money Gratuitous bailment is possible
SUJEET JHA 89 9213188188
Goods not returned to seller Goods returned to bailor purpose of bailment

is over
CONTRACT FOR WORK AND SKILL
⇒ Some contract involves use of both service and goods. This type of contract is considered
as contract for work and skill.
⇒ This kind of contract involves exercise of skill and labour by one party on some goods or
materials supplied by other party or supplied by party who exercise skill and labour for
price. It is immaterial who supply material. Alternatively, it can be said that in this kind
of contract, main purpose is to exercise work and skill. Supply of own goods is only
subsidiary. Intension of parties is to transfer goods only after exercise of some skill and
labour.
⇒ As it is not falling within categories of contract for Sale no sales tax is payable.
Example:
(1) A dentist agreed to supply a set of artificial teeth to a patient. The material was
wholly found by the dentist. Held, it was a contract for the sale of goods.
(2) An artist was asked to paint a portrait. The material was supplied by the party and
not by the painter. It was held to be a contract for work and labour and not of
sale.
CLASSIFICATION OF GOODS
GOODS
Existing Future Contingent
Specific Ascertained Unascertained
Types of Goods
The goods may be classified into following categories:
Existing goods
• Existing goods are the goods, which are owned and possessed by the seller at the time of
sale. Existing goods may be of three types;
(a) Specific Goods:

• The goods, which are identified and agreed upon by the parties at the time of contract of
sale.
• It should be noted that the goods must be both identified and agreed upon.
(b) Unascertained Goods:

• These are the goods, are not identified and agreed upon at the time of the contract of sale.
SUJEET JHA 90 9213188188
• These goods are merely described by the parties at the time of contract of sale.
(c) Ascertained Goods:

• There are the goods, which are identified after the formation of contract of sale. When
the un-ascertained goods are identified and agreed upon by the parties, the goods are
known as ascertained goods.
Future Goods
⇒ Future goods are those goods, which do not exist at the time of the contract of sale.
⇒ These goods are to be manufactured or acquired by the seller after the making of the
contract of sale.
⇒ Future goods cannot be sold, but there can only be an agreement to sell.
Example:
A, a manufacturer agrees to sell 5 tables and 50 chairs to B at Rs.10,000. B agrees to
purchase it. However, tables and chairs are yet to manufactured by A.
Contingent goods
⇒ It is a kind of future goods.

⇒ It is goods, the acquisition of which is contingent upon the happening or non –happening
of an uncertain event.
Example:
A agrees to sell the goods loaded on the ship “Titanic”, which is coming from London to
Bombay. The ship may or may not arrive. So, these goods will be called as contingent
goods.
Basis Futures Goods Contingent Goods
1. Meaning Goods that are yet to be Goods, the acquisition of which by the
manufactured produced or acquired Seller depends upon a contingency,
by the Seller after making contract of which may or may not happen.
sale.
2. Element of Acquisition of Future Goods does The procurement of Contingent Goods
uncertainty not depend upon and uncertainty. is dependent upon an uncertain event.
3. Scope Future Goods do not include They are wider in scope, it includes
contingent Goods because of the future Goods.
element of certainty.
4. Effect of Where by a contract of Sale, the There may be a “Contract for Sale” of
Contract Seller purports to effect a present Goods, the acquisition of which by the
sale of future Goods, the contract Seller depends upon a contingency
operates as an “agreement to sell” which may or may not happen [Sec.6
the Goods[Sec.6(3)] (2)]
5. Example B agrees to buy the entire crop of A agrees to sell to B a certain painting
wheat that would yield in S’s farm, only if C, its present owner, sells it to
at the rate of Rs.1000 per quintal. him. The sale is contingent upon the
sale by C.
SUJEET JHA 91 9213188188

Price of Goods – Sec 9 – 10
Price means the money consideration for a sale of a Goods 2(10)
The following are the modes of determining price: [Sec. 9]
⇒ Price is specified under the contract. It is the most common method of determining the
price. Here, parties decide the price in advance.
⇒ Price may be determined as per the method specified in contract.

Example :
Delivery of rice on 1st December 2008 at the rate prevailing on that day.
⇒ Price may be determined in accordance to custom and usage of trade. This method is
applicable if parties regularly trade.
⇒ Where the price is not fixed as above, the buyer shall pay the seller a reasonable price.
‘What is a reasonable price is a question of fact and circumstances.
Fixation of price by third party. (Sec. 10)

If it is so, contract shall specify name of third party.
If third party fails to specify, contract is void but if goods are delivered to buyer and used by
him, he is required to pay reasonable price.
If the third party is prevented from fixing price, defaulting party is liable for the damages.
Consequences of Destruction of Specific Goods – Sec 7 – 8
The consequences of destruction of specific goods can be discussed under the following three
heads:
⇒ If goods perish before making the contract
• Contract is void – ab – initio, due to mistake as to existence of subject matter.
• It is to be noted that if the seller has knowledge about the destruction of goods, even
then the enters into the contract of sale with buyer, then seller is bound to
compensate to the buyer.
⇒ Where a part of the goods is perished before making contract

• If the goods was divisible, then the contract can be enforced party and if the goods
was indivisible, then the contract becomes void – ab – inito.
Example:
A contracted to sell one wagon containing 700 bags of groundnut to B. Unknown to A,
109 bags had been stolen at the time of sale, Therefore, A made a delivery of 591 bags.
Held, the sale was void.
SUJEET JHA 92 9213188188

If goods perish after the “Agreement to sell; but before’ Sale [Sec. 8]
The contract is void if subsequently the goods have perished, and there is no fault on the
part of the buyer or seller in perishing the goods.
Example:
A horse was delivered upon trial for 8 days. However, the horse died within 8 days,
without the fault of buyer or seller. Held, the seller must bear the loss, as the contract
was void.
However, parties to the contract may provide otherwise also.
Section 7 and 8 are applicable only in case of specific goods.
Therefore, if unascertained goods are destroyed either before or after making the
agreement, the contract shall not become void. Thus, in an agreement to sell
unascertained goods, even if the entire stock of goods is destroyed, the contract that not
become void and the seller will have to perform his promise.
Example
‘A’ agreed to sell to ‘B’ 100 bags of wheat from his stock of 1,000 bags in his go down.
The entire stock was destroyed by fire. ‘A’ is bound to deliver 100 bags of wheat or else
he will be liable for damages.
If the contract does not otherwise provide, then –

⇒ Stipulation as to time of payment is not deemed to be essence of contract.
⇒ Stipulation as to time of delivery is deemed to be essence of contract.
SUJEET JHA 93 9213188188

CONDITIONS AND WARRANTIES
⇒ Generally, at the time of sale, the seller makes some representation, statements of
stipulations for the praise of his goods. Some of representations are in nature of opinion
others are in nature of facts. Representation as to fact which becomes a part of contract
of sale is called as stipulation.
⇒ Stipulation may be condition or warranty depends upon its importance in relation to

contract.
⇒ Stipulation which is essential to the main purpose of contract is known as condition.

Breach of condition gives the aggrieved party right to terminate the contract.
⇒ Stipulation which is collateral to the main purpose of the contract is warranty. Breach
of warranty gives rise to the aggrieved party right to claim damages but contract cannot
be terminated.
⇒ The conditions and warranties may be express or implied.
⇒ Express conditions and warranties are those, which the parties agree expressly, i.e. orally
or in writing.
⇒ Implied conditions are those, which are implied by the law in the absence of any
agreement to the contrary.
IMPLIED CONDITIONS
The following are the implied conditions which are contained in the Sales of Goods Act:
Conditions as to title – sec 14(a)
⇒ There is an implied condition on the part of the seller that

• In the case of sale, the seller has a right to sell the goods, and
• In the agreement to sell, the seller will have a right to sell the goods at the time of
passing of ownership in goods.
⇒ If the title of seller out to be defective, the buyer must return the goods to the true owner
and recover the price from the seller.
Conditions as to description – Sec 15
⇒ Where the goods are sold by description, there is an implied condition that the goods
shall correspond to the description.
Example;
SUJEET JHA 94 9213188188

A machine was sold. The buyer has not been the machine, but the seller described it as a
new one. However, it was found to be a very old one. Held, the machine was not
according to the description.
Sale by sample – Sec 17
⇒ Where the goods are sold by sample, the following are implied conditions.
• The bulk shall correspond to sample in quality.
• The buyer shall be given a reasonable opportunity to compare the goods with the
sample.
• The goods shall be free from any defect, rendering them un – merchantable. It is to
be noted that this implied condition applies only in the case of latent defects, i.e.
those defects which cannot be discovered by ordinary inspection. In fact, such
defects are discovered when the goods are put to use or by examination in
laboratories. The seller is not liable for apparent or visible defects which can be
discovered by examination.
Sale by description as well as sample – Sec 15
⇒ If the sale is by sample as well as description, both conditions shall be satisfied. Goods
must correspond with sample as well as description.
Example :
A agreed to sell to C some oil described as “Foreign refined oil” and warranted only
equal to sample. The goods supplied were equal to sample, but contained a mixture to
hemp oil. Held, C could reject the goods.
Conditions as to quality and fitness for buyer’s purpose – Sec 16
⇒ Where the buyer, expressly or impliedly, tells the seller the particular purpose for which
he needs the goods and relies on the skill or judgment of the seller, there is an implied
condition that the goods shall be reasonably fit for such purpose.
⇒ When the article can be used only for one particular purpose, the buyer need not inform
the seller the purpose for which the goods are required.
Example:
A purchased a hot water bottle from a chemist. While the bottle was being used by A’s
wife, it burst and injured A’s wife. Held, the seller was liable for damages as the bottle
was not fit for the purpose for which it was meant – Priest vs Last.
Exceptions to the implied condition as to quality or fitness
⇒ The condition as to quality or fitness’ well not apply, if the buyer is suffering from an
abnormality, which renders the goods unsuitable for a particular purpose and the buyer
does not inform the seller about that abnormally.
Example
SUJEET JHA 95 9213188188

A purchased a coat. He had abnormally sensitive skin, By wearing the coat, he got skin
complaint. Held, there was no breach of condition, as he had not disclosed the
abnormally of his skin.
⇒ Where the goods can be used for a number of purposes, the buyer should inform the
particular purpose for which such goods were required. If the does not disclose, there is
no such conditions of quality or fitness.
Conditions as to merchantability
⇒ Where goods are bought by description from a seller, who deals in goods of that
description, there is an implied conditions that the goods shall be of merchantable
quality.
⇒ ‘Merchantability’ means that there is no defect in the goods, which renders them unfit for
sale. Thus, a watch that will not keep time and a pen that will not write cannot be
regarded as merchantable.
Example:
A radio set was sold to a layman. The set was defective. It did not work in spite of
repairs, Held, the buyer could return the set and claim refund.
Condition as to wholesomeness
⇒ In the case of eatable and food – stuff, there is an implied condition that the goods shall
be wholesomeness, i.e., free from any defect which renders them unfit for human
consumption.
Example:
A Purchased milk from B, a milk dealer. The milk contained typhoid germs. A’s wife on
taking the milk got infected and died. Held, A was entitled to get damages – Frost vs
Aylesbury Dairy Co. Ltd.
IMPLIED WARRANTIES
The following are the implied warranties which are contained in the Sales of Goods Act:
Warranty as to quiet possession – Sec 14
⇒ In the absence to any contract showing contrary intention, there is an implied warranty
that the buyer shall have and enjoy quiet possession of the goods. If the buyer is
disturbed in the enjoyment of the goods, he can claim damages from the seller.
Warranty against encumbrances – Sec 14
⇒ Unless the circumstances of the case are such as to show a contrary intension, there is an
implied warranty that the goods shall be free from any charge or encumbrance in
SUJEET JHA 96 9213188188
favour of any party not declared to the buyer before or at the time contract is made.
However, there will not be any such warranty if charge is declared to buyer at the time of
sale.
Warranty as to quality and fitness by usage of Trade – Sec 16
⇒ An implied warranty as to quality or fitness for a particular purpose may be annexed by

the usage of trade.
Warranty to disclose the dangerous nature of goods
⇒ In case of sale of dangerous goods, the seller is under an obligations to warn the buyer
about the probable danger. Failure to do so will make the seller liable to pay damages.
Example :
A sold a tin of disinfectant to B, knowing that it was likely to be dangerous to the tin,
whereupon disinfectant powder went into her eyes, causing her injury. Held, A was
liable in damages to B, as he failed to warn B of the probable danger.
Difference between Condition and Warranty
Matter Condition Warranty

Stipulation Essential to main purpose of contract Collateral (subsidiary) to main purpose
of contract.
If breach? Buyer has right to cancel contract Buyer has no right to cancel the contract .
Can claim damages
Treatment Breach of condition may be treated as Breach of warranty can’t be treated as
breach of warranty breach of condition
DOCTRINE OF CAVEAT EMPTOR
⇒ The doctrine of ‘Caveat Emptor’ means “let the buyer beware”.
⇒ It means that the buyer while purchasing goods must act with a “third eye and ear”,
i.e.,
• He should be careful to see that the goods purchased will serve his purpose well.
• If the buyer is not careful and he finds later on that the goods do not serve his
purpose, he cannot hold the seller liable for it.
• The seller is under no obligation to tell the defects of his articles.
SUJEET JHA 97 9213188188

⇒ However, in the following exceptions Doctrine of caveat emptor is not applicable:
• Implied conditions as to quality or fitness. It means when buyer has specified his
purpose and relied on skill of seller, the doctrine of caveat emptor is not applicable.
• When goods are sold by description, it should be of merchantable quality. In such

case, doctrine of caveat emptor is not applicable.
• In case of edible items, implied condition of wholesomeness is applicable and

goods should are not fit for human consumption then buyer is not liable but seller
will be liable.
• Usage or custom of trade.
• When the consent of buyer is obtained by fraud, the provision of doctrine of caveat
emptor is not applicable.
SUJEET JHA 98 9213188188

TRANSFER OF OWNERSHIP
Transfer of property from seller to Buyer 20-22
Unascertained Ascertained Goods i.e. Specific Goods Sale on approval (24)

Goods
(a) On approval.
(a) Goods are (b) Adopting the
Ascertained transactions.
(b) Appropriation (c) Retains without
of Goods Deliverable Deliverable Non – notice of rejection
Unconditionally state Price State Price not deliverable for a long time.
determined determined State
At the time After After

when contract determination completion of
is made of price process to
make it
deliverable
⇒ Ownership is transferred immediately at the time of making the contract if all the
following conditions are satisfied:
• Contract is for specific goods.

• Goods are in deliverable state.
• Goods are not required to be weighed or measured for determining price.
Example :
A sold to B, 100 bales of cotton lying in his godown. Before the bales could be identified
and separated, all bales were destroyed in fire. Here, seller is liable for damage because
ownership is not transferred.
Section 21
⇒ If the goods are not ready in deliverable state at the time of making contract of sale,
ownership of goods is transferred after formation of contract of sale when following
conditions are satisfied;
• Contract is for specific goods.
• Goods are put in deliverable state by seller.
• Fact that the goods are put into deliverable state has come to knowledge to the
buyer.
Example :
Certain quantity of oil was purchased by A. The oil was to be filled in tins. B filled up
some of the tins and informed A to take the delivery. In the meantime, a fire destroyed
SUJEET JHA 99 9213188188

the entire quantity of oil. Held, A will bear the loss of the oil which was filed in the tins
and the seller must bear the loss of the balances.
Section 22
⇒ If the goods are not weight or measured at the time of making contract of sale, ownership
of goods is transferred after the formation of contract of sale when the following
conditions are satisfied.
• Contract is for specific goods
• At the time of formation, price is not determined. It is determined later by weighed
or measurement.
• Goods are put in deliverable state by the seller.
• Fact that the goods have been weighed or measured in order to determine price has
come to knowledge of buyer.
Example
A sold 10 kg wheat. The wheat was to be weighed. Before the wheat was weighed,
it was carried away by the flood. Held, the ownership of the wheat left with the
seller and it did not pass to the buyer.
Transfer of ownership in the case of unascertained goods – Sec 18 and 23
⇒ In the case of unascertained goods, when both parties come to know which particular
goods shall be delivered, ownership is transferred.
⇒ The following conditions must be satisfied to transfer the ownership:

• Ascertainment is first step in transfer of ownership. It means process of
identification and setting aside goods from a huge mass of goods.
• Generally, it is made by seller, (unilateral act).
Appropriation :
For property to pass u/s 23, the following conditions must be satisfied –
(a) Goods of the description mentioned in the contract must be produced or obtained.
(b) The must be in a deliverable state, i.e. the Goods are in such state that the Buyer would,
under the contract, be bound to take delivery of them.
(c) They must be unconditionally appropriated to the contract, Unconditional appropriation

is where, in pursuance of the contract, Seller –
(i) Delivers the Goods to Buyer or a carrier or other bailee for their transmission to
Buyer and
(ii) does not reserve the right of disposal. [Sec. 23(2)]
(d) The assent of the parties may be given expressly or impliedly and can be given either
before or after the appropriation.
(e) Example: A having a quantity of sugar in bulk, more than sufficient to fill 20 bags,
contracts to sell to B 20 bags of it. After the contract A fills 20 bags with the sugar, given
notice to B that the bags are ready and requires him to take them away. B says he will
SUJEET JHA 100 9213188188
take them as soon as he can. By this appropriation by A, and assent by B, property in the
sugar passes to B.
⇒ Contract to sell unascertained goods is not complete sell, it is agreement to sell.
Example :
20 bags of sugar out of a bulk were agreed to be sold. 4 bags of sugar were filled up and
taken away by the buyer. Subsequently, the seller filled up 16 bags and informed the
buyer. The buyer replied that he will take delivery as soon as possible. However, before
the buyer could take their delivery. Goods were lost. Held, the buyer was responsible as
the ownership had passed to the buyer.
Transfer of ownership in Case of Goods Sent on Approval or on sale or Return Basis –

Sec. 24
⇒ It means buyer has the option either to return goods. Here, property in goods doesn’t pass
from seller to buyer:
Case When ownership transferred

When the buyer given his approval or Approval or acceptance is communicated to
acceptance. seller
When the buyer does some act of adopting the When act of adoption is done.
transaction
When the buyer fails to return the goods. On expiry of the fixed time
(a) If time is fixed for return of goods. On expiry of the reasonable time.
(b) If no time is fixed
Example
Certain jewellery was delivered to a buyer on sale or return basis. The buyer pledged the
jewellery. Held, the buyer had adopted the transaction and as such property had passed and the
seller could not recover the jewellery from the Pawnee.
Right to disposal of Goods Sec. 25
⇒ Where the railway receipt or the bill of landing is in the name of the buyer, but is sent
through the bank with the instructions that the same is to be delivered against the
acceptance of the bill or payment of the price, the property in the goods shall not pass.
Deemed right of reservation Sec. 25

The seller may reserve the right of disposal under the following modes –
Reservation of right of disposal
Shipment or Railway delivery Drawing of B/E on buyer
By making the Goods deliverable to the order of the By Seller drawing a bill for the price
Seller or his agent. and making it acceptable by the
Buyer.
SUJEET JHA 101 9213188188

Passing of Risk Sec. 26
⇒ The general rule is that risk passes with ownership. We can say that risk and ownership
and ownership to together. However, express agreement between parties may provide
otherwise.
⇒ Possession of goods is immaterial for risk.
⇒ When delivery is delayed because of fault of any party, he is liable for risk.
⇒ Sometime, risk is based upon custom or usage of trade.
⇒ Where the delivery of goods has been delayed due to the fault of buyer/seller, goods are
at the risk of the party in fault.
Sale by Non – Owners or Transfer of Title by Non – Owners – Sec 27 – 30
⇒ The general rule is expressed by maxim ‘Namodat quod non habet’ which means no one
can give what he does not himself posses. If seller’s title is defective, then buyer’s title will
be defective.
⇒ Alternatively, we can say that the seller can’t give a better title to the buyer than be himself
has.
The following are the exceptions to the above general rule:
o Sale of Estoppel [Sec. 27]:
Where the owner by his conduct or by his act leads the buyer to believe that the seller has
the authority to sell and induces the buyer to buy the goods, he shall be estopped from
denying the fact that seller had no right to sell the goods.
Example : (Refer Classroom Notes Hira Sweets)
⇒ Sale by mercantile agent Sec. 27

Agent of seller can transfer the title if following conditions are satisfied :
• Agent must be in possession of goods or documents of title.
• Agent has sold goods in ordinary course of business.
• Buyer has acted in good faith.
• Buyer has no knowledge that seller had no authority to sell.
Example
A entrusted his car to a mercantile agent to receive offers and not to sell. A also delivered
signed documents to the agent. On the basis of these documents, the agent pretended to the
buyer that he had authority to sell the car and thus, the car was sold. Held, the owner was
estopped from denying buyers title.
SUJEET JHA 102 9213188188

A mercantile agent means an agent having in the customary course of business as such
agent authority either to sell goods, or to consign goods for the purpose of sale, or to buy
goods, or to raise money on the security of goods [Section 2(9)].
⇒ Sale by one of the joint owners – Sec 28

One of the joint owners can sale goods if following condition are satisfied.
• Goods are in sole possession of one of the joint owner.
• Buyer has acted in good faith.
Example
A and B Jointly purchased a car. The car was in the possession of A with the consent of B.
Later on A sold the car to an innocent purchaser. The purchaser will get a good title.
⇒ Sale by person in possession under voidable contract

• Seller must be in possession of goods under contract voidable.
• Goods must have been sold before contract is rescinded.
Example
A purchased a watch from B under fraud. A sold the watch to C, who bought it in good
faith. C gets goods title.
⇒ Sale by seller in possession after sale – Sec 30

• Ownership of goods has been passed to buyer.
• Seller continuous to be in possession of goods even after sale.
• Seller resells goods to new buyer.
• New buyer buys without notice to prior sell.
Example
A sells certain goods to B and promises to deliver the goods the next day. Before the
delivery, A sells and delivers the goods to C, who buys them in good faith and without
notice of the prior sale to B, C gets a good title to the goods, not with standing that the
property had, before he purchased, passed to B.
⇒ Sale by unpaid seller Sec. 54

After exercise of his right of lien or right of stoppage goods in transit.
⇒ If the owner of goods has declared insolvent and his goods, is sold by official receiver or
assignee or liquidator.
⇒ Sale by finder of goods (Sec.169 of IC Act 1872).

• The owner can’t be found or found but refuse to pay lawful charges to finder.
• The Goods are perishable in nature or in danger. To save goods from loss, finder can
sale it.
• Lawful charges of finder amount as 2/3 of its original value.
⇒ Sale by pawnee or pledge(Sec.176 of IC Act 1872).

• If there is default on part of payment of price or performance within time.
Reasonable notice is given by pawnee or pledge.
SUJEET JHA 103 9213188188

PERFORMANCE OF A CONTACT OF SALE

1. Meaning Sec.2(2): Delivery means voluntary transfer of possession from one person to
another.
2. Duty of Seller Sec. 31: It is the duty of the Seller to deliver the goods and of the buyer to
accept and pay for them in accordance with the contract of Sale.
3. Mode of delivery : Sec. 33: Delivery of Goods sold may be made by –
(a) doing anything which the parties agree shall be treated as delivery ; or
(b) which has the effect of putting the Goods in the possession of the Buyer or of any
person authorized to hold them on his behalf.
TYPES OF DELIVERY
Actual Delivery Symbolic Delivery Constructive Delivery
It is a delivery where When goods are not Where the third party who
goods are handed physically delivered to the is in possession of goods,
over to the buyer or buyer but some symbol of acknowledge to hold
his authorized agent. the real possession or goods on behalf of the
It means goods are control over goods is buyer is known as
physically put in handed over to buyer. construction delivery.
possession of the
buyer. Example Example:
Delivery of key of the car. A sells 100 bags of
cement lying in B’s
godown. B agrees to hold
the 100 bags of cement on
behalf of A.
Forward Delivery
Where delivery is to be made in future, and not at the time contract is entered into.
RULES REGARDING DELIVERY
Payment and delivery are concurrent Sec 32.
⇒ General rule suggest that the delivery of goods and payment of price are concurrent
conditions. However, parties may provide otherwise.
SUJEET JHA 104 9213188188

Part Delivery Sec34.
o A delivery of part of goods with an intention of giving the delivery of the whole amounts
to the delivery of the whole for the purpose of transfer of ownership of goods but a
delivery of part of goods with an intention of separating it from the whole lot does not
amount to the delivery of the whole of the goods.
Buyer’s duty to Demand the Goods Sec. 35
⇒ It is seller’s duty to be ready and willing to deliver the goods to the buyer. But he is not
bound to deliver goods unless the buyer makes a demand for delivery of the goods.
⇒ If the buyer fails to demand the delivery of goods, the seller is not liable for breach;
Buyer must demand delivery within a reasonable time. However, contract may provide
otherwise.
Rules as to Delivery [Sec. 36]
Place of delivery:
Situation Place where goods are to be delivered

If contract specified the place of delivery At the place specified
Contract does not specify the place of At the place at which goods are at the time of sale
delivery;
In case of sale
In case of agreement of sell
(i) In respect of existing goods At the place at which goods are at the time of
agreement of sell.
(ii) In respect of future goods At the place at which goods are manufacture,
produce or acquire
Time of Delivery
⇒ If the contract specified time of delivery, goods shall be delivered within such time.
⇒ If no time is specified in contract as to time of delivery of goods, it should be delivered
within reasonable time.
Delivery when the Goods in Possession of third party 36(3):
Unless and until such third person acknowledge to the buyer that the holds the goods on his
behalf
However this provision shall not affect the operation of the issue or transfer of any documents of
the title of the goods.
SUJEET JHA 105 9213188188

Time is tender of delivery
Demand or tender of delivery may be treat is reasonable unless made at reasonable hour. That is
reasonable hour is a question affects.
Expenses of delivery
⇒ All expenses of making delivery of goods shall be paid by seller
⇒ Buyer shall be the expense for receipt of goods.
⇒ unless otherwise agreed.
Delivery of Wrong quantity Sec 37
⇒ If the seller has delivered excess quantity, the buyer has the following options:
• To accept the whole of the goods delivered to him.
• To reject the whole of the goods delivered of him.
• To accept contracted quantity and reject the excess.
⇒ Seller has delivered short quantity, buyer has following options.

• To accept the goods delivered to him.
• To reject whole quantity delivered to him.
⇒ Right to reject the goods in excess of the contract does not apply where the variation is
negligible.
⇒ Further, the right to reject the goods is not similar to the right to cancel the contract. If
the buyer rejects the goods (either because they are less than or in excess of the quantity
contracted for), the seller has a right to tender again the contract quantity and the buyer is
bound to accept the same.
Delivery of Mixed Quality – Quantity

⇒ The seller is bound to deliver goods of exact quality – quantity otherwise buyer may:
• Reject the whole.
• Reject the goods not complying with quality or quantity and accept the rest.
[Contract is not repudiated] – means subsisting
Delivery by Installment Sec 38
⇒ Delivery by installment is not valid except when the contract provides so or buyer accepts
the delivery in installment.
SUJEET JHA 106 9213188188

Delivery to Carrier or Wharfinger – Sec 39
⇒ Delivery to carrier or wharfinger amounts as delivery to buyer if the following conditions

satisfy:
• Buyer has made reasonable contract with carrier.
• Seller is required to give notice to buyer to enable him to insure goods. If not to do
then his risk.
⇒ If seller makes valid delivery of goods, buyer has following duties:

• To accept the goods.
• To pay the unpaid price.
⇒ Where goods are sent by sea route, seller shall give notice to buyer to insure goods other
wise he will be liable for loss.
Risk where goods are delivered at distant place Sec 40
Where the seller agrees to deliver the Goods at his own risk at a place other than at which they
are sold, the Buyer shall bear the risk of deterioration necessarily incident to the course of
transit, unless otherwise agreed.
Buyer’s right to examining goods Sec 41
Delivered to buyer – not previously examined reasonable opportunity.

Seller is bound on request to afforded the buyer a reasonable opportunity of examine the good.
Acceptance of Delivery – Sec 42
⇒ Delivery doesn’t mean acceptance of goods, Buyer has deemed to have accepted the goods
under the following circumstances:
• When he intimates the seller about acceptance of goods.
• After receipt of goods, he does some act of affirmation.
• When he doesn’t inform seller about rejection of goods within a reasonable time.
Buyer’s not bound to return the rejected good Sec 43.
He is required to intimate the seller about rejection. (Buyer’s not bound to return the rejected
goods)
Liability of the Buyer for refusal of delivery of goods Sec 44
⇒ If the buyer wrongfully refuses to take delivery of goods, he is liable for damages and
expenses like storage cost and transportation cost to the seller.
SUJEET JHA 107 9213188188

UNPAID SELLER
Section 45
A seller of goods is deemed to be unpaid in the following cases:
• The price must be due but not paid. (When the whole of the price has not been paid
or tendered)
• A negotiable instrument, like cheque, bill of exchange etc., was received, but the
same has been dishonored.
• Seller who has obtained a decree for the price of the goods will also be an unpaid
seller, if the decree has not been satisfied.
• When the seller has been paid the large amount but small portion of payment remains
to be paid.
• Seller must have an immediate right of action for the price.
Right of an Unpaid Seller
Unpaid seller has the right against goods as well as against the buyer:
⇒ Rights of unpaid seller against the goods:
• Where ownership is transferred

9 Right of lien – Sec 47 – 49
9 Right to stoppage in transit – Sec 50 – 52
9 Right to resale of the goods
9 Where ownership is not transferred to the buyer, seller has the right to with hold
delivery of goods.
Right of an unpaid seller against the goods Sec 46
The ownership has not been transferred.

Conditions Unpaid Seller + ownership not transferred.
Consequences Lawfully refuse to deliver the goods to the buyer until he is paid the price.
Buyer cannot hold the seller liable for now delivery of goods.
Seller’s Lien Sec.47
Condition for exercising lien

Condition – Unpaid seller – actual possession
Buyer not paid the price of the good. The unpaid seller can exercise lien even through.
The property is goods has passed to the buyer
He is in the possession of the goods as an agent or bailee for the buyer.
Right of Lien
⇒ It means the right to retain the possession of goods until full price is received.
⇒ Seller can exercise his right of lien on the following two conditions:
SUJEET JHA 108 9213188188
• He must be in possession of the goods.

• He is the unpaid seller.
⇒ If buyer becomes insolvent, lien can be exercised by unpaid seller.
In the following circumstances, unpaid seller’s lien is lost: Sec 49
• When the seller waives his right of lien.

• When the buyer disposes off the goods by sale with consent of seller.
• When the goods are delivered off the buyer or his agent.
• When price is paid by the buyer.
• The right of lien cannot be exercised, where the right of lien has been expressly
excluded.
• By delivery of goods to carrier. Without reserving the right of disposal of goods,.
• By Estoppels i.e. where the seller so conducts himself that be leads third parties to
believe that the lien does not exist.
Lien is not lost merely become the unpaid seller has obtained a decree for the price of
the goods
Part delivery Sec. 48
Part delivery of goods does not disentitle the unpaid seller from exist lien on the remainder
goods.
Right of Stoppage in Transit – Sec 50 to 52
Right of stoppage goods in transit Sec 50

⇒ The right of stoppage in transit is an extension of the right of lien.
⇒ The right of lien is a right to retain possession, whereas right of stoppage in transit is a
right to regain possession.
⇒ The right of stoppages in transit can be exercised, if the goods are in transit, and the buyer
has become insolvent in the meantime.
Conditions : unpaid Seller + possession of goods with carrier (independent) + insolvent buyer
Duration of transit – Sec 51
⇒ Carrier may hold the goods in three capacities:

• As Seller’s Agent : In this case, the seller has lien on the goods, so question of right
of stoppage in transit does not arise.
• As Buyer’s Agent: In this case, the seller cannot exercise the right of stoppage in
transit.
• In an Independent Capacity: In this case, sit from the time they are delivered to a
carrier for the purpose of transmission to the buyer, until the buyer or his agent takes
their delivery.
⇒ Goods are deemed to be in course of transit from the time they are delivered to a carrier for
the purpose of transmission to the buyer, until the buyer or his agent takes their delivery.
⇒ The goods are in transit, even if the buyer asks the carrier to take them to some other
destination until they are delivered to the buyer at some other destination.
SUJEET JHA 109 9213188188

⇒ If the goods are rejected by the buyer and the goods are in the possession of the carrier, the
transit is not at an end, even if the seller has refused to take them back.
How Stoppage in transit is effected Sec 52
⇒ Right of Stoppage of Goods in Transit can be exercised either:

• By taking actual possession of the goods, or
• By giving notice of his claim to the carrier, who holds the goods
Effect of sub – sale or pledge by the buyer Sec.53
Sub sale of pledge by the buyer Effect on unpaid seller’s right
The unpaid seller’s right of lien or stoppage in transit is not affected by any further sale or other
disposition of goods by the buyer.
Exception
o When seller has given his assent to such mortgage or other disposition of goods made by
the buyer.
o When a document of title has been transferred to the buyer and the buyer transfer the
document to a person who has brought the goods in good faith for value.
Distinction Between Lien and Stoppage – in – Transit

Lien Stoppage – in – Transit
1. The goods are in actual possession of the 1. The goods are in possession of an
seller. independent carrier or bailes.
2. This right can be exercised even when the 2. This right can be exercised only when the
buyer is solvent but fails or refuses to pay buyer becomes insolvent.
the price.
3. This right comes to an end when the seller 3. This right commences only when the seller
parts with the goods. delivers the goods to a carrier.
4. This is a right to retain possession over This is a right to regain possession o the
the goods. goods.
5. This right can be exercised by the seller 4. This right can be exercised by the seller
himself. through the carrier or the bailee in whose
possession the goods are.
Right of Resale Sec 54
⇒ In case of perishable goods, unpaid seller can resale the goods if following conditions
satisfied.
• Buyer fails to pay the price within reasonable time.
• Seller is not required to give notice of re – sale.
⇒ In case of other goods (not perishable) unpaid, the seller can resale goods if the following
conditions are satisfied:
SUJEET JHA 110 9213188188
• Seller has exercised his right of lien or stoppage of goods in transit.

• Seller has given notice to buyer to pay the price within reasonable time and buyer
fails to pay the price.
⇒ Following will be effect of resale:
Rights In case of resale In case of resale

after notice without notice
Unpaid seller’s right to recover loss on sale Available No Available
Original buyers’ right to recover profit on goods Not available Available
New buyer’s right to acquire good title. Available Available
Right to Withhold Delivery of Goods
⇒ It means seller refuses to deliver goods to buyer.

⇒ The following conditions must be satisfied to exercise right to withhold delivery of goods:
• Seller is unpaid seller
• Ownership of goods has not been passed.
Right of unpaid seller against buyer:
Suit for price [sec 55]

55 (1) – Property has passed to the buyer
- Buyer wrongfully neglector refuses to pay price of goods
55 (2) - property has not passed to the buyer
- price is payable on a particular date irrespective of delivery.
- Buyer wrongfully neglects or refuses to pay price of goods
Suit for damages for non acceptance (56)

When buyer wrongfully neglects or refuses to accept and pay for the goods, the seller may sue
him for damages for non acceptance.
Suit for damages for Breach (60)

Repudiation of contract before due date: Where the contract is repudiated by the buyer before
the date of delivery the seller may treat the contract as rescind and sue for damage for the
breach.
Suit for interest [61(2) (d)]

Specific agreement between seller and buyer as to interest on price of goods from the date on
which payment becomes due the seller may recover the interest from the buyer.
⇒ This right is in addition to other remedies available to the seller.
Rights of
buyer/Buyers
remedies
against seller
Suit for Suit for Repudiation Suit for Suit for

damage for Specific of contract Breach of Interest
SUJEET
non – delivery JHA performance 111 warranty 9213188188
Buyer’s right against the seller or remedies against seller
The buyer has following remedies against the seller:
⇒ Suit for damage for non – delivery Sec 57

Buyer is ready and willing the take delivery of goods but seller wrongfully neglects or
refuses delivery of goods, buyer may sue seller.
⇒ Suit for specific performance Sec 58

Where seller wrongfully refuses to deliver specific or ascertained goods, court may direct
specific performance order.
⇒ Suit for breach of warranty Sec 59

If there is breach of warranty, buyer may claim damages from the seller. Buyer may deduct
the amount of damage from price payable if price is not paid. Buyer may recover the
damages if price paid.
⇒ Right to repudiate the contract

If the seller declares his intention of non – delivery of goods, buyer may repudiate the
contract and immediately sue for damages.
⇒ Suit for Interest

• In the absence of any contract to the contrary no interest shall be payable by the buyer on
the delay payment. If , there is no such agreement, the seller may give notice to the
buyer of his intention to charge interest on delayed payment.
Delivery to Carrier
⇒ It means transporter or bailee to whom goods are delivered by the seller for
transportation to buyer.
⇒ When goods are delivered to a carrier, it is deemed delivery of goods to the buyer if
following conditions are satisfied:
• Seller delivers exactly same goods as per contract.
• The Buyer has informed carrier name, address and goods required to be delivered.
• The seller delivers goods for the purpose of delivery.
Auction Sale – Sec 64
⇒ It means public sale. The seller invites the interested parties by advertisement to offer the
price. (i.e. bid)
⇒ The seller may hire service of auctioneer. An auctioneer is an agent of seller.
SUJEET JHA 112 9213188188

⇒ Advertisement of auction sale is not offer but an invitation to make an offer and therefore
if an auction sale is not held on appointed day, bidder can’t sue auctioneer.
⇒ Every bid amounts as offer and acceptance is given by auctioneer by some usual mode of
acceptance e.g., fall of hammer, going – going gone or one – two – three.
⇒ Auction sale starts with placing of bids. Auctioneer accepts the highest bids but he may
accept lower bid without giving any reason. When bid accepted, valid contract is formed.
⇒ Bid once made can be withdrawn before fall of hammer even if expressly prohibit.
⇒ Seller can bid at auction sale if bidders are informed of fact. (pretended bidding)
⇒ If the seller makes use of pretended bidding to raise the price, the sale is voidable at the
option of the buyer. The bid is said to be pretended when it is made by the seller or some
one on his behalf.
⇒ Only one person can be appointed for bidding.(called puffer)
⇒ Auctioneer may set reserve price or upset price. Bid lower that which is invalid.
⇒ ‘In the case of Knockout agreement, the buyers joint their hands to eliminate competition
among themselves at an raise the bid against each other and only one of them will bid at
the auction. When the profit. Prima facie, a knockout agreement is not illegal. However, if
the intention of the parties to the agreement is to defraud a third party, this will be illegal.
⇒ Damping is illegal, it includes;
• Pointing out defects in the goods, or

• Misleading the purchaser or doing any other act so that he may not participate in the
auction. It empowers the auctioneer to with draw the property from the auction.
Sale in lots :
When the goods are put up for sale in lots, each lot is deemed, prima facie, to be the
subject – matter of a separate contract of sale.
Delivery of Goods in Contract by Sea Route
It includes following three categories of contracts:

⇒ CIF Contract
• It means ‘cost, insurance and freight;
• Here, the price of goods includes the cost of goods, insurance and freight expenses.
• In CIF contract, buyer pays insurance and freight expenses.
• The essential of CIF contract is that seller shall deliver shipping documents to the
buyer usually through the bank. If the seller fails to deliver the documents within
reasonable time, he is liable for breach of contract.
• Ownership of goods is transferred to the buyer, when he pays the price of goods
while receiving shipping documents. If buyer refuses to pay the price, the seller can
claim damages for breach of contract.
SUJEET JHA 113 9213188188
⇒ FOB Contract
• It means free on board. Here, seller is required to put the goods on board of ship at
his expense.
• Buyer is liable for all the expenses and risk one goods are loaded on ship.
• The ownership of goods is transferred to the buyer as soon as goods are loaded to
ship.
⇒ Ex – Ship Contract
• It means contract in which the seller has to deliver the goods to the buyer at the port
of destination.
• All the freight charges and risk during voyage for goods remain with seller.
• Ownership of the goods is transferred to the buyer when goods are actually delivered
at the port of destination.
SUJEET JHA 114 9213188188

STUDY NOTES – 3 : INDUSTRIAL LAWS
3.1 FACTORIES ACT, 1948

Introduction
Factories Act is one of the earliest labour welfare legislations. The object of the act is to secure
health, safely, welfare, proper working hours, and other benefits to workers. The Act requires
that workers should work in healthy and sanitary conditions and for that purposes. It provides
that precaution should be taken for safety of workers and prevention of accidents.
Meaning of Factory
Factory means any premises, including the precincts thereof, in any part of which manufacturing
process is carried on with or without the aid of power, provided that at least 10 or 20 persons
respectively are employed or were employed on any day of the preceding 12 months.
The Act is applicable to all the factories.
Meaning of occupier of factory
Occupier of factory means a person who has ultimate control over affairs of factory. It includes a
partner in case of a firm and director in case of a company. It may be noted that if a factory is
run by a company, then only the director of the company can be treated as occupier.
The occupier shall ensure, as far as possible health, safety, and welfare of workers while they are
working in a factory. The name of the occupier of the factory is required to be informed to the
Chief Inspector of Factories. The occupier will be held responsible if the provisions of the
Factories Act, 1948 are not complied with.
Facilities and Conveniences
1) Factory should be kept clean.

2) There should be arrangement to dispose off wastes and effluents.
3) Ventilation should be adequate.
4) Reasonable temperature for comfort of employees should be maintained.
5) Dust and fumes should be controlled below permissible limits.
6) Artificial humidification should be at prescribed limits.
7) Over crowding should be avoided.
8) Adequate lighting, drinking water, toilets, and spittoons should be provided.
Additional facilities in case of large factories.
1) Ambulance room, if 500 or more workers are employed.

2) Canteen, if 250 or more workers are employed.
3) Rest rooms/ Centers with drinking facility, if 150 or more workers are employed.
4) Creshes, if 30 or more women workers are employed.
5) Full time Welfare Officer, if 500 or more workers are employed.
SUJEET JHA 115 9213188188
6) Safety Officer, if 1000 or more workers are employed.
Welfare Measures
1) All machines should be properly fenced to protect workers when machinery is in motion.
2) Hoist and lifts should be in good condition and tested periodically.
3) Pressure Plant should be checked as per the rules.
4) Floor, stairs and means of access should be of sound construction and free from
obstructions.
5) Safety appliances for eyes, dangerous dust, gas, fumes should be provided.
6) In case of hazardous substance additional safety measures have to be taken.
7) Adequate firefighting equipment should be available.
8) Safety Officer should be appointed if number of workers in factory is 1000 or more.
Working Hours
A worker cannot be employed for more than 48 hours in a week. Weekly holiday is compulsory.
If the worker is asked to work on weekly holiday, he should avail the holiday on one of the 3
days immediately after the normal day of holiday. A worker cannot be employed for more than 9
hours in a day. At least ½ hour rest should be provided after every 5 hours. Total period of work
including rest interval cannot be more than 10 ½ hours.
Overtime Wages
If a worker works beyond 9 hours a day and 48 hours a week, overtime wages are paid at double
the rate of normal wages. However, overtime wages are not payable on tour. Total working
hours including overtime should not exceed 60 hours in a week and total overtime hours in a
quarter should not exceed 50 hours.
Leave
Worker is entitled in every calendar year annual leave with wages at the rate of 1 day for every
20 days of work performed in the previous calendar year provided that he had worked for 240
days or more in the previous calendar year. Child worker (who is 14 years and above but less
than 15 years) is entitled to 1 day leave with wages for every 15 days. While calculating 240
days earned leave, maternity leave up to 12 weeks and lay off days will be considered but leave
shall not be earned on those days. Leave can be accumulated up to 30 days in the case of an
adult and 40 days in the case of al child.
Leave admissible is exclusive of holidays occurring during or at either end of leave period.
Leave cannot be taken for more than 3 times in a year.
It may be noted that above – mentioned benefit are the minimum benefits. Employer can of
course provide additional or higher benefits.
Employment of Women
A women worker cannot be employed beyond 6 a.m. to 7 p.m. State Government can grant
exemption to any factory from such provisions but in no case a woman can be permitted to work
during 10 p.m. to 5 a.m. Shift change can be done only after weekly or other holiday and not in
between.
SUJEET JHA 116 9213188188

Employment of Children
Children below 14 years of age cannot be employed. A child of age 14 years but below 15 years
can be employed for only 4.5 hours per day. He should be certified fit by certifying surgeon.
He cannot be employed during night from 10 p.m. to 6 a.m.
A person of 15 years of age but below 18 years of age is termed as adolescent. He can be
employed as an adult if he certificate of fitness for a full day’s work from a certifying surgeon.
An adolescent is not permitted to work between 7 p.m. to 6 a.m.
Display on Notice Board.
A Notice containing an abstract of the Factories Act, 1948 and the rules made there under in
English and local language shall be displayed by employer.
The name and address of Inspector of factories and Certifying Surgeon shall also be displayed
on the Notice Board.
Punishment to Welfare Officer
No punishment can be imposed on Welfare Officer without prior sanction of Chief

Commissioner of Factories. However, simple order of termination as per terms of appointment is
not punishment and such termination order is valid. [Arun Kumar Bali v. Government, NCT of
Delhi]

It means any process for—
Manufacturing process [Sec.2 (k)].

(i) Making, altering, repairing, ornamenting, finishing, packing, online, washing , cleaning.
Breaking, up, demolishing, or otherwise treating or adapting any article or substance
with a view to its use, sale, transport, delivery or disposal, or
(ii) Pumping oil, water. Sewage, or any other substance, or
(iii) Generating, transforming or transmitting power, or
(iv) composing types for printing, printing by letter press, lithography, photogravure or other
similar process or book-binding, or
(v) Constructing, reconstructing, repairing, refitting, finishing, breaking-up ship or “vessels,
or
(vi) Preserving or storing any article in cold storage.
Some of the processes which have been held to be manufacturing processes are as follows:
(a) Bidi making [Chintaman Rao v.State of M.P.,(1962) S.C.J.388].
(b) Molding and transformation of raw cinematography films into a finished product
[Gemini Studio v. State, (1952-53) 4 F.J.R. 329].
(c) Work done in a salt work which consists of converting sea-water into salt [Ardeshir H.
Bhiwandiwala v.State of Bombay, A.I.R. (1962) S.C.29.]
(d) Use of a refrigerator for treating or adapting any article with a view to its sale [New Taj
Mahal café Ltd. V. Inspector of Factories, (1956) 1 L.L.J.273].
(e) Work of compositions in printing business [V.K. Press v. Authority, A.I.R. (1955) all.
702].
SUJEET JHA 117 9213188188

(f) Use of electric motor for the purpose of lifting or pumping water [Syed Moosa Kazimi v.
K.M. Sheriff, A.I.R. (1959) Mad. 542].
(g) Process of moistening, stripping and packing of tobacco leaves [V.P. Gopala Rao v.
Public Prosecutor, A.I.R. (1970) S.C. 66].
(h) Activities of a petrol pump [Gateway Auto services v. Regional director, E.S.I. Corpn.,
(1981) Lab. I.C. 49].
In deciding whether a particular business is a manufacturing process or not, regard must be had
to the circumstances of each particular case. To constitute a manufacturing process, there must
be some transformation, i.e., the article must become commercially known as something
different from which it acquires its existence
General duties of the occupier (Sec. 7-A)

A new Sec. 7-A has been introduced by the Amendment Act of 1987, prescribing the general
duties of the occupier in regard to the health, safety and welfare of the workers in his factory.
According to it, every occupier shall ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, the health, safety
and welfare of all workers while they are at work in the factory [Sec. 7-A (1)]. Sec. 7-A (2)
enumerates the matters in regard to health, safety and welfare of the workers. These matters
include—
(a) the provision and maintenance of plant and systems of work in the factory that are safe
and without risks to health;
(b) the arrangements in the factory for ensuring safety and absence of risks to health in
connection with the use, handling, storage and transport of articles and substances;
(c) the provision of such information, instruction, training and supervision as are necessary
to ensure the health and safety of all workers at work;
(d) (i) the maintenance of all places of work in the factory in a condition that is safe and
without risks to health, and
(II) the provision and maintenance of such means of access to and egress from such
places as are safe and without such risks;
(e) the provision, maintenance or monitoring of such working environment in the factory for
the workers that is
(i) safe,
(ii) without risks to health, and
(iii) adequate as regards facilities and arrangements for their welfare at work [Sec. 7-
A (2)].
In addition to the above duties, every occupier shall also—
(a) prepare, and, as often as may be appropriate, revise, a written statement of his general
policy with respect to
(i) the health and safety of the workers at work, and
(ii) the organisation and arrangements for the time being in force for carrying out that
policy, and
(b) bring the statement and any revision thereof to the notice of all the workers. In some
cases as may be prescribed an occupier may be exempted from this duty [Sec. 7-A (3)].
Powers of inspectors (Sec. 9).

An Inspector may, within the local limits for which he is appointed,--
(a) enter, with assistant who are in the service of the Government or any local or other
public authority or with an expert, the premises of a factory;
(b) make examination of the premises, plant, machinery, article or substance;
SUJEET JHA 118 9213188188

(c) inquire into any accident or dangerous occurrence, whether resulting in bodily injury,
disability or not, and take on the spot or otherwise statements of any person which he
may consider necessary for such inquiry;
(d) require the production of any prescribed register or any other document relating to the
factory;
(e) seize, or take copies of, any register, record or other document or any portion thereof, as
he may consider necessary in respect of any offence under this Act, which he has reason
to believe, has been committed:
(f) direct the occupier that any premises or any part thereof, or anything lying therein, shall
be left undisputed (whether generally or in particular respects) for so long as in necessary
for the purpose of any examination under Clause (b) :
(g) take measurements and photographs and make such recordings as he considers necessary
for the purpose of any examination under Clause (b) taking with him any necessary
instrument or equipment:
(h) in case of any article or substance found in any premised, being an article or substance
which appears to him as having caused or is likely to cause danger to the health or safety
of the workers, direct it to be dismantled or subject it to any process of test (but not so as
to damage or destroy it unless the same is necessary for carrying out the purposes of the
Act.) Further, he may take possession of any such article or substance or a part thereof,
and detain it for so long as is necessary for such examination; and
(i) Exercise such other powers as may be prescribed.
The above powers of an inspector are subject to any rules which may be made by the State
Government in this behalf.
Certifying surgeons (Sec. 10.) Appointment.

¾ The State Government may appoint qualified medical practitioners to be certifying
surgeons for specified local limits or factories [sec. 10 (1)].
¾ A certifying surgeon may, with the approval of the State Government, authorise any
qualified medical practitioner to exercise any of his powers [sec.10. (2)] But no person
shall be appointed a certifying surgeon who is or becomes the occupier of a factory or is
or becomes directly or indirectly interested therein [sec. 10(3)].
¾ The State Government may exempt any person or class of persons from the provisions of
Sec. 10(3) in respect of any factory or class or description of factories (Proviso to Sec
10(3)].
¾ The exemption shall however be made by order in writing and subject to such conditions
as may be specified in the order.
Duties of certifying surgeons.
The certifying surgeon shall carry out such duties as may be prescribed in connection with—
(a) the examination and certification of young person’s ;
(b) the examination of persons engaged in factories in dangerous occupations or processes;
and
(c) the exercising of such medical supervision as may be prescribed for any factory where—
(i) cases of illness have occurred which it is reasonable to believe are due to the nature
of the manufacturing process carried on, or other conditions of work prevailing,
therein;
(ii) by reason of any change in the manufacturing process carried on or in the substances
used therein, there is a likelihood of injury to health of worker employed it that
manufacturing process;
(iii) young persons are, or about to be, employed in any work which I likely to cause
injury to their health [Sec. 10 (4)].
SUJEET JHA 119 9213188188
Cleanliness (Sec.11).
(1) Factory to be kept clean and fee from effluvia and dirt.
¾ Every factory shall be kept clean and fee from effluvia arising from any drain, privy,
or other nuisance.
¾ Accumulation of dirt and refuse shall be removed daily be some effective method.
¾ The floor of every work-room shall be cleaned at least once in every week by
washing, using disinfectants, where necessary, or by some effective method.
(2) Effective means of drainage.
Where a floor is liable to become wet ion the course of any manufacturing process to
such an extent as is capable of being drained, effective means of drainage shall be
provided.
(3) Use of disinfectants, etc., painting and varnishing.
Use of disinfectants, detergents, painting, repainting and varnishing, revarnishing,
whitewashing or colourwashing shall be restored to.
2. Disposal of wastes and effluents (sec.12).
(1) Treatment of wastes and effluents and their disposal.
Effective arrangements shall be made in every factory for the treatment of wastes and
effluents due to the manufacturing process a carried on therein, so as to render them
innocuous, and for their disposal [Sec. 12 (1)].
(2) Rules by the state Government prescribing arrangements.
The state government may make rules prescribing the arrangements to be made in this
regard. It may also require that such arrangements shall be approved by such authority as
may be prescribed [Sec. 12 (2)].
3. Ventilation and temperature (Sec. 13.)

(1) Maintenance of adequate ventilation and temperature.
Effective and suitable provision shall be made in every factory for securing and
maintaining in every workroom—
(a) Adequate ventilation by the circulation of fresh air, and
(b) Such a temperature as will secure to workers therein reasonable conditions of comfort
and prevent injury to health.
(2) Process producing high temperature to be separated.
The walls and roofs shall be of such materials and so designed that the temperature shall
not be exceeded but kept as low as practicable. The process which produces high
temperatures shall be separated from the workroom, by insulating the hot parts or by
other effective means [Sec. 13 (1)].
4. Dust and fume (Sec. 14).

(1) Measures for prevention of inhalation or accumulation of dust and fume.
¾ Where dust or fume or impurity of such a nature as is likely to be injurious or
offensive to the workers is given off as a result of the manufacturing process being
carried on in a factory, effective measures shall be taken in the factory for prevention
of inhalation or accumulation of dust and fumes in workrooms.
¾ If for such a purpose any exhaust appliance is necessary, it shall be applied as near as
possible to the point of origin of the dust, fume or other impurity and such point shall
be enclosed so far as possible [Sec. 14 (1)].
(2) Exhaust for internal combustion engine.
A stationary internal combustion engine shall not be operated unless the exhaust is
conducted into the open air. Other internal combustion engines shall not be operated in
any room unless effective measures have been taken to prevent accumulation of fumes
therefrom which are injurious [Sec. 14 (2)].
SUJEET JHA 120 9213188188
5. Artificial humidification (Sec. 15).

(1) Prescription of standards of humidification—ventilation and cooling of air.
In respect of all factories in which the humidity of the air is artificially increased, the
State Government may make rules prescribing standards of humidification. It may also
make rules regulating the methods used for artificially increasing the humidity of the air.
It may further make rules prescribing methods to be adopted for securing adequate
ventilation and cooling of the air in the workrooms [Sec. 15 (1)].
(2) Water used for artificial humidification to be clean.
In any factory in which the humidity of the air is artificially increased, the water used for
the purpose shall be taken from a public supply or other source of drinking water, or
shall be effectively purified before it is so used [Sec. 15 (2)].
6. Overcrowding (Sec. 16).
(1) Overcrowding injurious to health of workers to be avoided.
There shall not be overcrowding in any room of the factory so as to be injurious to the
health of the workers employed therein [Sec. 16 (1)].
(2) 9.9/14.2 cubic meters of space per worker.

¾ There shall be at least 9.9 cubic meters (for the factories in existence at the time of the
commencement of the Act) and 14.2 cubic meters (for the factories built after the
commencement of the Act) of space for every worker.
¾ In calculating the space of 9.9 or 14.2 cubic meters, no account shall be taken of any space
which is more than 4.2 meters above the level of the floor of the room [Sec. 16 (2)].
(3) Notice of maximum of workers to be employed in a workroom.

If the Chief Inspector by order in writing so requires, there shall be posted in each
workroom of the factory a notice specifying the maximum number of workers who may
be employed in the workroom [Sec. 16 (3)].
7. Lighting (Sec. 17).

(1) Sufficient and suitable lighting in every part of factory.
In every part of a factory where workers are working or passing there shall be provided
and maintained sufficient and suitable lighting, natural or artificial, or both [Sec. 17 (1)].
(2) Glazed windows and skylights to be kept clean.

All glazed windows and skylights used for the lighting of the workrooms shall be kept
clean on both the inner and outer surfaces and free from obstruction [Sec. 17 (2)].
(3) Measures for prevention of glare and formation of shadows.

Effective provision shall also be made for the prevention of (a) glare, either directly from
a source of light or by reflection from a smooth or polished surface; and (b) the
formation of shadows to such an extent as to cause eye strain or the risk of accident to
any worker [Sec. 17 (3)].
(4) Prescription of standards of sufficient and suitable lighting.

The State Government may prescribe standards of sufficient and suitable lighting for
factories or for any class or description of factories or for any manufacturing process
[Sec. 17 (4)].
8. Drinking water (Sec. 18).

(1) Suitable points for wholesome drinking water.
SUJEET JHA 121 9213188188

In every factory, effective arrangements shall be made to provide and maintain at

suitable points conveniently situated for all workers employed therein a sufficient supply
of wholesome drinking water [sec. 18 (1)].
(2) Cooling of drinking water where more than 250 workers employed.
In every factory wherein more than 250 workers are ordinarily employed, provision shall
be made for cooling drinking water during hot weather by effective means and for
distribution thereof [Sec. 18(3)].
9. Hoists and lifts (Sec. 28).

¾ Hoists and lifts to be of good mechanical construction and to be properly maintained
and examined once in every 6 months. In every factory every hoists and lift shall be of
good mechanical construction, sound material, and adequate strength.
¾ Further it shall be sufficiently protected by enclosures fitted with gates. It shall also be
properly maintained and shall be thoroughly examined by a competent person at least
once in every 6 months.
¾ A register containing the prescribed particulars of every such examination shall be kept.
The maximum safe working load shall also be plainly marked on every hoist or lift, and
no load greater than such load shall be carried thereon.
¾ The cage of every hoist or lift used for carrying persons shall be fitted with a gate on
each side from which access is afforded to a landing.
¾ The gate shall be fitted with interlocking or other efficient device to secure that the cage
cannot be moved unless the gate is closed.
For the purposes of Sec. 28, no lifting machine or appliance shall be deemed to be a hoist
or lift unless it has a platform or cage, the direction or movement of which is restricted
by a guide or guides (Expl. to Sec. 28 added by the Amendment Act of 1987).
12. Floors, stairs and means of access (Sec. 32). In every factory—
(a) all floors, steps, stairs, passages and gangways shall be of sound construction and
properly maintained. Further they shall be kept free from obstructions and substances
likely to cause persons to skip and handrails shall be provided where necessary;
(b) there shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, be provided and maintained safe means of
access to every place at which any person is at any time required to work; and
(c) when any person has to work at a height from where he is likely to fall, provision shall
be made, so far as is reasonably practicable, by fencing or otherwise, to ensure the safety
of the person so working. This restriction is not applicable if the place provides secure
foothold and, where necessary, secure handhold.
13. Safety Officers (Sec. 40-B). In every factory

(i) wherein 1,000 or more workers are ordinarily employed, or
(ii) wherein, in the opinion of the State Government, any manufacturing process or operation
is carried on, which process or operation involves any risk of bodily injury, poisoning or
disease, or any other hazard to health, to the persons employed in the factory, the
occupier shall, if so required by the State Government by notification in the Official
Gazette, employ such number of Safety Officers as may be specified in that notification
[Sec. 40-B) (1)]. The duties, qualifications and conditions of service of Safety Offices
shall be such as may be prescribed by the State Government [Sec. 40-B (2)].
WELFARE
Chapter V (Secs. 42 to 50) of the Act deals with facilities for the welfare of workers. The
various provisions in this regard are as follows:
1. Washing facilities (Sec. 42). In every factory (a) adequate and suitable facilities
(separately and adequately screened for the use of male and female workers ) shall be
SUJEET JHA 122 9213188188
provided and maintained for the use of the workers therein; and (b) such facilities shall
be conveniently accessibly and shall be kept clean.
2. Facilities for storing and drying clothing (Sec. 43). The State Government may make
rules requiring the provision of suitable places for keeping clothing of workers not worn
during working hours and for the drying of wet clothing in respect of any factory or class
of factories.
3. Facilities for sitting (Sec. 44).
(1) Provision of sitting arrangement for workers obliged to work in a standing
position. In every factory, suitable arrangements for sitting shall be provided and
maintained for all workers who are obliged to work in a standing position. This has
been done in order that the workers may take advantage of any opportunities for rest
which may occur in the course of their work [Sec. 44 (1)].
(2) Provision of seating arrangement for workers doing work which can be done in a
sitting position. If the workers in any factory engaged in a particular manufacturing
process or working in a particular room are able to do their work efficiently in a
sitting position, the Chief Inspector may require the occupier of the factory to
provide such seating arrangements as may be practicable [Sec. 44 (20].
(3) Exemption. The State Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette,
exempt any factory or class of factories or manufacturing process from the
application of the provisions of Sec. 44 [Sec. 44 (3)].
4. First-aid appliances (Sec. 45).
(1) At least one first-aid box with prescribed contents for every 150 workers.
There shall in every factory be provided and maintained so as to be readily accessible
during all working hours, first-aid boxes or cupboards with the prescribed contents.
There shall be at least one such box for every 150 workers ordinarily employed at any
one time in the factory [Sec. 45 (1)].
(2) First-aid box to have prescribed contents.

Only the prescribed contents shall be kept in a first-aid box or cupboard [Sec. 45 (2)].
(3) First-aid box to be in the charge of responsible person.

Each first-aid box or cupboard shall be kept in the charge of a separate responsible
person who holds a certificate in the first-aid treatment recognized by the State
Government. Further, such person shall always be readily available during the working
hours of the factory [Sec. 45 (3)].
(4) Ambulance room in a factory employing more than 500 workers.

In every factory wherein more than 500 workers are ordinarily employed there shall be
provided and maintained an ambulance room containing the prescribed equipment.
The room shall be in the charge of such medical and nursing staff as may be prescribed
and those facilities shall always be made readily available during the working hours of
the factory [Sec. 45 (4)].
5. Canteens (Sec. 46)

(1) Canteen in factory employing more than 250 workers—the State Government may
make rules.
The State Government may make rules requiring that in any specified factory wherein
more than 250 workers are ordinarily employed, a canteen or canteens shall be provided
and maintained by the occupier for the use of the workers [Sec. 46 (1)].
(2) Provisions in rules.

The rules made by the State Government as to canteens may provide for
SUJEET JHA 123 9213188188
(a) The date by which canteen shall be provided,

(b) The standards in respect of construction, accommodation, furniture and other
equipment of the canteen,
(c) The foodstuffs to be served therein and the charges which may be made thereof,
(d) The constitution of a managing committee for the canteen and representation of the
workers in the management of the canteen,
(e) The items of expenditure in the running of the canteen which are not to be taken into
account in fixing the cost of foodstuffs and which shall be borne by the employer,
and
(f) The delegation to the Chief Inspector, subject to such conditions as may be
prescribed, of the power to make rules under Clause (c) [Sec. 46 (2)].
6. Shelters, rest rooms and lunch rooms (Sec. 47).

(1) Provision for shelters, rest rooms, lunch rooms in factories employing more than 150
workers.
¾ In every factory wherein more than150 workers are ordinarily employed, there shall
be a provision for shelters, rest rooms and a suitable lunch room where workers can
eat meals brought by them with provision for drinking water.
¾ However, any canteen maintained in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 46 shall
be regarded as part of this requirement. Where a lunch room exists, no worker shall
eat any food in the workroom [Sec. 47 (1)].
(2) Shelters, etc. to be sufficiently lighted, ventilated and cooled.

The shelters or rest rooms or lunch rooms shall be sufficiently lighted and ventilated and
shall be maintained in a cool and clean condition [Sec. 47 (2)].
7. Crèches (Sec. 48).

(1) Provision of crèches in factories employing more than 30 women workers.
In every factory wherein more than 30 women workers are ordinarily employed, there
shall be provided and maintained a suitable room or rooms for use of children under the
age of 6 years of such women [Sec. 48 (1)].
(2) Crèches to be adequately lighted and ventilated and to be under the charge of trained
women.
Rooms for use of children shall provide adequate accommodation, shall be adequately
lighted and ventilated. Further they shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition
and shall be under the charge of women trained in the care of children and infants [Sec.
48 (2)].
(3) Prescription of rules by the State Government.

The State Government may make rules prescribing the location and the standards in
respect of construction, accommodation, furniture and other equipment of rooms for use
of children. It may also make rules for the provision of additional facilities for the care of
children belonging to women workers, including suitable provision of facilities
(a) For washing and changing their clothing,
(b) Of free milk or refreshment or both for the children, and
(c) For the mothers of children to feed them at the necessary intervals. [Sec. 48 (3)].
8. Welfare officers (Sec. 49).
(1) Employment of welfare officers in factories employing 500 or more workers.
In every factory wherein 500 or more workers are ordinarily employed the occupier shall
employ in the factory such number of welfare officers as may be prescribed [Sec. 49 (1)].
SUJEET JHA 124 9213188188

(2) Duties, qualifications and conditions of service to be prescribed by the State

Government.
The State Government may prescribe the duties, qualifications and conditions of service
of welfare officers [Sec. 49 (2)].
Even if a factory (say, a sugar factory) employs over 500 workers only for a few
months in the year and not continuously, the occupier shall employ the prescribed
number of welfare officers [Employers’ Assn. of Northern India v. Secretary of Labour,
A.I.R. (1952) All. 109].
Restriction on double employment (sec. 60)

No adult worker shall be required or allowed to work in any factory on any day on which he has
already been working in any other factory save in such circumstances as may be prescribed.
Working hours and notice of periods of work for children (Secs. 71 and 72).
(1) Working hours limited to 4-1/2.
No child shall be employed or permitted to work in any factory—
(a) for more than 4-1/2 hours in any day;
(b) during the night [Sec. 71 (1)].
‘Night’ means a period of at least 12 consecutive hours which shall include the4 interval
between 10 P.M. and A.M. [Expl. to Sec. 71 (1)].
(2) Period of work of children limited to 2 shifts.

The period of work of all children employed in a factory shall be limited to 2 shifts. These
shifts shall not overlap or spread over more than 5 hours each. Each child shall be employed
in only one of the relays which shall not, except with the previous permission in writing of
the Chief Inspector, be changed more frequently than once in a period of 30 days [Sec. 71
(2)].
(3) Child workers entitled to weekly holidays.

The provisions of weekly holidays |(Sec. 52) shall apply also to child workers and no
exemption from these provisions may be granted in respect of any child [Sec. 71 (3)].
(4) Prohibition if the child worker has already been working in another factory.
No child shall be required or allowed to work in any factory on any day on which he has
already been working in another factory [Sec. 71 (4)].
(5) Female child to work only between 8 A.M. to 7 P.M.

No female child shall be required or allowed to work in any factory except between 8 A.M.
and 7 P.M. [Sec. 71 (5) as introduced by the Amendment Act of 1987].
(6) Display of notice of work of child-workers.

There shall be displayed and correctly maintained in every factory in which children are
employed a notice of periods of work for children showing clearly for every day the periods
during which children may be required or allowed to work [Sec. 72 (1)]. The provisions of
Sec. 61(8), (9) and (10) (discussed earlier) also apply to the notice required under Sec. 72 (1)
[Sec. 72 (3)].
(7) Fixation of periods of work beforehand.

The periods shown in the notice shall be fixed beforehand in accordance with the method
laid down for adult workers [Sec. 72 (2)].
SUJEET JHA 125 9213188188

5. Restriction on employment of women (Se3c. 66).

A woman shall be required or allowed to work in a factory only between the hours of 6 A.M.
and 7 P.M. The State Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette in respect of any
factory or group or class or description of factories, vary these limits. But no such variation shall
authorise the employment of any woman between the hours of 10 P.M. and 5 P.M. Again there
shall be no change of shifts in the case of women workers in a factory except after a weekly or
any other holiday [Sec. 66 (1)].
The State Government may make rules providing for the exemption from the restrictions
imposed by Sec. 66 (1) in case of women working in fish-curing or fish-canning factories, where
the employment of women beyond the specified hours is necessary to prevent damage to, or
deterioration in, any raw material [Sec. 66 (3)].
Wages during leave period (Sec. 80).

For the leave allowed to a worker he shall be entitled to wages at a rate equal to the daily
average of his total full time earnings for the days on which he actually worked during the
month immediately preceding his leave. The full time earnings shall be exclusive of any
overtime and bonus but inclusive of dearness allowance and the cash equivalent of the advantage
accruing through the concessional sale to the worker of foodgrains and other articles [Sec. 80
(1)].
Important Points
1) The Supreme Court held that salt manufacture from sea water by employing different
processes is a manufacturing process and the workers engaged in this work are workers
within the meaning of Factories Act. [Ardeshir H. Bhiwandiwala v. State of Bombay]
2) The Supreme Court held that sun cured tobacco leaves subjected to processes of
moistening, stripping, breaking up, packing with the view to transport them to
Company’s main Factory for their use in manufacturing Cigarette is a manufacturing
process under the Factories Act. [Ardehir H. Bhiwandiwala v. State of Bombay]
3. The cutting of the woods or converting the wood into planks is a part of the
manufacturing activity. [Bharati Udyog v. Regional Director ESI Corpn.]
4) Construction of railway, use of materials like sleepers, bolts, loose rails etc, to adaptation
their use for ultimately for laying down railways line amounts to manufacturing process.
[Lal Mohmd. v. Indian Railway Construction Co. Ltd.]
5) The process undertaken in zonal and sub –stations and electricity generating stations,
transforming and transmitting electricity generated at the power station does not fall
within the definitions of manufacturing process. [Workmen of Delhi Electric Supply
Undertaking v. Management of DESU]
6) Piece – rate workers can be workers within the definition of worker in the Act, but they
must be regular workers and not workers who come and work according to their will,
[Shankar Balaji Wale v. State of Maharashtra]
7) All persons employed in or in connection with a factory whether or not employed as

workers are entitled to the benefits of the Act. [Union of India v. G.M. Kokil]
8) If a factory is being run by a Company, then only a director of that Company can be the
occupier for the purpose of the Act.[ J.K. Industries Ltd. v. Chief Inspector of Factories]
SUJEET JHA 126 9213188188

9. Employees working in canteens in industrial establishment runs by Managing Committee

are not employers of the Managing Committee, but are employees of occupier. [Kanpur
Suraksha karamchari Union v. Union of India]
10) Preparation of food and beverage and its sale to members of a club is a manufacturing
process. [CCI v. ESIC]
11. Receiving products in bulk and packing as per clients requirements amounts to
manufacture.
12. A person is said to be employed in the factory if his duties are connected with the
business of the factory, no matter whether he stands outside the factory premises or
inside it. [Shinde v. Bombay Telephones]
13. It was held the definition of worker includes employees who are entrusted solely with the
clerical duties. [Works Manager, Central Rly. Workshop Jhansi v. Vishwanath and
others]
Powers of Inspectors
An inspector may exercise any of the following powers within the local limits for which he is
appointed:
1. He can enter any place which is used or which, he has reasons to believe, is used as
factory.
2. He can make examination of the premises, plant, machinery etc.
3. He can require the production of any prescribed register or any other document relating
to the factory.
4. Take measurement and photographs and make such recordings as the considers
necessary for the purpose of any examination.
Processes Special Provisions relating to Hazardous
Special provisions relating to hazardous processes have been envisaged under Chapter IV. A of
the Factories Act, 1948. This chapter was inserted by the Factories (Amendment) Act, 1987 and
Consists of Sections 41 A to 41 H. These sections are as follows:
Constitution of Site Appraisal Committees [Section 41A]: A Committee under the name Site
Appraisal Committee shall be constituted by the State Government to advise the Government in
the matter of examination of application for establishment of factories involving hazardous
processes. The constitution of the site appraisal committee consisting of committee has been
specified therein.
The Site Appraisal Committee shall examine an application for the establishment of a factory
involving hazardous process and make its recommendation to the State Government within a
period of ninety days in the prescribed from.
Compulsory disclosure of information by the occupier [Section 41B]: It is compulsory on the

part of the occupier of every factory involving a hazardous process to disclose all information
regarding dangers, including health hazards to the workers employed in the factory, the Chief
Inspector, the local authority within whose jurisdiction the factory is situated and the general
public in the vicinity.
SUJEET JHA 127 9213188188

Specified responsibility of the occupier in relation to hazardous processes [Section 41C]:

Accurate and up to date health records or medical records of the workers of the factory who are
exposed to any chemical toxic or any other harmful substances which are manufactured, stored,
handled or transported and such records shall be maintained by the occupier of a factory
involving any hazardous process.
Inquiry Committee [Section 41D]: In the event of occurrence of an extraordinary situation, the
Central Government may appoint an Inquiry Committee to inquire into the standards of health
and safety observed in the factory with a view to finding out the causes of any failure or neglect
in the adoption of any measures prescribed for the health and safety of the workers or the
general public.
Emergency standards [Section 41E]: The director – General of Factory Advice Service and
Labour Institutes may be directed by the Central Government to lay down emergency standards
in respect of hazardous process.
Permissible limits of exposure of chemical and toxic substances (Section 41F): The second
Schedule added to the Act, indicates maximum permissible threshold limits of exposure of
chemical and toxic substances in manufacturing processes in any factory.
Workers Participation in safety management (Section 41G): The occupier in every factory
shall set up a safety committee consisting of equal number of representatives of workers and
management to promote co – operating between the workers and the management in
maintaining proper safety and health at work and to review periodically the measure taken in
that behalf where hazardous process is involved.
Warning about imminent danger (Section 41H): If there is reasonable apprehension regarding
likelihood of imminent danger to the lives or health of the workers employed in a factory, they
may bring the same to the notice of the occupier, agent, manager, etc.
SUJEET JHA 128 9213188188

3.2 INDUSTRIAL DISPUTES ACT, 1947

Introduction
The object of Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 is to make provisions for investigation and
settlement of industrial disputes. The purpose is to bring the conflict between the employer and
the employees to an amicable settlement. The Act also provides machinery for settlement of
disputes, if dispute cannot be resolved through collective bargaining. In additions to above, the
Act also makes other provision in respect of lay – off, retrenchment, strike, lock – out, etc.
Extent of the Act

The act extends to the whole of the India [Sec. 1 (2)]. It applies to all industries whether they are
carried on by private owners or by the Government [Western India automobile Assn. v.
Industrial Tribunal, Bombay, A.I.R. (1949) F.C.111].
The act has been amended from time to time. The latest amendment to the Act was made in
august, 1984.
OBJECTS OF THE ACT

The main objects of the Act are:
To secure industrial peace—
(a) by preventing and settling industrial disputes between the employers and workmen,
(b) by securing and preserving amity and good relations between the employers and
workmen through an internal Works committee and
(c) by promoting good relations through an external machinery of conciliation, Courts of
inquiry, Labour Courts, Industrial Tribunals and National Tribunals.
(1) To ameliorate the condition of work men in industry—
(a) by redressal of grievances of workmen through a statutory machinery; and
(b) by providing job security [S.N.Rai v.Vishwanath Lal, A.I.R. (1960) Pat. 10.]
What is included in the term ‘Industry’? ‘Industry’ includes—
(a) Any activity of the Dock Labour board established under Sec. 5-A of the Dock workers
(regulation of Employment) Act, 1948;
(b) Any activity relating to the promotion of sales or business or both carried on by and
establishment.
What is not included in the term ‘industry’? ‘Industry’ does not includes—
(1) Any agriculture operation except where such agricultural operation is carried on in an
integrated manner with any other systematic activity and such other activity is the
predominant one; or
‘Agricultural operation’ does not include any activity carried on in a plantation as
defined in Sec. 2 (f) of the Plantations Labour Act, 1951.
(2) Hospitals or dispensaries; or
(3) Educational, scientific, research or training institutions; or
(4) Institutions owned or managed by organizations wholly or sub-stantially engaged in any
charitable, social or philanthropic service; or
(5) Khadi or village industries; or
According to new clause (kka) as introduced in Sec.2 by the amendment Act of 1982,
‘khadi’ has the meaning assigned to it in Sec. 2(d0 of the Khadi and Village industries
commission Act, 1956.
SUJEET JHA 129 9213188188

(6) Any activity of the Government relatable to the sovereign functions of the Government
including all the activities carried on by the departments of the Central government
dealing with defense research, atomic energy and space; or
(7) Any domestic service; or
(8) Any activity, being a pr4ofession practiced by an individual or body of individuals. If the
number of persons employed in relation to such profession is less than 10; or
(9) Any activity, being an activity carried on by a co-operative society or a club or any other
like body of individuals, if the number of persons employed in relation to such activity is
less than 10.
Employees covered under the Industrial Dispute Act
Every person employed in an establishment for hire or reward, to do any manual, clerical skilled
unskilled technical operational or supervisory work is covered under the Act.
1) Persons employed mainly in a managerial or administrative capacity.

2) Person employed in a supervisory capacity and drawing wages exceeding Rs.1,600/-
p.m. or exercising functions mainly of managerial nature:
3) Persons subject to Army Act, Air force Act, Navy Act or those employed in the police
service or as an officer or employee of a prison.
The Act provides for constitution of Works Committee in factories employing 100 or more
workers. First of all, the works Committee will try to settle the dispute. If the dispute is not
settles it will be referred to the Conciliation Officer. The Conciliation Officer will try to arrive at
fair and amicable settlement acceptable to both the parties. If he is unable to do so, he will send
the report to the Central Government. The Government may then refer the industrial dispute to
the Board of Conciliation. It may be noted that here the employer and the employees can
voluntarily refer the matter to arbitration. If no settlement is arrived at then there is arrived that
three – tier system of adjudication i.e., Labour Court, Industrial Tribunal and National Tribunal.
Award means an interim or final determination of any industrial dispute or of any question
relating thereto by any Labour Court, Industrial Tribunal, or National Tribunal. The term award
also includes arbitration award. The award is required to be published by the Central
Government or State Government within 30 days from the date it is made. The award becomes
effectives only after 30 days of its publication. Generally the validity period of its publication.
Generally the validity period of an award is 1 year.
Settlement means a settlement arrived at in the course of conciliation proceedings. It includes a

written agreement between the employer and workman arrived at otherwise than in the course of
conciliation proceedings.
The settlement arrived in the course of conciliation and arbitration award and Labour Court
award or the Industrial or National Tribunal Award binds all parties to industrial dispute,
including present and future workman and all parties who are summoned to appear in the
proceedings. If settlement is arrived at otherwise in the course of conciliation proceeding, it
binds only those who are actually parties to the agreement; generally, the settlement is valid for
6 months.
Lay off means failure refusal or inability of the employer to give employment to a workman
because of any of the following reasons:
1) Shortage of coal, power or raw materials,
SUJEET JHA 130 9213188188

2) Accumulation of stock;
3) Breakdown of machinery
4) Natural calamity:
5) Any other similar or analogous reason.
Lay off means not giving employment within 2 hours after reporting to work.. Lay off can be
for half day also wherein the worker shall be asked to come in the second half of the shift.
A factory employing 50 or more but less than 100 employees can lay off its workman who have
completed 1 year of service by paying compensation equal to 50% of the salary / wages. A
factory employing more than 100 employees can lay off its workman with the previous approval
of Central Govt, However the approval of Central Govt. is not required in case lay off is done on
account of shortage of power or due to natural calamity. Employer can offer him alternate
employment if alternate employment does not call for any special skill or previous experience.
In such a case lay off compensation will not be payable if the employee refuses to accept the
alternate employment.
Retrenchment means the termination of service of a workman by the employer for any reason
other than as a punishment inflicted by a disciplinary action. In addition, retrenchment does not
include voluntary retirement or retirement on reaching the age of superannuation or termination
on account of non – renewal of contract or termination of contract itself or termination due to
continued ill – health of workman.
Retrenchment means discharge of surplus labour or staff of the employer. It is not be way of
punishment. The retrenchment shall be done on LIFO basis in respect of each category.
A workman who has completed one year of service can be retrenched by giving one month’s
notice or one month’s salary and retrenchment compensation.
Retrenchment compensation is calculated at the rate of 15 days’ average wages for every
completed year of service or any part thereof in excess of 6 months. Average Wages means
average of the wages payable for the proceeding 3 complete calendar months. For the purpose of
retrenchment compensation, one day wage shall be calculated by dividing monthly wage by 30.
Strike means a cessation of work by a body of persons, employed in any industry, acting in
combination or a concerted refusal, or a refusal under a common understanding of any number
of persons who are or have been so employed to continue to work or to accept employment.
1) During pendency of conciliation proceedings and 7 days thereafter;

2) During pendency of proceedings before Labour court or Industrial Tribunal or
National Tribunal :
3) During period of arbitration proceedings:
4) During period when settlement or award is in operation in respect of the matters
covered by the award or settlement.
In case of public utility services (hospital, railways, ports, docks, telephone, transport etc.),
employees have to give at least 14 days’ notice for strike. The notice is valid only if strike
commences within 6 weeks otherwise fresh notice is required. If such notice is received by any
employer, Government authorities should be informed within 5 days of the receipt of notice.
SUJEET JHA 131 9213188188

Wages during strike period are payable only if strike is both legal and justified. [Syndicate Bank
v. Umesh Naik]
Strike in violation of above provisions is illegal. In Such a case, the workman shall be
punishable with fine, which may extend to Rs.50/- per day and with imprisonment, which may
extend to 1 month.
Important Points
1) Principals governing Domestic Enquiry
In all such cases, the workmen after taking their seats, refuse to do work.
Go slow does not amount to strike, but it is a serious case of misconduct.
Cessation of work in the support of the demands of workmen belonging to other

employer.
Some workers may resort to fast on or near the place of work or residence of the
employer.
Since there is no cessation of work, it does not constitute a strike.
Lock out means temporary closing of a place of employment or the suspensions of work or the
refusal by the employer to continue to employ any number of persons employed by him.
Employer cannot go for lock – out in the following cases:

1) During pendency of conciliation proceedings and 7 days thereafter.
2) During pendency of proceeding before Labour Court or Industrial Tribunal or National
Tribunal:
3) During period of arbitration proceedings:
4) During period when settlement or award is in operation in respect of the matters covered
by the award or settlement.
In HAL. Employees Union v. Presiding Officer. It was held that when lock out by employer is
legal and justified, workmen are not entitled to compensation and wages for the period during
which lock out continue. In case of illegal lock out, the employer can be punished with fine may
extend to Rs.1,000/- and with imprisonment, which may extend to 1 month.
1) 1. The enquiry should be conducted by an unbiased person.
2. The enquiry officer should conduct the enquiry in an objective and fair manner.
3. The employee should be given a fair opportunity to defend himself.
4. proper procedure, rules, regulations etc. should be followed white conducting enquiry.
2) It has been held that if on the death of a fellow worker, the workmen acting in
combination refuse to resume work, it amounts tostrike. [National Textiles Workers
Union v. Meenakshi Mills]
3) Certain gardeners were appointed to look after the bungalow provided to the MD of the
Company. The gardeners were supposed to mark their attendance in the Company
Register and their salaries were being paid directly by the company. It was held that
since the gardeners are working directly under the control of the company, they are
workmen under the Industrial Dispute Act. [J.K. Cotton Spinning v. Weaving Mills Co.
Ltd.]
4) The Supreme Court held that the teachers employed by the Educational Institutions
cannot be considered as workmen within the Industrial Dispute Act, as imparting of
SUJEET JHA 132 9213188188

education which is the main function of the teacher cannot be considered as skilled or
unskilled manual work or supervisory work or technical work. [Sunderambal v.
Government of Goa]
5) Unfair Labour Practices means any of the practices specified in the Vth Schedule to the
industrial Disputes Act. This Schedule declares certain labour practices as unfair on the
part of the employees and their trade unions and on the part of the workmen and their
trade unions. Industrial Disputes Act prohibits commission of any unfair labour practice
by Employers & Workmen.
6) The Supreme Court held that termination of services of a bus driver on the ground of
weak eyesight does not amount to retrenchment under the Industrial Disputes Act
because here the employees is being terminated on the ground of continued ill health and
not because of surplus labour. [Anand Bihari v. Rajasthan State Road Transport]
7) It was held that a car driver engaged by area manager of a bank for which allowance was
given to him was not a workman of the bank under Industrial Dispute Act, eventhough
the car was maintained at the bank’s expenses, as the control of the driver was not into
the hands of the bank. [PNB v. Ghulam Dastagi]
8) An Industrial Dispute exists only when the same has been raised by the workman with
the employer. A mere demand to the appropriate government without a dispute being
raised by the workman with their employer, cannot become an industrial dispute.
[Sindhu Resettlement Corporation ltd. v. Industrial Tribunal]
9) A workmen’s case sponsored by a body of workmen either acting through their union or
otherwise, would amount to an Industrial Dispute. [Newspaper Ltd., Allahabad v.
Industrial Tribunal]
10) The term ‘employment or non – employment’ is concerned with the employees’ failure
or refusal to employ a workman. [Western India Automobile Association v. Industrial]
11) A Salesman, whose duties included manual as well as clerical work such as to attend to
the customer, prepare cash memos, to assist manager in daily routine is a workman.
[Carona Sahu Co. Ltd. v. Labour Court]
12) Refusal to do work which the employer has no right to ask for performance, such a
refusal does not constitute a strike. [Northbrooke Jute Co. Ltd. v. Their Workman]
13) Where in pursuance of a common understanding the employees entered the premises of
the Bank and refused to take their pens in their hands, it was held to be strike. [Punjab
National Bank Ltd. v. all India Punjab National Bank Employees’ Federation]
14) Go – slow does not amount to strike. [Bharat Sugar Mills Ltd. v. Jai Singh]
15) Where the strike was resorted to by using violence or acts of sabotage or for any ulterior
purpose, then the strike will be illegal. [ Gujarat Steel Tubes Ltd. v. Gujarat Steel Tubes
Majdoor Sabha]
16) When the workmen and the management are equally to be blamed for the strike, the
Court normally awards half of the wages. [India Marine Service Pvt. Ltd. v. their
Workmen]
17) A closure of a place of business for a short duration of 30 days in retaliation to certain
acts of workmen was held to be a lockout. [Lord Krishna Sugar Mills Ltd. v. State of
U.P]
18) Retrenchment does not include disengagement from service of persons employed for
working on daily wages. [U.P. v. Labour court, Haldwani]
19) if the termination of an employees’ service is a punishment inflicted by way of
disciplinary action, such termination would not amount to retrenchment. [SBI v.
Employees of SB]
20) Termination of service of casual workers after their work is over, is not a retrenchment.
[Tapan Kumar Jana, v. The General Manager, Calcutta Telephones]
21) Where the services of an employee irregularly appointed were terminated, it was held to
be a case of retrenchment. [Prabhudayal Jat v. Alwar Sehkari Bhumi Vikas Bank Ltd]
SUJEET JHA 133 9213188188

22) The use of force or violence or acts of sabotage resorted to by the workmen during a
strike disentitles them to wages for the strike period. [Crompton Greaves Ltd. v.
Workmen, Syndicate Bank v. Umesh Naik]
23) The Government employees have to fundamental right to resort to strike and they cannot
take the society at ransom by going on strike, even if there is injustice to some extent.
[T.K. Rangarajan v. Govt. of Tamil Nadu & Others]
Under Difference between lock-out and lay-off.

lock-out the employer refuses to give employment because of closing of a place of
employment or suspension of work. Under lay-off the employer refuses to give employment
because of shortage of coal, power or raw material or the accumulation of stocks or the
breakdown of machinery or natural calamity or for any other reason to give employment.
(2) Lock-out is resorted to by the employer to coerce or pressurize the workmen to accept his
demands; lay-off is for trade reason beyond the control of the employer.
(3) Lock-out is due to an industrial dispute and continues during the period of dispute; lay-off is
not concerned with a dispute with the workmen.
Difference between lock-out and closure. Lock-out and closure of a business are often
confused. This is because cessation of work is common to both.
Closure is a fundamental right and if it is not a lock-out, the workers cannot grudge [J.K.
Hosiery Factory v. Labour Appellate Tribunal, A.I.R. (1956) All. 498]. The State cannot compel
an employer to carry on his business because several employees may be thrown out of
employment if it is closed. The grounds for closure of a business may be actual loss or
apprehended loss. It may also be disinclination to run the risk of running the business [Indian
Metal & Metallurgical Corpn. V. Industrial Tribunal, Madras, 3 F. J.R. 420 High Court,
Madras].
The points of difference between a lock-out and closure are as follows:

(1) In the case of lock-out it is only the place of business which is closed (and not the
business itself), while in the case of closure of a business not only the place of business
but the business itself is closed [Express Newspapers (Pvt.) Ltd. V. Their Workmen,
A.I.R. (1963) S.C. 569]. The closure of a business indicates the final and irrevocable
termination of the business itself. Lock-out, on the other hand, indicates the closure of
the place of business or the place of employment and not the closure of the business
itself.
(2) Lock-out is a weapon of coercion in the hands of employer; closure is generally for trade
reasons.
(3) In closure there is severance of employment relationship whereas in lock-out there is no
severance but only suspension of such relationship.
(4) A lock-out is caused by the existence or apprehension of an industrial dispute whereas a
closure need not be in consequence of an industrial dispute.
National Tribunal [Sec. 2 (n)]. It means—
any railway a National Industrial Tribunal constituted under Sec. 7-B.
Public utility service [Sec.2 (n)]. It means—

(i) Any railway service or any transport service for the carriage of passengers or goods by
air;
(ii) Any service in , or in connection with the working of , any major port or dock;
(iii) Any section of an industrial establishment, on the working of which the safety of the
establishment or the workmen employed therein depends;
(iv) Any postal, telegraph, or telephone service;
SUJEET JHA 134 9213188188
(v) Any industry which supplies power, light or water to the public;
(vi) Any system of public conservancy or sanitation;
(vii) Any industry specified in the First Schedule.
The appropriate Government may, if satisfied that public emergency or interest so requires,
by notification in the Official gazette, declare any industry specified in the First Schedule to
be public utility service for the purposes of the Industrial disputes Act for such period as
may be specified in the notification. The period so specified shall not, in the first instance,
exceed 6 month. But it may, by a like notification, be extended from time to time by any
period not exceeding 6 month at any time if in the opinion of the appropriate government,
public emergency or public interest requires such extension. The first schedule is reproduced
below.
Difference between ‘retrenchment’ and ‘closure’. The important points of difference between
‘retrenchment’ and ‘closure’ may be enumerated as follows;
(1) Retrenchment is the termination by the employer of the service of the workman for any
reason whatsoever, otherwise than as punishment inflicted by way of disciplinary action.
It affects only some of the workmen. Closure, on the other hand, means closing down of
the business of trade reasons and it affects all the workmen.
(2) In case of retrenchment the services of workmen are terminated on account of surplus
labour; while in case of closure it is on account of total closure of work by an employer.
(3) In retrenchment the trade or business remains uninterrupted as it continues; while in
closure the business itself is discontinued.
(4) The compensation payable to a workman on retrenchment either on account of surplus
labour or closure, shall be equivalent to 15 days’ average pay for every completed year
of continuous service or any part thereof in excess of 6 months. Retrenchment as a result
of bona fide closure of business does not entail any compensation beyond average pay
for 3 months.
Difference between lock-out and retrenchment.
(1) Lock-out is temporary; retrenchment is permanent. Retrenchment results in complete
severance of industrial relationship between an employer and an employee while lock-
out keeps this relationship alive even during the cessation of work. The former results in
severance of relationship between the employer and employee while the latter amounts to
only suspension of the relationship.
(2) Lock-out is with a motive to coerce the workmen to accept the demands of the employer
retrenchment is resorted to dispense with surplus labour.
(3) Lock-out is due to and during an industrial dispute; there is no such dispute in case of
retrenchment.
SUJEET JHA 135 9213188188

3.3 WORKMEN’S COMPENSATION ACT 1923
Introduction
This Act provides social security to workmen. Under this Act, a workman who dies or suffers
disablement, partial or total, due to an accident is entitled to get compensation from his
employer.
Applicability of the Act

A workman covered under ESI Act, 1948 is not entitled to get compensation under Workmen’s
Compensation Act. 1923. Thus, Act is applicable to those factories, mines, transport
establishment, construction works, etc. Which are not covered under ESI Act, 1948.
Meaning of Workman
Workman means the following:
(i) Railway servant”
(ii) Crew of ship;
(iii)Crew of aircraft;
(iv) Driver, cleaner, helper or mechanic of motor vehicles;
(v) Workman recruited abroad;
(vi) Person employed in activities like manufacturing process, explosive, mines, shop
loading/ unloading, construction, electricity generation and distribution, drivers,
horticulture, circus.
(vii) Persons employed in cultivation of land, fishing, rearing of livestock. If the number
of persons employed there is more than 25.
Every employee including those employed through contractor who is engaged for the purpose of
employer’s business is eligible for workman’s compensation. However, casuals employees and
employees engaged in clerical capacity neither are nor covered.
In case of contract labour, the principle employer is liable to pay compensation in the same
manner, as he is liable for his departmental labour, However, he is entitled to be indemnified by
the contractor for such compensation. [Managing Director, Orissa State Warehousing
Corporation V. Smt, Geetarani]
Employer’s Liability for Compensation
An employer is liable to pay compensation if personal injury is caused to a workman ny accident

arising out of and in the course of his employment.
However, an employer is not liable in the following.
(1) Injury which results in total or partial disablement of workman up to 3 days;
(2) Injury caused by an accident directly attributable to the following:
(a) Workman working under the influence of drinks or drugs;
(b) Willful disobedience of express order of safety;
(c) Willful removal of safety guards or devices.
However in a such cases, if the workman does or suffers permanent total disablement the
employer will be liable.
Further, an employer is liable to a workman, if a workman contract any specified occupational
disease while he is in the service of the employer for at least 6 months.
If may be noted that compensation is payable even when there is no fault of the employer;
except the aforesaid cases where the compensation is not payable./ The compensation is payable
even if it is found that the employee did not take proper precaution or he was careless or
negligible in the performance of his work.
SUJEET JHA 136 9213188188
Amount of compensation payable

Compensation is payable to workman in case of partial or total disablement. It is payable to
dependants of workman in case of death.
It maybe be noted that compensation is an amount equal to 50% of monthly wages deceased
workman multiplied by a factor depending on the age of the workman (more than age, lower the
compensation), subject to a minimum compensation of Rs. 80,000/-. In addition to this funeral
expenses of Rs. 2,500/- are also paid.
In case of permanent of total disablement, compensation payable is an amount equal to 60% of

monthly wages o disabled workman multiplied by a factor depending on the age of the workman
(more the age, lo9wer the compensation), subject to a minimum compensation of Rs. 90,000/-
In case of permanent partial disablement, compensation is paid based on percentage of loss of

earning capacity.
Accident arising out of and in the course of employment.
Accident arising out of employment: An accident arising out of employment implies a proximate
and direct connection between the accidental injury and the employment. In this case, the
compensation will be payable if the accident has occurred at the place where the workman was
performing his duties.
Accident in the course of employment: An accident in the course of employment implies a

casual connection between the accidental injury and the employment. In this case, for the
payment of compensation it is not necessary that the accident occurred at the place where the
workman was performing his duties, Further, it is also not necessary that the workman must be
actually working at the time of his death.
It is well established that there must be some casual connection between the death of the worker
and his employment. If the workman dies, as a natural result of the disease from which he was
suffering then it will be considered that he has died .of that disease as a wear and tear of his
employment and hence no liability would be fixed upon the employer. However, if the
employment is contributory cause or has accelerated the death, or if the reason of the death is not
only the disease but also the disease coupled with the employment then it could be said that the .
death arose in the course of the employment and the employer would be liable.
Employer's liability when contractor is engaged

Section 12 makes the employer liable for compensation to such workmen hired by the contractor
under following circumstances:
(a) The contractor is engaged to do a work which is part of the trade or business of the
employer( called principal);
(b) The workmen were engaged in the course of or for the purpose of his trade or business;
and
(c) The accident occurred in or about the premises on which the principal employer has
undertaken or undertakes to execute the work concerned.
The amount of compensation shall be calculated with reference to the wages of the workman
under the employer by whom he is immediately employed.
SUJEET JHA 137 9213188188

Important Points
1) A workman who was on duty had gone to the canteen to take tea where he died. It has
been held that the accidental injury arose in the course of employment and the period of
recess did not disrupt the continuity of employment. [Regional Director v. Batul Bibi]
2) A factory worker suffering from a heart disease while coming out of the factory died
inside the factory premises. The stress and strain of work were the accelerating factors to
death and therefore the employer was liable to pay the compensation. [D.N.K Project v.
Smt. D. Buchitalli]
3) A workman .died on duty by heart attack after receiving continuous threats on his life
from thieves who he prevented successfully. It has been held that his widow will be
entitled to compensation under this Act. [Smt. A. Seetharamma v. G.M., SouthEastern
Railways]
4) Where an employee was under a contractual obligation to use only a particular means of
transport, the area or field of employment would stand extended to the course of the said
transport. Accident sustained by transport staff while traveling between depot and
residence or vice versa must be treated arising in the course of employment. [BEST
Undertaking v. Mrs. Agnes]
5) Where the deceased workman was standing in the queue waiting for the bus provided by
the employer for reaching the place of work and was run over by the bus by which he
was to travel it was held that the workman has died as result of employment injury.
[ESIC v. Sayeeda Khatoon Dannawal]
6) It has been held that an employer will be liable to pay compensation if workman meets
with an accident while proceeding to his workplace on a bicycle. [Indian Rare Earth
Ltd. v, Surinder Beevi]
7) Where a mill worker was stabbed in a communal riot while he was returning home
sometime after midnight after the night shift and died just at a short distance from the
mill, . it was held that the case clearly falls within the meaning of employment injury.
[Ahmed Khan Pathan v. ESIC]
8) If a workman suffers as a result of an injury from a physical defect which does not infact
reduce his capacity to work but at the same time makes his labour unsaleable in any
market. he can establish a right to compensation provided he proves that he had been
turned away by a reasonable number of likely employers on account of such defect.
[Sukhai v. Hukam Chand Jute Mills Ltd.] .
9) If after the accident a worker has become disabled. and cannot do a particular job but the
employer offers him another kind of job, the worker is entitled to compensation for
partial disablement. [General Manager, G.I.P. Rly. v. Shankar]
10) If due to any physical defect, a workman is unable to get any work which a workman of
his class ordinarily performs, and has thus lost the power to earn, he is entitled to
compensation for total disablement. [Ball v. William Hunt & Sons Ltd.]
11) In a case permanent partial disability caused to a workman in accident while working on
ship, it was held that workman can be said to have lost his earning capacity even though
SUJEET JHA 138 9213188188

getting same amount of wages as before. [Mangru Palji v. Robinsons]
12) Where a carpenter had amputated his left ann from elbow while working in the factory,
it
was held to be a case of total disablement. [Pratap Narain Singh Deo v. Sriniwas
Sabata]
13) Where an electrician who had to go frequently to a heating room from a cooling plant,
contracted pneumonia resulting in his death, it was held that the injury caused by an
accident is not confined to physical injury and includes nervous shock or break down or
mental strain. [Indian News Chronicle v. Mrs. Lazarus]
14) Where a workman suffers from heart disease and dies on account of strain of work by
keeping continuously standing or working, it was held that the accident arose out of
employment. [Laxmibai Atmaram v. Bomba}' Port Trust]
15) A workman while returning home after duty was murdered within the premises of the
employer. It was held that there was a close and proximate connection between the
accident and the employment and hence his wife was entitled to compensation. [Naima
Bibi v. Lodhne Colliery Ltd.].
16 Where the workman, a state employee, received injury while performing the
electrification work of the town entrusted to state employees by the Municipal Board, it
was held that the state and not the board was liable to pay compensation because
execution of electrical project was not the ordinary, business of the Municipal Board .
17) Where the cartman engaged by a Rice Mill to carry rice bags from mill to railway station
met with an accident on a public road while returning back from railway station resulting
in his death, it was held that the Mill Owner was liable to pay compensation.
. .
18) The Supreme Court held that there should be some connection, casual or direct, between
the injury/accident and the employment in order to get the compensation under
Workmen's Compensation Act. Where a workman has exposed himself to an added peril
by his own imprudent act, then the employee will not be eligible for compensation.
[Machenzie v. I.M .. Issak]
SUJEET JHA 139 9213188188

3.4 PAYMENT OF WAGES ACT, 1936

Extent of the Act
The Act extends to the whole of India [Sec. 1 (2). It was extended to Jammu and
Kashmir by the Central Labour Laws (Extension to Jammu and Kashmir) Act, 1970.
Application of the Act

¾ The Act applies to the payment of wages to persons employed in any factory, to persons
employed (otherwise than in a factory) upon any railway by a railway administration and
to an industrial or other establishment specified in Clauses (a) to (g) of Sec. 2 (ii) (which
defines industrial or other establishment).
¾ The persons employed upon a railway by a railway administration may have been
employed either directly or through a sub-contractor by a person fulfilling a contract with
a railway administration [Sec. 1 (4)].
¾ The State Government may after giving 3 months’ notice extend the provisions of the
Act to the payment of wages to any class of persons employed in any industrial
establishment or class of establishments specified by the Central Government or a State
Government under Clause (h) of Sec. 2 (ii) [Sec. 1 (5)].
¾ In case of industrial establishments owned by the Central government, such notification
can be issued with the concurrence of the Central Government [Proviso to Sec. 1 (5)].
In various States the Act has been extended to shops and establishments also.
The Act does not apply to persons whose wages exceed Rs. 6,500 per month [Sec. 1 (6)]. This
limit was raised from Rs. 1,600 to Rs. 6,500 by the Payment of Wages (Amendment) Act, 2005.
Reference to Sections in this Chapter. Reference to Sections in this Chapter, un less otherwise
indicated, is to the Payment of Wages Act, 1936.
Industrial or other establishment [Sec. 2 (ii)]. It means any—

(a) Tramway service, or motor transport service engaged in carrying passengers or goods or
both by road for hire or reward;
(aa) air transport service other than such service belonging to or exclusively
employed in the military, naval or air force of the Union or the Civil Aviation
Department of the Government of India;
(b) dock, wharf or jetty;
(c) inland vessel, mechanically propelled;
(d) mine, quarry or oilfield;
(e) plantation;
(f) workshop or other establishment in which articles are produced, adapted or
manufactured, with a view to their use, transport or sale;
(g) establishment in which any work relating to the construction, development or
maintenance of buildings, roads, bridges or canals, or relating to operations connected
with navigation, irrigation or supply of water or relating to the transmission or
distribution of electricity or any other form of power is being carried on;
Wages [Sec. 2 (vi)].
“Wages’ means all remuneration (whether by way of salary, allowances or otherwise) expressed
in terms of money or capable of being so expressed which would, if the terms of employment,
express or implied, were fulfilled, be payable to a person employed in respect of his employment
or of work done in such employment. Simply stated, ‘wages’ means all remuneration due to any
SUJEET JHA 140 9213188188

worker or employee if the terms of contract of employment are fulfilled.

The definition of expression ‘wages’ is made sufficiently wide by including within the
expression:
(a) any remuneration payable under any award or settlement between the parties or order of
a Court;
(b) any remuneration to which the person employed is entitled in respect of overtime work
or holidays or any leave period:
(c) any additional remuneration payable under the terms of employment (whether called a
bonus or by any other name);
(d) any sum which by reason of the termination of employment of the person employed is
payable under any law, contract or instrument which provides for the payment of such
sum, whether with or without deductions, but does not provide for the time within which
the payment is to be made;
(e) any sum to which the person employed is entitled under any scheme framed under any
law for the time being in force.
The expression ‘wages’ does not include:
(1) any bonus (whether under a scheme of profit-sharing or otherwise) which does not form
part of the remuneration payable under the terms of employment or which is not payable
under any award or settlement between the parties or order of a Court;
(2) the value of any house accommodation, or of the supply of light, water, medical
attendance or other amenity or of any service excluded from the computation of wages
by a general or special order of the State Government;
(3) any contribution paid by the employer to any pension or provident fund, and the interest
which may have accrued thereon;
(4) any travelling allowance or the value of any travelling concession;
(5) any sum paid to the employed person to defray special expenses entailed on him by the
nature of his employment; and
(6) any gratuity payable on the termination of employment in cases other than those
specified in Clause (d) above.
The definition of the expression ‘wages’ comprises 3 parts:
The first part declares that ‘wages’ means all remunerations which would, if the terms of the
contract of employment, exp0ress or implied, were fulfilled, be payable to a person employed, in
respect of his employment. This clause presents no difficulty whatsoever for it declares in an
unambiguous language that an employee is entitled to receive wages in accordance with the
terms of his contract.
The second part says that the expression ‘wages’ shall include any bonus or other
remuneration of the nature aforesaid which would be so payable, i.e., payable in accordance with
the terms of the contract.
The third part declares that the expression ‘wages’ shall include ‘any sum’ payable to such
person by reason of the termination of his employment. The language of this clause is wide
enough to embrace not only a sum payable to an employee under the terms of a contract but also
a sum payable to him under the provisions of any law.
Fixation of wage-periods (Sec. 4)

Every person responsible for the payment of wages under Sec. 3 shall fix periods, known as
wage-periods, in respect of which such wages shall be payable [Sec. 4 (1)]. A wage-period shall
not exceed one month [Sec. 4 (2)].
SUJEET JHA 141 9213188188

Time of payments of wages (Sec. 5)

The rules relating to time of payment of wages are as follows:
Wages to be paid before 7th or 10th day.
¾ The wages of every person employed upon or in any railway, factory or industrial or
other establishment upon or in which less than 1,000 persons are employed, shall be paid
before the expiry of 7th day of the following wage-period.
¾ In case the number of workers exceeds 1,000, the wages shall be paid before the expiry
of the 10th day of the following wage-period [Sec. 5 (1)].
¾ In the case of persons employed on a clock, wharf or jetty or in a mine, the balance of
wages due on completion of the final tonnage account of the ship or wagons loaded or
unloaded, as the case may be, shall be paid before the expiry of the 7th day from the day
of such completion [Proviso to Sec. 5 (1)].
Deductions which may be made from wages (Sec. 7)
Kinds of deductions
1. Deductions for fines [Secs. 7 (2) (a) and 8]
2. Deductions for absence from duty [Secs. 7 (2) (b) and 9]
3. Deductions for damage or loss [Secs. 7 (2) (c), (m), (n) and (o) and 10]
4. Deductions for services [Secs. 7 (2) (d), (e) and 11]
5. Deductions for recovery of advances [Secs. 7 (2) (f) and 12]
6. Deductions for recovery of loans [Secs. 7 (2) (fff) and 12-A)
7. Deductions for payments to co-operative societies and insurance schemes [Secs. 7 (2) (i)
and (k) and 13]
Other deductions
Deductions made, with the written authorization of the employed person, for contribution to the
Prime Minister’s National Relief Fund or to such other Fund as may be specified by the
appropriate Government [Sec. 7 (2) (p). [This Clause was added by the Payment of Wages
(Amendment) Act, 1976]; and
Limit on deductions [Sec. 7 (3)]

¾ The total amount of deductions which may be made under the above heads [Sec. 7 (2)] in
a wage-period from the wages of any employed person shall not exceed 75 per cent of
such wages in cases where such deductions are wholly or partly made for payments to
co-operative societies under Sec. 7 (2) (i).
¾ In any other case, they shall not exceed 50 per cent of such wages [Sec. 7 (3)].
¾ Where the total deductions authorised under Sec. 7 (2) exceed 75 per cent, or as the case
may be, 50 per cent of the wages, the excess may be recovered in such manner as may be
prescribed [Proviso to Sec. 7 (3|)].
MAINTENANCE OF REGISTERS AND RECORDS

Who may file application? An application for claims arising under the Act may be filed by—
(a) the person employed himself, or
(b) any legal practitioner, or
(c) any official of a registered trade union authorised in writing to act on his behalf, or
(d) any Inspector under the Act, or
(e) any other person acting with the permission of the Authority appointed under Sec. 15 (1)
[Sec. 15 (2)].
SUJEET JHA 142 9213188188

Application to be filed within 12 months.

¾ Every application for claims under the Act shall be presented within 12 months from the
date on which the deduction from the wages was made or from the date on which the
payment of the wages was due to is made [Proviso 1 to Sec. 15 (2)].
¾ An application may also be admitted after 12 months if the applicant satisfies the
Authority that there was a sufficient cause for not making the application within 12
months [Proviso 2 to Sec. 15 (2)].
Procedure.
¾ When any application for claims under the Act is entertained, the Authority shall hear the
applicant and the employer or other persons responsible for the payment of wages under
Sec. 3, or give them an opportunity of being heard.
¾ The Authority shall make such further inquiry as may be necessary. It may direct the
refund to be made to the employed person of the amount deducted or the payment of the
delayed wages, together with such compensation as it may think fit.
¾ The compensation shall not exceed 10 times the amount improperly deducted, and not
exceeding Rs. 3,000 but not less than Rs. 1,500 in case of delayed wages.
¾ Even where the deducted or delayed wages are paid before the disposal of the
application, the Authority may direct the payment of such compensation as it may think
fit.
¾ This amount of compensation shall however not exceeds Rs. 2,000 [Sec. 15 (3)].
Appeal (Sec. 17)
An appeal may be preferred in a Presidency-town before the Court of Small Causes and
elsewhere before the District Court against—
(i) an order dismissing either wholly or in part an application made under Sec. 15 (2), or
(ii) a direction made under Sec. 15 (3) by the Authority to refund to the employed person the
amount deducted from wages or under Sec. 15 (4) by the Authority for payment of
penalty to the employer.
The appeal may be preferred within 30 days of the date on which the order or direction
was made [Sec. 17 (1)].
The Court may, if it thinks fit, submit any question of law for the decision of the High
Court and, if it so does, shall decide the question in conformity with such decision [Sec.
17 (4)].
SUJEET JHA 143 9213188188

3.5 MINIMUM WAGES ACT, 1948

The object of the Act is to secure the welfare of the workers in a competitive market by `fixing
the minimum rates of wages in certain employments. The Legislature undoubtedly intended to
apply the Act to those industries or localities in which, by reason of causes such as unorganized
labour or absence of machinery for regulation of wages, wages paid to workers were, in the light
of the general level of wages and subsistence level, inadequate [Bhikusa Yamasa Kshatriya v.
Sangammer Akola Taluka, Bidi Kamgar Union, A.I.R. (1963) S.C. 806].
The Minimum Wages Act was passed in 1948 enabling the Central and State Governments to fix
minimum rates of wages payable to employees in a selected number of ‘sweated’ industries.
The Act applies to the whole of India.
Wages [Sec. 2 (h)].

‘Wages’ means all remuneration, capable of being expressed in terms of money, which would, if
the terms of the contract of employment, express or implied, were fulfilled, be payable to a
person employed in respect of his employment or work done in such employment. It includes
house rent allowance but does not include—
(i) The value of—
(a) Any house accommodation, supply of light, water, medical attendance, or
(b) Any other amenity or any service excluded by general or special order of the
appropriate Government;
(ii) Any contribution paid by the employer to any Pension Fund or Provident Fund or under
any scheme of social insurance;
(iii) Any travelling allowance or the value of any travelling concession;
(iv) Any sum paid to the person employed to defray special expenses entailed on him by the
nature of his employment; or
(v) Any gratuity payable on discharge.
Fixing of minimum rates of wages (Sec. 3)

The responsibility for fixing the minimum rates of wages is that of the appropriate Government.
Sec. 3 provides that the appropriate Government—
(a) shall fix the minimum rates of wages payable to employees employed in an employment
specified in Part I or part II of the Schedule (reproduced earlier) and in an employment
added to either Part by notification in the Official Gazette [Sec. 3 (1) (a)];
(b) may, in respect of employees employed in an employment specified in Part II of the
Schedule, instead of fixing minimum rates of wages for the whole State, fix such rates
for a part of the State or for any specified class or classes of such employment in the
whole State or part thereof [Proviso to Sec. 3 (1) (a)];
(c) shall review at such intervals not exceeding 5 years, the minimum rates of wages so
fixed and revise the minimum rates if necessary [Sec. 3 (1) (b)].
Minimum number of employees.
¾ The appropriate Government may refrain from fixing minimum rates of wages in respect
of any scheduled employment in which there are in the whole State less than 1,000
employees engaged in such employment.
¾ But if at any time, the appropriate Government comes to a finding after an inquiry that
the number of employees in any scheduled employment has risen to 1,000 or more, it
shall fix minimum rates of wages payable as soon as may be after such finding [Sec. 3
(1-A)].
SUJEET JHA 144 9213188188

Minimum rates. The appropriate Government may fix—

(a) a minimum rate of wages for time work (referred to as ‘a minimum time rate’);
(b) a minimum rate of wages for piece work (referred to as ‘a minimum piece rate’);
(c) a minimum rate of remuneration to apply in the case of such employees employed on
piece work for purpose of securing to such employees a minimum rate of wages on a
time work basis (referred to as ‘a guaranteed time rate’);
(d) a minimum rate (whether a time rate or a piece rate) to apply in substitution for the
minimum rate which would otherwise be applicable, in respect of overtime work done by
employees (referred to as ‘overtime rate’) [Sec. 3 (2)].
Advisory Board (Sec. 7)
For the purpose of coordinating the work of committees and sub-committees appointed under
Sec. 5 and advising the appropriate Government generally in the matter of fixing and revising
minimum rates of wages, the appropriate Government shall appoint an Advisory Board (Sec. 7).
No procedure is prescribed in the Act for the Advisory Board to function. It can devise its own
procedure [State of Rajasthan v. Hari Ram Nathwani, A.I.R. (1976) S.C. 277].
Composition of Committees and Advisory Board (Sec. 9).
Each of the committees, sub-committees and the Advisory Board shall consist of persons to be
nominated by the appropriate Government representing employers and employees in the
scheduled employments, who shall be equal in number, and independent persons not exceeding
1/3rd of its total number of members. One of the independent persons shall be appointed the
Chairman by the appropriate Government.
Wages in kind (Sec. 11)
¾ Minimum wages payable under the Act shall be paid in cash [Sec. 11 (1)]. But where it
has been the custom to pay wages wholly or partly in kind, the appropriate Government
may, by notification in the Official Gazette, authorise the payment of minimum wages
either wholly or partly in kind [Sec. 11 (2)].
¾ The appropriate Government may also by notification in the Official Gazette authorise
the provision of the supply of essential commodities at concessional rates [Sec. 11 (3)].
¾ The cash value of wages in kind [under Sec. 11 (2)] and of concession in respect of
supplies of essential commodities at concessional rates authorised under Sec. 11 (2) and
(3) shall be estimated in the prescribed manner [Sec. 11 (4)].
Payment of minimum rate of wages (Sec. 12)
¾ Where in respect of any scheduled employment minimum wages have been fixed, the
employer shall pay to every employee wages at a rate not less than the minimum rate of
wages fixed for that class of employees in the employment.
¾ Such wages shall be paid without any deductions except as may be authorised. Where the
contract rate of wages is higher, the statutory obligation does not come into play [Sec. 12
(1)].
Sec. 12 does not affect the provisions of the Payment of Wages Act, 1936 [Sec. 12 (2)].
Fixing hours for a normal working day, etc. (Sec. 13)

In regard to any scheduled employment where minimum rates of wages have been fixed, the
appropriate Government may—
(a) fix the number of hours of work which constitute a normal working day, inclusive of one
or more specified intervals;
SUJEET JHA 145 9213188188
(b) provide for a day of rest in every period of 7 days and for payment of remuneration in
respect of such day of rest;
(c) provide for payment for work on a day of rest at a rate not less than the overtime rate
[Sec. 13 (1)].
Provisions of Sec. 13 (1) to apply subject to conditions.
In relation to the following classes of employees, the provisions of Sec. 13 (1) shall apply only
to such extent and subject to such conditions as may be prescribed;
(a) employees engaged on urgent work, or in any emergency which could not have been
foreseen or prevented;
(b) employees engaged in work in the nature of preparatory or complementary work which
must necessarily be carried on outside the limits laid down for the general working in the
employment concerned;
(c) employees whose employment is essentially intermittent;
(d) employees engaged in any work which for technical reasons has to be completed before
the duty is over;
(e) employees engaged in work which could not be carried on except at times dependent on
the irregular action of natural forces [Sec. 13 (2)].
Intermittent employment.
The employment of an employee is essentially intermittent when it is declared to be so by the
appropriate Government. The appropriate Government declares an employment as intermittent
on the ground that the daily hours of duty of the employee normally include periods of
inaction during which the employee may be on duty but is not called upon to display either
physical activity or sustained attention [Sec. 13. (3)].
Rates of overtime (Sec. 14)

Where an employee, whose minimum rate of wages is fixed under this Act, by the hour, by the
day or by such longer wage-period as may be prescribed, works overtime, the employer shall
pay him for every hour or for part of an hour so worked in excess, wages at the rates fixed for
overtime work under the Act or under any law of the appropriate Government in force,
whichever is higher [Sec. 14 (1)].
The provisions of the minimum Wages Act, 1948 do not prejudice the operation of the
provisions of Sec. 59 of the Factories Act, 1948 in any case where those provisions are
applicable [sec .14 (2)].
Wages of worker who works for less than normal working day (Sec. 15)
Sometimes an employee whose minimum rate of wages has been fixed by the day may work on
any day on which he was employed for as period less than the requisite number of hours
constituting a normal working day. In that case he is entitled to receive wages in respect of work
done by him on that day as if he had worked for a full normal working day except—
(1) where his failure to work is cause by his unwillingness to work and not by omission of
the employer to provide him with work, and
(2) in such other cases and circumstances as may be prescribed.
Wages for two or more classes of work (Sec.16)
Where an employee does two or more classes of work to each of which a different minimum rate
of wages is applicable, the employer shall pay to such employee in respect of the time
respectively occupied in each such class of work, wages at not less than the minimum rate in
force in respect of each such class.
Minimum time rate wages for piece work (Sec.17)

SUJEET JHA 146 9213188188
Where an employee is employed on piece work for which minimum time rate and not a
minimum piece rate has been fixed under the Act, the employer shall pay to such employee
wages at not less than the minimum time rate.
Maintenance of registers and records (Sec. 18)
¾ Every employer shall maintain registers and records giving particulars of employees
employed by him, the work performed by them and such other particulars and in such form
as may be prescribed [Sec. 18 (1)].
¾ He shall also keep exhibited notices in the prescribed form containing prescribed particulars
in the prescribed manner in the factory, workshop or place where the employees in the
schedule employment may be employed.
¾ In the case of out-workers, he shall keep these notices exhibited in such factory, workshop or
place as may be used for giving out-work to them [sec. 18. (2)].
¾ The appropriate Government may, by rules made under the Act, provide for the issue of
wages books or wage slips to employees employed in any scheduled employment in respect
of which minimum rates of wages have been fixed.
¾ It may also prescribe the manner in which entries shall be made and authenticated in such
wage books or wage slips by the employer or his agent [sec. 18 (3)].
ENFORCEMENT OF THE ACT

(Secs. 19 TO 21)
Powers of Inspectors. An Inspector May—
(a) enter at all reasonable hours, with such assistants as he thinks fit, any premises or place
where employees are employed or work is given out to out-workers in any scheduled
employment in respect of which minimum rate of wages have been fixed, for the purpose
of examining any register, record of wages or notices required to be kept or exhibited by
or under the Act or rules made there under, and required the production thereof for
inspection;
(b) examine any person whom he finds in any such premises or place and who, he has
reasonable cause to believe, is an employee employed therein or an employee to whom
out-work is given;
(c) require any person giving out-work and any out-workers, to give any information, which
is in his power to give, with respect to the names and addresses of the persons to, for and
from whom the work is given out or received, and with respect to the payments to be
made for the work;
(d) seize or take copies of such register, record of wages or notices as he may consider
relevant in respect of an offence under the Act which he has reason to believe has been
committed by and employer; and exercise such other powers as may be prescribed [sec.
19
SUJEET JHA 147 9213188188

3.6 THE EMPLOYEES’ PROVIDENT FUNDS AND MISCELLANEOUS PROVISION

ACT, 1952
APPLICABILITY OF PE ACT [Sec. 1]
¾ Factory
1. every establishment which is a factory engaged in any industry specified in
schedule I and in which 20 or more persons are employed on any single day, and
2. any other establishment employing 20 or more persons or class of such
establishments which the Central Government may, by notification in the Official
Gazette, specify in this behalf.
¾ Extension
The Central Government by notification in the Official Gazette –
(a) add to Schedule I any other industry, where it is of the opinion that a Provident
fund scheme should be framed under this Act.[Sec. 4]
(b) may extend the provisions of this act to an establishment employing less than 20
persons after giving not less than 2 months notice of its intention.
¾ Voluntary:
The central PF Commissioner may apply of this Act on an application received
from employer and majority of employees by notification in the Office Gazette.
¾ Established to include all departments and branches [Sec. 2A]:

If established consists of different departments of branches, whether situated in the
same place or in different places, they shall be treated as part of the same
establishment
¾ Composite Factories:
Composite Factories engaged in more than one industry, which may include
activities covered in Schedule I as well as other activities. The test for determining
the applicability of the Act is whether the activity falling in Schedule I is its primary
and domination activity.
NON – APPLICABLE OF PF ACT [Sec. 16]
¾ Co-operative Society
An establishment fulfilling the following conditions:
(a) The establishment has been registered under the Co-operative Societies Act.
(b) It employs less than 50 persons.
(c) It is working without the aid of power
¾ Government Undertaking
Any establishment fulfilling the following conditions:
(a) It belongs to the CG or SG, or is under the control of CG or SG.
(b) The employees of the establishment are entitled to benefit of contributory
provident fund or old age pension.
¾ Undertaking constituted under an Act

Any establishment fulfilling the following conditions:
(a) It has been set up under any Central or State or provincial Act.
SUJEET JHA 148 9213188188

(b) The employees of the establishment are entitled to benefit of contributory

provident fund or old age pension.
¾ Power of Central Government to exempt certain Establishments [Sec. 16(2)]

(a) The Central Government may exempt certain establishments / class of
establishments from the applicability of this Act by way of a notification in the
Official Gazette.
(b) The exemption is granted taking into consideration –
- the financial position or
- other circumstances of the case and
- on the opinion of the Central Government that is expedient as specified,
either prospectively or retrospectively.
DEFINITIONS [Sec. 2]
¾ Appropriate Government [Sec. 2(a)]

• AG means CG in the following cases:
(i) In relation to an establishment belonging to, or under the control of, CG.
(ii) In relation to an establishment connected with a railway company, a major
port, a mine or an oil field or a controlled industry.
(iii)In relation to an establishment having departments or branches in more than
one State.
• In relation to any other establishment, AG means SG.
¾ Authorized officer [Sec. 2(aa)]

• Central Provident Fund Commissioner
• Additional Provident Fund Commissioner
• Deputy Provident Fund Commissioner
• Regional Provident Fund Commissioner
• Such other officer as may be authorized by CG, by notification in Official
Gazette.
¾ Basic wages [Sec. 2(b)]

• ‘Basic wages’ means –
- all emoluments
- Which are earned by an employee
- In accordance with the terms of the contract of employment
- Which are paid or payable in cash to him
- While (a) on duty; or
(b) while on leave with wages; or
(c) while on holidays with wages.
• ‘Basic wages’ does not include –
(a) the cash value of any food concession
(b) any dearness allowance (i.e., all cash payments by whatever name called, paid
to an employee on account of a rise in the cost of living)
(c) house – rent allowance, overtime allowance
¾ Employer [Sec. 2(e)]

• In relation to an establishment which is a factory, employer means-
(a) the owner or occupier of the factory (Occupier means the person who has
ultimate control over the affairs of the factory);
(b) the agent of such owner or occupier,
SUJEET JHA 149 9213188188
(c) the legal representative of a deceased owner or occupier

(d) Person named as a manager of the factory under the Factories Act.
• In relation to any other establishment, employer means –
(a) the person having the ultimate control over the affairs of the establishment;
(b) the manager or the managing director to whom the affairs of the
establishment are entrusted.
¾ Employee
• Employee means any person –
- who is employed for wages
- in any kind of work, whether manual or otherwise,
- in or in connection with the work of an establishment
- who gets his wages directly or indirectly from the employer.
• Employee includes any person –
(i) employed by or through a contractor in or in connection with the work of
establishment
(ii) engaged as an apprentice (not being an apprentice under the Apprentices Act,
1961or under the standing order of the established)
¾ Factory [Sec.2(g)]
Factory means –
- any premises including the precincts thereof
- in any of which a manufacturing process is being carried on or is ordinary so
carried on,
- whether with the aid of power or without the aid of power
¾ Exempted employee [Sec.2(ff)]

Exempted employee means an employee to whom the Scheme does not apply by
reason of exemption granted u/s 17-
¾ Exempted [Sec. 2(e) M 95, M 07

• In relation to – An establishment which is a Factory
- The owner or occupier of the factory, including agent of such owner or
occupier,
- The legal representative of a deceased owner or occupier, and
- Where a person has been named as a manager of the factory u/s 7 of the
factories Act, the person so named.
• Any other Establishment
- The person, who, or the Authority which, has the ultimate control over the
affairs of the establishment, and
- Where the said affairs are entrusted to a manager, managing director or
managing Agent, then such manager, managing director or managing agent.
¾ Manufacture or manufacturing process [Sec. 2(ic)]

Manufacture or manufacturing process means any process for making, altering
repairing ornamenting finishing, packing, oiling, washing cleaning breaking up,
demolishing or otherwise treating or adapting any article or substance with a view to
its use, sale, transport, delivery or disposal
¾ Industry [Sec. 2(i)]

Industry means any Industry specified in Schedule I, and includes any other industry
added to the Schedule by notification u/s 4.
SUJEET JHA 150 9213188188
The following have been held to be “Industries” –

(a) A Company doing business in renewing and reconditioning worn – out machine
parts.
(b) A Company carrying on the work of repair and servicing of Motor Cars.
(c) Sugar Factory, Confectionery, and Distillery located within one compound is one
Factory.
(d) A Laundry in which mechanical power was used for driving machines used in the
aid of the work of washing clothes.
(e) Department of publications and press run by a University.
THE CENTRAL BOARD (Sec. 5A)
Both Central Board of Trustees and Executive Committee under the EPF Act, are constituted by
the Central Government by Notification in the Official Gazette. The following are the
comparative points of composition etc –
¾ Administration of fund
• The fund vests in and is administered by Central Board of Trustees, i.e. Board of
Trustees or simply the Board.
• The Central Board is formed by CG by notification in the Official Gazette.
• In other words, Central Board shall administer the following funds:
(a) The Employees Provident Fund
(b) The Employees Pension Fund
(c) The Employees Deposit Linked Insurance Fund.
¾ Board is a body corporate

The Board of Trustees is a body corporate having perpetual succession and common
seal.
¾ Composition of Board
1 Chairman
1 Vice Chairman
1 Central Provident
fund commissioner
Maximum 5 Representing CG
officials
Maximum 15 Representing SG
officials
10 persons Representing - appointed by CG in consultation with
employers association of employers
10 persons Representing - appointed by CG in consultation with
employees organization of employees.
¾ Function of Central Board

Rights / Function Duties
1. Administration of the Fund: Rights to 1. Maintenance of Proper Accounts:
administer the fund subject to Sec. 6A To maintain proper accounts of
and 6C in such manner as specified in Income and expenditure in such
the scheme. from and manner as the Central
2. Performing Other Functions: Perform Government may specify.
such other functions as required of it 2. Audit of Accounts: To get the
SUJEET JHA 151 9213188188
under the Provident Fund Scheme, accounts audited annually by the C

Family Pension Scheme and Insurance & AG of India.
Scheme. 3. Forwarding Audit Report to Central
3. Appointment of Officers: Central Government: To forward the audited
Board shall appoint Additional, accounts together with explanations,
Deputy, Regional or Assistant if any, on any remarks of the Audit
Provident Fund commissioners and Report of the C & AG to the Central
other staff as may be considered Government.
necessary for efficient administration of 4. Submission of Annual Report: To
the Scheme. submit to the Central Government
4. Delegation of Functions: Central Board an Annual Report of its work and
shall delegate in powers and functions activities.
to any of its officers as it may deem
necessary for efficient administration.
EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE (Sec. 5AA)
¾ Composition of the committee

• Executive Committee is constituted by CG by notification in the Official Gazette.
• Executive committee shall consist of 13 members.
• The members of the Executive Committee are selected out of the members of the
Central Board.
• The Executive Committee consists of the following members:
Chairman - From amongst the members of the Central - appointed by CG.
Board
2 persons - From amongst the representatives of CG
elected to the Central Board
3 persons - From amongst the representatives of SG
elected to the Central Board
3 persons - From amongst the representatives of - elected by the
employers elected to the Central Board Central Board
3 persons - from amongst the representatives of
Employees elected to the Central Board.
Central Provident Fund Commissioner
¾ Purpose of constitution of Executive committee

• The purpose of executive committee is to assist the Central Board in its function.
• The Scheme shall provide for –
(a) Terms and conditions subject to which a member of the Central Board may be
appointed or elected to the Executive Committee.
(b) The time, place and procedure of the meetings of the Executive Committee
RECOVERY OF MONEY FROM EMPLOYER (Sec. 8B)
¾ Issue of certificate to recovery officer

The authorized officer is required to issue a certificate to Recovery Officer specifying
the amount due from the employer.
¾ Which recovery officer

The recovery certificate shall be sent to the Recovery Officer within whose
jurisdiction –
SUJEET JHA 152 9213188188
(a) the business or profession is situated; or

(b) employer resides; or
(c) Any immovable or movable property of establishment or employer is situated.
¾ Mode of recovery
(a) Attachment and sale of the movable or immovable property of the establishment.
If amount so recovered is insufficient for recovering the whole of the amount of
arrears specified in the certificate, the movable and immovable property of the
employer may also be attached and sold.
(b) Arrest of the employer and his detention in prison.
(c) Appointing a receiver for the management of the movable or immovable
properties of the establishment or the employer.
¾ Stay of proceeding
• The authorised officer may grant time for the payment of the amount, and
thereupon the Recovery Officer shall stay the proceeding until the expiry of the
time so granted.
• The stay of proceedings may be granted notwithstanding that a certificate has
been issued to the Recovery Officer for the recovery of any amount.
TRANSFER OF ACCOUNTS (Sec.17A)
¾ If the new establishment is covered under PF Act

If
- an employer who is a member of PF, leaves an establishment
- he obtains re-employment in another establishment
- the new establishment is also covered under PF Act
Then
- the amount standing to his credit will be transferred to his account in the
new establishment (i.e. the establishment where he is re – employed)
¾ If the new establishment is not covered under PF Act

If
- an employee who is a member of PF, leaves an establishment
- he obtains re-employment in another establishment
- the new establishment is not covered under PF Act
- the new establishment has a Provident Fund of its own
- the rules of such provident fund permit such transfer
Then
- at the request of employee
- within such time as be specified CG
new establishment
¾ If the old establishment was not covered under PF Act

If
- an employee is employed in an establishment to which the provisions of
the PF Act do not apply
- such establishment has its own Provident Fund
- the rules of such provident fund permit such transfer
- the employee leaves such establishment
- he obtains re – employment in another establishment
SUJEET JHA 153 9213188188
- the new establishment is covered under PF Act

Then
- at the request of employee
new establishment
PROTECTION AGAINST ATTACHMENT (Sec. 10)
¾ Nature of protections
The amount standing to the credit of any member in the fund –
(a) shall not in anyway be capable of being assigned or charged:
(b) shall not be liable to attachment under any decree or order of any court in respect
of any debt or liability;
(c) shall not be capable of being claimed by the official assignee or the official
receiver:
(d) Shall be free from debt or other liability (in the hands of the nominee) incurred by
the deceased member.
¾ No protection
The employee cannot claim any protection in respect of the money which has been
withdrawn him from the PF Account.
LIABILITY OF EMPLOYER IN CASE OF TRANSFER OF ESTABLISHMENT (Sec.

17B)
¾ Contribution due upto the date of transfer

If an employer transfer (whether by way of gift, sale, lease or any other mode) an
establishment, he as well as transferee of the establishment shall be jointly and
severally responsible for contributions and other sums due upto the date of transfer of
establishment.
¾ Limitation on liability
Liability of transferor
The liability of transferor shall be limited with respect to the period upto the date of
transfer.
Liability of transferee
The liability of transferee shall be limited to the assets obtained by him by way of
transfer of establishment.
INSPECTORS (Sec. 13)
¾ Appointment
• AG is empowered to appoint the inspectors for the purpose of EPF Act, EPF
Scheme, pension Scheme, and Insurance Scheme. The appointment of inspector
shall be made by issue of a notification in the Official Gazette.
• The respective jurisdiction of the inspectors shall be specified by shall
Appropriate Government.
• The inspector is a ‘public servant’ within the meaning of Sec. 21 or IPC.
¾ Powers of inspector
(a) To call such information from the employer or contractor as he considers
necessary.
SUJEET JHA 154 9213188188
(b) To enter into any establishment and require production of any books, registers
and documents.
(c) To examine the employer, his agent or servants.
(d) To make copies and take extracts of any book, register or other document.
(e) To seize the books, registers or other documents as he considers necessary if he
has reason to believe that any offence under this Act has been committed by an
employer.
(f) To exercise such other powers as may be provided in PF Scheme. Pension
Scheme or Insurance Scheme.
17. SCHEMES COVERED UNDER THE ACT
Schemes under EPF Act
Employees Provident Employee’s Pension Employee’s Deposit Linked

Fund Scheme Scheme Insurance Scheme
A. EMPLOYEES PROVIDENT FUND SCHEME
¾ Quantum of contribution
Employer’s contribution
- 10% of pay (i.e., basic wages plus dearness allowance plus retaining allowance) –
Employer’s contribution
- 10% of pay.
- Employee may voluntarily contribute a higher amount.
Rounding off
The contribution has to be rounded off to nearest rupee.
‘Dearness allowance’
Dearness allowance includes cash value of any food concession allowed to the employee.
‘Retaining allowance’
Retaining allowance means an allowance payable to an employee during any period
during which the establishment is not working for retaining his services.
¾ Increase in rate of contribution
- CG is empowered to increase the rate of contribution to 12%.
- The power shall be exercise by way of a notification in the Official
Gazette.
¾ Employee earning more than Rs.6,500

If the pay of an employee exceeds Rs.6,500, the Employer’s contribution shall be 10%
12% of Rs.6,500.
¾ Diversion to Employees’ Pension Scheme

Out of employer’s contribution of 10%/ 12%, the Employer’s contribution of 8.33%
shall be diverted to Employees’ Pension Scheme.
¾ Investment of the contributions

- The Board of Trustees is responsible for managing the Fund.
- The moneys of the Fund shall be invested by the Board of Trustees as per the
investment plans approved by the Central Government.
- Members (i.e. Employees) get interest on the money standing to their credit at a rate
recommended by the Government.
SUJEET JHA 155 9213188188

¾ Advances and withdrawals

Employees are allowed to withdraw from their account for specific purposes.
B. EMPLOYEES PENSION SCHEME FROUDED BY (Sec. 6A)
- Employer’s contribution of 8.33% shall be diverted to Employer’s Pension Scheme.
- CG can contribute to the pension fund, as approved by the parliament.
¾ Benefit under the scheme

(a) Members will get pension –
- on superannuation; or
- on retirement from service; or
- upon permanent total disablement during employment.
(b) Pension, will be available to widow/widower for life or till he/she remarries.
(c) Children will be entitled to pension, upto 25 years of their age. Benefit of pension to
children is restricted only for 2 children.
(d) Orphans will be entitled to pension at enhanced rate. Benefit of pension to orphans is
restricted only for 2 orphans.
(e) If the person is unmarried or has no family, pension is available to nominee for a
specified period.
(f) Funds managed by 6A(4) : Central Board of Trustees constituted u/s 5A.
(g) Scheme provides for 6A(5): All or any of the matters specified in Schedule III.
(h) Period of effect of Scheme 6A(6): Prospectively, or
: Retrospectively from such date as may be
specified
C. EMPLOYEE’S DEPOSIT LINKED INSURANCE SCHEME
Employer
The employer is required to pay contribution which cannot be more than 1% of pay of
employee. Presently, the rate of contribution is 0.5%.
Employee
The employees do not contribute any amount to the scheme.
CG
CG also contributes to the – Insurance Fund at the rate of 0.25% of pay of every
employee.
Administration charges
Employer is also required to pay administration charges for the Insurance Scheme, which
shall not be more than 0.25% of pay of employee. Presently, the rate of contribution is
0.01% of pay of employee subject to a minimum of Rs.2 per month per member.
¾ Exemption from the scheme

- Exemption from the scheme can be obtained if LIC Group Gratuity scheme is
adopted by employer.
- If exemption is granted, only inspection charges of 0.005% of pay are payable to PF
authorities.
SUJEET JHA 156 9213188188

3.7 THE PAYMENT OF BONUS ACT, 1965

1. APPLICABILITY OF THE ACT (Sec. 1)
¾ Factories
The Act applies to every factory
¾ Establishment employing 20 or more persons

The Act applies to every establishment in which 20 or more persons are employed on
any day of the AY.
¾ Establishment employing less than 20 persons
The Act applies to every other establishment or class of establishments if –
• It employs to 10 or more persons (i.e. it employs persons between 10 and 19 in
number);
• The provisions of the Act are made applicable to it by way of a Notification in the
Official Gazette by AG; and
• Before issuing such notification, at least 2 months’ notice was given to the
establishment by AG.
¾ Once applicable forever applicable
- If the Act becomes applicable to an establishment in any AY.
- It shall continue to be applicable to the establishment
- Even if the number of persons employed by it falls below the minimum number
of person as required for the applicability of the Act.
2. NON – APPLICABILITY OF THE ACT Sec.32
1. Employees employed by -
(a) General insurance companies
(b) LIC
2. Seamen as defined under merchant shipping Act, 1958
3. Employees registered under any scheme made under the Dock Workers (Regulation of
Employment) Act, 1948 and employed by registered or listed employers.
4. Employees employed by Inland Water Transport Establishments operating on routes
passing through any other country.
5. Employees employed by RBI, CG, SG or a local authority.
6. Employees employed by Indian Red Cross Society, universities or other educational
institutions, institutions established not for purpose of profit.
7. Employees employed by SFC, NHB, NABARD, IFCI, IDBI, SIDBI, UTI.
8. Any other financial institution notified in the Official Gazette.
3. ACCOUNTING YEAR [(Sec.2(1)]
¾ In relation to a corporation
The year ending on the day on which the books and accounts of the corporation are to be
closed and balanced.
¾ In relation to a company
The period in respect of which P & L Account of the company is prepared.
¾ In any other case

(a) The year commencing on the 1st April and ending on following 31st March;
SUJEET JHA 157 9213188188

(b) However, the employer has an option to close and balance the accounts of the
establishment on any day other 31st day of March. In such a case, AY shall end on
the day on which the accounts are so closed and balanced.
In other words, the employer may exercise the option to close and balance the
accounts on any particular day every year. But such option can be exercised only
once.
(c) Further exercise of option shall require the previous permission in writing of the prescribed
authority and compliance of conditions as specified by the prescribed authority.
4. MEANING OF ESTABLISHMENT
Any unit, undertaking or place of business in which –

• Any commercial activity or business is carried on; or
• Services are rendered,
Under any form of business organization.
5. ESTABLISHMENTS TO INCLUDE DEPARTMENTS, UNDERTAKINGS, AND

BRANCHES (Sec. 3)
¾ General rule
For the purpose of computation of bonus, an establishment shall include department,
undertakings, and branches.
¾ Exception
A branch, department or undertaking shall not be treated as part of an establishment if
the following 2 conditions are satisfied.
(a) A separate B/S and P & L A/c has been prepared for such branch, department or
undertaking.
(b) Such branch, department or undertaking has never been treated as part of the
establishment for the purpose of computation of bonus.
6. EMPLOYEE [Sec .2(13)]
¾ Meaning of employee
• any person employed (other than an apprentice)
• on a salary or wage not exceeding Rs.10,000 per month
• in any industry
• to do any work (i.e. skilled, unskilled, manual, supervisory, managerial,
administrative, technical or clerical)
• for hire or reward
• Whether the terms of employment are express or implied.
¾ Illustrative list of employees entitled to bonus

• Probationer
• Dismissed employee (provided Sec.9 is not attracted) or suspended employee.
• Retrenched employee
• Temporary employee
• Part time employee
• Employee of a seasonal factory – proportional Bonus according to number of days
work.
• Piece rated employee
SUJEET JHA 158 9213188188

7. “EMPLOYER” [(Sec. 2(14)]
¾ If establishment is a factory
(a) Owner
(b) Occupier (Occupier means the person who has ultimate control over the affairs of the
establishment)
(c) Agent of owner or occupier
(d) Legal representative of deceased owner or occupier
(e) The person named as a manager of the factory under the Factories Act.
¾ If it is any other establishment

(a) The person having ultimate control over the affairs of the establishment
(b) The manager or the managing director to whom the affairs of the establishment are
entrusted.
8. ‘SALARY OR WAGE’ [(Sec. 2(21)]
¾ ‘Salary or wage’ means

- remuneration in respect of work done
- which would become payable to an employee
- if the terms of employment (whether expressed or implied) were fulfilled.
¾ ‘Salary or wage’ includes

(a) Dearness allowance (i.e. all cash payments by whatever name called, paid to an
employee on account of a rise in the cost of living)
(b) Food allowance or the value of free food given by the employer in lieu of salary)
¾ ‘Salary or wage’ does not include

(a) Allowances
(b) Commission
(c) Bonus (including incentive, production and attendance Bonus)
(d) Traveling concession
(e) Ex-grata payment
(f) Retrenchment compensation, gratuity or other retirement benefits
(g) Any amenity, service, or concessional supply of food grains or other articles
(h) Employer’s contribution to PF or pension fund
(i) Remuneration in respect of overtime work.
9. ELIGIBILITY FOR BONUS (Sec. 8)
Every employee is eligible for bonus if he has worked in the establishment ≥ 30 working days in
a AY.
10. DISQUALIFICATION FOR BONUS (Sec. 9)
¾ Conditions for applicability of Sec.9

An employee is disqualified for bonus (and is therefore not eligible to receive bonus) if –
- he has been dismissed from service; and
- the reason for his dismissal was –
SUJEET JHA 159 9213188188

(a) fraud; or
(b) riotous or violent behavior while on the premises of the establishment; or
(c) theft, misappropriation or sabotage of any property of the establishment.
¾ Effects of Sec.9
An employee who becomes disqualified u/s 9 shall not be eligible to receive any bonus
(whether for current AY or for any previous AY) under the Act.
11. PAYMENT OF MINIMUM BONUS (Sec.10, 11, 12, 13 and 14)
¾ Computation of Allocable surplus (Sec.11)

Amount set on/set off u/s 15 shall be taken into account while computing the allocable
surplus for any AY.
¾ Amount of minimum bonus (Sec. 10)

Whether or not the employer has allocable surplus in an AY, every employer is bound to
pay to every employee (eligible as per Sec. 8) in respect of every AY, minimum bonus,
as follows.
Employee aged ≥ 15 years Higher of - 8.33% of salary or wage or Rs.100
Employee aged < 15 years Higher of - 8.33% of salary or wage or Rs.60
¾ Proportionate reduction in minimum bonus (Sec. 13)

The minimum bonus of Rs.100/60 shall be proportionately reduced if the employee has
not worked on all the working days in the AY.
- computation of number of working days (Sec. 14)
It shall be deemed that the employee had worked on the days on which the
employee was –
(a) laid off;
(b) on leave with salary or wages;
(c) on maternity leave with salary or wages;
(d) Absent due to temporary disablement caused arising out of and in the course
of his employment.
¾ Ceiling on salary or wage (Sec.12)

If the salary or wage of an employee exceeds Rs.3,500 per month, the salary or wage for
the purpose of computation of bonus shall be taken as Rs.3,500 per month.
12. PAYMENT OF MAXIMUM BONUS (Sec.11 and 12)
¾ Computation of Allocable surplus (Sec.11)

Amount set on/set off u/s 15 shall be taken into account while computing the allocable
surplus for any AY.
¾ Amount of maximum bonus (Sec.11)

If, in an AY, allocable surplus exceeds the amount of minimum bonus, the employer
shall pay to every employee, in lieu of minimum bonus, which shall be an amount in
proportion to the salary or wage earned by the employee during the AY subject to a
maximum of 20% of such salary or wage (Sec.11). Following conclusions may be
drawn;
• Sec, 11 applies if, in an AY, allocable surplus exceeds the amount of minimum
bonus;
SUJEET JHA 160 9213188188

• If Sec, 11 applies, the whole of the allocable surplus shall be divided (i.e.
payment shall be made in the form of bonus) amongst the employees in
proportion of their salary or wage.
• However, if division of whole of the allocable surplus amongst the employees in
proportion of their salary or wage exceeds 20% of salary or wage of the
employees, then –
(a) Such excess shall be carried forward for being set on in the 4 succeeding
AY(s);
(b) Every employee shall be paid bonus equal to 20% of his salary or wage (this
payment of maximum of 20% is termed as ‘maximum bonus’).
¾ Ceiling on salary or wage (Sec. 12)

If the salary or wage of an employee exceeds Rs.3,500 per month, the salary or wage for
the purpose of computation of bonus shall be taken as Rs.3,500 per month.
13. SET ON AND SET OFF OF ALLOCABLE SURPLUS (Sec.15)
¾ Allocable surplus > maximum bonus

If, in any AY, allocable surplus (after taking into account the amount set on / set off u/s
15) exceeds maximum bonus, such exceeds (subject to a limit of 20% of salary or wage
of the employees) shall be –
• Carried forward
• For being set on in the 4 succeeding AY(s) in the manner illustrated in Fourth
Schedule.
¾ Allocable surplus < minimum bonus

If, in any AY, allocable surplus (after taking into account the amount set on/set off u/s
15) is less than the minimum bonus, such deficiency shall be –
• Carried forward
• For being set off in the 4 succeeding AY(s) in the manner illustrated in Fourth
Schedule.
¾ Utilization of amount carried forward

- While calculating bonus for any succeeding AY.
- The amount of set off carried forward from the earliest AY.
- Shall first be taken into account.
14. DEDUCTIONS FROM BONUS (Sec. 17 and 18)
¾ Adjustment of bonus (Sec.17)

The employer is entitled to deduct from bonus payable to an employee –
(a) the amount paid as customary bonus (e.g. puja bonus);
(b) the amount paid as interim bonus (i.e. bonus paid before it became payable)
¾ Deductions from bonus (Sec.18)

Conditions
(a) An employee is found guilty of misconduct
(b) Financial loss is actually caused to the employer.
Effects
• The loss caused to the employer may be recovered from the bonus payable to the
employee.
SUJEET JHA 161 9213188188

• Such deduction can be made only from the amount of bonus payable in respect of
same AY in which the employee has caused financial loss to the employer.
15. TIME LIMIT FOR PAYMENT OF BONUS (Sec. 19)
¾ If there is a dispute regarding payment of bonus

The bonus shall be paid within 1 month of-
- award becoming enforceable ;or
- settlement coming into operation
¾ In any other case
Time limit – the bonus shall be paid within 8 months from the end of AY.
Extension of period.
• AG may extent the time limit for payment of bonus.
• Conditions for extension of time are as follows:
(a) An application shall be made by the employer to AG.
(b) AG must be satisfied that there are sufficient reasons to grant extension of
time for payment of bonus.
(c) Total period including the period of extension shall not exceed 2 years.
16. PAYMENT OF BONUS LINKED WITH PRODUCTION OR PRODUCTIVITY

(Sec.31A)
¾ Applicability of Sec.31A
• Sec. 31A applies only if there is an agreement or settlement between the employer
and employers to pay annual bonus linked with production or productivity.
• Sec. 31A overrides the entire Act.
¾ Terms of the agreement

The agreement or settlement may provide that –
- the bonus shall be paid annually to employees;
- such bonus shall be linked production or productivity;.
- Such bonus shall be paid in lieu of bonus based on profits.
¾ Agreement to be void
The agreement or settlement shall be null and void in so far as it purports to deprive an
employee of his right to minimum bonus. In other words, every employee shall have a
right to receive the minimum bonus even though bonus calculated as per the provision of
the agreement or settlement is less than the amount of minimum bonus.
¾ Ceiling on bonus
The bonus linked with production or productivity calculated as per the agreement or
settlement shall not exceed 20% of salary or wages earned in the relevant AY.
17. RECOVERY OF BONUS DUE FROM AN EMPLOYER (Sec. 21)
¾ Application by whom?
(a) Employee (including an employee who is no longer in employment)
(b) Any person authorized by the employee in writing
(c) Legal heirs of the employee.
¾ Time limit
SUJEET JHA 162 9213188188
• Application shall be made within 1 year of bonus becoming due for payment
• Time limit for making application may be extended by AG it sufficient cause is
shown.
¾ Application to whom?
The application shall be made to AG.
¾ Issue of recovery certificate

If AG is satisfied that bonus is due. It shall issue a recovery certificate.
¾ Recovery by collector
The bonus shall be recovered by the collector in the same manner as if it were arrears of
land revenue.
¾ Delegation of powers
The powers u/s 21 may be delegated by AG to such authority as may be specified by
AG.
18. SPECIAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO NEW ESTABILISHMENTS (Sec. 16)
¾ First 5 years
(a) Bonus is payable only in respect of an AY in which the employer derives profit.
(b) Bonus shall be calculated in accordance with the provision of the Act.
(c) The Provisions of Sec. 15 (Set on/set off of allocable surplus) shall not apply.
¾ 6th year
Set on / set off shall be made
Taking into account the excess/deficiency of the allocable surplus
In respect of 5th and 6th AY.
¾ 7th year
Set on/set off shall be made
Taking into account the excess / deficiency of the allocable surplus
In respect of 5th, 6th, and 7th AY.
¾ 8th year onwards

Sec. 15 (set on or set off) shall apply as it applies to any other establishment
¾ Meaning of newly set up establishment

An establishment shall not be deemed to be newly set up merely by reason of a change in
its location, management, name or ownership
¾ Meaning of employer deriving profit

An employer shall not be deemed to have derived profit in any AY, unless –
(a) depreciation for such AY has been provided; and
(b) the arrears of depreciation and losses incurred during earlier AY(s) have been fully
set off against the profits.
¾ Manner of reckoning first five, 6th, 7th and 8th AY.

First AY means the AY following the AY in which the employer sells the goods
manufactured by him or renders services, as the case may be, from such establishment.
Similarly, other AY(s) shall be construed.
SUJEET JHA 163 9213188188
¾ Meaning of ‘sale of goods’

Sale of goods manufactured during the trial running of any factory or of the prospecting
stage of any mine or an oil field shall not be taken into consideration.
19. PRESUMPTION ABOUT ACCURACY OF B/S AND P&L A/C OF CORPOR-

ATIONS AND COMPANIES (Sec.23)
¾ Applicability of Sec. 23 – Conditions

(a) There is dispute relating to –
- payment of bonus; or
- Applicability of Payment of Bonus Act, 1965.
(b) The dispute is filled with any Court, Tribunal or Arbitrator (hereinafter referred to as
the ‘said authority’).
(c) The employer is a corporation or a company.
(d) During the course of proceedings, the B/S and P & L A/c of such corporation or
company are produced before the said authority.
(e) The B/S and P&L A/c have been audited –
• In case of a company - by an auditor qualified u/s 226.
• In case of a corporation - by CAG.
¾ Presumptions about
(a) The said authority may presume that the particulars contained in such B/S and P & L
A/c are accurate.
(b) It shall not be necessary for the corporation or company to –
• Prove the accuracy of such B/S and P & L A/c; or
• Produce any affidavit for establishing such accuracy.
20. AUDITED ACCOUNTS OF BANKING COMPANIES NOT TO BE

QUESTIONED (Sec. 24)
¾ Applicability of Sec.24 – Conditions

(a) There is a dispute relating to -
• Payment of bonus; or
• Applicability of Payment of Bonus Act. 1965
(c) The dispute is filled with any Court, Tribunal or Arbitrator (hereinafter referred to as
(d) The employer is a banking company.
(e) During the course of proceedings, the accounts of banking company are produced
before the said authority.
(f) The accounts have been duly audited.
¾ Presumptions about the accounts

(a) The said authority may presume that the accounts are accurate.
(b) No trade union or employee shall be allowed to question the correctness of such
accounts.
21. AUDIT OF ACCOUNTS OF EMPLOYERS, NOT BEING CORPORATIONS OR

COMPANIES (Sec. 25)
¾ Applicability of Sec. 25 – Conditions

SUJEET JHA 164 9213188188
(a) There is a dispute relating to

- payment of bonus; or
- applicability of payment of Bonus Act, 1965
(b) The dispute is filled with any court. Tribunal or Arbitrator (hereinafter referred to as
(c) The employer is any person other than a corporation or a company.
(d) During the course of proceedings, the accounts of such employer are produced before
the said authority.
(e) The accounts of the employer have been duly auditor who is duly qualified to act as
an auditor of a company (u/s 226 of the companies Act, 1965).
¾ Presumptions about the accounts

(a) The said authority may presume that the accounts are accurate.
(b) It shall not be necessary for the employer to –
- prove the accuracy of such accounts; or
- Produce any affidavit for establishing such accuracy.
¾ Order for audit of accounts

Nature of order
The said authority may order the employer to get his accounts audited –
- within such time as may be specified in the order; and
- by such auditor as may be specified in the order.
Conditions for making order
The said authority may make such an order, if –
- the accounts of the employer are not audited by an auditor qualified u/s 226;and
- it is of the opinion that audit of accounts is necessary for deciding the dispute.
Consequences of default by employer
If the employer fails to get his accounts audited –
- the said authority may get the accounts audited by such auditor as it thinks fit;
- the remuneration paid to the auditor and other incident expenses shall be paid by
the employer.
Presumption of accuracy
The accounts so audited shall be presumed to be accurate.
22. Provisions As To Maintenance Of Records And Registers [Sec.26]
1. Maintenance of Registers, Records etc. [Sec.26]: Every Employer shall prepare

and maintain such registers, records and other documents in such from and in such
manner as may be prescribed.
2. Duty of Employers: Maintenance of records and registers is an obligation, and a
duty imposed on the Employers for due discharge of their duties regarding payment
of Bonus.
3. Production of Records: The Employer is legally bound to produce the registers and
accounts when called upon by an Inspector.
4. Offence: Non – maintenance and non – production of records and registers is an
offences.
5. Registers to be maintained : Rule 4 of Payment of Bonus Rules, 1965 prescribes
the following registers to be maintained by the Employers, viz. –
Register in - Register to contain –
Form A Computation of Allocate Surplus referred to in Sec.2(4)
Form B Set – on and Set – off of Allocable Surplus u/s 15.
Form C ¾ Details of amount of Bonus due to each of the
SUJEET JHA 165 9213188188
Employees,
¾ Deductions under Sec.17 and 18, and
¾ Amount Actually disbursed to the Employees.
23. INSPECTORS (Sec. 27)
¾ Manner of appointment
The inspectors shall be appointed by AG by Notification in the Official Gazette.
¾ Numbers and jurisdiction

• Such number of inspectors may be appointed as AG may deem fit.
• AG may define the limits within which the inspectors shall exercise jurisdiction.
¾ Powers of inspector
(a) To call such information from the employer as he considers necessary
(b) To enter into any establishment and require production of any books, registers and
documents.
(c) To examine the employer, his agent or servants.
(d) To make copies and take extracts of any book, register or other document
(e) To exercise such other powers as may be prescribed.
¾ Purpose of appointment
To ascertain whether or not the provisions of the Act have been complied with by an
employer.
¾ Duties of owners etc.

Any person required to produce any accounts, books, register or other documents or to
give information by an Inspector shall be legally bound to –
(a) Produce accounts, books, register or other documents required by the Inspector.
(b) Give information required by the Inspector.
24. EXEMPTION FROM PROVISIONS OF THE ACT (Sec. 36)
¾ Grounds for exemption

Before granting exemption, AG shall consider financial position and other relevant
circumstances.
¾ Opinion of AG
The exemption shall be given only if AG is satisfied that it is not in public interest to
apply all or any of the provisions of this Act to an establishment or class of
establishments.
¾ Publication of order
The order of exemption shall be published by way of a notification in the Official
Gazette.
¾ Contents of order of exemption

The order of exemption shall specify –
- conditions, subject to which exemption is given, and
- period of exemption
25. ESTABLISHMENT IN PUBLIC SECTOR (Sec. 2(16) and (20)]

SUJEET JHA 166 9213188188
¾ Meaning [Sec,. 2(16)]

Establishment in public sector means an establishment owned, controlled or managed by
–
(a) a Government company; or as defined u/s 617 of the companies Act, 1965.
(b) a corporation in which 40% or more capital is held by –
- CG, SG, RBI or a corporation owned by CG, SG, or RBI.
¾ Applicability of Act (Sec. 20)

General rule
The Act does not apply to an establishment in public sector.
Exception
The Act shall apply if the following 2conditions are satisfied;
(a) In an AY, it sells any goods or renders any services, in competition with an
establishment in private sector.
(b) The income from such or services or bo is 20% or more of its gross total income of
the establishment in public sectors for that accounting year.
26. Procedure for Settlement of Disputes [Sec.22]

1. Area of dispute: Disputes may arise between the employer and employee with
respect to –
(a) Bonus payable under this Act, or
(b) Applicability of the provisions of this Act to establishment in Public
Section
2. Settlement: Any such dispute shall be deemed to be an Industrial Dispute within
the meaning of –
(a) the industrial Dispute Act, or
(b) Any corresponding law relating to investigation & Settlement of industrial
dispute in force in the State.
Hence, the provisions of the Industrial Disputes Act or of such law in force shall apply to
the settlement of disputes, unless otherwise expressly provided.
27 Some Other Definitions

1. Appropriate Government [Sec.2(5)
Situation Appropriate Government

An establishment in respect of which the Central Government
Appropriate Government under the Industrial
Disputes Act, 1947 is the Central Government.
Any other Establishment Government of the State in which the
Establishment is situated.
2. Award [Sec.2(7)]: Award means:

(a) An interim or a final determination,
(b) of any industrial dispute or of any question relation thereto,
(c) By – (i) any labour court, Industrial Tribunal or National Tribunal constituted under
the Industrial Dispute Act, 1947 or (ii) any other authority constituted under any
corresponding law relation to investigation and settlement of industrial dispute in force
in the State, and includes an Arbitration Award made u/s 10 A of that Act.
3. Co- Operative Society [Sec.2(10)]: A Society registered or deemed to be registered
under the Co – Operative Society Act, 1912, or under any other law for the time being in
force in any State relating to Co – operative Societies.
SUJEET JHA 167 9213188188
4. Corporation [Sec.2(11)]: Corporation means any Body Corporate established by or

under any Central, Provincial or State Act, Corporation does not include a Company or a
Co – Operative Society.
5. Company [Sec.2(9)]: Company means as defined u/s 3 of the Companies Act, 1956, and
includes a Foreign Company within the meaning of Sec. 591 of that Act.
6. Allocable Surplus [Sec.2(4)]: Most Imp.
In relation to Allocable surplus

An Employer being a company other than a 67% of the Available surplus in an Accounting
banking company which has not made the Year.
arrangements prescribed under the Income Tax
Act, for the declaration and payment within
India, of dividends payable out of its profits in
accordance with Sec.194 of the said Act
In any other case 60% of the Available surplus in an Accounting
Year.
7. Available Surplus [Sec.2(6)]: RTP, N 83, N 02

Available surplus means the Available Surplus as computed u/s 5.
8. Establishment in Private Sector [Sec.2(15)]:
It means any Establishment other than an establishment in Public Sector
Offences by Companies [Sec.29]

1. Definitions : For the purpose of this Section -
(a) “Company” means any Body Corporate and includes a Firm or other –
Association of Individual, and
(b) “Director”, in relation to a Firm, means a Partner in the Firm.
2. Liability of Company and Person In charge: Where an offence has been committed by
a company, every person who, at any time when the offence was committed, was in
charge of and was responsible to, the Company for the conduct of the business of the
Company as well as the Company, shall be deemed to be guilty of the offence, and shall
be liable to be proceeded against and punishable accordingly.
3. Due Diligence: it the person who is liable to any punishment under this Act proves that
the offence was committed without his knowledge or that he exercised all due diligence
to prevent the commission of such offence, then such person is not liable.
4. Liability of officers/ Directors etc: Where an offence has been committed by a
Company and it is proved that the offence has been committed with the consent or
connivance of, or is attributable to any gross negligence on the part of any Director,
Manager, Secretary or other of the Company, such Director, Manager, Secretary or other
officer of the company shall also be deemed to be guilty of the offence and shall be liable
to be proceeded against and punished accordingly.
SUMMARISED PROCEDURE FOR COMPUTATION OF BONUS

Step 1. Computer gross profit
Step 2. Deduct prior charges from gross profits
Step 3. Compute available surplus
Step 4. Compute allocable surplus
Step 5. Compute bonus
Step 1. Computation of gross profit

Net profit as shown in P & L Account after making usual and necessary provision
Add:
SUJEET JHA 168 9213188188
1. Provision for bonus, depreciation and reserves.

2. Bonus paid to employees in respect of previous accounting years.
3. Gratuity paid or payable to employees in excess of the aggregate of –
(a) the provision made for approved gratuity fund; and
(b) the amount actually paid to employees on their retirement or on termination of
their employment.
4. Donations in excess of the amount admissible for income tax.
5. Capital expenditure
6. Losses and expenditure of any business situated outside India.
7. Income directly credited to reserves
Less:
1. Capital receipts and capital profits.
2. Profits of any business situated outside India.
3. Refund of any excess direct tax paid for previous AY.
4. Cash subsidy received from the Government
Gross profit
Step 2. Deduct prior charges from gross profit
Gross profit
Less:
1. Development Rebate
2. Development Allowance
3. Investment Allowance
4. Depreciation admissible under Income Tax Act.
5. Direct tax which the employer is liable to pay for the AY.
6. Sums referred to in the Third Schedule, viz –
(a) 8.5% of equity share capital (at the beginning of the AY)
(b) 6% of Reserve (at the beginning of the AY)
(c) Dividend paid on preference shares at actual rate.
Gross profit after charges
Step 3. Computation of available surplus [Sec. 2(6) real with Sec. 5]

Gross profits after prior charges
Add: Tax saved in respect of bonus paid during the preceding AY [Tax on Gross Profit less
Tax on (Gross Profits Bonus paid)
Available surplus
Step 4. Computation of allocable surplus [Sec.2(4)]
(a) If an employer is a company, which has not made prescribed arrangements for
declaration and payment of dividend as per Sec.194 of Income Tax Act 1961, then
the allocable surplus shall be 67% of the available surplus.
(b) In any other case, the allocable surplus shall be 60% of available surplus.
Step 5. Compute bonus

Bonus shall be calculated as per the provisions contained in Sec.10, 11, 12, 15 and other
applicable provision of the Act.
SUJEET JHA 169 9213188188

3.8 THE PAYMENT OF GRATUITY ACT, 1972

1. APPLICABILITY OF THE ACT
Initial Applicability (Sec.1(3) Continued Applicability [Sec.1(3A)

The Act applies to – A shop or Establishment to which this Act has
(a) Every Factory, Mine, Oilfield, become applicable shall continue, to be
Plantation, Port and Railway governed by this Act notwithstanding that the
Company, number of persons employed therein at any
(b) Every Shop or Establishment time after it has become so applicable falls
within the meaning of any law for below 10.
the time being in relation to shops
and establishments in a State, in
which 10 or more persons are
employed, or were employed, on
any day of the preceding 12
months,
(c) Such other establishments or class
of establishments, in which 10 or
more employee are employed, or
were employed, on any day of the
preceding 12 months, as specified
by Central Government
Notification.
¾ Right to receive gratuity

An employee is eligible to receive gratuity under the Act, if -
• He is employed in an establishment to which the Act applies (Sec.1)
• He is an employee as per Sec.2(e).
• He has been in continuous service of 5 years – subject to some exceptions.
2. DEFINITIONS (Sec.2)
¾ Appropriate Government [Sec. 2(a)]

• In relation to any of the following establishment, AG means CG:
(i) An establishment belonging to, or under the control of, CG.
(ii) An establishment, being a factory, belonging to, or under the control of, CG.
(iii) An establishment connected with a railway company, a major port, a mine or
an oil field.
(iv) An establishment having branches in more than one state.
• In relation to any other establishment, AG means SG.
¾ Family [Sec.2(h)]
In the case of a male employee, family In the case of a female employee, family
means- means –
• The employee himself • The employee herself
• Wife of employee • Husband of employee
• Children of employee (whether • Children of employee (whether
married or unmarried) married or unmarried)
• Dependent parents of employee • Dependent parents of employee
SUJEET JHA 170 9213188188

• Dependent parents of wife of • Dependent parents of husband of

employee employee
• Widow and children of predeceased • Widow and children of predeceased
son of employee son of employee.
If – the personal law of an employee permits adoption by him/her of a child; and

- the employee lawfully adopts a child
Then – the adopted child shall be deemed to be included in his/her family.
If – any child of the employee is adopted by another person; and
- the personal law of the person making such adoption permits such adoption
Then – such child shall be deemed to be excluded from his/her family.
¾ Factory [Sec.2(g)]
‘Factory’ means - ‘Factory’ does not include -

Any premises including the precincts (i) a mine covered under the Mines Act,
(adjoining area) thereof – 1952;
(i) wherein 10 or more workers are (ii) mobile unit belonging to the armed
working or were working on any forces of the Union;
day of the preceding 12 months, (iii) a railway running shed;
and in any part of which a (iv) a hotel, restaurant or eating place.
manufacturing process is being
carried on with the aid of power, or
is ordinarily so carried on; or
(ii) wherein 20 more workers are
working or were working on any
day of the preceding 12 months,
and in any part of which a
manufacturing process is being
carried on without the aid of power,
or is ordinarily so carried on.
¾ Employee [Sec. 2(e)]

Employee means –
• Any person (other than an apprentice)
• Employed on wages
• In any establishment, factory, mine, oilfield, plantation, port or railway company or
shop
• To do any work (i.e. skilled, unskilled, manual, supervisory, technical or clerical)
• Whether the terms of employment are express or implied
• Whether or not he is employed in a managerial or administrative capacity.
Employee does not include –

• A person who holds a post under CG or SG
• If he is governed by any other Act or by any Rules proving for payment of gratuity:
¾ Employer [Sec.2(f)]
• In relation to any establishment, factory, mine, oilfield, plantation, port or railway
company or shop belonging to or under the control of the CG or SG, employer means
–
SUJEET JHA 171 9213188188

(a) the person or authority appointed by AG for the supervision and control of
employers;
(b) head of the Ministry or the Department concerned, in case no person or authority
is appointed by AG for the supervision and control of employees.
• In relation to any establishment, factory, mine, oilfield, plantation, port or railway

company or shop belonging to or under the control of a local authority, employer
means –
(a) the person or authority appointed by the local authority for the supervision and
control of employees.
(b) The Chief Executive Officer of the local authority, in case no person or authority
is appointed by the local authority for the supervision and control of employees.
• In any other case, employers means –

(a) the person or the authority having the ultimate control over the affairs of the
establishment;
(b) the manager or the managing director (or any other person by whatever name
called) to whom the affairs of the establishment are entrusted.
¾ Wages [Sec.2(s)]
• Wages means
- all emoluments which are earned by an employee
- while on duty or on leave
- in accordance with the terms and conditions of his employment
- Which are paid or payable to him in cash.
• Wages includes
- Dearness allowance.
• Wages does not include –

- Any bonus, commission, house rent allowance, overtime wages and other
allowances.
¾ Superannuation [Sec.2(r)]
Superannuation means
- The attainment by the employee of such age.
- as is fixed in the contract or conditions of service
- As the age on attainment of which the employee shall vacate the employment.
¾ Retirement [Sec.2(q)]
Retirement means termination of service of an employee other than on superannuation.
¾ Controlling authority [Sec.2(2) and 3]

• Controlling authority means an authority appointed by AG u/s 3 [Sec.2(d)]
• As per Sec.3, AG may, by notification in the official Gazette, appoint any officer to
be a controlling authority, who shall be responsible for the administration of this Act.
AG may appoint different controlling authorities for different areas.
¾ Completed year of service [Sec. 2(b)]

Completed year of service means continuous service for one year.
¾ Meaning of Continuous Service [Sec. 2A(1):

SUJEET JHA 172 9213188188
Meaning Permissible interruptions

An employee shall be said to be in (a) Sickness,
continuous service for a period if he has, (b) Accident,
for that period, been in uninterrupted (c) Leave,
service, or service with permissible (d) Absence from duty without leave
interruptions, whether such uninterrupted (not being absence in respect of
or interrupted service was rendered before which an order treating the absence
or after the commencement of this Act. as break in service has been passed
in accordance with, standing
orders, rules or regulations
governing the employees of the
establishment),
(e) Lay – off,
(f) Strike or Lock – out or cessation of
work not due to any fault of the
employee.
¾ Deemed Continuous Service: Where an employee is not in continuous service as

defined above, he shall be deemed to be in continuous service under the employer, if the
following minimum working days conditions are satisfied –
Seasonal Other than Seasonal Establishments [Sec.2A(2)]
Establishments
[Sec.2A(3)] For 1 year period For 6 months period
• 190 days, in the case of any • 95 days, in the case of any
Not less than 75%
of the number of employee employed below, employee employed below,
days on which the the ground in mine or in an the ground in mine or in an
establishment was establishment which works establishment which work
in operation during for less than 6 days in a for less than 6 days in a
such period. week, and week, and
• 240 days, in any other case, • 120 days, in any other
out of 12 calendar months case, out of 6 calendar
preceding the date of months preceding the date
calculation. of calculation.
¾ Inclusion of certain days:

For the purposes of Sec.2A(2), the number of days on which an employee has actually
worked under an employer shall include the days on which –
(a) he has been laid –off under an agreement or as permitted by standing order made
under the Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946, or under the Industrial
Disputes Act, 1947, or under any other law applicable to the establishment,
(b) he has been on leave with full wages, earned in the previous year,
(c) he has been absent due to temporary disablement caused by accident arising out of
and in the course of his employment, and
(d) in the case of a female, she has been on maternity leave, however, the total period of
such maternity leave does not exceed 12 weeks.
¾ Notification [Sec.2(k)]
• Notification means a Notification published in the Official Gazette.
• The Appropriate Government may by Notification, make Rules for the purpose of
carrying the provisions of the Act. [Sec.15]
SUJEET JHA 173 9213188188

¾ Prescribed [Sec.2(o)]
Prescribed means prescribed by Rules made under this Act.
Note: (a) An employee who is re – employed without any break in service, (b) a
retrenched employee, and (c) an employee resigning from service, will be eligible for
Gratuity.
3. DETERMINATION AND PAYMENT OF GRATUITY (Sec.7)
¾ Application for payment of gratuity

Application by whom?
• An employee who is eligible for payment of gratuity
• Any person authorised in writing by such employee
• Nominee of the employee (if the deceased employee had made a nomination)
• Legal heir of the employee (if the deceased employee had not made any
nomination)1 years
Application to whom?
• Application shall be made to the employee.
Manner of making application

• The application shall be made in writing
• Ordinarily, the application shall be made within 30 days from the date gratuity
becomes payable.
• If the date of superannuation or retirement of the employee is known in advance, the
employee may apply to the employer before 30 days of date of superannuation or
retirement.
• The application shall require the employer to pay the gratuity to the employee.
¾ Determination of amount of gratuity

Determination by employer
• As soon as the gratuity becomes payable, the employer shall determine the amount of
gratuity.
• The employer shall give notice to the person to whom gratuity is payable as well as
the controlling authority. The notice shall specify the amount of gratuity determined
by the employer.
• The employer has to determine the gratuity, and give notice to the person to whom
gratuity is payable and controlling authority irrespective of the fact whether an
application for payment of gratuity has been made or not.
¾ Payment of gratuity
Time limit
Within 30 days of gratuity becoming payable, the employer shall pay the gratuity to the
person to whom it is payable.
Consequences of default by employer

• If the employer fails to pay the gratuity within 30 days of gratuity becoming payable,
he shall be liable to pay simple interest at such rate as may be notified by CG from
time to time.
SUJEET JHA 174 9213188188

• The interest shall be paid for the period starting with the due date of payment of
gratuity and ending with the actual date of payment of gratuity.
Consequences of default by employee

The employer shall not be liable to pay any interest, if –
• The delay in payment of gratuity is due to the fault of the employee; and
• The employer has obtained permission in writing from the controlling authority for
delayed payment on such ground.
¾ Dispute as to gratuity
Nature of disputes
Dispute may arise as to –
• The amount of gratuity payable, or
• The admissibility of any claim of an employee for payment of gratuity: or
• The person entitled to receive the gratuity.
Duty of employer in case of dispute

In case of dispute, the employer shall deposit –
- with the controlling authority
- such amount as he admits to be payable by him.
Inquiry by controlling authority

• The controlling authority shall hold an inquiry. The proceedings before the
controlling authority shall be deemed to be judicial proceedings.
• The controlling authority shall give a reasonable opportunity of being heard to the
parties concerned.
• Thereafter, the controlling authority determines the gratuity payable. If amount
determined by the controlling authority is more than the amount deposited by the
employer, the controlling authority shall direct the employer to pay the balance
amount.
Powers of controlling authority

For the purpose of concluding an inquiry, the controlling authority shall have the
following powers vested in a civil court:
(a) Summoning and enforcing the attendance of any person and examining him on oath.
(b) Requiring the discovery and production of documents.
(c) Receiving evidence on affidavits.
(d) Issuing commission for the examination of witnesses or documents.
Appeal against the order of controlling authority

• Any person aggrieved by an order of the controlling authority may prefer an appeal
with AG or such other authority as AG may specify in this behalf (hereinafter called
as appellate authority).
• The appeal may be filed within 60 days of receipt of order of the controlling
authority. However, if the appellate authority is satisfied that the applicant was
prevented by sufficient cause from filling the appeal within the specified period of 60
days, if may admit the appeal within a further period of 60 days.
• Appeal by employer shall not be admitted unless at the time of preferring the appeal,
the employer has deposited with the appellate authority a sum equal to the amount of
gratuity determined by the controlling authority.
SUJEET JHA 175 9213188188

• The appellate authority shall give a reasonable opportunity of being beard to the
parties concerned.
• Thereafter, the appellate authority may confirm, modify or reverse the decision of the
controlling authority.
4. ELIGIBILITY FOR, AND AMOUNT OF GRATUITY (Sec.4)
¾ Eligibility
Gratuity shall be payable to an employee on the termination of his employment after he
has rendered continuous service for not less than 5 years –
(a) On his superannuation, or
(b) On his retirement or resignation, or
(c) On his death or disablement due to accident or disease. [Here, the condition as to 5
years of continuous service is not applicable]
Note: Disablement means such disablement as incapacitates an employee for the work
which he was capable of performing service is not applicable]
¾ Payee
Generally, Gratuity is payable to the employee himself, However, Gratuity is payable to
the following persons in the situations given below –
Situation Gratuity Payable to
Death of employee, and nomination has Nominee(s).
been made.
Death of employee, and no nomination Heir(s)
has been made.
Where Nominee(s) or Heir(s) is a Minor Deposited with controlling Authority, who
shall invest the same for the benefit of
such Minor in term deposit with SBI or its
Subsidiaries or any Nationalized Bank, till
such Minor attains majority.
5. REDUCTION AND FORFEITURE OF GRATUITY [Sec.4(6)]
¾ Computation [Sec.4(2)]:
Establishment Computation of Gratuity Amount
Establishment other 15/26 × Last Drawn Salary × No. of completed years of service
than seasonal or part thereof in excess of 6 months.
Establishment i.e. In case of Piece Rate Employee, Daily Wages shall be computed
General Rule on the average of the total wages of the 3 months preceding the
termination of employment (Wages for Overtime work shall not
be included)
Seasonal • Those who work throughout the year: 15/26 rule as above.
Establishment • Those who work only during the season: 7 days gratuity for
each season.
¾ Maximum [Sec.4(3)]:
The amount of gratuity Payable to an employee shall not exceed Rs.1000000.
SUJEET JHA 176 9213188188

¾ Disabled Employee [Sec.4(4)]:

When an employee becomes disabled due to any accident or disease and is not in a
position to do the same work and re-employed on reduced wages on some other job, the
gratuity will be calculated in 2 parts –
(a) For the period preceding the disablement: on the basis of wages last drawn by the
employee at the time of his disablement.
(b) For the period subsequent to the disablement; on the basis of the reduced wages as
drawn by him at the time of the termination of services.
¾ Better Terms [Sec.4(5)]:

Sec.4 shall not affect the right of an employee to receive better gratuity under any award
or agreement or contract with the employer. However, the maximum statutory limit u/s
4(3) cannot be reduced by mutual settlement or agreement.[Bharat Commerce and
Industries vs Ram Prasad]
6. NOMINATION (Sec.6)
In case of termination of service due to death of employee, the gratuity should be paid to
his Successors/Heirs. To avoid complications and controversies in such payment, the
employee shall make a nomination. The provisions relating to nomination are –
¾ Nomination [Sec.6(1)]
Each employee, who has completed 1 year of service, shall make a nomination for the
purpose of the sec.4(1) Second Proviso. Nomination shall be made in From F, in
duplicate within 30 days of completion of 1 year of service. If the from is filed after the
specified period, but with reasonable grounds of delay, it shall be valid and accepted by
the employer.
¾ Multiple Nominees [Sec.6(2)]:

An employee may, in his nomination, distribute the amount of gratuity payable to him
under this Act, amongst more than one nominee.
¾ Family [Sec.6(3)]:
If an employee has a family at the time of making a nomination, the nomination shall be
made in favour of member(s) of his family. Any nomination made by such employee in
favour of a person who is not a member of his family, shall be void. [Sec Note below for
“Family”]
¾ Acquiring a Family [Sec.6(4)]:

If at the time of making a nomination, the Employee has no family, the nomination may
be made in favour of any person(s), but if the employee subsequently acquires a family,
such nomination shall forthwith become invalid and the employee shall make a fresh
nomination in favour of member(s) of his family. This fresh nomination should be made
in From G, in duplicate, within 90 days of acquiring a family.
¾ Modification [Sec.6(5)]:
A nomination may, subject to Sec.6(3) and 6(4), be modified by an employee at any
time, after giving to his employer a written notice of his intention to do so. This
modification should be made in From H and be in duplicate.
¾ Death of Nominee [Sec.6(6)]:
SUJEET JHA 177 9213188188

If a nominee pre-deceases the employee, the interest of the nominee shall revert back to
the employee, who shall file a fresh nomination, in respect of such interest. This
modification should be made in From H and be in duplicate.
¾ Custody [Sec.6(7)]:
Every nomination, fresh nomination or alteration of nomination, as the case may be shall
be sent by the employee to his employer, who shall keep the same in his safe custody.
The Employer shall verify the service particulars of the employee as given in the
Nomination Form, and return one copy of the Form to the employee, as
acknowledgement.
7. PROTECTION OF GRATUITY (Sec.13)
¾ Nature of protection
• Gratuity payable to an employee shall not be liable to attachment in execution of any
decree or order of the Civil or Revenue or Criminal Court.
• It is immaterial as to whether the gratuity is payable to the employee –
(a) Under the Act: or
(b) In an establishment exempted u/s 5.
8. RECOVERY OF GRATUITY (Sec.8)
¾ Recovery certificate
• If the employer fails to pay the gratuity within the prescribed time (i.e. within 30
days of termination of employment), the controlling authority is empowered to issue
a certificate to the collector to recover the amount of gratuity.
• Before issue to such certificate, the controlling authority shall give the employer a
reasonable opportunity of being heard.
¾ Payment of interest
• The employer shall also be liable to pay compound interest at such rate as may be
notified by CG from time to time.
• The interest shall be paid starting from the date of expiry of prescribed period for
payment of gratuity and ending with the actual date of payment of gratuity.
• However, the interest payable shall not exceed the amount of gratuity payable.
¾ Recovery by collector
The gratuity shall be recovered by the collector in the same manner as if it were arrears
of land revenue. The gratuity so recovered shall be paid to the person entitled to payment
of gratuity.
9. COMPULSORY INSURANCE (Sec. 4A)
¾ Compulsory Insurance [Sec.4A(1)]:

Every employer shall obtain insurance for his liability for payment of Gratuity under the
Act, from – (a) the LIC, or (b) any other prescribed Insurer. However, the following
categories of employers need not obtain such insurance cover –
(a) Employer of an establishment belonging to or under the control of Central / State
Government.
(b) Any other Employer, who has established an Approved Gratuity Fund u/s 4A(2).
¾ Approved Gratuity Fund [Sec.4A(2)]:

SUJEET JHA 178 9213188188
The Appropriate Government may exempt-

(a) Employers who have already established an Approved Gratuity Fund in respect of his
employees and who desires to continue with such arrangement, and
(b) Employers having 500 or more persons, and who establishes and Approved Gratuity
Fund in the prescribed manner.
¾ Registration [Sec.4A(3)]:
Every employers shall get his establishment registered with the Controlling Authority.
One those employers who have taken an insurance u/s4A(1) or have established an
Approved Gratuity Fund u/s 4A(2), shall be registered.
¾ Rules [Sec.4A(4)]:
To give effect to Sec.4A, the Appropriate Government may make Rules including
matters such as – (a) composition of Board of Trustees of the Approved Gratuity Fund,
and (b) recovery by the Controlling Authority of the amount of gratuity payable to
employee, from LIC or any other Insurer with whom an insurance has been taken, or as
the case may be, the Board of Trustees of the Approved Gratuity Fund.
¾ Default [Sec.4A(5) & (6)]:

If the employer fails to pay the premium to the Insurer or to contribute to a Gratuity
Fund, he shall be liable to pay the amount of gratuity including interest, if any, on
delayed payments, to the Controlling Authority, Contravention thereof is punishable with
fine upto Rs.10,000 and in case of continuing offence with a further fine of upto Rs.100
per day of default.
10. EXEMPTION FROM PROVISIONS OF THE ACT (Sec.5)
¾ Exemption by whom?
The exemption may be given by AG.
¾ Manner of giving exemption

The exemption can be given only by way of a notification in the Official Gazette.
¾ Terms of exemption
• The exemption shall be subject to such conditions as may be specified in the
notification.
• The exemption may be given prospectively or retrospectively.
• The exemption may be given from the operation of all or any of the provisions of any
Scheme.
¾ Conditions for giving exemption

The exemption may be given if AG is of the opinion that the employees are in receipt of
gratuity not less favourable than the benefits provided under this Act.
11. INSPECTORS (Sec.7A and 7B)
¾ Manner of appointment
• The inspectors shall be appointed by AG by Notification in the Official Gazette.
• Every inspector shall be deemed to be a ‘public servant’ within the meaning of
Sec.21 of IPC.
¾ Number and jurisdiction

SUJEET JHA 179 9213188188
• Such number of inspectors may be appointed as AG may deem fit.

• AG may define the area to which the authority of an inspector shall extend. Where
two or more inspectors are appointed for the same area, AG may distribute or
allocate work to be performed by them (i.e. AG may define the limits within which
the inspectors shall exercise jurisdiction).
¾ Power of inspector
(a) To call such information from the employer as he considers necessary.
(b) To enter into and inspect, at all reasonable times, any premises of any establishment,
factory, mine, oilfield, plantation, port or railway company or shop to which this Act
applies, any books, registers, records, notices and other documents.
(c) To examine the employer and his servants.
(d) To make copies and take extracts of any books, registers, records, notices and other
documents.
(e) To exercise such other powers as may be prescribed.
¾ Purpose of appointment
To ascertain whether or not the provisions of the Act have been complied with by an
employer.
¾ Duties of owners etc.

Any person required to produce any accounts, books, register or other documents or to
give information by an Inspector shall be legally bound to-
(a) produce accounts, books, register or other documents required by the Inspector;
(b) give information required by the Inspector.
SUJEET JHA 180 9213188188

3.9 CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 1986

OBJECT OF THE ACT
According to the preamble, the Act is to provide for better protection of the interests of
consumers and for that purpose to make provision to make provision for the establishment of
consumer councils and other authorities for the settlement of consumer’s disputes and for
connected therewith.
It may be noted that Consumer Protection Act (COPRA) is in addition to and not in derogation
of any other law. [Section 3]
BASIC RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS [SECTION 6]

The basic rights of consumers that are sought to be promoted and protected are;
a) The right to be protected against marketing of goods and services which are hazardous to
life and property:
b) The right to be informed about the quality, quantity, purity, standard and price of goods,
or services so as to protect the consumer against unfair trade practices;
c) The right to be assured, wherever possible, access to variety of goods and services at
competitive prices;
d) The right to be heard and to be assured that consumers’ interest will receive due
consideration at appropriate forums;
e) The right to seek redressal against unfair trade practices or restrictive trade practices or
unscrupulous exploitation of consumers; and
f) The right to consumer education.
CONSUMER PROTECTION COUNCILS
Introduction
The interest of consumers are sought to promoted and protected under the act inter – alia by
establishment of Consumer Protection Councils at the Central, State and District levels.
Central Consumer Protection Council
Section 4 provides that the Central Government shall, by notification, establish a Council to be
known as Central Consumer Protection Council, which shall consist of the following members:
(i) The Minister – in – charge of Consumer affairs in the Central Government, who shall be
its Chairman; and
(ii) Such number of other official or non – official members representing such interest as
may be prescribed.
The Central Council shall consist of 150 members and the term of the Council shall be 3 years.
The Central council shall meet as and when necessary, but atleast one meeting shall be held
every year.
State Consumer Protection Council
Section 7 provides that the State Government shall, by notification establish a Council to be
known as Consumer Protection council for (name of the state), which shall consist of the
following members:
(i) The Minister – in – Charge of consumer affairs in the state government, who shall be its
chairmans;
SUJEET JHA 181 9213188188
(ii) Such number of other or non – official members representing such interest as may be
prescribed by the State Government; and
(iii) Such number of other official or non – official members, not exceeding ten, as may be
nominated by the Central Government.
The State Council shall meet as and when necessary but not less than two meetings shall be held
every year. The procedure to be observed in regard to the transaction of its business at such
meeting shall be prescribed by the State Government.
District Consumer Protection Council
Section 8A provides that the State Govt. shall establish for every district, by notification, a
council to be known as the District Consumer Protection council, which shall consist of the
following members;
(i) The Collector of the district (by whatever name called), who shall be its Chairman; and
(ii) Such number of other official and non –official members representing such interests as
may be prescribed by the State Govt.
The District Council shall meet as and when necessary but not less than two meetings shall be
held every year.
REDRESSAL MACHINERY UNDER THE ACT
Introduction
The Consumer Protection Act, 1986 provides for a three – tier quasi – judicial redressal
machinery at the District, State and National levels for redressal of consumer disputes and
grievances. They are known as Consumer disputes Redressal Agencies.
District Consumer Disputes Redressal Forum

The Act provides for the establishment of a District Forum by the State Government in each
district of the State by notification. The State Government may establish more than one District
Forum in a District if it thinks for to do so.
Section 10 provides that each District Forum shall consist of :

(i) a person who is, or who has been, or is qualified to be, a District Judge, who shall be its
President; and
(ii) two other members, one of whom shall be a woman.
The members of District Forum should be persons of ability, integrity and standing and should
have experience relating to economics, law, commerce, accountancy, industry, public affairs or
administration. They must be graduates and over 35 years of age.
Every member of the District Forum shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 65
years, whichever is earlier, and shall be eligible for re – appointment.
Jurisdiction [Sec. 11]: Section 11 provides for the jurisdiction of the District Forum under the
following two criteria:
1. Pecuniary limits: The District Forum can entertain complaints where the value of goods
or services and the compensation, if any, claimed is up to Rs.20 lakhs.
2. Territorial limits: The District Forum can entertain complaints if any of the opposite
party ordinary resides or carries on business or personally works for gain or has a branch
office; or the cause of action arises within the local limits of its jurisdiction.
SUJEET JHA 182 9213188188

State Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission
The Act provides for the establishment of the State Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission
by the State Government in the State by notification.
Section 16 provides that each State Commission shall consist of :

(i) a person who is, or has been a judge of a High Court appointed by the State Government
(in consultation with the Chief Justice of the High Court), who shall be its President; and
(ii) not less than two, and not more than such number of members, as may be prescribed, and
one of whom shall be a woman.
The members of State Commission should be persons of ability, integrity and standing; and
should have experience relating to economics, law, commerce, accountancy, industry, public
affairs or administration. They must be graduates and over 35 years of age.
Every member of the State Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of
67 years, whichever is earlier, and shall be eligible for re – appointment.
Jurisdiction [Sec. 17]: The jurisdiction of the State Commission is as follows:

1. Original Jurisdiction : The State Commission can entertain complains where the value of
the goods or services and the compensation, if any, claimed exceeds Rs.20 lakks but does
not exceed Rs.1 crore. [Pecuniary Limits]
The State commission can entertain complaints if any of the opposite party ordinarily
resides or carries on business or personally works for gain or has a branch office; or the
cause of action arises within the local limits of its jurisdiction. [Territorial Limits]
2. Appellate Jurisdiction: The State Commission also has the jurisdiction to entertain
appeals against the orders of any District Forum within the State.
3. Reversionary Jurisdiction : The State commission also has the power to call for the
records and pass appropriate orders in any consumer dispute which is pending before or
has been decided by any District Forum of the same state.
National Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission
The Act provides for the establishment of the National Consumer Dispute Redressal
Commission by the Central Government by notification in the Official Gazette.
Section 20 provides that the National Commission shall consist of :

(i) a person who is or has been a judge of the Supreme Court, to be appointed by the Central
Govt. (in consultation with the Chief Justice of India), who shall be its President; and
(ii) not less than four, and not more than such number of members, as may be prescribed,
and one of whom shall be a woman.
The members of National Commission should be persons of ability, intergrity and standing; and
should have experience relating to economics, law, commerce, accountancy, industry, public
affairs or administration. They must be graduates and over 35 years of age.
Every member of the National Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the
age of 70 years whichever is earlier and shall be eligible for re-appointment.
Jurisdiction [Sec. 21]: The jurisdiction of the National Commission is as follows:
SUJEET JHA 183 9213188188

1. Original Jurisdiction : The National Commission can entertain complaints where the
value of the goods or service and the compensation, if any, claimed exceed Rs.1 crore.
2. Appellate Jurisdiction :The National Commission also has the Jurisdiction to entertain
appeals against the original orders of any State Commission.
3. Reversionary Jurisdiction: The National Commission also has the power to call for the
records and pass appropriate orders in any consumer dispute which is pending before or
has been decided by any State Commission.
Time limit for filing the Complaint
A complaint must be filed within two years from the date on which the cause of action arose.
However, the District Forum, State Commission or National Commission may entertain
complaint even after the expiry of two years, if it is satisfied that there was sufficient cause for
not filing the complaint within prescribed period of two years.
Time limit for filing the Appeal
An appeal to the:
(i) State Commission against the orders of District Forum:
(ii) National Commission against the original orders of State Commission.
(iii) Supreme Court against the original orders of National Commission.
Must be filed within 30 days from the date of receiving the order or District Forum / State
Commission / National Commission. However the State Commission, National Commission
Supreme Court may entertain an appeal even after the expiry of said 30 days, if it is satisfied that
there was sufficient cause of not filing the appeal within the prescribed period of 30 days.
Further, appellant shall also be required to deposit 50% of the amount required to be paid as per
the order of the District Forum/State Commission /National commission or
Rs.25,000/35,000/50,000, respectively, whichever is less.
It may be noted that appeals are allowed only against the original orders passed by the concerned
Redressal Agency. Thus, appellate orders passed by the State Commission or National
Commission cannot be further appealed against. Similarly, the revisional orders passed by the
State Commission or National Commission are also not appealable. However, only the National
Commission has the power to review any order made by it when there is an error apparent on the
face of the record.
NATURE AND SCOPE OF REMEDIES UNDER THE ACT [SECTION 14]
Where the goods complained against suffer from any of the defects specified in the complaint or
any of the allegations contained in the complaint about the services are proved, the District
Forum/State Commission / National Commission may pass one or more of the following orders:
a) To remove the defects pointed out by the appropriate laboratory from the goods in
question.
b) To replace the goods with new goods of similar description which shall be free from any
defect?
c) To return the prices or the charges, as the case may be, to the complainant.
d) To pay the amount of compensation to the consumer for any loss or injury suffered and
in addition, punitive damages can be granted:
e) To remove the defects in goods or deficiencies in the services in question.
f) To discontinue the unfair trade practice or the restrictive trade practice.
SUJEET JHA 184 9213188188

g) No to offer the hazardous goods for sale;

h) To withdraw the hazardous goods from being offered for sale.
i) To cease manufacture of hazardous goods;
j) To pay such sum as may be determined by it;
k) To issue corrective advertisement; and
l) To provide for adequate costs to parties.
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONSW [SECTION 2]
Complainant [Sec. 2(1) (b)]
Complainant means –
(a) a consumer
(b) any voluntary consumer association registered under any law;
(c) the Central or any State Government
(d) one or more consumers, where there are numerous consumers having the same interest;
or
(e) in case of death of a consumer, his legal heir or representative,
Who or which makes a complaint.
An association of persons to have locus standi as consumer, it is necessary that all the
individuals forming the association must be the consumer having purchased the same goods or
hired the same services from the party.
In case the affected consumer is unable to file the complaint due to ignorance, illiteracy or
poverty, any recognized consumer association may file the complaint as per the above clause
(b). Thus, rule of ‘privity of contract’ or ‘locus standi’ , which permits only the aggrieved party
to take action, has very rightly been set aside in the spirit of public interest.
Complaint [Sec.2(1)(c)]
Complaint means any allegation in writing made by a complaint that –

(i) an unfair trade practice or a restrictive trade practice has been adopted by any trader;
(ii) the goods bought by him or agreed to be bought by him be suffer from one more defects;
(iii) the services hired or availed of or agreed to be hired or availed of by him suffer from
deficiency in any respect;
(iv) the trader has charged a price in excess of the price; (a) fixed under any law; (b)
displayed on the goods or any package containing such goods; (c) displayed on the price
list exhibited by him; or (d) agreed between the parties.
(v) goods which will be hazardous to life and property when used are being offered for sale
to the public;
(vi) services which will be hazardous to life and safety of the public when used, are being
offered by the service provider.
With a view to obtain any relief provided by law under this Act.
Consumer [Sec. 2(1) (d)]
Consumer means –
(i) In respect of goods, any person who purchases goods for a consideration but does not
include a person who has purchased goods for re – sale or commercial purpose. Such
consideration may be paid or promised or partly paid and partly promised or under the
system of deferred payments.
SUJEET JHA 185 9213188188

(ii) Any person who is using the goods, with the permission of the buyer of such goods as
specified in clause (i).
(iii) In respect of service, any person who hires or avails service for a consideration but does
not include a person who has availed service for commercial purpose. Such consideration
may be paid or promised or partly paid and partly promised or under the system of
deferred payment.
(iv) Any person who is beneficiary under the services with the permission of the hirer of such
services as specified in clause (iii);
(v) A person who purchases goods or avails services exclusively for the purpose of earnings
his livelihood by means of self employment.
Commercial Purpose: A person who has purchased goods for “commercial purpose” shall not
be deemed to be a consumer. A purchase of goods could be said to be for a “commercial
purpose” only if two conditions are satisfied, namely : (i) the goods must have been purchased
for being used in some profit – making activity on a large scale; and (ii) there should be close
and direct nexus between the purchase of goods and the profit – making activity.
Thus, a person who buys goods for re – sale or commercial purposes or avails services for
commercial purposes is specifically excluded from the definition of ‘consumer’. For example, a
person buying one truck or tempo or sewing machine or one computer for the purpose of earning
his livelihood by self – employment will be eligible to qualify as consumer. However, if a
person buys two typewrites, out of which one is used by a person employed by him, he will not
be eligible to file a complaint as a consumer because a person buying goods for re – sale or
commercial purpose is not a consumer.
For instance, a lawyer purchased a computer and a printer for his office. The printer started
giving trouble form the day one. The lawyer lodges a complaint under the Consumer Protection
Act. In this case, the printer has not been purchased by the advocate for any commercial purpose
treated as consumer and will succeed in his complaint.
[Sanjay Krishana Kant v. M/s Grooy Communication & Others]
Who is a Consumer : Following are some of the important decided cases in this regard:
1. Railway passengers traveling on payment of fare is consumer. [GM, South Eastern

Railways v. Anand Prasad Sinha]
2. Beneficiary of bank guarantee is a consumer. [Union Bank v. Seppo Rally]
3. Parents who bring the child to hospital and the child both are consumers. [Spring
Meadows Hospital v. Harjot Ahluwalia]
4. Allottees of house by Housing Board are consumers [UP Avas Gram Vikas Parishad v.
Garima Shukla]
5. A person obtaining water from a government agency and paying water bills for the water
supplied is a consumer. However, only if the water tax is levied, the person availing
services will not be a consumer. [Nagrik Parishad v. Garhwal Jal Sansthan]
6 The widow of a deceased policy holder is a consumer, as the term ‘consumer’ includes
any beneficiary of service other than the person who hires the services for consideration.
[A Narsamma v. LIC of India]
SUJEET JHA 186 9213188188

Who is not a Consumer: following are some of the important decided cases in this regard.
1. A charitable trust is not a consumer if it has purchased machinery for its diagnostic
centre, when only 10% patients are provided free services and charges are levied on
remaining patients Charitable Trust v. Toshniwal Brothers]
2. Person buying goods for manufacture of another product is not consumer as the goods
were intender for commercial purpose. [Rajeev Metal Works’ v. MMTC]
3. A tenant is not consumer when landlord has not agreed to render any service to tenant in
lease agreement. [Laxmiben Laxmichand Shah v. Sakerben Kanji]
4. A hospital will not be liable, if the hospital happens to be a government hospital where
no fee is charged for consultation and treatment, but only a token registration fee is
charged. [Indian Medical Assoc. v. V.P. Shanta & others]
Goods [Sec. 2(1) (i)]
Goods means goods as defined in the sale of goods Act, 1930.
As per Sale of Goods Act, goods means every kind of moveable property other than actionable
claims and money; and includes stock and shares, growing crops, grass or things attached to or
forming part of the land which are agreed to be severed before sale or under the contract of sale.
Therefore, most common products would come within the purview of this definition.
Shares have been specifically included in ‘goods’. However, shares before allotment are not
goods, as they do not exist before the allotment is made. To constitute a consumer, there must be
transaction of goods. Hence, a prospective investor cannot be regarded as a consumer within the
meaning of this Act, [Morgan Stanley Mutual Fund v. Kartik Das]
Services [Sec. 2(1) (o)]
Service means services of any description which is made available to potential users and
includes, but not limited to the provision of facilities in connection with banking financing,
insurance, transport, processing supply of electrical or other energy, board or lodging or both,
housing construction entertainment amusement or the purveying of news of other information,
but does not include the rendering of any service free of charge or under a contract of personal
services.
“Potential Users’ mean those who are capable of using the service. [Lucknow Development
Authority v. M.K. Gupta]
Contract of Personal Service and Contract for Personal Service: In contract of personal service,
the master can order or require what is to be done and how it is to be done. This is out of the
purview of COPRA as the master can always dispense with the service of the servant and hence
no occasion would arise for him to complain about service of the servant. However, in contract
SUJEET JHA 187 9213188188

for personal services, the person cannot order what is to be done and how it is to be done.
Services rendered in professional category could be treated as contract for personal service and
hence covered under COPRA.
Consumer Forum cannot decide disputes arising out of contract of appointment of personal
service For instance, Civil Servants and Professors in Universities are appointed under contract
of personal service and hence are not covered under COPRA. [Centre for Research & Industrial
Development v. Madam Lal Sahni]
What is Service: Following are some of the important decided cases in this regard:
1. Passengers traveling by trains on payment of the stipulated fare charged for the ticket are
consumer’ and the facility of transportation by rail provided by the railway
administration is a ‘service’ rendered for consideration as defined in the Act. [GM, South
Eastern Railways v. Anand Prasad Sinha]
2. Similarly telephone services availed for consideration is a service. [District Manager,

Telephones Patna v. Lalit Kr. Baijla]
3. Service rendered to a patient by a medical practitioner (except where the doctor renders
service free of charge to every patient) by way of consultation, diagnosis and treatment,
both medical and surgical, would fall within the ambit of ‘service’. [Indian Medical
Association v.V.P. Shanta & Others]
4. Accepting deposits from public agreeing to pay interest is service. If interest and
principal is not paid on due dates, it is deficiency of service and consumer forums can
issue orders for payment of outstanding dues. [Kalawati v. United Vaish]
5. Education is an activity which comes within the ambit of ‘service’ because ‘service’
means service of any description which is made available to potential users under this
Act. [The CBSE v. Consumer Disputes Redressal Forum]
What is not service: following are some of the important decided cases in this regard:
1) Conducting examination is not service as a candidate appearing for examination could

not be regarded as a person who has hired or availed the services of the University or
Board for consideration. Thus, the University or Board in conducting examination is not
performed any service. [Chairman, Board of Examination v. Mohideen Abdul Kader]
2. Registration of documents by government is not a service. A person presenting a

document for registration is not a consumer. There is no commercialization involved.
Officers who are doing the work of registration are doing the statutory duty. [S.P. v.
collector of Stamps]
3. Payment of taxes is not hiring of services. No complaint can be lodged against Municipal
Corporation for failure to carry out its statutory duty of proper maintenance of drains, as
payment of taxes is not hiring of services. [Signet corporation v. Commissioner, MCD,
New Delhi]
4. Promotional activities of state and its agencies are not services and complainants are not
consumers, as facilities are provided by State and its agencies without any specific
SUJEET JHA 188 9213188188

consideration. [T.N. Sethuraman v. Goa, Daman and Diu Industrial Development

corporation]
5. Even if a litigant pays court fees, he is not hiring services of Court. The Court is
exercising sovereign function of dispensation of justice. Thus, complaint against Court
for delay in judgment is not maintainable under Consumer Forums.
6. Free Services are not covered under COPRA. The employer (Govt. in this case) deducted
insurance premium from salary of employee, but failed to make payment to LIC. When
the employee died LIC refused to pay as premium was not paid. It was held that the
employer was giving free service and hence he is not liable. [State of Orissa v. LIC]
7. However, if the employer is agent of LIC for the purpose of colleting premium, then
general principle of agency as contained in Contract Act shall apply. Employee has no
responsibility to intimate LIC about non – remittance of the premium. Hence, LIC has to
make payment of compensation if employer has deducted premium from salary of
employee. [Delhi Electric Supply v. Basanti Devi]
Consumer Dispute [Sec. 2(1) (e)]
Consumer dispute means dispute where the person against whom a complaint has been made,
denies in goods or against any deficiency in services or against charging an exorbitant price.
Defect [Sec. 2(1) (f)]
Defect means any fault, imperfection or shortcoming in the quality, quantity, potency, purity or
standard of any goods which is required to be maintained by or under any law for the time being
in force or under any contact, express or implied, or as is claimed by the trader in any manner
whatsoever in relation to any goods.
In the case of Abhaya Kumar Panda v. Bajaj Auto Ltd. where the motor vehicle sold to the
petitioner was found to have major manufacturing defects which could not be removed despite
several repairs, it was held to be ‘defective’and the vehicle was ordered to be replaced.
Deficiency [sec. 2(1) (g)]
Deficiency means any fault, imperfection, shortcoming or inadequacy in the quality nature and
manner of performance of any service which is required to be maintained by or under any law
for the time being in force or has been undertaken to be performed by a person in pursuance of a
contract or otherwise in relation to any service.
In order to get any loss compensated for deficiency in service, mere loss or injury is not enough.
Loss or injury must be coupled with negligence. The term ‘negligence’ means absence of
reasonable care which a prudent person is expected to observe in a given set of circumstances.
Thus, no compensation can be claimed even in case of loss or damage. If it was not caused due
to negligence of the person. [Consumer Unity and Trust Society v. Bank of Boroda]
For instance, the driver of a bus suddenly, applied the brake to avoid a collision with bullock
cart and with result the bus met with an accident resulting in the death of a passenger. The legal
heirs of the deceased lodged a complaint with Consumer Forum for compensation on the ground
of ‘deficiency in service.’ In the present case, the accident that occurred had nothing to do with
provided to the deceased because the injury sustained has nothing to do with the service
SUJEET JHA 189 9213188188

provided but due to the direct result of the accident, Further, there was no element of negligence
on the part of driver, as he had applied the brakes to avoid a collision. Hence, the heirs of the
deceased will not succeed in their complaint against the transport company.
[Chairman, Thiruvallavar Transport Corporation v. Consumer Protection Council]
It may be noted that COPRA does not have any jurisdiction in respect of any matter, if there is
some special law dealing with that matter.
What is Deficiency in Service: Following are some of the important decided cases in this
regard:
1. Negligence in settlement of Insurance claim, [Div. Manager, LIC of India v. Bhavanam

Srinivas Reddy]
2. Ornaments kept in the banks’ locker were found lost though the certificate recorded by
the custodian of the bank stated all lockers operated during the day had beenm checked
and found properly locked. [Punjab National Bank v. K. B. Shetty]
3. Issuing drafts on foreign banks where the bank had no account causing inconvenience to
the customer. [Tarun Kumar Kaniyalal Soni v. Punjab National Bank]
4. Honouring forged cheques [Corporation bank v. Filmalaya (P) Ltd.]
6. Debiting cheques to wrong accounts [Corporation Bank v. Filmalaya (P) Ltd.]
7. Failure to give possession of the house after receiving the price and registering the flat in
favour of the allottee. [Lucknow development Authority v. Roop Kishore Tandon]
8. Non delivery of letter by a courier company. [Skypack Couries Pvt. Ltd. v. Anupama
Bagla]
9. Theft of car from parking of an hotel constitution the deficiency in service. [Atul
Virmani. V. Asian Hotels Limited]
10. Delay in issue of units by UTI of about 18 months is deficiency in service. In this case,
15% interest was awared as compensation. [UTI. v. Smt. Bandana Roy]
11. To run a boat club without having necessary equipment and personal trained for meeting
an emergency constitutes gross negligence and serious deficiency in service. [Sandhu v.
Union of India]
12. Parking vehicle in parking lot on payment of parking charges is bailment. Persons
responsible for management of parking area is liable to make good the loss due to theft.
[Mahesh Enterprises v. Arun Kumar Gumber]
13. In the case of goods carrier services, the liability of a carrier to whom the goods are
entrusted for carriage is that of an insurer and is absolute in terms. So long as the goods
are in the custody of the carrier, it is the duty of carrier to take due care as he would have
taken of his own goods and he would be liable if any loss or damage was caused to the
goods on account of his negligence3 or criminal act or that of his agent and servants.
This would be so even if goods are carried ‘AT OWNER’s RISK ----------‘. Owners’ risk
is understood in the sense that the carrier would not be liable for damage or loss to the
SUJEET JHA 190 9213188188

goods if it was not caused on account of carrier’s own negligence or the negligence of
his servants and agents. [Nath Brothers v. Best Roadways Ltd.]
14. The transportation of goods through carriers cannot be considered as for commercial
purposes and the transporter is liable for any deficiency in service. [Express Goods
Service v. Standard Textile Mills]
15. Selling an item at double the price printed on the wrapper is an Unfair Trade Practice.
[Kapil Mitra v. Priya Village Roadshow, New Delhi]
What is not Deficiency in Service : Following are some of the important decided cases in
this regard:
1. Refusal to give credit to customers on grounds that the unit belonged to a sick Industry
or was not economically viable on any other grounds would not fall under deficiency of
service as a bank is the sole judge of the credit worthiness of any party. [Asha Sharma v.
Union of India]
2. Failure to deliver goods carried by the railways is not covered clause ‘deficiency in
service rendered’ of Consumer Protection Act, But it is covered under Railway claims
tribunal Act. 1987 and thus required to be compensated in that Act. [Union of India v. M.
Adaikalan]
3. The National Commission held that where the bank has not been accommodating the
complainant sufficiency in the matter of grant of adequate mursing facility for small
scale industry which consequently became sick, the proper forum to agitable the said
grievance is civil court and not a consumer redressal forum. It further held that the banks
have to exercise their discretion and act in accordance with their best judgment after
taking into account various relevant factors and hence mere failure to provide financial
facility cannot be said to constitute deficiency in service. [Special Machines v. Punjab
National Bank]
4. A person or organization engaged in the business of courier services for carriage of mail
or parcels falls within the purview of the COPRA, 1986 and delay in delivery of articles
or non – delivery will constitute deficiency in service. However the National
Commission held that the complainant ought to have insured the documents if they were
of great value and as per IATA Regulations, the consignee is bound to declare the nature
of the contents and hence did not grant any relief to the complainant. [Air Pack couriers
(India) Pvt. Ltd. v. S. Suresh]
5. If the staff gives some information (or leaflet containing some information) which is
against the provisions of Statute, the Authority is not liable for deficiency in service. In
this case, the postal staff gave incorrect information about rate of interest and maturity
period of National Saving Certificate. The Supreme Court held that since the terms are
specified by notification of Govt. of India, any information contrary to the notification is
not binding on Govt. of India. [Post Master v. Ms. Raja Premeelamma]
6. Disconnection of electric supply for non – payment of charges by consumer is not

deficiency in service. Electricity Board has power to discontinue supply. It was also held
that electricity board can make supplementary bill for escaped bill. [Swanstic Industries.
v. Maharashtra State Electricity Board]
SUJEET JHA 191 9213188188

7. Disconnecting power supply for tampering with electric meter is not deficiency in
service.[CESC Limited v. Sumitra Pal]
8. In Airline services, delay due to bad weather and poor visibility are unforeseen
circumstances and hence there is no deficiency in service. Compensation can be awarded
only if there is negligence and loss is suffered by complainant on account of negligence.
[Indian Airlines Limited v. Dr. V. J. Philip]
SUJEET JHA 192 9213188188

STUDY NOTE – 4 OTHER LAWS
4.1 LAW RELATING TO RIGHT TO INFORMATION

INTRODUCTIONS
Throughout the world, the right to information is seen by many as the Key to strengthening
participatory democracy and ensuring more people centered development. In India also, the
Government enacted Right to information (RTI) Act in 2005 allowing transparency and
autonomy, and access to accountability in public authorities.
In R.P. Limited Indian Express Newspaper, the Supreme Court read into Article 21 the right
to know. The Supreme Court held that right to know is a necessary ingredient of participatory
democracy. Article 21 confers on all persons a right to know which include a right to receive
information.
It may be pointed out that the right to impart and receiving information is a species of the right
to freedom of speech and expression. Article 19(1) (a) of our Constitution guarantees to all
citizens freedom of speech and expression. Right to freedom of speech and expression in Art. 19
(1) (a) carries with it the right to propagate and circulate one’s views and opinions subject to
reasonable restrictions as mentioned under Article 19(2). The prerequisite for enjoying this right
is knowledge and information.
The Right to Information Act, 2005 provides an effective an effective framework the right to
information recognized under Article 19 of the Constitution.
DEFINITIONS
Public Authority [Sec. 2(h)]
“Public authority” means any authority or body or institution of self government established or
constituted
¾ By or under the Constitution.
¾ By any other law made by Parliament.,
¾ By and other law made by State Legislature.
¾ By notification issued or order made by the appropriate Govt.
Record [Sec 2(1)]
“Record” includes.
(a) any document, manuscript and file;
(b) any microfilm, microfiche and facsimile copy of a document.
(c) any reproduction of image or images embodied in such microfilm; and
(d) any other material produced by a computer or any other device.
Information [Sec 2(1)]
SUJEET JHA 193 9213188188

“Information” means any material in any form including records, documents, memos, e-mails,
opinions, advices, press release, circulars, orders, logbooks, contracts, reports, samples, models,
data materials held in any electronic form.
Right to Information [Sec. 2(i)]
“Right to information” means the right to information accessible under this Act with is held by
or under the control of any public authority and includes the right to –
(i) taking notes, extracts, or certified copies of documents or records.
(ii) Inspection of work, documents, records.
(iii) Taking certified samples of materials.
(iv) Obtaining information in the form of diskettes, floppies, tapes, video cassettes or in
any other electronic mode or through printouts where such information is stored in a
computer or in any other device.
OBLIGATIONS OF PUBLIC AUTHORITY
Every public authority under the Act has been entrusted with a duty to maintain records and
publish manuals, rules regulations, instructions, etc. in its possession as prescribed under the
Act.
As per Sec.4, every public authority has to publish within 120 days of the enactment of this Act:
¾ The particulars of its organization functions and duties.

¾ The powers and duties of its officers and employees;
¾ The procedure followed in its decision making process, including channels of
supervision and accountability.
¾ The norms set by it for the discharge of its functions;
¾ The rules, regulations instruction, manuals and records used by its employees for
discharging its functions;
¾ A statement of the categories of the documents held by it or under its control;
¾ The particulars of any arrangement that exists for consultation with, or representation by
the members of the public in relation to the formulation of policy or implementation
thereof;
¾ A directory of its officers and employees;
¾ The monthly remuneration received by each of its officers and employees, including the
system of compensation as provided in its regulations.
¾ The budget allocated to each of its agency, including the particulars of all plans,
proposed expenditures and reports on disbursements made;
¾ The manner of execution of subsidy programmes, including the amounts allocated and
the details and beneficiaries of such programmes:
¾ Particulars of recipients of concessions, permits or authorizations granted by it;
¾ Details of the information available to, or held by it, reduced in an electronic form;
¾ The particulars of facilities available to citizens for obtaining information, including the
working hours of a library or reading room, if maintained for public use;
¾ The names, designations and other particulars of the public Information Officers,
¾ Such other information as may be prescribed; and thereafter update the publications
every year.
DESIGNATION OF PUBLIC INFORMATION OFFICERS [PIO]
Every public authority has to do the following;
SUJEET JHA 194 9213188188

¾ Designate in all administrative units or officers Central or State Public Information

Officers to provide information to persons who have made a request for the information;
and
¾ Designate at each sub – divisional level or sub – district level Central Assistant or State
Assistant Public Information Officers to receive the applications for information or
appeals or forwarding the same to the Central or State Public Information Officers.
PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING INFORMATION
PIO shall deal with requests from persons seeking information. If the information requested for
is held by another public authority; the PIO shall transfer, within 5 days, the request to that other
public authority and inform the applicant immediately.
PIO, on receipt of a request shall as expeditiously as possible and in any case within 30 days of
the receipt of the request, provide the information on payment of such fee as may be prescribed.
hours of the receipt of the request.
If the PIO fails to give decision on the request Where the information requested for concerns the
life or liberty of a person, the same shall be provided within forty eight within the period
specified, he shall be deemed to have refused the request.
Where a request has been rejected, the PIO shall communicate the following to the requester:
(i) the reasons for such rejection;
(ii) the period within which an appeal against such rejection may be preferred; and
(iii) the particulars of the Appellate Authority.
EXEMPTION FROM DISCLOSURE
Certain categories of information have been exempted from disclosure under the Act. These are;
¾ Where disclosure prejudicially affects the sovereignty and integrity of India;
¾ Information which has been expressly forbidden by any court or tribunal or the
disclosure of which may constitute contempt of court:
¾ Where disclosure would cause a breach of privilege of parliament or the state legislature;
¾ Information including commercial confidence, trade secrets or intellectual property.
¾ Information received in confidence from a foreign government;
¾ Information the disclosure of which endangers life or physical safety of any person or
identifies confident source of information or assistance;
¾ Information that would impede the process of investigation or apprehension or
prosecution of offenders;
¾ Cabinet papers including records of deliberations of the Council of Ministers, Secretaries
and other officers before the decisions are taken.
Section 8 provides that personal information which would cause invasion of the privacy unless
larger public interest justifies it, shall not disclosed
Section 9 empowers the Public Information Officer to reject a request for information where an
infringement of a copyright subsisting in a person would be involved.
It may be noted that as per Section 10 of the RTI Act, only that part of the record, which does
not contain any information which is exempt from disclosure and which can reasonably be
severed from any part that contains exempt information, may be provided. This is known as
partial disclosure.
SUJEET JHA 195 9213188188

WHO IS EXCLUDED?
The Act excludes Central Intelligence and Security agencies specified in the Second Schedule
like IB, R & AW, Directorate of Revenue Intelligence, Central Economic Intelligence Bureau,
Directorate of Enforcement, Narcotics Control Bureaus, Aviation Research Centre, Special
Frontier Force, BSF, and Nicobar, the Crime Branch – CID – CB; Dadra and Nagar Haveli and
Special Branch, Lakshadweep Police, Agencies specified by the State Governments through a
Notification will also be excluded.
The exclusion, however, is not absolute and these organization have an obligation to provide
information pertaining to allegations of corruption and human rights violations. Further,
information relating to allegations of human rights violation shall be given only with the
approval of the Central Information Commission within forty – five days from the date of the
receipt of request. [Section 24]
INFORMATION COMMISSIONS
Central Information Commission (CIC)
The Central Information Commission is to be constituted by the Central Government through a

Gazette Notification. The Central Information Commission consists of the Chief Central
Information Commissioner and Central Information Commission not exceeding 10.
The Chief Information Commissioner and Information Commissioners shall be persons of

eminence in public life with wide knowledge and experience in law, science technology, social
service, management, journalism, mass media or administration and governance. CIC/IC shall
not be a Member of Parliament or Member of the Legislature of any State or Union Territory.
He shall not hold – any other office of profit or connected with any political party or carrying on
any business or pursuing any prolession.
CIC shall be appointed for a term of 5 years or till he attains the age of 65 years, whichever is
earlier. CIC is not eligible for reappointment.
State Information Commission (SIC)
The State Information Commission will be constituted by the state Government through a
Gazette notification. The State Information Commission consists of one State. Chief Information
Commissioner (SCIC) and not more that 10 State Information Commissioners (SIC). The
qualification for appointment as SCIC/SIC shall be the same as that for Central Commissioners.
Powers of Information Commission
The Central Information Commission Information Commission has a duty to receive complaints
from any person.
¾ Who has not been able to submit an information request because a PIO has not been
appointed;
¾ Who has been refused information that was requested.
SUJEET JHA 196 9213188188

¾ Who has received no response to his / her information request within the specified time
limits;
¾ Who thinks the fees charged are unreasonable;
¾ Who thinks information given is incomplete or false or misleading; and
¾ Any other matter relating to obtaining information under this law.
If the Commission feels satisfied, an enquiry may be initiated and while initiating an enquiry the
Commission has same powers as vested in a Civil Court.
The Central Information Commission or the State Information Commission during the inquiry of
any complaint under this Act may examine any record which is under the control of the public
authority, and no such record may be withheld from it on any grounds.
APELLATE AUTHORITIES
Any person who does not receive a decision within the specified time or is aggrieved by a
decision of the PIO may file an appeal under the Act.
First Appeal
First appeal shall be filed to the officer senior in rank to the PIO in the concerned Public
Authority within 30 days, from the expiry of the prescribed time limit for providing the
information or from the receipt of the decision. However, the Appellate Authority may entertain
the appeal even after the expiry of the aforesaid 30 days, if it is satisfied that the Appellant has
been prevented by sufficient cause from filing the appeal within the prescribed period of 30
days.
First Appeal shall be disposed of within 30 days from the date of its receipt or within such
extended period not exceeding a total of forty – five days from the date of filing thereof, for
reasons to be recorded in writing.
Second Appeal
Second appeal shall be filed to the Central Information Commission or the State Information
Commission, as the case may be, within 90 days of the date on which the decision was given or
should have been made by the First Appellate Authority. However, the Appellate Authority may
entertain the appeal even after the expiry of the aforesaid 90 days, if it is satisfied that the
Appellant has been prevented by sufficient cause from filling the appeal within the prescribed
period of 90 days.
SUJEET JHA 197 9213188188

4.2 COMPETITION ACT, 2002

INTRODUCTION / REASONS FOR REPEAL OF MRTP ACT, 1969
MRTP Act, 1969 has become obsolete in certain areas in the light to international economic
developments relating to competition laws. So the need was felt to shift the focus from curbing
monopolies to promoting competition. Hence, the Competition Act, 2002 was enacted, which
aims at doing away from the rigidly structured MRTP Act, 1969.
The Competition Act, 2002 is flexible, behavior oriented and also explicitly indicates the
parameters which shall be kept in view while deciding the adverse effect on competition, abuse
of dominance and prejudicial combinations. The main purpose of the Act is to ensure free and
fair competition in the market.
SALIENT/IMPORTANT REATURES OF THE ACT
1) The Competition Act, 2002 has been enacted to prevent practices having an appreciable
adverse effect on competition, to promote and sustain competition in the market and to
protect the interest of consumers and to ensure freedom of trade.
2) With the enforcement of the Competition Act, 2002 the MRTP Act, 1969 shall stand
repeated and the MRTP Commission shall be dissolved.
3) The Competition Act, 2002 seeks to achieve its objectives by prohibiting anti –
competitive trade agreements, preventing abuse of dominance, regulating combinations
and formulating a policy on competition, creating awareness by imparting training on
competition issues.
4) The Competition Act, 2002 provides for the establishment of Competition Commission
of India and prescribes its duties, functions and powers.
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS [SECTION 2]
Agreement
Agreement includes any arrangement or understanding or action in concert –

a) Whether or not, such agreement, understanding or action is formal or in writing or
b) Whether or not, such agreement, understanding or action is intended to be
enforceable by legal proceedings.
Cartel
Cartel includes an association of producers, sellers or distributors, traders or service providers

who, by agreement amongst themselves, limit, control, or attempt to control the production,
distribution, sale or price of goods or services or, trade in goods provision of services.
The Competition Act, 2002 prohibits formation of certain cartels.
SUJEET JHA 198 9213188188

Consumer
Consumer means any persons who –

(i) Buys any goods for a consideration which has been paid or promised or partly paid and
partly promised, or under my system of deferred payment and includes any person who
uses those goods with the approval of the person buying those goods, whether such
purchase of goods is for resale or for commercial purpose or for personal use:
(ii) Hires or avails of any services for a consideration which has been paid or promised or
partly paid and partly promised, or under any system of deferred payment and includes
any person who is the beneficiary of those services with the approval of hirer or avail or
of those services, whether such hiring or availing of services is for any commercial
purpose or for personal use.
It may be noted that under the competition Act, 2002 even if a person purchases goods or avails
of services for commercial purpose. he’ll be a consumer, whereas for the purpose of consumer
Protection Act, 1986 a person purchasing goods or availing services for commercial purposes is
not a consumer and cannot seek relief under that Act.
Enterprise
Enterprise means a person or department of the Government, who or which is, or has been
engaged in any activity, relating to the production, storage , supply, distribution, acquisition or
control of articles or goods or the provision of services of any kind.
Goods
Goods means goods as defined in the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 and include the following:
(i) Products manufactured processed or mined:
(ii) Debentures, shares and stocks after allotment;
(iii) In relation to ‘goods supplied’, goods imported in India
Services
Services means service of any description which is made available to potential users and
includes the provision of services in connection with business of any industrial or commercial
matters such as banking, communication, education, financing, insurance, chit funds, real estate,
transport storage material treatment processing, supply of electrical or other energy, boarding,
lodging, entertainment, amusement, constructions, repair conveying of news or information and
advertising.
It may be noted that under the Competition Act, 2002 the services of industrial or commercial
nature also fall within the scope of the Act, whereas under the Consumer Protection Act, 1986
the services of commercial nature or for business or industrial purposes are excluded for
interpreting deficiency in the supply of any service.
Relevant Market, Relevant Geographic Market, and Relevant Product Market
SUJEET JHA 199 9213188188

The turns Relevant Market, Relevant Geographic Market, and Relevant Product Market have
relevance in determination of the agreements being anti – competitive within the meaning, of
Section 3 of the Competition Act, 2002.
Relevant Market means the market, which may be determined by the Competition Commission
of India with reference to both the markets [Section 2(1)].
Relevant Geographic Market means a market comprising the area in which the conditions of
competition for supply of goods or provision of services or demand of goods or services are
distinctly homogeneous. Can be distinguished from conditions prevailing in neighboring areas
[Section 2(s)]
Relevant Product Market means a market comprising of all those products or services, which are
regarded as interchangeable or substitutable by the consumer, by reasons of characteristics of
products or services, their prices and intended use [Section 2(1)]
IMPORTANT PROVISIONS
Anti – competitive Agreements
Section 3(1) of the Competition Act, 2002 provides that no enterprise or association of persons
shall enter into any agreement in respect of production, supply, distribution, storage, acquisition
or control of goods or provision of services, which causes or is likely to cause an appreciable
adverse effect on competition. Section 3(2) further provides that any anti competitive agreement
within the meaning of section 3(1) shall be void.
Prohibition on Agreements having Appreciable Adverse Effect on Competition
The following agreements shall be deemed to be prohibited under section 3(1), if such
agreements cause or are likely to cause an appreciable adverse effect on competition.
a) Tie – in arrangement, i.e. an agreement requiring a purchaser of goods, as a condition of
such purchase, to purchase some other goods.
b) Exclusive supply agreement, i.e. an agreement restricting in any manner the purchaser in
the course of his trade from acquiring or otherwise dealing in any goods other than those
of the seller or any other person.
c) Exclusive distribution agreement i.e. an agreement to limit, restrict or withhold the
output or supply of any goods or allocate any area or market for the disposal or sale of
the goods.
d) Refusal to deal i..e., an agreement which restricts, or is likely to restrict, by any method
the person or classes of persons to whom goods are sold or from whom goods are
bought.
e) Resale price maintenance i.e., an agreement to sell goods on condition that the prices to
be charged on the resale by the purchaser shall be the prices stipulated by the seller
unless it is clearly stated that prices lower than those prices may be charged.
Important Factors while determining whether as agreement has an ‘appreciable adverse

effect’ on competition.
Section 19(3) of the competition Act, 2002 provides that while determining whether as
agreement has appreciable adverse effect on competition, the Commission shall give due regard
to all or any of the following factors, namely –
a) Creation of barriers to new entrants in the market;
b) Driving existing competitors out of the market;
SUJEET JHA 200 9213188188

c) Foreclosure of competition by hindering entry into the market;

d) Accrual of benefit to consumers;
e) Improvements in production or distribution of goods or provision of services; and
f) Promotion of technical, scientific and economic development by means of production or
distribution of goods or provision of services.
Regulation of combination
Regulation of Combination is one of the core provisions of the Competition Act, 2002 Section 5
of the Competition Act, 2002 provides that acquisition of one or more enterprise by one or more
persons or merger or amalgamation of enterprise shall be combination of such enterprises and
persons or enterprise which are above the certain prescribed size in terms of (a) assets or (b)
turnover as provide under section 5.
Section 6 of the Competition Act, 2002 provides that any person or enterprise entering into a
combination which causes or is likely to cause an appreciable adverse effect on combination
within the relevant market in India and if such a combination is formed, it shall be void.
COMPETITION COMMISSION OF INDIA
Establishment of CCI [Section 7]
Section 7 empowers the Central Government to establish a Commission to be known as

“Competition Commission of India.” The commission is a body corporate having perpetual
succession and common seal.
The Competition Commission has its head office at New Delhi (established w.e.f. 14.10.2003).
In addition to this, the Commission can establish its offices at other places in India.
Composition of CCI [Section 8]
The Commission shall consist of a Chairman and other members, which shall not be less than 2
and more than 10. The Chairman and all the members shall be appointed by the Central
Government.
Following are the qualification of Chairman and the members:

1) He shall be a person of ability, integrity and standing; and
2) He has been or is qualified to be Judge of a High Court or he has special knowledge and
professional experience of not less than 15 years in international trade, economics,
business, commerce, law finance, accountancy, management, etc.
Term of Office [Section 10]
The term of office of chairman shall be 5 years or up to the age of 67 years, whichever is earlier
and that of other members shall be 5 years or up to the age of 65 years, whichever is earlier.
However, they shall be eligible for reappointment.
Removal of Chairperson and other Members [Section 11]
The Chairperson or a Member of CCI may be removed from the office by the Central
Government in the following cases:
a) Where he is adjudged as an insolvent:
b) Where he has been engaged in any paid employment;
SUJEET JHA 201 9213188188

c) Where he has been convicted of an offence which involved moral turpitude;

d) Where he has acquired such financial or other interest as is likely to affect prejudicially
his functions;
e) where he has abused his position and
f) Where he has become physically or mentally incapable.
Restriction on employment of Chairperson and other Members [Section 12]
As per section 12, the Chairperson and other Member shall not, for a period of two years, accept
and employment connected with the management of administration of any enterprise which has
been a party to any proceeding before the Commission under this Act.
However, the said restriction shall not apply where the Chairperson or any Member is offered an
employment in a corporation established by or under any Central, State or Provincial Act.
Validity of Acts of Competition Commission of India [Section 15]
Act of Competition Commission of India cannot be challenged on the ground only of any defect
in the constitution of competition Commission of India or the existence of any vacancy in the
Competition Commission of India. However, acts of Competition Commission of India can be
questioned on other acts such as acting mala fide, acting on the basis of untenable evidence, etc.
It may be noted that when an act of Competition Commission of India is called in question on
such other grounds, defects in the constitution or the existence of a vacancy in the Competition
Commission of India may also be urged as an additional ground.
Powers of CCI
Following are the important powers or CCI.

1) To inquire into anti – competitive agreements and abuse of dominant position.
2) to determine whether an agreement has an appreciable adverse effect on competition:
3) Enquire whether a combination has cause or likely to cause an appreciable adverse effect
on competition:
4) To issue ‘cease and desist’ orders;
5) To grant such interim relief as would be necessary in a particular case;
6) to award compensation;
7) To order division of dominant undertakings:
8) To order demerger:
9) To impose firms;
10) To order cost for frivolous complaints.
Powers of CCI to regulate its own procedure [Section 36]
The CCI has been empowered to lay down its own procedure and regulation and shall not be
bound by the procedure laid down by the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908. However, it shall
observe the principle of natural justice and shall be subject to the rules made by the Central
Government for the procedure to be followed in inquiries.
The CCI shall have the same powers as are vested in the civil court under the Code of Civil
Procedure. 1908 while trying a suit, in respect of the following matters, namely;
i) Summoning and enforcing the attendance of any person and examining them on oath;
ii) Requiring the discovery and production of documents;
SUJEET JHA 202 9213188188

iii) Receiving the evidence on affidavits;

iv) Issuing the commission for the examination of witnesses or documents;
v) Requisitioning any public record/document from any office;
vi) Dismissing an application in default or deciding it;
vii) Any other such matter as may be prescribed
Section 36 of the Competition Act, 2002 empowers the Commission to call upon the experts
from the fields of economics, commerce, accountancy, international trade or from any other
discipline to assist the Commission in the conduct of any inquiry before it.,
DIRECTOR GENERAL
Section 16 empowers the Central Government to appoint a Director General and such number of
additional, joint, deputy or assistant Director Generals or other advisers, consultants, or officers.
These person shall be appointed from amongst the persons of integrity and outstanding ability
and who have experience in investigation and knowledge of accountancy, management,
business, public administration, international trade, economics, law etc.
Director General is an important functionary under the Competition Act, 2002. He assists the
Commission by furnishing Investigation Report in respect of such matters as are referred to him
by the CCI. He also assists the Commission in conducting proceedings of enquiries, which are
initiated by the CCI suo moto.
COMPETITION ADVOCACY
Section 49 of the Competition Act, 2002 provides that while formulating a policy on
competition including review of laws related to competition, the Central Government may make
a reference to the CCI for its opinion on the possible effects of such a policy on competitions.
The Commission shall, within 60 days of receipt of such a reference, give its opinion on it to the
Central Government. Thereafter the Central Government may formulate such policy as it deems
fit. It may be noted that the role of the Commission is advisory and the opinion given by it shall
not be binding on the Central Government.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN MRTP ACT AND COMPETITION ACT
Following are the important differences between the MRTP Act, 1969 and Competition Act,
2002:
1) MRTP Act is based on the pre – liberazation scenario whereas Competition Act is based
on the post liberalization scenario.
2) MRTP Act emphasizes on curbing monopolies whereas Competition Act emphasizes on

Promoting competition.
3. MRTP Act provides for compulsory registration of agreements relating to restrictive

trade practices whereas in Competition Act, there is no such requirement of registration
of agreements.
4) Under Competition Act, dominance per se is not bad but only the abuse of dominance is
considered bad whereas under the MRTP Act, dominance itself is bad.
SUJEET JHA 203 9213188188

5) Combinations are not regulated by MRTP Act whereas they are regulated by
Competition Act.
6) MRTP Act does not vest MRTP Commission power to inquire into cartels of foreign
origin in a direct manner whereas the Competition Act seeks to regulate them.
SUJEET JHA 204 9213188188

4.3 The Negotiable Instruments, Act, 1881

1. INTRODUCTION TO NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS
¾ Definition of Negotiable instrument (Sec.13)

Negotiable instrument means
- a promissory note; or
- bill of exchange; or
- cheque
Payable
- either to order; or
- to the bearer.
¾ Meaning of Negotiable instrument

- Negotiable instrument means an instrument
- The property in which is acquired by anyone who takes it –
• Bonafide; and
• For value
- notwithstanding any defect in the title of any prior party.
- In other words negotiable instrument means an instrument
- Notwithstanding any defect in the title of any prior party.
2. ESSENTIALS OR CHARACTERISTICS OF A NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENT

(Sec.13)
• Freely transferable from one person to another
• Transferable infinitum (i.e. indefinitely).
• HDC gets a good title to negotiable instrument even though the title of transferor is
defective.
• A negotiable instrument may more than one payee jointly or alternatively.
3. PRESUMPTIONS AS TO NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS (Sec.118)
Unless the contrary is proved, the following presumptions shall be made –

¾ As to consideration
That every negotiable instrument was made or drawn for consideration and that every
such instrument when it has been accepted, endorsed or negotiated has been for
consideration.
¾ As to date
That every negotiable instrument bearing a date was made or drawn on such date.
¾ As to time of acceptance
That every accepted bill of exchange was accepted within a reasonable time after its date
and before its maturity.
¾ As to time of transfer
That every transfer of a negotiable instrument was made before its maturity.
¾ As to order of endorsements
That the endorsements appearing upon a negotiable instrument were made in the order in
which they appear thereon.
SUJEET JHA 205 9213188188

¾ As to stamp
That a lost promissory note or bill of exchange was duly stamped.
¾ That holder is a holder;

That the holder of a negotiable instrument is a holder in due course.
¾ As to dishonour
If a suit is filed upon an instrument which has been dishonored, the court shall, on proof
of the protest, presume the fact of dishonour.
The above presumptions are rebuttable (debatable) by producing evidence to the

contrary. It is the responsibility of the person alleging the non existence of presumptions
to prove the same.
The above presumptions are not applicable where an instrument has been obtained by an
offence, fraud or for unlawful consideration.
4. MEANING OF PROMISSORY NOTE (Sec.4)
A ‘Promissory note’ is an instrument in writing (not being a bank – note or a currency –

note) containing an unconditional undertaking
Signed by the maker
to pay a certain sum of money only to –
(a) a certain person; or
(b) the order of a certain person.
Rs……………. Place…………..
Date…………..
……..month/days after date. I promise to pay ……….or Bearer/Order the sum of

Rs………..for value received with interest @..............p.a. with ………..rests
…………..
(Maker)
5. ESSENTIALS CHARACTERISTICS OF A PROMISSORY NOTE (Sec.4)
¾ In writing
An oral promise to pay is not sufficient
Example
A promises to pay Rs.1,000 to ‘B’, over telephone.
¾ Express promise to pay

There must be express promise to pay.
Mere acknowledgement of indebtedness is not sufficient.
• “I acknowledge myself to be indebted to B in Rs.5,000, to be paid on demand, for
value received”. The promise to pay is definite and therefore this is a valid
promissory note.
SUJEET JHA 206 9213188188
• “Mr. B.I.O.U Rs.1,000.” There is no promise to pay and therefore this is not a valid
promissory note.
¾ Definite and unconditional promise

If a promise to pay is dependent upon an event which is certain to happen, although the
time of its happening is uncertain, the promise to pay is unconditional.
• “I promise to pay B Rs.500 seven days after my marriage with C.” The promise is
conditional since the promise is dependent upon marriage of the promisor with C,
which may or not happen.
• “I promise to pay B Rs.500 on D’s death, provided D leaves me enough to pay that
sum.” The promise is conditional since the promise is dependent upon the estate
inherited by the promisor.
• “I promise to pay B Rs.500 on D’s death.” The promise is not conditional, but
definite since death of D is certain. Therefore, the promissory not is valid.
¾ Signed by maker
A promissory note must be signed by the maker.
The signatures may be made on any part of the instrument.
¾ Promise to pay a certain sum

• “I promise to pay B Rs.500 and all other sums which shall be due to him.” Since the
amount payable is not certain, it is not a valid promissory note.
• “I promise to pay B Rs.500 first deducting there from any money which he owes
me.” Since the amount payable is not certain, it is not a valid promissory note.
¾ Promise to pay money only

“I promise to pay B Rs.500 and to deliver to him my black horse on 1st January next.” It
is not a valid promissory note since the promisor is required to deliver his black horse
also, which is not ‘money’.
¾ Payee must be certain

The name of payee must be specified in the promissory note, otherwise it will be invalid.
¾ Stamped
A promissory note must be stamped.
Parties to a promissory note

Maker : The person who makes the promissory note is called as maker. His liability is
primary and unconditional.
Payee : The person to whom money is to be paid is named in the promissory note. He is
called as payee.
The words “ or to the bearer of the instrument” is inoperative in view of section 31 of

the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934, which provides that no person in India other than
Reserve Bank of India or Central Government can make or issue promissory note
payable to bearer of the instrument.
6. BILL OF EXCHANGE (Sec. 5)
A ‘bill of exchange’ is an instrument in writing

Containing an unconditional order
Signed by the maker
SUJEET JHA 207 9213188188
Directing a certain person

To pay a certain sum of money only to –
(a) a certain person ; or
(b) the order of a certain person; or
(c) the bearer of the instrument.
Amount: Rs………… Place…………….

Date……………..
…….month/days after date, pay to ……………or Bearer/Order the sum of

Rupees…………only for value received.
To
…………. ………….
(Drawer) (Drawee)
¾ Essentials characteristics of a bill of exchange

(a) It must be in writing
(b) It must contain an express order to pay
(c) The order to pay must be definite and unconditional
(d) It must be signed by the drawer
(e) The sum contained in the order must be certain
(f) The order must be to pay money only
(g) Drawer, drawee and payee must be certain (usually, same person is the drawer and
payee)
(h) It must be stamped.
¾ Parties to a bill of exchange

Drawer
• The person who draws the bill (i.e.the person who makes the bill) is called as drawer.
• His liability is secondary and conditional
• His liability is primary and conditional until the bill is accepted.
Drawee
• The person on whom the bill is drawn is called as drawee.
• On acceptance of the bill
(a) he is called as acceptor;
(b) he becomes liable for the payment of the bill;
(c) his liability is primary and unconditional.
Payee.
• The person to whom money is to be paid is named in the bill.
• He is called as payee.
The words “or the bearer of the instrument” is inoperative is view of section 31 of the
Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934, which provides that no person in India other than
Reserve Bank of India or Central Government can make or issue promissory note
payable to bearer of the instrument.
Difference between promissory note and bill of exchange.
SUJEET JHA 208 9213188188

7. CHEQUE (Sec.6)
A cheque is a bill of exchange drawn on a specified banker and not expressed to be

payable otherwise than on demand (i.e. it is always payable on demand) and it includes –
- the electronic image of truncated cheque; and
- a cheque in electronic from.
¾ Essentials characteristics of a cheque

(a) It must be in writing
(b) It must contain an express order to pay
(c) The order to pay must be definite and unconditional
(d) It must be signed by the drawer
(e) The sum contained in the order must be certain
(f) The order must be to pay money only
(g) Drawer, drawee and payee must be certain
(h) It is always drawn upon a specified banker
(i) It is always payable on demand
• A cheque must contain all the characteristics of a bill of exchange
• A cheque does not require
(a) stamping ; or
(b) acceptance.
¾ Parties to a cheque
Drawer
• The person who draws the cheque, i.e., the person who makes the cheque is called as
drawer.
• His liability is primary and conditional
Drawee
• The bank on whom the cheque is drawn is called as drawee.
• He makes the payment of the cheque.
Payee
• The person to whom money is to be paid (i.e., the person in whose favour cheque is
issued) is named in the cheque. He is called as payee.
• The payee may be the drawer himself or a third party.
Meaning of electronic cheque and truncated cheque
¾ Meaning of truncated cheque

- A truncated cheque means a cheque
- Which is truncated during the course of a clearing cycle
- Either by the clearing house or bank whether paying or receiving payment.
- Immediately on generation of an electronic image.
- For transmission substituting the further physical movement of cheque in writing
¾ Meaning of ‘a cheque in electronic form’

- A cheque in electronic form means a cheque
SUJEET JHA 209 9213188188
- Which contains the exact mirror image of a paper cheque

- and is generated, written and signed in a secure system ensuring the minimum
safety standards with the use of digital signature (with or without biometric
signature) and asymmetric crypto system.
¾ Duties of collecting banker

The collecting banker shall verify with due diligence and ordinary care –
• The prima facie genuineness of the cheque to be truncated;
• As to whether any fraud, forgery or tampering is apparent on the face of the
instrument.
¾ Presentment of truncated cheque

In case of any reasonable suspicion about the genuineness of the electronic image of a
truncated cheque (e.g. suspicion as to fraud, forgery, tampering or destruction of the
instrument), the paying banker is entitled to –
• Demand any further information regarding the truncated cheque;
• Demand the presentment of truncated cheque itself for verification.
Difference between electronic cheque and truncated cheque

Electronic cheque Truncated cheque
Paper is not used at any stage in creation of an A truncated cheque is nothing but a paper
electronic cheque. cheque, which is truncated during the clearing
cycle.
Digital signatures must be used to create an The paper cheque, which is afterwards
electronic image of cheque. Thus, an electronic truncated, contains no digital signature. The
cheque contains digital signature. signatures in ink appear on the truncated
cheque.
The original writing of an electronic cheque is The – original writing of a truncated cheque is
in electronic form. on paper duly – signed in ink. After the paper
cheque is converted into electronic form, it is
truncated and thus, it becomes a truncated
cheque.
8. CAPACITY OF A PERSON TO BE A PARTY TO A NEGOTIABLE

INSTRUMENT (Sec. 26)
¾ Person must be capable of contracting
A person shall be liable on a negotiable instrument (by reason of making, drawing,
accepting endorsing, delivering or negotiating a negotiable instrument) only if he is
capable of contracting according to the law to which he is subject.
¾ Liability in case of a minor

• A minor may draw, endorse, deliver and negotiate any negotiable instrument.
• All the parties shall be bound on such negotiable instrument.
• However, the minor shall not be bound on such negotiable instrument.
SUJEET JHA 210 9213188188

9. CLASSIFICATION OF NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENT (Sec. 13, 19 and 21)
Classification of instruments
Based on Transfer Based on Location Based on payment Others
Bearer Order Demand Time Ambiguous Inchoate

Instrument Instrument Instrument Instrument Instrument Instrument
Inland Foreign
¾ Order Instrument :
An instrument -
• Payable to a particular person or expressed to be payable to a particular person, and
• Does not contain words prohibiting transfer or indicating an intention that it shall not
be transferable.
¾ Bearer Instrument :
An instrument is payable to bearer of –
(a) it is expressed to be so payable, or
(b) on which the only or last endorsement is an endorsement in blank.
• Promissory note – can not be made payable to bearer
• Bill of exchange can not be made payable to bearer on demand
¾ Demand Instrument:
An instrument which satisfies the following conditions –
(a) Time for payment is not specified.
(b) Expressed to be payable on demand.
(c) Can be presented for payment at any time.
Note: A P/N or B/E, in which no time for payment is specified, and a cheque, are
payable on demand. [ Sec.19]
¾ Time Instrument :
An instrument in which time for payments is specified and may be payable –
(a) After a specified period, or
(b) On a specified day, or
(c) Certain period after, sight, or
(d) On the happening of a certain event.
¾ Inland Instrument [Sec.11]:

A P/N, B/E or cheque is said to be an inland instrument, if any one of the following
conditions is satisfied –
(a) Drawn or made in India and made payable in India, or
(b) Drawn or made in India and drawn upon a person resident in India.
Note: Even if an Inland Bill is endorsed to a foreign country, it continues to be an Inland

Instrument.
¾ Foreign Instrument [Sec.12]:

An instrument which is not an Inland Instrument, is deemed to be a Foreign Instrument.
SUJEET JHA 211 9213188188

¾ Ambiguous Instruments [Sec.17]:

(a) Where an instrument may be constructed either as a P/N or as a B/E, the holder may
at his option treat it as either, and the instrument shall henceforth be treated
accordingly, e.g. a B/E drawn in favour of a fictitious person.
(b) An Ambiguous Instrument treated as a P/N or as a B/E cannot be treated differently
afterwards.
¾ Conditions for an inchoate instrument

(a) A person signs a negotiable instrument.
(b) The negotiable instrument is stamped.
(c) The negotiable instrument is either wholly blank or is partially blank.
(d) The person signing such negotiable instrument delivers it to another person.
¾ Legal effect
The holder gets a prima facie authority to make or complete the negotiable instrument.
¾ Liability on an inchoate instrument

Rights of a person to whom an inchoate instrument is delivered
He can recover only such amount as he was authorised to fill.
Rights of HDC
He can recover the whole amount stated in the instrument, but not exceeding the amount
covered by the stamps.
10. MATURITY OF A NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENT (Sec.22)
¾ Maturity of a negotiable instrument Days of grace

- It means the date on which the negotiable instrument falls due for payment.
- A negotiable instrument which is payable otherwise than on demand is entitled to
3 days of grace.
11. CALCULATION OF DAYS OF MATURITY (Sec.23 to 25)
Case Date of maturity

Negotiable instrument payable Specified day + 3rd day
on a specified day
Negotiable instrument payable Date on which negotiable instrument is drawn + stated
on a stated number of days number of days + 3rd day
after date
Negotiable instrument payable Date on which negotiable instrument is presented for4
on stated number of days after sight + stated number of days + 3rd day
sight
Negotiable instrument payable Date on which such event happens + stated number of
on stated number of days after day + 3rd day
happening of a certain event
Negotiable instrument payable Corresponding day of the relevant month (i.e., date on
on stated number of months which negotiable instrument is drawn + stated number
after date of months) + 3rd day
Negotiable instrument payable Corresponding day of the relevant month* (i.e., Date
on stated number of months on which negotiable instrument is presented for sight
after sight + stated number of months) + 3rd day
Negotiable instrument payable Corresponding day of the relevant month* (i.e., Date
on stated number of months on which such event happens + stated number of
SUJEET JHA 212 9213188188
after happening of a certain months)+ 3rd day

event
If the day of maturity of Immediately preceding business day
negotiable instrument is a
public holiday
If the day of maturity of Immediately succeeding business day
negotiable instrument is an
emergency or unforeseen
public holiday
12. NEGOTIATION – MEANING AND METHODS (Sec.14)
¾ Meaning of negotiation
Negotiation means transfer of a negotiable instrument to any other person so an to
constitute that person the holder of such negotiable instrument.
¾ Methods of negotiation
Negotiation by delivery
• A bearer instrument may be negotiated by delivery.
• The delivery must be voluntary
Negotiation by endorsement and delivery
An order instrument can be negotiated only by way of -
(i) endorsement; and
(ii) delivery.
13. MEANING OF ENDORSEMENT (Sec. 15)
Endorsement means
Signing
- on the face or back of negotiable instrument; or
- on a slip of paper annexed to the negotiable instrument
By
- the holder of negotiable instrument
For the purpose of
- negotiating such negotiable instrument .
Type of Endorsement
In Blank In full Restrictive Qualified
Sign only and Sign with Restrict

name of endorsee’s rights
endorses name
not written written
Sans Sans Facultative
Recourse Frais
Endorser No expenses Certain

excludes to be incurred rights
his own on endorser waived
liability account
SUJEET JHA 213 9213188188
14. ESSENTIAL REQUEREMENTS OF A VALID ENDORSEMENT (Sec.15 and 16)
Writing
The endorsement must be in writing
Signed
The endorsement shall not be valid unless it is signed.
By holder
The endorsement shall be valid only if the negotiable instrument is signed by the holder.
15. KINDS OF ENDORSEMENTS (Sec.16, 50, 52, 56)
¾ General endorsement i.e. endorsement in blank

Meaning
- General endorsement means, an endorsement made by the endorser without
writing the name of the endorsee.
Effect
- Order instrument is converted into bearer instrument.
¾ Special endorsement i.e., endorsement in full

Special endorsement means an endorsement made by a holder by –
(a) singing his name, and
(b) adding a direction to pay the amount to a specified person
¾ Restrictive endorsement
An endorsement which restricts the right of further negotiation is called as restrictive
endorsement.
¾ Partial endorsement
An endorsement which purports to transfer only a part of the amount of the instrument is
called as partial endorsement. Partial endorsement is not valid at law.
¾ Conditional endorsement
(a) Sans Recourse – Endorser relieves himself from the liability to all subsequent
endorsees.
(b) Facultative – Endorser waives any of his rights.
(c) Contingent - Endorser makes his liability dependent upon the happening of an
event.
16. NEGOTIATION BACK (Sec.90)
¾ Meaning
If –
- a negotiable instrument is negotiated by the holder, but
- the endorser again becomes the holder of such negotiable instrument
Then –
SUJEET JHA 214 9213188188

- it is called as negotiation back.

¾ Effect
• The holder cannot enforce payment against an intermediate party to whom he
was previously liable.
• The holder can enforce payment against all the parties to whom he was not
previously liable.
• However, the holder can sue all the prior parties (including all intermediate
parties to whom he was previously liable), if he had made sans recourse
endorsement.
17. DISTINCTION BETWEEN NEGOTIATION AND ASSIGNMENT
Basis Negotiation Assignment

1. Applicable Act If a negotiable instrument is Where any right is transferred by way
transferred by way of negotiation, of assignment, the Transfer of Property
Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881, Act applies.
applies.
2. Meaning Negotiation means transfer of a Transfer of a right to receive the
negotiable instrument to any other payment of a debt by one person (viz,
person so as to constitute that assignor) to another document is called
person the holder of such as assignment.
negotiable instrument.
3. Scope Negotiation can be made for Assignment can be made of any right.
transferring negotiable
instruments only.
4. Method or A bearer instrument can be Assignment is valid only if it is made
manner negotiated merely by delivery, in writing and is signed by the
and an order instrument can be assignor.
negotiated by endorsement and
delivery.
5. Notice Notice of negotiation is not Notice of assignment must be given by
required to be given to any party. the assignee to the debtor.
6. consideration It is presumed that every There is no such presumption in case
negotiable instrument was of assignment.
negotiated for consideration.
7. Burden of The other party has to prove that The assignee has to prove that there
proof negotiation was without any was some consideration.
consideration.
8. Better title The transferee of a negotiable The assignee does not acquire a title
instrument acquires a title better better than that of the assignor.
than that of the transfer, i.e., he
becomes a holder in due course.
9. Stamp duty Negotiation does not require Assignment requires payment of stamp
payment of stamp duty. duty.
18. MEANING AND PURPOSE OF CROSSING

SUJEET JHA 215 9213188188
¾ Meaning of crossing
Crossing means a direction given by the drawer of the cheque to the drawee bank, not to
pay the cheque at the counter of the bank, but to pay it to a person who presents it
through a banker.
¾ Purpose of crossing
Crossing makes it possible to trace the person to whom the payment has been made.
Thus, it makes the cheque safe.
19. TYPES OF CROSSING (Sec. 123 to 131A)
¾ General Crossing ; Sec.123

Where a cheque bears across its face an addition of –
• The words ‘and company’ or any abbreviations thereof between two parallel
transverse lines, or
• Two parallel transverse lines simply.
……………….
Pay…………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………..or bearer
Rupees……………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………
XYZ Bank
XXXX XXXX
Either with or without the words ‘not negotiable’, the addition shall be deemed a
crossing, and the cheque shall be deemed to be crossed generally.
Where a cheque is crossed generally, the banker on whom it is drawn shall not pay it
otherwise than to a banker.
¾ Special Crossing : Sec.124.

Where a cheque bears across its face an addition of the name of a banker, either with or
without the words ‘not negotiable’, that addition shall be deemed a crossing and the
cheque shall be deemed to be crossed specially.
……………….
Pay…………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………..or bearer
Rupees………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………..
XYZ Bank
XXXX XXXX
Two parallel transverse lines are not a must. Where a cheque is crossed specially, the
banker on whom it is crossed shall not pay it, otherwise than to the banker to whom it is
crossed or his agent for collection.
SUJEET JHA 216 9213188188
Difference:
In general crossing the Name of the Bank is not mentioned whereas in special crossing
the Name of the Bank is mentioned.
‘Not Negotiable’ Crossing : Sec.130.
The object of “Not negotiable” crossing is to protect the rights of holder of a cheque.
A person taking a cheque crossed generally or specially, bearing in either cases the
words ‘not negotiable’, shall not have, and shall not be capable of giving a better title to
the cheque other than that which the person from whom he took it had.
Ordinarily a person acquiring a cheque in good faith becomes its holder in due course
just as in the case of an open document. Such a cheque can be negotiated further.
However, where a cheque is crossed as ‘Not Negotiable’, either generally or specially,

the Holder in due course will not get a better title than the person from whom the
received. It maybe noted that though it is mentioned ‘Not Negotiable’, the cheque can be
transferred. The only restriction is with regard to the title passed.
In other words, the principle of nema dat quod non habet (nobody can pass on a title
better than what he himself has) will be applicable to a cheque with a ‘not negotiable’
crossing, even though the cheque is in the hands of a holder in due course.
¾ ‘Account Payee’ Crossing / Restrictive Crossing

The purpose of this crossing bearing the words “A/c Payee” is to obviate the risk of a
wrong person obtaining payment on a cheque.
It is a direction to banker to credit the proceeds only to the account of the payee.
The cheque remarks legally negotiable but “A/c payee” crossing hinders the negotiability
of the cheque in practice.
20. BOUNCING OR DISHONOUR OF CHEQUES (Sec.31 and 138)
¾ Liability of drawee on dishonour Conditions (Sec.31)

If –
- the drawer has sufficient funds in the account; and
- such funds are properly applicable to payment of the cheque
Then –
- the drawee is duly required to pay the cheque.
- In case of default by drawee (i.e. Banker), the drawee shall compensate the
drawer for loss caused to him.
¾ Liability of drawer on dishonour (Sec.138)

Nature of liability
• Imprisonment – 2 years (Maximum); or
• Fine - 2 times the amount of cheque (Maximum); or
• Both
Conditions
• Debt - Cheque was issued to discharge a legally enforceable debt.
• Reason for dishonour – insufficiency of funds
• Presentment of cheque – within 6 months or validity period of the cheque
SUJEET JHA 217 9213188188
• Demand made from drawer – within 30 days of dishonour

• Default by drawer to pay - within 15 days of demand made.
• Complaint by holder – within 1 month, with the Court.
21. HOLDER (Sec.8 and 9)
¾ Meaning of ‘holder’ (Sec.8)

(a) He must be entitled to the possession of negotiable instrument in his own name.
(b) He must be entitled to receive or recover the amount due on negotiable instrument
from the parties liable on negotiable instrument.
¾ Holder for value

‘Holder for value’ means, as regards all parties prior to himself, holder of an instrument
for which value has, at any time, been given.
¾ Meaning of ‘holder in due course’ (Sec.9)

(a) He must be a holder.
(b) He must have become the holder for consideration.
(c) He must have obtained the possession of negotiable instrument before maturity
(d) He must have obtained the negotiable instrument in good faith, i.e. without sufficient
cause to believe that any defect existed in the title of the person from whom he
derived his title.
Example:-
Situation Holder Holder for Holder in due
Value Course
a. X steals a cheque √ × ×
b. X gets a cheque for √ √ ×
consideration but
after maturity
c. X gets a cheque for √ √ √
consideration before
maturity.
22. PRIVILEGES OF A HOLDER IN DUE COURSE (Sec.20, 36, 43, 46, 53 and 58)
Every prior party to a negotiable instrument is liable to a HDC (Sec.36)

A holder who derives title from HDC has the same rights as that of a HDC
(Sec.53)
No prior party can set up a defense that the negotiable instrument was drawn,
made or endorsed by him without any consideration (Sec.43)
No prior party can set up a defence that the negotiable instrument was lost or was
obtained from him by an offence or fraud or for an unlawful consideration. Thus,
HDC gets a valid title to the negotiable instrument even though the title of the
transferor was defective (Sec.58)
No Prior party can allege that negotiable instrument was delivered conditionally
or for a special purpose only (Sec.46).
HDC can claim full amount of the negotiable instrument (but not exceeding the
amount covered by the stamp) even though such amount is in excess of the
amount authorised by the person delivering an inchoate negotiable instrument
(Sec.20).
23. DIFFERNCE BETWEEN HOLDER AND HDC

SUJEET JHA 218 9213188188
Basis Holder HDC

1. consideration A person becomes a holder A person becomes a HDC
even if he obtains the only if he obtains the
negotiable instrument without negotiable instrument for
any consideration. consideration.
2. Before Maturity A person becomes a holder A person becomes a HDC
even is he obtains the only if he obtains the
negotiable instrument after the negotiable instrument before
maturity of the negotiable its maturity.
instrument.
3. Good Faith, i.e., A person becomes a holder, For being a HDC, a person
bonafide even if he does not obtain the must obtain the negotiable
negotiable instrument in good instrument in good faith.
faith.
4. Privileges A HDC is entitled to various
A holder is not entitled to the
privileges as specified under
privileges, which are available
for HDC. the Negotiable Instruments
Act, 1881.
5. Right to sue A holder cannot sue all the A HDC can sue all the prior
prior parties. parties.
24. PAYMENT IN DUE COURSE. (Sec.10)
Payment is made as per apparent tenor.

Payment is made in good faith-
Payment is made without negligence
Payment is made to holder of negotiable instrument
Payment is made in money only
25. PROTECTION TO PAYING BANKER (Sec.85)
¾ Cheque payable to order

• Payment is made in due course.
• The protection shall be available notwithstanding that any endorsement subsequently
turns out to be a forgery.
¾ Cheque originally payable to bearer

• Payment is made in due course
• Payment is made to the bearer of the cheque
• The protection shall be available notwithstanding that any endorsement appears on
the cheque
¾ Cheques crossed generally

• Payment is made in due course.
• Payment is made to any banker.
¾ Cheques crossed specially

• Payment is made in due course
• Payment is made to the banker to whom the cheque is crossed.
SUJEET JHA 219 9213188188

26. LIABILITY OF THE PAYING BANKER (Sec.129)
The paying banker shall be liable to the owner of the cheque for any loss sustained by
him in the following 2 cases.
(a) Where the paying banker pays a cheque crossed generally otherwise than to a banker.
(b) Where the paying banker pays a cheque crossed specially otherwise than to the
specified banker.
27. BANKER MUST REFUSE TO HONOUR A CUSTOMER’S CHEQUE
Stop payment
Garnishee order
Death of customer
Insolvency of customer
Insanity or customer
Assignment of funds by customer
Defect in title of holder
Loss of cheque
Materially altered cheque, mutilated cheque, cheque of doubtful validity, incomplete
cheque
Different signatures
Receipt of application for closure of account
Irregular endorsement
Stale cheque, i.e., outdated cheque
Post dated cheque
Undated cheque
28. BANKER MAY REFUSE TO HONOUR A CUSTOMER’S CHEQUE
Insufficient funds
Funds not applicable
Presentment at different branch
Presentment after banking hours
29. EFFECT OF NON – PRESENTMENT OF CHEQUE WITHIN REASONABLE TIME

(Sec.84)
¾ No liability of drawer if bank fails Conditions

(a) The drawer has sufficient balance when he issue the cheque, and when the cheque
ought to be presented for payment.
(b) The holder fails to present the cheque within a reasonable time of issue of the
cheque.
(c) Meanwhile (i.e. after issue of the cheque but before presentation of the cheque by the
holder) the bank fails, and consequently the drawer suffers actual damages.
30. MATERIAL ALTERATION (Sec.20, 49, 87 and 125)
¾ Meaning
An alteration is called as material alteration if it alters –
• the character or operation (i.e. the legal effect) of a negotiable instrument; or
• the rights and liabilities of any of the parties to a negotiable instrument.
SUJEET JHA 220 9213188188

¾ Material alterations authorised by Act

(a) Filling blanks of an inchoate instrument (Sec.20)
(b) Conversion of a blank endorsement into an endorsement in full (Sec.49)
(c) Crossing of cheques (Sec.125)
(d) Conversion of general crossing into special crossing or not negotiable crossing or A/c
Payee Crossing (but not vice – versa)
(e) Conversion of a bearer instrument into an order instrument by deleting the word
‘Bearer’.
¾ Effects of material alteration (87)

All the parties to negotiable not consenting to the material alteration are discharged.
31. ACCEPTANCE (Sec.7 and 86)
¾ Meaning of acceptance (Sec.7)

(a) The drawee signs the bill; and
(b) The drawee delivers it to the holder of the bill; or
¾ Effect (Sec.7)
The drawee becomes the acceptor.
¾ Essentials of a valid acceptance (Sec.7)
(a) Writing (whether on the face or back of the bill)
(b) Signed (Signature without the word ‘accepted’ is also valid)
(c) Signing on the bill
(d) Delivery or intimation to the holder that the bill has been accepted.
¾ Types of acceptance (Sec.86)

(a) General – Acceptance of bill without any qualification.
(b) Qualified – Acceptance of bill subject to some qualification (e.g. accepting the bill
subject to the condition that the payment of bill shall be made only on
happening of an event specified therein).
¾ Effect of qualified acceptance (Sec. 86)

(a) The holder may object to the qualified acceptance. In such a case, it shall be treated
that the bill is dishonoured due to non – acceptance.
(b) He may give his consent to the qualified acceptance. In such a case, all the previous
parties, not consenting to it, are discharged.
32. DISHONOUR BY NON – ACCEPTANCE (Sec.91)
¾ Meaning
A bill is dishonoured by non – acceptance if it is duly presented for acceptance, but the
drawee refuses to accept the bill.
¾ Cases in which a bill is dishonoured by non – acceptance

(a) Where a bill is not accepted by the drawee within 48 hours of presentment of bill. If
the holder allows to the drawee more than 48 hours for acceptance, all the prior
parties not consenting to the same are discharged from liability to such holder.
(b) In case there are two or more drawees who are not partners, if the bill is not accepted
by all the drawees.
(c) Where the drawee is a fictitious person
(d) When the drawee cannot be found even after a reasonable search.
SUJEET JHA 221 9213188188

(e) When the drawee is incompetent to contract.

(f) Where the drawee gives a conditional acceptance, and the holder does not give his
consent to the conditional acceptance.
¾ Effects
• The holders gets an immediate right to sue all the prior parties.
• He need not wait till the maturity of the bill for it to be dishonoured on presentment
for payment.
¾ Non – applicability
A promissory note or a cheque cannot be dishonoured by non – acceptance since a
promissory note or a cheque does not require any acceptance.
33. ACCEPTANCE FOR HONOUR (Sec.108 to 112)
¾ Meaning
The person who accepts the bill for the honour of any other person is called as an
acceptor for honour;
¾ Conditions for ‘acceptance for honour’

• The bill must have been noted for non – acceptance
• The acceptance is given –
- for the honour of any party already liable under the bill.
- By any person who is already not liable under the bill.
- With the consent of the holder of the bill.
• The acceptance must be made in writing on the bill.
¾ Liability of acceptor for honour

• He is liable to pay the amount of the bill, if the drawee does not pay.
• He is liable only to the parties subsequent to the party for whose honour the bill is
accepted.
¾ Rights of acceptor for honour

He is entitled to recover the amount paid by him from the party for whose honour the bill
was accepted, and from all the parties prior to such party.
34. PAYMENT FOR HONOUR (Sec.113 and 114)
¾ Meaning of ‘payer for honour’

A person who pays a bill for honour of any other person is called as ‘payer for honour’
¾ Conditions for ‘payment for honour’

• The bill must have been noted for non – payment.
• Payment for honour is made –
- for the honour of any party already liable under the bill.
- By any person (whether or not he is already liable under the bill).
- With the consent of the holder of the public.
• The payment must be recorded by Notary Public.
¾ Rights of payer for honour

• The payer for honour is entitled to all the rights of a holder.
SUJEET JHA 222 9213188188

• He can recover all the sums paid by him form –

(a) the party for whose honour he pays; and
(b) all the parties prior to such party.
35. DISHONOUR BY NON – PAYMENT (Sec.92)

Kinds of negotiable A negotiable instrument shall be dishonoured by non – payment
instrument if default in payment is made by the following parties
Promissory note Maker
Bill Acceptor (Drawee, in case the bill does not require acceptance
Cheque Drawee
36. NOTICE OF DISHONOUR (Sec.93 to 98)
¾ Notice by whom?
Notice may be given by the holder or any party liable on the negotiable instrument.
¾ Notice to whom?
Notice must be given to all the parties to whom the holder seeks to make liable
¾ Contents of notice
Notice must disclose the fact of dishonour of negotiable instrument
¾ Effects of default
A party (other than the party primarily liable on the negotiable instrument) to whom
notice of dishonour is not given is discharged from liability on the negotiable instrument.
¾ When notice of dishonour is unnecessary or excused (Sec.98)

(a) When notice of dishonour is dispensed with by a party.
(b) Where the drawer of the cheque has countermanded payment, notice to drawer is not
required to be given.
(c) When the party entitled cannot be found even after due search.
(d) Where the party bound to give notice is unable to give notice without any fault of his
own.
37. NOTING AND PROTESTING (Sec.99 to 103)
¾ Meaning of noting
Recording the fact of dishonour of a negotiable instrument on the negotiable instrument.
¾ Procedure and contents of noting

• The dishonoured bill is handed over to a Notary Public.
• Notary Public presents it again for acceptance/payment.
• If the drawee/acceptor refuses to accept or pay the bill, the Notary Public records the
fact of dishonour on the bill.
¾ Noting is optional
It is net mandatory to get the fact of dishonour noted.
¾ Meaning of protest
A certificate issued by Notary Public stating the fact of dishonour.
38. DRAWEE IN CASE OF NEED (Sec.7 and 115)

SUJEET JHA 223 9213188188
The name of any person may be given in a bill as ‘drawee in case of need’.
His liability arises on the bill only when the bill is not accepted by the drawee named in
the bill.
The bill is not dishonoured until it has been dishonoured by drawee in case of need.
39. DISCHARGE OF A NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENT
The Negotiable Instrument is deemed to be discharged in the following cases –

¾ Payment [Sec.78]:
• When the party primarily liable on the instrument i.e. Maker of P/N, Acceptor of B/E
or Drawee Bank, makes the payment in due course to the Holder at or after maturity.
• Payment by a party who is secondarily liable does not discharge the instrument
because the payer holds it to enforce it against prior indorsers and the principle
Debtor.
¾ Cancellation of N/I [Sec.82]:

When the holder cancels an instrument with intention to release the party primarily liable
thereon from liability, the instrument is discharged and ceases to be negotiable.
¾ Express Waiver of Rights by Holder:

The N/I is discharged when the Holder, at or after its maturity absolucly and
unconditionally renounces in writing , his rights against all the parties to the instrument.
¾ Lapse of time :
An instrument becomes discharged by lapse of time making the debt time barred under
the limitation Act.
¾ Insolvency of party primarily liable:

When the party primarily liable becomes insolvent, the instrument is discharged and the
holder cannot make any other prior party liable thereon.
¾ Material Alteration to Instrument ;

The instrument stands discharged when it is rendered void by a material alteration to the
Instrument.
¾ Negotiation to Acceptor [Sec. 90];

When a B/E which has been negotiated is, at or after maturity, held by the Acceptor in
his own right, all rights of action thereon are extinguished, i.e. the B/E is discharged.
40. DISCHARGE OF A PARTY (Sec.82 to 90)
Discharge by Causal Factor Discharge of ……..

Cancellation Holder deliberately cancels Maker, Acceptor or Indorser
the name of Acceptor / of N/I is discharged from
Indorser (by striking off the liability to such Holder and to
name) with an intent to all parties claiming under such
discharge him from liability. Holder.
Note: Cancellation done under a mistake or without authority
of the Holder would be inoperative and will and discharge any
party.
Release Holder discharges the Maker, Acceptor or Indorser
SUJEET JHA 224 9213188188
Maker/Acceptor / Indorser by of N/I is discharged from

any method other than liability to such Holder and to
cancellation of names, e.g. all parties claiming under such
separate agreement of waiver, Holder.
release, or remission etc.
Payment Party primarily liable on the All the parties to the
N/I makes payment in due instrument stand discharged,
course to the Holder at or after as the instrument is also
maturity. discharged by such payment.
Allowing Drawee Holder of a B/E allows the All previous parties not
more than 48 hours to Drawee more than 48 hours, consenting to such allowance
accept exclusive of public holidays, are thereby discharged from
to consider whether he will liability to such holder.
accept the same .
Cheque not duly Cheque is not presented for Drawer is discharged as
presented payment within a reasonable against the Holder to the
time, and Drawer suffers extent of the actual damage
actual damage as a result of suffered by him.
the delay by the bankers.
Note: Holder of the cheque as to which such Drawer is

dischared shall be a Creditors to the Banker to the extent of
such damage and entitled to recover the amount from him.
Payment of Cheque Cheque payable to order The Drawee i.e. the Paying
payable to order purpose to be endorsed by or Banker is discharged from
on behalf of the payee is paid liability.
in due course.
Cheque originally Bank makes a payment in due The Drawee, i.e. the paying
expressed payable to course to a Bearer. Banker is discharged from
Bearer liability notwithstanding any
indorsement (full or blank or
restrictive) thereon.
Payment of Drafts A Draft drawn by one Bank The Bank is discharged from
upon another office of the liability.
same Bank for a sum of
money payable to order on
demand is paid in due course.
Taking Qualified or Holder of B/E agrees to All prior parties whose
Limited Acceptance acceptance – consent is not obtained to such
• Which is qualified, or an acceptance are discharged
• Limited to part of money from liability to the Holder
due, or and those claiming under such
• Which substitutes a Holder.
different time or place for
payment or
• Not signed by all Drawees
who are not partners.
Material alteration Any material alteration N/I is void as against anyone
without the consent of any who is a party at the time of
party thereto. making such alteration.
Material alteration Any material alteration made Indorser is discharged from all
by the indorsee. liability to the Indorsee in
SUJEET JHA 225 9213188188
respect of consideration
thereof.
Payment of altered Payment in due course is The person or Banker making
instrument made in respect of – such payment in due course is
• A P/N, B/E or cheque has discharged from all liability
been materially altered but thereon.
does not appear to be so
altered, and
• A cheque presented for
payment which at the time
of presentment does not
appear to have an
obliterated crossing
Non – presentment of Where B/E payable after a Drawer and all Indorsers who
a bill for acceptance certain period after sight, is were liable towards such a
not presented for acceptance Holder are discharged from
by the Holder within a their liability.
reasonable time.
No notice of When the Holder does not Any party to a N/I (other than
dishonour send any notice of dishonour. party primarily liable) to
whom notice of dishonour is
not sent is discharged from
liability as against the holder.
Note : The parties to a N/I are also discharged by operation of law, in the following
cases
• Upon Order of Insolvency Court, the Insolvent is discharged.
• When a judgment is obtained against the Acceptor, Maker or Indorser, debt
under the bill is merged into Judgment Debt.
• By lapse of time, when the remedy becomes time – barred.
41. MEANING OF HUNDI
A. TYPE OF HUNDIS
¾ Shah jog hundi
• Three parties – Drawer, Drawee and financier (Shah)
• Payable to shah
• Shah presents the hundi when it falls due for payment to drawee on behalf of holder
¾ Jokhmi hundi
• Documentary bill drawn by consignor on consignee in respect of goods shipped by
consignor.
• Name of the vessel by which goods are shipped is mentioned in the hundi.
• Consignee is required to pay only on goods reaching destination.
¾ Nam Jog Hundi

• Hundi payable to party named or to his order.
• Party has right to endorse as in the case of Bill of Exchange.
¾ Jawabee Hundi
• Instrument for remitting money
SUJEET JHA 226 9213188188
• Form – Ordinary letter advising parties that he may collect money from banker.
• Remitter hands over hundi to banker
• Banker endorses hundi to a correspondent residing in the town in which payee is
resident
• Correspondent forwards hundi to payee.
• Payee on presenting letter collects amount from correspondent.
¾ Dhani Jog Hundi

• Hundi payable to owner, i.e., person who owns it
¾ Firman Hundi
• Hundi payable at sight
¾ Dharshani Hundi
• Hundi payable at sight
• Transferable by endorsement
• Similar to bill of exchange payable on demand.
¾ Maidi Hundi
• Known in Bengal as MUDDATI HUNDI
• Hundi payment after a time
• Usually, the interest for the period upto the due date is deducted in advance.
B. OTHER TERMS
¾ Zikri Chit
• Issued by some party liable thereon to the holder of hundi
• Letter of protection addressed to a merchant in town where hundi is payable
requesting acceptance of the hundi in case of dishonour.
• Intended to be used by holder if hundi is dishonoured by non – acceptance.
¾ Peth
• Duplicate copy of hundi issued on loss of original hundi.
• The holder at the time when bill is lost before it is overdue may apply to the drawer
to give him another bill of the same tenor (Sec.45). The holder may give security, if
required to indemnify him against all persons in case the bill alleged to have been
lost is found again. If the drawer refuses to give a duplicate bill on request, he may be
compelled to do so.
¾ Perpeth
• Triplicate copy of hundi given on loss of duplicate hundi
¾ Khoka
• A hundi paid and cancelled.
SUJEET JHA 227 9213188188

STUDY NOTE - 5
SECTION II AUDITING
The concept of audit is a very old Phenomenon. The word “audit” is taken from the Latin word
“Auditus”- act of hearing. An ancient time, the owners of the business verify their accounts by
expert accountants or book-keepers to detect errors and frauds. Even the king and Amenders
used to listen from the accountants regarding receipts and payments of their kingdom.
At the end of fifteenth century due to renaissance in Italy there was a rapid growth in industry,
trade and commerce. The principle of doubled entry system was introduced by Luca Pacioli, a
famous Italian mathematician. Besides cash transaction accounting system also records credit
transactions and as a result complexity of accounts was increased.
As a result of industrial revolution in England in the 18th century there was a subs trial increase
in the volume of business. A rapid increase in commercial activity, emergence of banking,
insurance and joint stock companies, Separation of ownership from management of the business,
growing activities in the government sector led the need for audit of accounts.
A rapid change in socio-economic business environment scenario, requirement of the

globalization of business, complex regarding true accounts, necessity of the government to get
audited accounts for different purposes have influenced auditing to be used a fact-finding tool
have caused a greater responsibility in the technique, scope, reporting standard, professional,
legal, moral and ethical responsibilities from the auditors.
AUDITING- DEFINITION, SCOPE AND FEATURE.
Auditing” In modern concept, auditing is the scientific and systematic examination of the
books, accounts, vouchers and other financial records that will help the auditor to give
opinion regarding true and fair view of the state of affairs of the business and to verify that
profit and loss account reflects a true and fair view of profit or loss for the financial year.
In the words of Spicer and Pegler, “Audit is such an examination of the books, accounts and
vouchers of a business, as will enable the auditor to satisfy himself that the balance sheet is
properly drawn up, so as to give a trued and fair view of the state of affairs of the business, and
whether the Profit and Loss account gives a true and fair view of profit or loss for the for the
financial period, according to the best of his information and the explanations given to his and as
shown by the books; and if not, in what respect he is not satisfied.”
According to F.R.M. De Paula., “An audit denotes the examination of a Balance Sheet and
Profit and Loss Account prepared by others together with the books, accounts and vouchers
relating thereto in such a manner that the auditor may be able to satisfy himself and honestly
report that, in his opinion, such Balance Sheet is properly drawn up so as to exhibit a true and
correct view of the state of affairs of the particular concern according to the information and
explanations given to him and as shown by books.”
Prof. Montgomerty “Auditing is a systematic examination of the books and records of business
or other organization in order to ascertain or verify and to report upon the facts regarding its
financial operations and the result thereof.
SUJEET JHA 228 9213188188

M.L. Shandilya “Auditing may be defined as inspecting comparing, checking reviewing,

vouching ascertaining, scrutinizing, examining and verifying the books of accounts of a business
concern with a view to have a correct and true idea of its financial state of affairs.
According to the Institute of Charted Accountants of India auditing is “a systematic and

independent (Financial and otherwise) of an enterprise for a stated purpose. In any auditing
situation the auditor perceives and recognizes the propositions before him for examination,
collects evidence, evaluates the same and on this basis formulates his judgment which is
communicated through his audit report.”
The meaning of an Audit contains

¾ An intelligent and critical examination of the books of accounts of business.
¾ It is done by an independent qualified person.
¾ It is done with the help of vouchers, documents, information and explanations
received from the clients.
¾ The auditor satisfied himself with the authenticity of the financial accounts prepared
for a particular period.
¾ The auditor reports that
• The balance Sheet exhibits a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the
concern.
• The Profit and Loss account reveals the true and fair view of the profit or loss for
the financial period.
• The accounts have been prepared in conformity with the concerned law.
• If he is not satisfied then reports in what respect he is not satisfied.
Benefits of Business: Business may get many advantages of conducting audit by a qualified
auditor. The advantages are discussed below:
(a) True and Fair view: With the help of audit of accounts, it is possible get a true and fair
view of the financial position of the business.
(b) Detection of errors and frauds: If books of accounts are audited, errors and frauds can
be detected and necessary action can be taken to prevent it.
(c) Moral pressure on the employees: If audit is conducted by the organization, employees
should be cautions and there should be a moral pressure on them. As a result, chances of
errors and frauds will be minimized.
(d) Proper accounting control: A system of regular audit helps the organization to
maintain proper books of accounts regularly and books of accounts are kept up to date.
(e) Acceptable evidence: Audited accounts are very strong financial document acceptable
to many interested parties e.g. taking loan from financial institution, determination of
income tax, sales tax, amalgamation of companies, determination of purchase
consideration, admission, retirement, death of a partner etc.
(f) Helps to determine future policy: By comparing the audited accounts with past year
the trend of financial activities can be determined. On the basis of this review,
weaknesses are found out and future policy is determined.
(g) Valuable suggestions given by the auditor: If there is a system of continues audit in the
organization the auditor can give his valuable advice for the improvement of the
business.
(h) Increase in goodwill: Audit of business on a regular basis increases confidence to the
interested parties and general public. As a result goodwill of the business increases.
SUJEET JHA 229 9213188188

(ii) To the Owner: The owners of the business are also interested to know the financial
position of the business. There are discussed below:
(a) Benefit to the sole proprietor: In case of large business, the proprietor can get a true
and fair view of the accounts maintained by his employees and also able to know the
state of affairs and profit made by him. The proprietor is also benefited for getting
loan from financial institutions, to pay income tax etc.
(b) Benefits to the partners: Shareholders are the owners of a company. With the help
of audited accounts help to the partners to settle their unsettled disputed, for taking
loan from financial institutions, to get off the books of accounts maintained by the
employees etc.
(c) Benefits to the shareholders: Shareholders are the owners of a company. With the
help of audited accounts they get a real picture of the financial position of The
company and they can assure that business is running efficiently.
(d) Benefit to the non-profit seeking organizations: There are different non-profit
seeking organizations e.g., charitable institution, club, religious institute, school,
college etc. This organization run with public money. Whether public money is
properly utilized or not can be revealed from the audited accounts.
(iii) To the third parties: Besides business and the owners, there are different outside
interested parties who required audited accounts for different purposes: These are:
(a) Government may be interested to get the audited accounts to show the deficiency of
the business for giving grant and subsidy.
(b) Financial institutions sections loan to the organization on the basis of verification of
financial soundness form the audited accounts.
(c) Tax authorities may depend on audited accounts for determination of income tax,
sales tax, excise duty etc.
(d) Prospective buyers who want to invest money in shares and debentures of a company
may rely on audited accounts.
(e) Creditors who supply goods to the business may asses the solvency and liquidity
position of the business on the basis of audited accounts.
(f) For settlement of insurance claim, insurance companies can barely on audited
accounts.
From the above discussion, it is clear that both accounting and auditing are not contradictory but
complementary to each other,
To achieve the primary objective, an auditor has to verify that:

(i) All the transactions are properly recorded in the books of accounts.
(ii) All the transactions are for the current financial year.
(iii) To verify that all the assets and liabilities are properly shown in the balance Sheet.
(iv) All materials facts have been considered while preparing financial statements.
Objective Of audit
Primary Secondary
Reflects true and fair view of the books 1. Detection of errors and frauds.
Accounts and certify it to the appointing 2. Prevention of errors and frauds.
Authority 3. Necessary steps to rectify the above
(1.) Errors: Errors means careless representation of books of accounts or mistake in the
process of keeping accounting records by the employees’ who maintain the books of accounts.
There are different types of errors founds in the books of accounts while conducting audit by an
SUJEET JHA 230 9213188188

auditor. Errors may be of two type’s i.e., intentional errors and unintentional errors. Intentional
errors are conducted by the dishonest employees to falsify the books of accounts for their
personal interest. Unintentional errors are made due to the be shown diagrammatically which are
as follows:
Error
Clerical Errors Errors of Principle
Errors of Errors of Commission Errors of Compensating

Omission Duplication Errors
Frauds- Detection and Measures for Remedy

Frauds are the international misrepresentation of transactions in the books of accounts by the
dishonest employees to deceive another. Fraud may be of two types i.e. (a) Misappropriation of
cash and goods and (b) Falsification or manipulation of accounts. The different type of frauds
can be shown diagrammatically which are as follows:
Frauds
Misappropriation Falsification or manipulation

Of cash and Goods of Accounts
DEFERENCE BETWEEN ERROR AND FRAUDS
Errors Frauds
1. Errors means careless representation of 1. Frauds are the intentional
books of account or mistake in the misrepresentation of transactions in the
process of keeping accounting records books of accounts by the dishonest
by the employees’ who maintain the employees to deceive another. Fraud
books of accounts may be of tow types i.e., (i)
Misappropriation of cash and goods
and (ii) Falsification or manipulation of
accounts
2. Errors may be international or 2. Fraud is always intentional and is
unintentional committed to deceive the organization.
3. Generally employees of the accounting 3. Generally frauds of cash and goods are
department commit errors whether done by the higher level of
intentional or unintentional management staff
4. Unintentional errors are comparatively 4. It is comparatively through to detect
easier to detect. Intentional errors can frauds because this is always
also be finding out by the auditor if intentional.
proper attention is given.
DISTINCTION BETWEEN ACCOUNTANCY AND AUDITING

Accountancy: Accountancy and auditing is not a similar thing Accountancy is related with
maintaining books of accounts and to prepare financial statements. i.e., Profit and loss
Account and Balance Sheet in such a way that will reflect the financial position and
supplies the information relating to financial position to the interested parties. For this, it
SUJEET JHA 231 9213188188

has to collect, classify summaries and present the financial date in such a manner that is
acceptable to the different users.
Audit: In modern concept, audit is the scientific and systematic examination of the books,
accounts vouchers and other financial records that will help the auditor to give opinion
and other financial regarding true and fair view of the state of affairs of The business and
to verify that profit and loss account reflects a true and fair of profit or loss for the
financial year.
Therefore, where the works of an accountants ends, the work of auditor starts. The different
between accountancy and auditing are given below:
Accountancy Auditing
1. Accountancy is related with 1. Auditing is the scientific and
maintaining books of accounts and to systematic examination of the books,
prepare financial statements i.e. profit accounts, vouchers and other financial
and Loss account and Balances Sheet records that will help the auditor to
in such a way that will reflect the given opinion regarding true and fair
financial position and supplies the view of he state of affairs of the
information relating to financial business and to verify that profit and
position to the interested parties. loss account reflects a true and fair
view of profit or loss for the financial
year.
2. To reflect the financial position to the 2. The main objective of audit of a
business at the end of the financial year business is to show that the books of
and its presentation to the different accounts are prepared with recognized
interested parties are the main object of accounting principles and reflects the
accountancy true and fair view of the financial
position of the organization and to give
opinion regarding true and fair view of
the state of affairs of the business and
to verify the at profit and loss account
reflects a true and fair view of profit or
loss for the financial year.
3. The accounting job is done by an a 3. Generally the audit works is done by
accountant i.e. he may not be a an independent professionally qualified
professionally qualified person i.e. person i.e. a Charted Accountant. The
Charted Accountant. The accountant is auditor is not an employee of the
a paid employee of the organization. organization. He works on the basis of
audit if required.
4. The accounting work is done 4. Generally audit is conducted at the end
throughout the accounting year. of the financial year except in case of
big organizations, there may be
continuous audit if required.
5. An accountant does not require a 5. A social knowledge, skill and expertise
special skill and expertise for doing are require for doing auditing work.
accounting work
6. An accountant may not have an idea 6. The auditor must have a sound
regarding audit knowledge in accountancy. Otherwise
auditing works is not possible
7. The work of accounting begins first 7. The work of audit starts when the tasks
with the past financial transactions of financial accounts are completed.
8. There are some generally accepted 8. In India the work of audit controlled by
SUJEET JHA 232 9213188188
accounting principles followed by all the Company’s act, 1956 and the
the organizations while preparing standard auditing practices (SAP)
books of accounts. framed by the Institutes of Character
Accountant of India.
9. If there is may errors and frauds the 9. If there are any undisclosed errors or
employees are accountable of the frauds due to the negligence of the
management of the company. auditor, he will be liable as per civil,
criminal and professional misconduct
of the country.
10. After completion of accounting work 10. After completion of audit work the
the accountant gives his report to the auditor gives his audit report to the
management of the company shareholders (in case of a company)
and in other cases to the appointing
authority.
3. MAJOR INFLUENCES OF AUDITING

• Industrial Revolution
• Ownership
• Professional Management
• Statutory Provisions
• Case Laws
• Information Technology
6. ROLE OF EVIDNCE IN AUDITING

Meaning and Importance
• Evaluation of the proposition in terms of materiality or significance.
• Collection of evidence within given Limits of time and costs
• Evaluation of evidence obtained as valid or not valid.
• Formation of judgment as to the propositions at issue.
Types of Audit Evidence
¾ Meaning
Audit Evidence refers to any information obtained by the auditor so that he can draw
conclusions & express opinion on financial statements.
¾ Analytical evidence
These evidences consist of journals, subsidiary books allocation sheets reconciliation
statements or any other records which supports the data appearing in the books of
accounts.
¾ Corroborative Evidence
This evidence consist of invoices, confirmations cancelled cheques or similar
documents.
• Physical examination by the auditor of the thing represented in the accounts.
• Written of oral statement by independent third parties.
• Authoritative documents prepared inside or outside the enterprise.
• Formal or informal statement by officers and employees of the enterprise.
• Calculations performed by the auditor.
SUJEET JHA 233 9213188188
• Satisfactory internal control procedure.

• Subsequent actions by the enterprise and by others
• Subsidiary or detailed records with no significant indications of irregularities.
• Interrelationship within the data examined.
Obtaining Audit Evidence
• Inspection
• Observation
• Inquiry and Confirmation
• Computation
• Analytical Review
7. AUDIT TECHNIQUES AND PRACTICES

Audit Techniques:
• Physical Examination
• Confirmation
• Comparing Documents with The Records (Vouching)
• Computation
• Re tracking Book – keeping
• Scanning
• Inquiry
• Examining Subsidiary Records
• Co – relation With The Related Information
• Observation of Pertinent Activities.
Professional Pronouncements
Contained in your module as per page B – 7, 8, 9.
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
The international federation of accounts had issued following international financial
reporting standards. Actually these standards are pronounced by the International
Accounting Standard Board (IASB) constituted in place of old International Accounting
Standards Committee (IASC) in 2001, this pronunciation has amended certain IAS by
IFRS. These IFRS apply to the general purpose of financial statements and other
financial reporting by profit oriented entities. These IFRS apply to individual company
and consolidated financial statements. The ICA of India has decided to fully converge
with IFRS from the accounting period commencing on or after 1st April 2011.
IFRS 1 – First time adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards.
IFRS 2 – Share based payments
IFRS 3 – Business combinations
IFRS 4 – Insurance contracts
IFRS 5 – Noncurrent assets held for sale and discontinued operations
IFRS 6 – Exploration for and evaluation of mineral assets
IFRS 7 – Financial instruments disclosures
IFRS 8 – Operating segments
Guidance Note
The ICA of India issued a number of guidance notes on matters raised by its members
relating to auditing. These notes are recommendatory in nature, cost accountant should
ordinarily follow recommendations to an auditing matter but this guidance notes will be
superseded by the accounting standard coming in force (after guidance note).
The ICWA of India issued no. of guidance notes as for the benefit of cost accounts,
which includes. (i) Guidance note on valuation audit under (centre excise law). (ii)
Guidance on central excise – MODVAT audit (iii) guidelines on cost audit (iv)
SUJEET JHA 234 9213188188
guidelines on inventory valuation (v) total cost management in the manufacturing

process (vi) guidelines on transfer pricing (vii) guidelines on CENVAT audit under
central excise. (viii) Environmental audit.
8. GENERALLY ACCEPTED AUDITING STANDARDS PRINCIPLES (GAAS/GAAP)
¾ General Standards –
• Independence – The auditor, in all matters relating to the assignments, should follow
an independent attitude.
• Due Care – In exercising the work of audit, the auditor should exercise due care.
¾ Field Work Standards –
• Planning and Supervision – Before the beginning of an audit, the audit work should
be properly planned and the work assigned to assistants be carefully supervised.
• Internal Control – The internal controls existing in the enterprise be studied and
evaluated beforehand.
• Evidential Matter – While auditing, auditor should collect the evidential documents
to afford a reasonable basis for forming an opinion on the financial statements.
¾ Reporting Standards –
• Financial Statements – Auditor should make a mention whether the financial
statements are prepared according to the Generally Accepted Auditing Standards
Principles or not-
• Consistency – He should make a mention whether these Principles / Standards are
consistently are taken as reasonably adequate.
• Obligation – Auditor should submit his report, when the work is finished, stating
clearly his opinion or if not possible make a mention there in that “optioning cannot
be expressed” and in such a case support it with reasons.
These formal standards / principles are framed in the context of statutory auditing but the
AICPA suggest that while following these GAAP/GAAS, due consideration be given to
materiality and “audit risk”.
The International Federation of Accountants had issued following nine broad GAAP i.e.
Basic Principle governing an audit:
• Integrity, Objective and Independence
• Confidentially
• Skills and Competence
• Work Performed by Others
• Documentation
• Planning
• Audit Evidence
• Accounting System and Internal Control
• Audit Conclusions and Reporting
US – GAAP
The features of US-GAAP and Indian Accounting Standards are clear from their
differences.
They are as follows:-
India USA
1. Financial Statement 1. Financial Statements
Prepared in accordance with the Not required to be prepared under any
presentation requirements of Schedule specify format as long a they comply with
VI to the Companies. Act, 1956 the disclosure requirements of US
(Schedule VI). Accounting Standards.
2. Fixed Assets & Depreciation 2. Fixed Assets & Depreciation
Revaluation of assets permitted. Revaluation of assets not permitted except in
Depreciation is based (usually) on rates cases of quasi-re-organisations.
SUJEET JHA 235 9213188188
set out in Schedule XIV to the Depreciation is over the useful economic
Companies Act, 1956. lives of assets. Depreciation and profit / loss
on sale is based on historic cost.
3. Investment in own shares 3. Investment in own shares
Expressly prohibited except in cases of Permitted, and is shown as a reductions form
buy back of own securities. shareholder’s equity
4. R & D 4. R & D
Costs can be capitalized subject to the Costs are expenses as incurred except for
conditions of the criteria of technical plant and depreciation if they have
feasibility of the production resource alternative future uses or expenses as
availability and existence of market, etc. incurred if they have no alternative future
(AS – 8, Research & Development, uses.
issued by the Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India)
5. Goodwill 5. Goodwill
Purchased goodwill is capitalized and Treated as any other intangible asset, and is
amortized over the expected period of capitalized and amortized. The maximum
benefit or charged against available carry forward and period is 40 years.
capital reserves.
No, standard except for brief references
is AS – 10, Fixed Assets and AS – 14,
Accounting for Amalgamations
Goodwill arising from amalgamations
can be written off over 5 years.
6. Pre – operative Expenses 6. Pre – operative Expenses
All direct and indirect expenses incurred Concept does not exist. They are expenses
prior to commencement of business are unless they are capital is nature.
treated capitalized to the cost of fixed
cost of assets. These are also allowed to
be deferred and written off over a period
of 3 – 5 years or 10 years.
7. Assets and Liabilities 7. Assets and Liabilities
No mandatory disclosure of current and Mandatory disclosures about current and
long term components. long term components separately. Current
component normally refers to one year of the
operation cycle.
8. Foreign Currency Transactions 8. Foreign Currency Transactions
Gains and losses resulting from the Exchange gain/loss is taken to the income
translation of financial statements into a statement. The concept of capitalization of
reporting currency should be recognized exchange fluctuations arising from foreign
as income or expenses for the period. currency liabilities incurred for acquiring
fixed assets does not exist.
9. Foreign Currency Transactions 9. Foreign Currency Transaction
Gains and losses resulting from the Gains and losses resulting from the
transaction of financial statements into a transaction of Financial Statements into a
reporting currency should be recognized reporting currency are reported of a separate
as income or expenses for the period. component of shareholder’s equity in the
balance sheet.
10. Related Party Transaction 10. Related Party Transactions
No specific disclosures required. Disclosures are stringent and require
Auditors have a duty to report certain descriptions of nature of relations and
transactions entered into by related control, transactions, amounts involved, and
SUJEET JHA 236 9213188188
parties as defined under the companies amounts due.

Act, 1956: AS – 18 is issued w.e.f.
01.04.2001
9. CONCEPT OF MATERIALITY IN AUDITING

According to AAS 13, “information is material if its misstatement (i.e. omission or
erroneous statement) could influence the economic decision of user taken on basic of the
financial information. Materiality depends on the size and nature of the item, judged in
the particular circumstances of its misstatement.
The following are some of the specific requirements in the form of Balance Sheet based
materiality consideration implicit in the very process of prescribing the format in Part I
of schedule VI.
• Loans from directors to be shown separately.
• Nature of interest if any of any director with the bankers or other officers of the
company at any time during the year should be disclosed by way of a note.
• The maximum due by directors or other officers of the company at any time during
the year should be disclosed by way of a note.
Further whenever there is any change in the basis of accounting the effect thereof must
be disclosed.
AAS 13 on ‘ Audit Materiality’ requires that the auditor should consider materiality and
is relationship with audit risk when conducting an Audit.
Circumstance of Materiality
According to the ICFAI the circumstance of materiality are as under –
• Mistake discovered like valuation of stock calculation of depreciations calculation of
interest estimation of liability etc.
• Non – disclosure of abnormal and unusual items or non recurring or expenditure etc.
• Non – disclosure of items violating the statutory provision. etc.
Materiality and Audit Risk
Risk of Providing inappropriate opinion
Inherent Risk (I.R) Control Risk (CR) Detection Risk (D.R.)

Risk that Material Risk that I.C. fail to Risk that auditor’s substantive
Misstatement may occur operate as desired. procedures will not detect a
material Misstatement
Arises at level of Arises at level of Arises at auditor’s level.
management management
Auditor can only assess this Auditor can only assess Auditor can frame this risk.
risk this risk.
Risk of system of Risk of I.C. system of Risk of substantive procedure
management management adopted by auditor.
This is generally high, This is evaluated in stages DR should be inversely
However certain factors may (See chart below) proportionate to combined
be present due to which it assessment of I R & C R
can be less than high. DR ∝ 1/(IR + CR)
If IR & CR are high, DR
should be kept at low level.
• Internal Risk – Risk that material error will remain.

• Control Risk – Risk that client’s internal control system cannot prevent or make up for
such error.
SUJEET JHA 237 9213188188

• Detection Risk – Risk that material errors though they are there will not be detected.
STUDY NOTE – 6
AUDIT MEMORANDUM- ITS CONTENTNS
Accounts of the Company
LOCATION OF BOOKS OF ACCOUNT [Sec.209(1) and (2)]

1. Registered office : All the books of account shall be kept at the registered office.
2. Any other place
Place in India
All or any of the books may be kept at any other place in India.
Board resolution
The Board must pass a resolution according approval to keep the books at such other
place.
Requirements of Board resolution
The Board resolution must specify –
(i) the nature of books of be kept at such other place; and
(ii) the full address of such other place.
Notice of registrar
• The company shall give a notice to the registrar.
• The notice shall be given within 7 days of passing the Board resolution.
3. Branch office
Nature of books
All the books of account in respect of branch office may be kept at such branch office.
Duties of the company
(a) The branch office shall prepare up – to – date summarized return.
(b) The interval between preparation of any two summarized returns shall not exceed 3
months.
(c) The summarized returns shall be sent to be company (at the registered office or at
such other place where the books are kept) within a reasonable time of compilation
of the returns.
SUJEET JHA 238 9213188188
CONTENTS OF BOOKS OF ACCOUNT [Sec.209(1)]

Nature of books to be kept
Every company shall keep books of account with respect to –
(a) receipts and expenditures
(b) sale and purchase of goods.
(c) Assets and liabilities.
(d) Prescribed particulars relating to cost incurred on materials, labour and other items if –
(i) the company is engaged in production or processing or manufacturing or
mining, and
(ii) an order for maintenance of cost records in made by CG.
PROPER BOOKS OF ACCOUNT [Sec. 209(3) and 541(2)

Conditions prescribed u/s 209(3)
True and fair view
• The books must not suppress any transaction.
• The books must not contain any fictitious transaction.
Accrual basis
Cash basis and Hybrid system of maintenance of books is prohibited.
Double entry
Single entry system of maintenance of books is prohibited.
Conditions prescribed u/s 541(2)

Explain financial position
The books must be such as fully explain the financial position and transaction of the company.
Disclosure relating to goods
The books must sufficiently disclose –
(a) the details of annual stock takings.
(b) All purchase and sale of goods.
(c) The particulars of buyers and sellers, except where goods are sold by way of ordinary
retail trade.
PRESERVATION OF BOOKS OF ACCOUNT [Sec. 209(4A)]

• Books of account for 8 years immediately preceding the current year shall be preserved.
• The relevant vouchers shall also be preserved.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE OF BOOKS OF ACCOUNT [Sec.209(5) and

(6)]
Persons responsible u/s 209(6)
(a) MD or manager
(b) Every director, if the company has neither employed MD nor manager
(c) All officers and employees of the company.
Charging a competent person with duty of maintenance of books [Sec.209(5)]

Duty charged to whom?
Any competent and reliable person
Duty charged by whom?
By the manager or MD or Board
Effect – Defense for persons responsible u/s 209(6)
SUJEET JHA 239 9213188188

The persons responsible u/s 209(6) may put a defense that the person charged with the duty of
maintenance of books of account was competent, reliable and was in a position to discharge
such duty.
ANNUAL ACCOUNTS – LEGAL REQUIREMENTS [Sec.210 and 211]

Laying of annual accounts at an AGM
Duty of laying of annual accounts
It is the duty of the Board of directors to lay the annual accounts at every AGM.
Meaning of annual accounts
(i) B/S
(ii) P&L A/c
Requirements of B/S and P & L A/c

B/S
(i) The B/S shall be in the same form as set out in Part I of Schedule VI.
(ii) The B/S must comply with the “Notes” given at the end of Part I of Schedule VI.
P&L A/c
(i) No form has been prescribed for P & L A/c.
(ii) P &L A/c must comply with the requirements of Part II of Schedule VI.
B/S and P&L A/c

B/S and P&L A/c must give a true and fair view.
‘Financial year’
Meaning of FY
• The period for which P&L A/c is prepared is called as FY.
• It may be more or less than a calendar year.
Maximum period of FY
• FY shall not exceed a period of 15 months.
• But, it may exceed upto 18 months with the special permission of registrar.
Change of FY from year to year

• The Board is empowered to decide the period covered in a FY.
• The period covered in a FY may be different from the period covered in the preceding
FY(s).
Responsibility
Same persons are responsible for preparation of B/S and P&L A/c as are responsible for
maintenance of books of account.
ACCOUNTING STANDARDS (Sec.211. 217 and 227)

Meaning of accounting standards
• AS means the standards of accounting recommended by ICAI, as may be prescribed by
CG after consultation with National Advisory Committee on Accounting Standards.
• Until AS are prescribed by CG, the standards of accounting specified by the ICAI shall
be AS.
Duties of the company regarding AS (Sec. 211)

Compliance with AS
Every company shall comply with AS.
Disclosure in case of non – compliance
SUJEET JHA 240 9213188188
• Deviation from AS.

• Reasons for deviation
• Financial effect due to deviation.
Duties of the auditor regarding AS (Sec.227)

• The auditor shall state as to whether the P&L A/c and B/S comply with AS.
• If the P&L A/c or B/S does not comply with AS, the auditor shall qualify the audit report.
Duties of the directors regarding AS [Sec. 217(2AA)]

(a) Director’s Responsibility Statement must be included in Board’s report.
(b) Following disclosures must be given in the Directors’ Responsibility Statement ;
• Whether applicable AS have been followed
• In case of material departures, proper explanation therefore must be given.
CONTENTS OF BOARDS’ REPORT [Sec.217]

Contents specified u/s 217(1)
(a) The state of the company’s affairs
(b) Profits proposed to be transferred to reserves.
(c) Dividend recommended by the Board
(d) Material changes subsequent to close of FY.
Disclosure relating to conservation of energy etc.

Conservation of energy
(a) Energy conservation measures taken
(b) Additional investment and proposals being implemented for reduction of consumption of
energy.
(c) Impact of measures on reduction of energy consumption and cost of production.
(d) Total energy consumption and energy consumption per unit of production.
Technology absorption
Efforts made in technology absorption.
Foreign exchange earnings and outgo
(a) Activities relating to exports
(b) Initiatives taken to increase the exports, development of new export markets and export
plans.
(c) Total foreign exchange used and earned.
Changes during the financial year

Nature of disclosure required.
Change in –
(a) nature of the company’s business.
(b) Company’s subsidiaries.
(c) Nature of business carried on by subsidiaries of the company
(d) Generally, in the classes of business in which company has an interest.
When is disclosure required?

• Disclosure is required if it would result in better understanding of state of affairs of the
company.
• Disclosure is not required if such disclosure will be harmful to the business of the
company or its subsidiaries.
Disclosure of particulars of certain employees

SUJEET JHA 241 9213188188
When is disclosure required?

(a) An employee who received a remuneration of Rs.24 lakhs or more during the FY.
(b) An employee who received a remuneration of Rs.2 lakhs per month or more for any part
of FY.
(c) An employee satisfying the following 2 conditions.
(i) He has received remuneration at a rate which, in the aggregate, is in excess
of remuneration drawn by MD or WTD or manager.
(ii) He holds 2% or more of the equity share capital.
Nature of disclosure required

Designation, Remuneration, Nature of duties, Qualifications and experience, Age, Last
employment, Nature of employment, Other terms and conditions, Percentage of equity shares
held, Whether the employee is a relative of any director or manager.
Disclosures in Director’s Responsibility Statement [Sec.217(2AA)]

Accounting standards
• The directors shall state as to whether they have complied with the AS.
• In case of material departures, the directors shall give proper explanation for the same.
Accounting policies
The directors shall state as to whether the accounting policies –
• Have been consistently applied ; and
• Used by them are reasonable.
Judgments and estimates

The directors shall state as to whether the judgments and estimators made by them are –
• Reasonable and prudent; and
• Give a true and fair view;
Proper and sufficient care

The directors shall state as to whether they has taken proper and sufficient care for –
• The maintenance of adequate accounting records in accordance with the provision of this
Act;
• Safeguarding and assets of the company; and
• Preventing and detecting fraud and other irregularities.
Going concern Assumption

The directors shall state as to whether they have adopted the assumptions of going concern while
preparing annual accounts.
Reasons for non – completion of buyback

• Every buy – back should be completed within 12 months from the date of passing the
resolution for buy – back (whether SR or a resolution at a BM only).
• If a buy – back could not be completed within the specified period of 12 months, the
Board shall disclose the reasons for the same.
Comments on auditors’ report

The Board shall give fullest information and explanation in respect of every reservation,
qualification or averse remark contained in the auditors’ report.
SIGNING OF BOARD’S REPORT AND ANNUAL ACCOUNTS (Sec.215 and 217)

Signing of Boards’ report (Sec.217)
SUJEET JHA 242 9213188188
Case (a)
The chairman of the Board is authoridsed by the Board to sign the Board’s report
The Board’s report shall be signed y the chairman of the Board.
Case (b)
In any other case
• The Board’s report shall be signed by 2 directors (one of whom shall be MD, if there is
one).
• The Boards’ report shall be signed by 1 director, if only I director is for the time being in
India.
Signing of annual accounts (Sec.215)

Case (a)
If only I director is for the time being the India
The annual accounts shall be signed y –
(a) the manager or secretary; and
(b) I director.
Case (b)
Any other case
The annual accounts shall be signed by –
(a) the manager or secretary; and
(b) 2 directors (one of whom shall be MD, if there is one)
Approval of annual accounts

B/S and P&L A/c shall be approved by the Board before –
- they are signed on behalf of the Board; and
- they are submitted to the auditors for their report thereon.
CIRCULATION OF ANNUAL ACCOUNTS, ETC. [Sec.219]

Nature of documents requiring circulation
(a) Balance sheet
(b) Profit and loss account
(c) Auditors’ report
(d) Every other document required to be annexed or attached to B/S
The above documents have been referred to as’ annual accounts etc.’ u/s 219 and 270.
Persons entitled to receive annual accounts, etc.

(a) Every member
(b) Every debenture trustee
(c) All persons who are entitled to receive the notice of GM, e.g. the auditors
Supplying of annual accounts, etc. on demand

Who can demand the annual accounts, etc.
(a) A member
(b) A debenture holder
(c) Any depositor.
Duties of the company

The company shall supply the annual accounts, etc.
- free of cost
- within 7 days of demand.
Consequences of default
SUJEET JHA 243 9213188188
CLB may direct the company to furnish the annual accounts, etc.
Time limit for circulation of annual accounts, etc.
General rule
The annual accounts, etc. shall be sent at least 21 days before the date of GM.
Exception
The annual accounts, etc. may be sent less than 21 days before the date of GM, if so agreed by
all the members entitled to vote at the GM.
Circulation of annual accounts, etc. in case of a listed company

Option 1
The company may send the annual accounts, etc. in full.
Option 2
The company shall comply with the following 2 conditions
(a) The company shall send the abridged version of the annual accounts etc.
(b) The unabridged version of the annual accounts etc. shall be made available for inspection
at the registered office during working hours for a period of 21 days before the date of
AGM.
FILING OF ANNUAL ACCOUNTS WITH THE REGISTRAR (Sec.220)

Where thirty five days from the date of presenting before annual general meeting three copies of
the balance sheet and the profit and loss account signed by the managing director, Manager or
secretary of the co. be filed with the Registrar. In case of default the company and every officer
by the company who is in default shall be liable to like punishment as is provided by section 162
for a default in complying with the provisions of section 159, 160 or 161.
Teeming and Lading – A process of Misappropriating Cash- Auditors Duty in this respect.
Teeming and lading is a process of misappropriating cash from an organization by the
dishonest employees. In this process, collection from credit customers are misappropriated and
collection from subsequent customers are recorded in the accounts of previous customers and
this process is goes on until the dishonest employees leave the organization or absconded.
i. Auditor’s Duty: This type of fraud is very hard to detect. The auditor should carefully
detect the following points.
ii. Internal check system: The auditor should verify the internal check system and its
effectiveness regarding cash received from customers and the amount deposited into
bank.
iii. Checking Debtors account: Verify all the debtors account and the amount due from
them with the statement sent by them and also check how much delay is made by them,
confirm the debtors balance if any.
iv. Verify Bank Pass Book: Check the bank pass book to show that all receipts are
deposited in to bank and prepare bank reconciliation statement if required.
v. Checking of Receipt: The auditor should verify the counterfoils of receipts with
the cash book and confirm that all receipts are properly recorded in the cash book.
vi. Confirmation from Debtors: If any suspicion arises during the course of audit
regarding collection from credit customers, the auditor may take help direct confirmation
with the debtors and may meet with them is situation arises.
SUJEET JHA 244 9213188188

SUJEET JHA 245 9213188188

STUDY NOTE – 7
COMPANIES ACT PRVISIONS RELATING TO AUDITS
DISQUALIFICATIONS FROM APPOINTMENT AS AN AUDITOR [Sec.226 (3)]

1. A body corporate
2. An officer or employee of the company
3. A person who is a partner / employee of either an officer / employee of the company.
4. A person who –
a) Is Indebted to the company for amount exceeding Rs.1000
b) Has given any guarantee / provided any security in connection with any third
person for an amount exceeding Rs.1,000.
SUJEET JHA 246 9213188188
5. A person holding any security (means an instrument carrying voting rights) of the
company.
6. A person disqualified from acting as auditor of the company’s subsidiary or holding
company or of any other subsidiary of the same holding company.[Sec.226(4)]
7. A partnership firm, wherein any partner is disqualified because of any of the aforesaid
Provisions.
VACATION OF OFFICE [Sec.226 (5)]

If after being appointed as an auditor, he attracts any of the disqualifications in Sec.226 (3) or
(4) above, he shall be deemed to have vacated his office.
APPOINTMENT OFAUDITOR
1. FIRST AUDITORS [Sec.224 (5)]
(a) Appointed by - Board of Directors
(b) Time limit of - Within 1 month of date of
appointment
(c) Tenure of Office - Until conclusion of 1st AGM.
(d) Failure to appoint - Appointment by shareholders at General Meeting, by
within 1 Month of passing Ordinary resolution.
registration.
(e) First Auditor’s name - Articles to be void. Only by procedure in Sec.224 (5)
included in Articles above.
(f) Notice appointment - NOT required.
Neither by company to 1st Auditor, Nor by the First
Auditor to the Registrar.
2. SUBSEQUENT AUDITORS
A) Appointment at Nature of meeting At every AGM, the auditor are appointed
an AGM or reappointed by the company
Nature of regulation Ordinary resolution
Nature of business Ordinary business
B) Tenure of office The auditors hold office from the conclusion of the meeting in
which they are appointed to the conclusion of the next AGM.
C) Notice of Notice by the • The company shall give notice of

appointment company appointment reappointment to the
auditor.
• Such notice shall be given within 7
days of the appointment or
reappointment
Notice by auditor • The auditor shall give notice to the
register
• Such notice shall be given within 30
days of receipt of notice of
appointment or reappointment from
the company.
• The notice shall state to whether he
has accepted or refused the
appointment.
REAPPOINTMENT OF RETIRING AUDITOR
SUJEET JHA 247 9213188188

a) Reappointment of retiring - At an AGM,

auditor - the retiring auditor, by whatsoever authority appointed,
- shall retire and he shall be reappointed.
b) Exception The retiring auditor shall not be reappointed in the following cases:
(i) Where he is not qualified or is disqualified for
reappointment.
(ii) Where he has expressed his unwillingness in writing to
be reappointment.
(iii) Where a resolution has been passed at the AGM
appointing somebody instead of him or providing
expressly that he shall not be reappointed.
(iv) Where notice has been given of an indented resolution to
appoint some person in the place of a retiring auditor,
and by reason of the death, incapacity or disqualification
of the person, the resolution cannot be proceeded with.
c) AGM not held within time • The auditors hold office from the conclusion of the meeting in
whether auditor vacates his which they are appointed to the conclusion of the next AGM.
office? As such the appointment of auditors is made in terms of this
period and not for any FY.
• Therefore, an auditor shall continue in his office even if AGM
is not held within the time limits specified u/s 166 and 210.
APPOINTMENT OF AUDITORS BY CG.

a) Notice to CG Notice by whom? The company shall give notice to CG.
When is notice required? If no auditors are appointed or
reappointed at an AGM.
Time limit for giving The notice shall be given by the company
notice within 7 days of conclusion of AGM.
b) Appointment by On receipt of notice from the company, CG shall fill the vacancy.
CG
c) No auditor is (i) Where the appointment of a person appointed as an auditor in an
appointed examples auditor in an AGM is void ab initio.
(ii) where OR is passed, but the appointment of auditors requires SR.
REMUNERATION OF AUDITOR
a) Right to fix If appointment made by (i) The remuneration shall be fixed
remuneration member by the members is GM.
(ii) Alternatively, the GM may
determine the manner in which
the remuneration shall be fixed.
If appointment is made The remuneration shall be fixed by the
by board Board.
If appointment is made The remuneration shall be fixed by CG.
by CG
If appointment is made (i) The remuneration shall be fixed
by CAG by the member in GM.
(ii) Alternatively, the GM may
determine the manner in which
the remuneration shall be fixed.
b) Meaning of • Any sum paid by the company in respect of the auditors, expenses
SUJEET JHA 248 9213188188
remuneration shall be deemed to be included in the expression remuneration.

• Out – of – pocket – expenses of the auditors shall be included in
the remuneration unless the resolution fixing the remuneration
specifically provides that such expenses shall be paid separately.
• Remuneration for other services is permissible without sanction of
shareholders.
However, disclosure in P & L A/c is required.
REMOVAL OF AUDITORS
a) Removal of first (i) OR shall be passed at a GM.
auditor before expire of (ii) No special notice is required for such removal.
his term (i.e. before the (iii) Procedure prescribed u/s 225(2) and (3) shall be followed.
1st term AGM) (iv) Any other person may be appointment in his place.
(sec.224(5)]
b) Removal of (i) Previous approval of GC is required,
subsequent auditor (ii) OR shall be passed at a GM.
before expire of his (iii) No special notice is required for such removal.
term (i.e. before the (iv) Procedure prescribed u/s 225(2) and (3) shall be followed.
AGM) [Sec.224(7)]
c) Removal of auditor (i) Previous approval of CG is not required.
(whether first auditor (ii) OR shall be passed at a GM.
subsequent auditor) at (iii) Special notice is required for such removal.
an AGM (sec.225) (iv) Procedure prescribed u/s 225(2) and (3) shall be followed.
Special notice may require that –
(i) the retiring auditor shall not be reappointed; or
(ii) some person, other than retiring auditor, shall be appointed,
as an auditor.
d) Removal by CG When can CG exercise Where appointment of nominee directors
its power u/s 408? is made u/s 408 to end the oppression or
mismanagement.
Nature of power of CG • Amongst other power, CG has power
to give directions to the company u/s
408.
• The directions may include a
direction to remove the existing
auditor.
• The directions given by CG shall
come into effect as if all the provision
of the Act, in this behalf has been
compiled with.
Effect of direction of CG a) The existing auditor shall vacate office
without requiring any action for his
removal.
Procedure prescribed u/s 225 (2) and (3).

a) Notice to auditor The company shell sends the notice of removal to the auditor.
b) Right of the auditor (i) Right to be heard orally at the meeting.
(ii) Right to make a representation in writing to the company.
(iii) Right to get his representation circulated amongst the member.
c) Duties of company (i) To send a copy of the representation to every member of the
company.
SUJEET JHA 249 9213188188

(ii) To state the fact of the representation heaving been made in the
notice given to the member.
d) Reading of If a copy of not sent by the company to the member, the auditor may
representation require that the representation shall be read out at the meeting.
Application to whom? An application may be made to CLB/NCLT.
Application by • The company, or
whom? • Any other aggrieved person.
Satisfaction of The right to make a representation is being
CLB/NCLT abused by the auditor to secure needless
publicity for defamatory matter.
e) Intervention by
CLB/CLT Order by CLB / (i) Copy of representation not be sent
NCLT to the members.
(ii) The representation need not be
read out at the meeting.
(iii) Cost on such an application shall
be paid by the auditor.
AUDIT OF ACCOUNTS OF BRANCH OFFICE

Meaning of branch (i) Any establishment described as a branch by the company
office (ii) Any establishment carrying on either the same or substantially the
same activity as that carried on by the head office.
(iii) Any establishment engaged in any production, processing or
manufacture [Sec.2(9)]
b) Qualifications of (i) The company’s auditor as appointed as an auditor u/s 224.
branch auditor (ii) Any person qualified to be appointed as an auditor u/s 226.
(iii) Where the branch office is situated in a foreign country, any
person duly qualified to act as auditor in such foreign country may
also be appointed as an auditor.
c) Appointments of (i) Appointment may be made by the member in GM.
branch auditor (ii) Alternatively, the shareholders may authorize the Board to make
the appointment of branch auditor in consultation with company’s
auditor.
d) Power and duties of A branch auditor has the same powers and duties as that of company’s
branch auditor auditor.
e) Right of company’s Where the accounts of any branch office are audited by a person other
auditor than the company’s auditor, the company’s auditor has the following
rights;
(i) Right to visit the branch office, if he deems it necessary to do so
for the performance of his duties and auditor.
(ii) Right of access at all times to the books, accounts and vouchers to
the company maintained at the branch office.
f) Remuneration of (i) The remuneration shall be fixed by the members in GM.
branch auditor (ii) Alternatively the GM may authorize the Board to fix the
remuneration.
g) Report of branch ¾ Report shall be prepared in accordance with sec.227.
auditor ¾ Report shall be prepared in accordance with CARO.
¾ Report shall be forwarded to the company’s auditor.
¾ The company’s auditor, while preparing his report, shall deal
with the report of the branch auditor in such manner as he
deems fit.
SUJEET JHA 250 9213188188

EXEMPTION FROM BRANCH AUDIT

(i) Any manufacturing processing or treading activity is carried on
at the branch office.
(ii) The exemption is available only if the amount calculated in step
2 is not more then amount calculating in Step 3.
Step 1. Calculate ‘quantum of activity’. The quantum of activity
means the highest of the following:
a) (i) Aggregate value of goods produced or manufactured or
processed at the branch office.
(ii) Aggregate value of goods sold any services rendered by
the branch office.
(iii) Aggregate value of expenditure, whether of revenue or
capital nature, incurred by the branch office.
Step 2. Calculate average of ‘ quantum of activity’ by taking
average of the quantum of activity during 3 FYs immediately
preceding the relevant FY.
Step 3. Calculate the higher of the following two limits:
(i) Rs.2 lakhs;or
(ii) 2% of the average of the total turnover of the company
including all its branch offices, earnings from services
rendered and earnings from any other source.
b) Exemption in other Conditions for claiming exemption;
cases -
Discretion of CG Exemption may be given for specified
period and subject to conditions.
Withdrawal of CG may withdraw the exemption if the
exemption by CG term and conditions of exemption are not
complied with.
Submission of a copy of A copy of exemption order shall be
exemption order submitted to the company auditor.
Reading of exemption It shall be the duty of the auditor to read
order the exemption order at the GM.
Ground for exemption Additional conditions for claiming
exemption
(a) Company has made ¾ Company is not carrying on
sufficient arrangements manufacturing processing or
for scrutiny and check trading activities; and
of account of branch ¾ Scrutiny and check shall be made
office by a responsible person. Such
person is competent to scrutinize
and check the accounts.
(b) A branch auditor is CG shall pay regard to the nature
not likely to be quantum of activity carried on at the
available at a branch office.
reasonable cost
(c) Company has made Audit shall be done by a person
arrangements for the otherwise qualified for appointment as a
audit of accounts of branch auditor, except that he is an
branch office employee of the company.
(d) For any other person CG is satisfied that exemption should be
granted.
SUJEET JHA 251 9213188188
SPECIAL AUDIT
a) Circumstances in which CG is of an opinion that –
special audit may be (i) The affairs of the company are not being managed in
ordered accordance with sound business principles or prudent
commercial practices; or
(ii) The company is being managed in a manner likely to
cause serious injury or damage to the interests of the
trade, industry or business to which it pertains; or
(iii) The financial position of the company is such as to
endanger its solvency.
b) Period of special audit Special audit shall be conducted for such period as may be
specified in the order of CG.
c) Appointment of special ¾ Special auditor shall be appointed by CG.
auditor ¾ The person appointed to conduct the special audit shall be –
(i) Company’s auditors; or
(ii) Any other CA (whether or not he is in practice.)
d) Powers and duties Special auditor shall have same powers and duties as that of a
company’s auditor.
e) Directions by CG. CG may direct any person to furnish to the special auditor such
information as may be required by him.
f) Report of special auditor Submission of report The special auditor shall submit his report
to CG
Action by CG On receipt of report, CG may take such
action, as it deems fit.
g) Remuneration special ¾ Remuneration shall be determined by CG.
auditor ¾ Such determination shall be final.
COST AUDIT
a) Cost audit – when (i) The company is compulsorily required to maintain cost records
required? as per Sec.209 (1) (d); and
(ii) CG has issued a direction to the company to conduct a cost
audit.
b) Qualifications of cost (i) Cost accountant; or
auditor (ii) CA, possessing the prescribed qualifications, if CG is of the
opinion that – sufficient number of cost accountants are not
available for conducting the cost audit; and a notification is issued
to this effect.
c) Disqualification of a (i) A person disqualified to act as a statutory auditor u/s 226.
cost auditor (ii) The statutory auditor of the company .
d) Vacation of office The cost auditor shall vacate his office if after appointment; any of
the disqualifications are attracted to him.
e) Appointment of cost The cost auditor shall be appointed by the Board.
auditor The appointment of cost auditor requires previous of CG.
f) Ceiling on number of Timing of giving The auditor shall, before appointment, give
audits certificate a certificate of his eligibility to appointed
as cost auditor.
Requirement of The certificate shall state that the
certificate appointment, if made, will be within the
SUJEET JHA 252 9213188188
ceiling on number of audits as specified u/s

224(1B).
g) Powers And Duties of The cost auditor shall have same power and duties as that of a
cost auditor company’s auditor (given u/s227).
Submission of report The cost auditor shall submit a report to
CG and the company.
The report shall be submitted within 180
days of close FY.
h) Cost Audit Report Reply by the ¾ The company shall furnish to CG
company full information and explanations
on every reservation or qualification
contained in cost audit report.
¾ The reply shall be submitted within
30 days from the date of receipt of
cost audit report.
Calling of further CG may call further information from the
information company.
The company shall furnish the information
required by CG within the time specified
by CG.
Action by CG CG may take such action as it deems fit.
i) Duties of the company (i) Give all facilities and assistance to the cost auditor.
(ii) Submit cost records to the cost auditor within 30 days of the
close of FY.
Types of audit report
Standard unqualified report

It is issued when the following conditions are met:
(a) all financial statements give a true and fair view in accordance with the financial
reporting framework used for the preparation and presentation of the financial
statements.
(b) the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the generally accepted
accounting principle.
(c) the financial statements comply with relevant statutory requirements and regulations; and
(d) disclosure are adequate and statutory requirements with regard to them have been
adhered to;
In case of a limited company, thus if the auditor makes various statutory affirmations contained
in section 227 without any reservation, he is said to have issued an unqualified audit report or
clean report.
Modified reports
SA 700, The Auditor’ Report on Financial Statements, states. An auditors’ report is considered
to be modified when it includes.
(a) Matters that do not affect the auditor’s opinion
• Emphasis of matter
(b) Matters that do affect the auditors’ opinion

• Qualified opinion
• Disclaimer of opinion
• Adverse opinion
SUJEET JHA 253 9213188188

(i) Unqualified report with an ‘emphasis of matter’ paragraph

(a) Auditor may attach paragraph to an unqualified opinion to put emphasis on a matter
regarding financial statements due to its importance.
(b) Such a matter is, generally, included in a note to the financial statements which discusses
it in greater details.
(c) ‘Emphasis of matter’ paragraph does not change the nature of the audit report as it relates
to a matter that does not affect the auditor’s opinion.
(d) Examples of situation in which an auditor’s introduces ‘emphasis of matter’ paragraph
are given below;
• Going concern doubt
• Significant uncertainty
(ii) Qualified audit report

(a) Qualified audit report is a report wherein the auditor has expressed a qualified
opinion, that is to say, an opinion subject to certain reservations.
(b) Important aspects in relation to qualification in an audit report are mentioned below
• The auditor shall give a qualified opinion when the subject matter of qualification
is not highly material and pervasive and he believes that he overall financial
statements give a true and fair view.
• A qualification should be preceded by the words ‘subject to’ or ‘except that’ to
make it clear that the matter is of exceptional nature.
• The audit report should quantity the effect of individual qualifications also the
total effect of all qualification on the financial statements.
• The auditor shall the reasons for his qualification.
• In case of a limited company, if any of the statutory affirmations in section
227(2) and section 227(3) are answered in negative or with qualification by the
auditor, the audit report would be termed as a ‘qualified audit report’.
• Qualification which deal with matters, which have an adverse effect on the
functioning of the company should be thick type o in italics.
(c) A qualified report can result from:
• Scope limitation
• Disagreement with management with regard to departure from generally
accepted accounting principles or adequacy of disclosure.
(iii) Disclaimer of opinion

(a) The auditor issues a declaimer of opinion if the subject matter involved is material
pervasive and he I unable to obtain sufficient appropriate evidence to express an
opinion on it.
(b) A disclaimer an result because material and pervasive uncertainties could not be
resolved, there is going concern doubt or there is a material limitation on the scope of
the audit.
(iv) Adverse report

(a) When the auditor is of the opinion that the effect of disagreement with the
management is material and pervasive to the financial statement, he gives an adverse
report.
(b) The auditor must, categorically state that the financial statements do not give a true
and fair view.
SUJEET JHA 254 9213188188

AUDIT REPORTS UNDER COMPANIES ACT, 1956.
Report on specific enquiries Section 227(IA)

Section 227(IA) requires the auditor to make specific enquiries during the conduct of his audit.
He is however, not required to report on these matters unless he has any special comments to
make. It should be understood that the auditor should only enquire on the specific matters and is
not to investigate into them. It requires reporting on following.
(i) Whether loans and advances made by the company on the basis of security have been
property secured and whether the terms on which they have been made are not
prejudicial to the interests of the company or its members.
(ii) Whether book entries are prejudicial to the interests of the company.
(iii) Whether the sale price of the shares, debentures and other securities held by the
company is less than their purchase price.
(iv) Whether loans and advances made by the company have been shown as deposits.
(v) Whether personal expenses have been charged to revenue account.
(vi) Where it is stated in the books and papers of the company that any shares have been
allotted for cash, whether cash has actually been received in respect of such
allotment, and if no cash has actually been so received, whether the position as stated
in the accounts books and the balance sheet is correct, regular and not misleading.
Report on true and fair view Section 227(2)

The auditor shall state whether, in his opinion and to the best of his information and according to
the explanations given to him, the Balance sheet and Profit & loss account give –
(i) the information required by the Act, and
(ii) a true and fair view of state of affairs of the company.
Report on principal assertions Section 227(3)

1. Whether he has obtained all the information and explanations;
2. Whether in his opinion, proper books of account have been kept.
3. Whether the report of branch auditor has been forwarded to him and how he has dealt
with the same in preparing his audit report.
4. Whether the B/S and P& L account are in agreement with the books of account and
returns ;
5. Whether AS have been complied with:
6. The observations or comments of the auditors which have any adverse effect on the
functioning of the company in thick type or in italics;
7. Whether any director is disqualified from being appointed as a director u/s 274(1)(g).
8. Whether cess payable by the company has been so paid.
(NOTE: The companies (Second Amendment) Act, 2002 provides for section 441A
which states as follows:
• A cess on companies will be levied for purpose of rehabilitation or revival of sick
industrial Co.
• These provisions are made in sections 441 A to 441 F.
• The amount to be collected must be in a range of 0.005% to 0.1% on value of
annual turnover/annual gross receipts (whichever is more) as the Central
Government may notify from time to time is official gazette.
• The company shall pay the amount to Central Government within 3 months from
close of every financial year).
SUJEET JHA 255 9213188188

Report on CARO Section 227 (4A)The auditor has to report on all the matters specified in
CARO.
STUDY NOTE – 8
REVIEW AND AUDIT OF INTERNAL CONTROL
SYSTEM
Brief description of different types of the following
(i) Statutory audit: Statutory audit is a compulsory audit for the companies conducted by
the qualified independent auditor as per company’s act, 1956.
(ii) Non-statutory audit: The audit which is not compulsory under the statute and depends
on need of the organization is known as non-statutory audit: E.G. audit of sole-
proprietorship and partnership firm.
(iii) Government audit: When audit of government departments are made by the employees
of the government department under the supervision of Comptrollers and Auditor
General of India is known as government audit.
(iv) Complete Audit: When audit start after completing books of accounts and after the close
of the financial year is known as complete audit.
(v) Partial audit: When audit is conducted for some particular work out of various matters
is known as partial audit e.g. Verification of assets.
(vi) Balance sheet Audit: A balance Sheet audit is an audit relating to verification of assets
and liabilities appearing in the balance sheet. In this audit the auditor starts audit work
from the balance sheet and proceeds backwards.
(vii) Continuous audit: Continuous audit is a system of audit where the auditor and his staff
examines all the transactions and books of accounts in details continuously throughout
the year at regular intervals i.e., weekly or fortnightly or monthly etc.
(viii) Periodical audit: Periodical audit is an audit which is conducted at the end middle of the
year to pay interim dividend or to get half yearly financial statements for different
purposes of the management.
(ix) Interim audit: Interim audit is an audit, which is generally conducted at the middle of
the year to pay interim dividend or the get half yearly financial statements for different
purposes of the management.
SUJEET JHA 256 9213188188

(x) Cost Audit: Cost audit means examining by the company and to verify the audit of
costing records maintained by the company and to verify each element of cost to give a
true and fair view of cost of production so that cost efficiency can be achieved.
(xi) Management audit: Management audit is a method of independent and systematic
evaluation of the management activities at all levels of management to ascertain the
functions, efficiency and achievement of the management (i.e. policies) as compared to
standards set by the company.
(xii) Social Audit: Business is a part of society, so it has some social obligation towards the
society, Social audit is a process of audit of organizations of a country to evaluate the
benefit the entity has received from the country and its contribution to the welfare of the
society.
(xiii) System audit: A system audit is a technique of certification of effectiveness of system of
accounting internal control and internal check instead of checking all transactions in
detail. This audit is applicable in large organization where there are numerous
transactions.
(xiv) Property audit: Property audit is a method of audit which verifies the reasonableness of
expenditure incurred by an organization and is not detrimental to public interest. This
audit is generally applicable to the government organizations.
(xv) Performance audit: Performance audit is a special type of audit which determines the
overall performance of the organization and efficiency and economy of utilizing
resources as compared to predetermined standards. It seeks to identify possibilities for
economy, efficiency and effectiveness.
(xvi) Tax audit: Tax audit is a special type of audit directed by the tax department in case of
needs and complexities of the business e.g. tax audit is compulsory in case of sole-
partnership and partnership firm if turnover exceed Rs. 40,00000.
(xvii) Special Audit: When audit is done by the special auditors as per section 223A of the
company’s act, by order of the central government regarding the affairs, management
and financial position of the company is known as special audit.
(xviii) Human resource audit: When the audit is conducted to evaluate and review of the
performance and contribution of the organization’s employees towards the overall
achievement of the entity’s goal is known as human resource audit.
(xix) Financial audit: Financial audit is the scientific and systematic examination of the
books, accounts, vouchers and other financial records that will help the auditor to give
opinion regarding true and fair view of the state of affairs of the business and to verify
that profit and loss account reflects a true and fair view of profit or loss for the financial
year.
CONTINUOUS AUDIT
Continuous audit: Continuous audit is a system of audit where the auditor and his staff
Examines all the transactions and books of accounts in details continuously throughout the year
at regular intervals i.e. weekly or fortnightly or monthly etc.
According to Spicer and Pegler, “a continuous audit is one where the auditor’s staff is
occupied continuously on the accounts the whole year round, or where the auditor attends
at intervals, fixed or otherwise, during the currency of the financial year and performs an
interim audit; such audits are adopted where the work involved is considerable and have
many points in their favour although they are subject to certain disadvantages.”
Where this audit is applicable: In the following cases continuous audit is applicable.
(i) Where there are enormous transactions in a big organizations and continuous monitoring
of accounts are required.
SUJEET JHA 257 9213188188

(ii) If there is no internal check system in the organization or the system is not very much
effective.
(iii) When the company wants to declare interim dividend and for this purpose interim
accounts are to be prepared.
(iv) In case of financial institutional and insurance companies, where it is necessary to get the
final accounts just after the end of the financial year.
(v) If the management of the company are to get statement of accounts at a regular intervals.
Advantages of continuous audit: Following are the advantage of continuous audit in an

organization. These are discussed below.
(i) Extensive checking: As the auditor regularly visits the client’s office, he should get time
for extensive checking of small transactions and the audit work can ne smoothly
conducted.
(ii) Early detection of errors and frauds: As continuous audit is conducted throughout the
whole year, errors and frauds can be quickly detected. The accounting staff should not
get sufficient time to manipulate accounts.
(iii) Early Preparation of Final accounts: AS this audit is conducted throughout the whole
year, it is possible to prepare final accounts i.e. Profit and Loss account and Balance
Sheet just at the end of the financial year. The management and the owners can know the
financial results without delay.
(iv) Deceleration of interim dividend: Those companies who want to declare interim
dividend at the middle of the year is to prepare interim accounts. Continuous audit helps
to get interim account in time.
(v) More reliability on audited accounts: If continuous audit is done throughout the year,
all the interested parties can rely much on the audited accounts.
(vi) Moral check: As a result of continuous audit employees should feel a moral pressure
and the chances of errors and frauds are minimized.
(vii) Early declaration of dividend: With the help of continuous audit final accounts are
prepared just at the end of the financial year and the shareholder get dividend without
delay.
(viii) Early submission of report: As continuous audit is conducted throughout the year the
auditor can complete final accounts audited just at the end of the financial year and can
submit his audit report to the shareholders as early as possible.
(ix) Increase in efficiency: As audit is conducted on continuous basis, all the transactions
are correctly recorded in the books of accounts and overall efficiency in according work
can be made.
Disadvantage of continuous audit: The following are the disadvantages of continuous audit:
(i) High Cost: As continuous audit is conducted throughout the year the organization has to
give huge remuneration to the auditor. Therefore, a small concern cannot afford the high
cost of conducting such audit.
(ii) Difficulties in accounting work. As a result of frequent visits of the auditor often it is
seen that the books of accounts are checked by the audit staff and for this audit work is
hampered.
(iii) Change of figures: It may so happen that the portion of accounts which have already
examined by the auditor may alter the figures by the dishonest employees to achieve
some personal interest.
(iv) Loss of continuity of work: As continuous audit is conducted at regular intervals, the
auditor may left unchecked same audit work which was pending during his last audit
work.
(v) Adverse effect on employees morale:
(vi) monotony in Work
SUJEET JHA 258 9213188188

(vii) Chances of collusion between organization’s staff and auditor’s staff
How disadvantage many overcome:

(i) No work unfelt:
(ii) Prepare fixed audit programme
(iii) Rotation of Work
(iv) Frequent visit:
(v) Use of special mark:
(vi) Use of ink for writing of castings
(vii) Keep important notes:
(viii) Preparation of effective audit programme
(ix) Pending of checking impersonal and general ledger:
(x) A revise of the past work
DISTINCTION BETWEEN STATUTORY AUDIT AND INTERNAL AUDIT

Statutory Audit Internal Audit
1. Statutory audit is a compulsory audit 1. Internal audit being a part of internal
for the companies conducted by the control system is a detailed review of
qualified independent auditor as per the books of accounts throughout the
company’s Act, 1956. The primary accounting year by a specialist group
duty of a Statutory auditor is to give of employed auditors independently
opinion in his report that profit and within an organization to assure
loss account and balance sheet of the management that proper accounts has
company have been drawn up as per been maintained, adequate safeguards
law and whether the accounts shows a to maintain revenue and protect
true and fair view of the state of misappropriation of assets and
affairs of the company of not. evaluated the effectiveness of policies
given by the management.
2. Statutory audit is compulsory for 2. Internal audit is not compulsory for i.e.
every company as per company Act, it is optional i.e. non-stationary and is
1956. conducted in case of necessity.
3. Statutory audit is conducted by 3. Internal audit is an audit conducted by
independent external auditor the employees of the company.
4. Statutory auditors are generally 4. Internal audit is an audit conducted by
appointed by the shareholders in the the employees of the company.
annual general meeting of the
company.
5. A Statutory auditor must have 5. No statutory qualifications are
prescribed qualifications under section prescribed in the company’s act for
226 of the company’s Act, 1956. Internal auditor.
6. Generally statutory audit is done after 6. Internal audit is done on a continuous
the preparation of final accounts and basis and for the whole year.
at the end of the financial year.
7. The scope, nature, rights and duties of 7. The scope nature, rights and duties of
Statutory auditors are determined by work is determined by the
the company’s Act, 1956. management.
8. Statutory auditor has to give his report 8. Internal auditor has to submit his report
to the shareholders to the management.
9. Only shareholders of the Company 9. Internal auditor can be removed by the
can remove the statutory auditor in the management.
annual general meeting.
10. Remuneration of statutory audit is 10. Remuneration of internal auditor is
SUJEET JHA 259 9213188188
fixed by the shareholders in the annual fixed by the management.

general meeting
11. Statutory auditor is not an advisor 11. Internal auditor gives suggestion to the
except specifically requested. management regarding efficiency of
business and how to prevent errors and
frauds.
12. Statutory auditor while auditing may 12. Each and every transaction is checked
take help of test checking by internal auditor.
13. Statutory auditors has a right to attend 13. Internal auditor has no right to attend
Annual general meeting of the in the annual general meeting of the
company company.
14. Statutory audit is compulsory for the 14. Internal audit is not a substitute\e of
companies. Hence, internal audit is statutory audit. In additional to internal
optional and conducted according to audit statutory audit is required.
the needs of the company.
15. In statutory audit, right, duties, nature 15. The option and suggestion given by an
and scope of an auditor is determined internal auditor is highly includes by
by the companies Act, 1956. the top management i.e., freedom of
work of the internal auditor is
restricted.
CARO, 2003
i) Fixed Assets:
a) Whether the company is maintaining proper records showing full particulars,
including quantitative details and situation of fixed assets;
b) Whether these fixed assets have been physically verified by the management at
reasonable intervals; whether any material discrepancies were noticed on such
verification and if so, whether the same have been properly dealt with in the
books of account;
c) If a substantial part of fixed assets have been disposed off during the year,
whether it has affected the going concern.
(ii) Inventory:
a) Whether physical verification of inventory has been conducted at reasonable
intervals by the management;
b) Are the procedures of the physical verification of inventory followed by the
management reasonable and adequate in relation to the size of the company and
the nature of its business? If not, the inadequacies in such procedures should be
reported.
c) Whether the company is maintaining proper records of inventory and whether
any material discrepancies were noticed on physical verification and if so,
whether the same have been properly dealt with in the books of account.
iii) Loan Given or Taken:

a) Has the company granted any loans, secured or unsecured to companies, firms or
other parties covered in the register maintained under Section 301 of the Act. If
so, give the number of parties and amount involved in the transactions:
b) Whether the rate of interest and other terms & conditions of loans given by the
company, secured or unsecured, are prima – facie prejudicial to the interest of the
company;
c) Whether the receipts of the principal amount and interest are also regular;
SUJEET JHA 260 9213188188

d) If overdue amount is more than one lakh, whether reasonable steps have been
taken by the company for recover of the principal and interest.
iv) Internal Control:

Is there an adequate internal control system commensurate with the size of the company
and the nature of its business, for the purchase of inventory and fixed assets and for the
sale of goods and services? Whether there is a continuing failure to correct major
weaknesses in internal control system.
v) Section 301:
a) Whether the particulars or arrangements referred to in Section 301 of the Act
have been entered in the register required to be maintained under the section:
b) Whether transactions made in pursuance of such contracts or arrangements have
been made at prices which are reasonable having regard to the prevailing market
prices at the relevant time.
[This information is required only in case of transaction exceeding the value of five lakh
rupees in respect of any party and in any one financial year]
vi) Deposits from the public;

In case the company has accepted deposits from the public, whether the directives issued
by the Reserves Bank of India (RBI) and the provisions of Section 58 A and 58AA or
any other relevant provision of the Act and the rules framed there under, whether
applicable, have been complied with. If not the nature of contraventions should be stated
; if an order has been passed by Company Law Board (CLB) or National Company Law
Tribunal (NCLT) or Reserve Bank of India (RBI) or any court or any other Tribunal
whether the same has been complied with or not?
viii) Internal Audit System:

In the case of listed companies and / or other companies having a paid – up capital and
reserves exceeding Rs. 50 lakhs as at the commencement of the financial year concerned,
or having an average annual turnover exceeding five crores rupees for a period of three
consecutive financial years immediately preceding the financial year concerned, whether
the company has an internal audit system commensurate with its size and nature of its
business.
vii) Cost Records:

Where maintenance of cost records have been prescribed by the Central Government
under section 209 of the Act, whether such accounts and records have been made and
maintained.
ix) Statutory Dues:

a) Is the company regular in depositing undisputed statutory dues including
Provident fund, Investor, Education and Protection Fund, Employee’s State
Insurance, Income Tax, Sales – Tax, VAT, Service Tax, Wealth Tax, Custom
Duty, Excise Duty, Cess & any other statutory dues with the appropriate
authorities and if not, the extent of the arrears of outstanding statutory dues as at
the last day of financial year concerned for a period of more than six months from
the date they become payable, shall be indicated by the auditor:
b) In case dues of Income Tax/ Sales Tax/ Wealth Tax Service Tax/ Custom Tax /
Excise Duty / Cess have not been deposited on account of any dispute, the
amounts involved and the forum where dispute is pending shall be mentioned.
SUJEET JHA 261 9213188188

x) Company Registered for more than 5 years;

Whether in case of a company which has been registered for a period not less than five
years, its accumulated losses at the end of the financial year are not less than fifty percent
of its net worth and whether is has incurred cash losses in such financial year and in the
immediately preceding financial year.
xi) Default in payment of dues of Financial Institutions or Debenture holders;

Whether the company has defaulted in repayment of dues to a financial institution or
bank or debenture holders? If yes, the period of amount of default to be reported.
xii) Loan / Advance Secured:

Whether adequate documents & records are maintained in cases where the company has
granted loans and advances on the basis of security by way of pledge of shares,
debentures and others securities ; if not, the deficiencies of be pointed out.
xiii) Special Statutes to Chit Fund:

Whether the provisions of any special statute applicable to chit fund have been duly
complied with?
a) Whether the net owned fund to deposit liability ratio is more than 1:20 as on the
date of balance sheet;
b) Whether the company has complied with the prudential norms on income
recognition and provisioning against substandard / doubtful / loss assets;
c) Whether the company has adequate procedures for appraisal of credit. Proposals/
request , assessment of credit needs and repayment capacity of the borrowers;
d) Whether the repayment schedule of various loans granted by the Nidhi is based
on the repayment capacity of the borrower.
xiv) Company Trading or Dealing in Shares / Securities, etc;

If the company is dealing or trading in shares, securities, debentures and other
investments, whether proper records have been maintained of the transaction and
contracts and whether timely entries have been made therein; also whether the shares,
securities, debentures and other investments have been held by the company, in its own
name except to the extent of the exemption, if any granted under Section 49 of the Act.
xv) Guarantee to Bank / Financial Institution;

Whether the company has given any guarantee for loans taken by others, from bank or
financial institutions, the terms and conditions whereof are prejudicial to the interest of
the company.
xvi) Term Loans;

Whether the term loans were applied for the purpose for which the loans were obtained.
xvii) Short Term Funds;

Whether the funds raised on short term basis have been used for long term investment. If
yes, the nature and amount is to be indicated.
xviii) Preferential allotment to parties covered under registered maintained under Section
301:
Whether the company has made any Preferential allotment of shares to parties and
companies covered in the Registered maintained under Section 301 of the Act, and if so
SUJEET JHA 262 9213188188

whether the price at which shares have been issued is prejudicial to the interest of the
company.
xix) Security/ Charge created for debentures issued:

Whether securities or change has been created in respect of debentures issued?
xx) End Use;

Whether the management has disclosed the end use of money raised by public issues and
the same has been verified.
xxi) Fraud on / by company reported:

Whether any fraud on or by the company has been noticed or reported during the year, if
yes, the nature and the amount involved is to be indicated.
Summary of CARO, 2003

. Non – applicability to:
(a) Banking Companies
(b) Insurance Companies
(c) Companies registered under Sec. 25 of Companies Act.
(d) Pvt. Ltd. Company at all times during the year whose –
(i) Paid up capital + Reserves ≤ 50 lakhs; and
(ii) Loans outstanding ≤ 25 lakhs; and
(iii) Turnover ≤ 5 crores
‘Turnover’
¾ Includes both sale of goods & rendering of services.
¾ Commission to 3rd parties should not be deducted.
¾ Following shall be deducted;
9 Trade discounts
9 Sales Tax/ Excise duty, if credited separately to such A/cs
9 Sales Returns (even if relating to prior years)
‘Reserves’
[(Capital Reserve + Revaluation Reserve) + (Revenue Reserve – Debit Bal. of P & L A/cs)
(Upto the extent of revenue reserve only)
‘ Loan outstanding’
¾ Both long term & short term shall be taken.
¾ Aggregate of loans from both banks & financial institutions shall be taken.
¾ Loan taken from a company shall not be considered.
1. Fixed Assets
• Proper records (situation wise and quantity wise)
• Physical verification and discrepancies
• If disposed off → whether affecting going concern
2. Inventories
• Physical verification
SUJEET JHA 263 9213188188
• Procedure reasonable (inadequacy to be pointed out)

• Proper records and discrepancy.
3. Loan to parties covered under register u/s.301
Given Taken
1. If yes, number of parties and amount 1. If yes, number of parties and amount
2. Interest, term & conditions prejudicial 2. Interest, term & conditions prejudicial
3.
4. Receipt regular
Interest Control 3. Payment regular
4. If overdue
• amount
Purchase> of1 lakh, reasonable
inventory steps.
and Fixed assets
• Sale of goods and services
• Is failure to correct weaknesses?
•
5. Transaction with parties covered under register u/s. 301
• Particulars of contract / arrangements entered in register
• Transaction at reasonable prices (for transaction > 5 lakh for each party for each
F.Y.)
6. Companies accepting public deposit
• RBI/Companies Act/any other act complied.
• Order by CLB / RBI/ NCLT complied.
7. Internal Audit
Listed Company or Other Company

(i) Paid up capital + reserves > 50 lakh at starting of year or
(ii) Average annual turnover > 5 crore Rs. For F.Y. immediately preceding
this year.
8. Cost Record: Whether maintained, if prescribed.
9. Statutory Dues
• Regular in depositing undisputed statutory dues. If not, extent of arrears as at
balance date exceeding 6 months to be reported.
• If dispute, amount and forum.
10. Company registered ≥ 5 years
• Accumulated losses at end ≥ 50% of net worth, and
• Cash loss in this / immediately preceding F.Y.
11. Defaulted: Default in payment of dues of Financial Institutions or Debenture holders –
Yes, then amount.
12. Loan / Advance (secured): Proper records/Documents (deficiency)
13. Special Statutes to Chit Fund:
• Net owned fund/deposit liability > 1/20 as at Balance sheet.
• Companies complied with prudential norms.
• Adequate procedure for credit appraisal.
• Repayment schedule based on repayment capacity.
14. Company trading / dealing in Share / securities, etc.
• Proper records of transfer and contracts
• Timely entries
SUJEET JHA 264 9213188188
• Investment in own name (except u/s 49)

15. Guarantee to Bank / Financial Institution: Terms and conditions prejudicial
16. Term Loans: Applied for purpose for which obtained.
17. Short term funds – Used for long term (amount and nature);
18. Preferential allotment to parties covered under register maintained u/s. 301
• Whether made.
• Price (whether prejudicial)
19. Security / charge – created for debenture issued.
20. End use: Whether management disclosed end use of money raised by public issue and
same verified.
21. Fraud: on / by company reported. If yes, then, nature and amount.
AUDIT PROGRAMME- ITS FEATURES AND OBJECTIVES

Audit programme: Audit programme means a written plan made by the auditor before doing
actual audit work. It is a detailed plan and procedure to be followed for audit work.
In the opinion of professor W.B. Meigs, “An audit programme is a detailed plan of auditing
work to be performed, specifying the procedures to be followed in verification of each item in
the financial statements and giving the estimated time required.”
Features or principles of Audit Programme:

Every audit programme has some common features. These are discussed below:
(i) Cover all aspect of audit: Audit programme cover all areas of auditor work so that no
matters left unchecked.
(ii) Techniques and procedures: All important techniques and procedures of audit works are
to be given in details so that audit programme can be constructive.
(iii) Time bound: Any audit programme should consider the time
(iv) Logical: The techniques and procedures to be followed by the audit staff should be based
on logic and not haphazard.
(v) Flexibility: Audit programme should not be rigid rather it will be flexible enough and
may be changed according to the need or situation.
(vi) Covers only important matters: Planning of audit programme should be such that only
important matter which requires examination is to be considered
OBJECTIVE OF AUDIT PROGRAMME:

An audit programme has a great importance to an auditor. Audit programme is guideline or
roadmap through which an auditor conducts audit works in a smooth way. The objectives for
which an audit programme is prepared are discussed below:
(i) Proper distribution of work:
(ii) No work unleft:
(iii) Finished within scheduled time
(iv) Evidence for future reference
(v) Systematic procedure can be maintained:
Steps for preparing Audit programme and its Contents:

Before preparing audit programme an auditor has to consider the following steps:
(i) Purpose and scope of audit:
(ii) Nature of the organization
(iii) Effectiveness of internal control and internal check system:
(iv) Procedure of accounting
(v) Books of accounts
SUJEET JHA 265 9213188188
(vi) Important documents

(vii) Verification of last year audited accounts
Contents of generally audit programme: The matters which are generally included in an audit
programme are given below:
(i) Name and address of the organization.
(ii) The objects and the nature of the business
(iii) Time scheduled for completing audit work.
(iv) Date of commencement of audit work.
(v) Details of audit work to be done as per importance and sequence e.g. examination of
cash and bank account, checking of purchase and sales day book, verification if different
transaction, valuation of assets and liabilities etc.
(vi) Opinion given by the previous auditor in his report.
(vii) Procedures and methods of accounting followed by the organization
(viii) List of importance documents etc.
Advantages of a fixed audit programme:

An audit programme has many advantages which are discussed below:
(i) Proper distribution of work
(ii) Help to know the portion of work completed:
(iii) Responsibility and accountability:
(iv) No pending of work
(v) No loss of time
(vi) Continuity of work
(vii) Evidence for future disputes
(viii) Monitoring and controlling of work
(ix) Increase in performance of the audit staff
(x) Helps to prepare futures audit programme
Disadvantage of a fixed audit programme

Though audit programme has many advantages still it is not free from limitations. The
limitations are:
(i) Lack of flexibility:
(ii) Monotony in work
(iii) Not suitable for small organizations
(iv) Difficulties for inefficient staff
(v) Problems to cover all items:
Steps to be taken to remove the drawbacks of fixed audit programme:
The problems or difficulties arise for preparing fixed audit programme can be removed in the
following way:
(i) Flexible audit programme
(ii) Modification of programme
(iii) Encourage to the audit assistances
(iv) Effectiveness of internal control system
(v) Participation of the audit staff
(vi) Checking without notice
(vii) Change of audit programme after some years
SUJEET JHA 266 9213188188

Audit Note Book and Its Contents:
Audit note book: During the course of audit work the auditor and his staff may have to face
different queries and problems relating to various matters. These queries and matters which
require explanations and solutions are noted in a bound book is known as audit note book.
Contents of audit note book: The audit note book records the following general points.
(i) Objectives and nature of the business, organization structure relating to administration
and accounts.
(ii) The manes of the management staff and their functions, power and responsibilities.
(iii) Important points of Memorandum of association, Articles of Association, minutes in case
of companies, and partnership deed in case of partnership business which may be
required in future.
(iv) important contracts made by the client with the third parties.
(v) List of missing vouchers and duplicate found if any.
(vi) List of all important documents.
(vii) Suggestions given by the audit staff.
(viii) Methods of according and efficiency of internal control system.
(ix) List of queries for which further explanations are required.
(x) List of all important correspondence.
(xi) Date’s and information for future reference.
(xii) Submission and balances of important ledger accounts.
(xiii) List of matters for which detailed investigation is required.
(ix) Matters of opinion which is to be given in the audit report.
(x) Portion of audit work already completed.
(xi) A list of errors and frauds detected in the books of accounts while conducting audit
work.
Advantages of Audit Note Book:
Audit note book is a very important document to an auditor, by maintaining audit note book and
auditor gets many advantages. These are discussed below:
(i) A storehouse of important information: The auditor and his staff keep important
information in the audit note book which will be required for audit work. For any future
reference these information helps the auditor.
(ii) Minimization of errors and frauds: As all the important information is recorded in the
audit note book chances of errors and frauds are minimized.
(iii) Effectiveness of work: With the help of audit note book the auditor can evaluate the
progress of work done by the audit staff and can also judge their knowledge and
efficiency.
(iv) Continuity of work: If all the important matters are accurately recorded in the audit note
book, there is no chance of dislocation of work if any new staff joined for audit work or
if any existing audit staff transferred for other work.
(v) Evidence for future reference: Audit note book is a very important document to the
auditor. He can defend himself against the charges made by the company or by the third
parties for negligence and misfeasance if audit note book is properly maintained by him.
(vi) Helps for future audit programme: On the basis of important information and records
in the audit note book future audit programme is prepared.
ROUTINE CHECKING AND ITS OBJECTIVES
SUJEET JHA 267 9213188188

Routine checking: Routine checking is a checking of books of original entry and ledgers as a
matter of routine work to determine the arithmetical accuracy and to detect errors and frauds and
ensures the reliability of final accounts.
Objective of routine checking: The objectives of routine checking are discussed below:
(i) Checking of primary books
(ii) Examining arithmetical accuracy
(iii) Examination of pointing
(iv) Helps to detect errors and frauds
(v) Prevent to alter errors and frauds
(vi) Accuracy of Trail Balance
(vii) Reliability of Final Accounts
Advantage or importance of Routine Checking:

There are many advantages of routine checking. These are discusses below:
(i) Examination of arithmetical accuracy
(ii) Through checking of books of accounts
(iii) Detection and prevention of frauds
(iv) Reliability of final accounts
(v) Prevent to alter figures
(vi) Easy examination
Disadvantages or Limitations of Routines Checking.

The following are the limitations of routine checking.
(i) All errors can not be detected
(ii) All frauds can not be detected
(iii) Highly mechanical
Audit Working Paper and its Objectives

Audit working papers: Audit working papers are the permanent financial evidences obtained
during the course of audit and is required to give audit conclusions and for future references.
According to Mautz, “Audit work papers are the specific device used to accumulate the evidence
needed by an auditor to support his opinion.”
Examples of audit working papers: The following are the examples of audit working papers
generally kept for future reference:
(i) Documents regarding audit programme and audit note book.
(ii) Statement of reconciliation between cash book and bank pass book.
(iii) Copy of correspondence between the auditors and debtors creditors, bank, income tax
authority and with the other third parties.
(iv) Important points of minutes of board meetings and shareholder’s meetings.
(v) Copy of previous audit report.
(vi) List of all fixed assets, debtors, creditors, investment etc.
(vii) Copies of certificates received from the management regarding valuation of closing
stock, outstanding expenses, accrued income etc.
Objective or purposes or importance of preserving audit working papers:
Audit working papers have a great importance to the auditor. This is an documents of audit work
already made because all important documents are kept as working papers during the audit
period.
SUJEET JHA 268 9213188188

(i) Evidence of work performed: Audit working papers acts as written documents of audit
work already made because all importance documents are kept as working papers during
the audit period.
(ii) Documentary evidence for future reference: if any charges are made against the
auditor for negligence and misfeasance of work, he can defend himself with the help of
working papers.
(iii) Measurement of efficiency: On the basis of preparation of working papers, the auditor
can evaluate the efficiencies of audit staff.
(iv) Report can be made within short time: If the working papers prepared by the audit
staff are available within the time schedule, the auditor can prepare his audit report
within a short time.
(v) Continuity of work: If all the working papers are readily available there will be no
dislocation of work, if any new staff joined for audit work or if any existing audit staff
transferred for other work.
(vi) Helps for preparing futures working papers: Present working papers acts as a guide to
the auditor for preparing future working papers. If there are nay weaknesses in the
present working papers the auditor can rectify it at the time of preparing future working
papers.
(vii) Giving advice to the management: If there is weakness in the system of internal
control and internal check and in the system of maintaining accounts, the auditor cab
give valuable advice to the top management on the basis of his working papers.
(viii) Acts as a good control system: With the help of audit working papers, the auditor can
monitor and control the total work distributed among the audit staff. As a result co-
operation between the employees increases.
Features/Principles/ characteristics/ essentials/ scope of maintaining goods working

papers:
Successful audit work depends on maintaining and preserving of good working papers. For this
purpose, some common principles are to be followed. These are discussed below:
(i) Relevance: Only working papers which are materials for the purpose of audit are to be
preserved. Irrelevant working papers should not be kept.
(ii) Completer information: The working papers prepared by the audit staff should be
complete and accurate in all respect so that necessary information can be obtained when
the situation demands. The data’s and figures should be arithmetically correct.
(iii) Arrangement of working papers: Working papers should be arranged according to the
need and priority of audit work. Besides that audit staff should mention the date on
which it was prepared. He should also sign on the face of the working paper.
(iv) Changeability: Working papers should not be rigid. This should be prepared according
to the need of the audit work and changes are to be made if required.
(v) Safe custody: Working papers should be kept secret and protected in such a way that no
one can access these without authorization.
(vi) Correctness in presentation: The working papers should contain such information’s
which is correct and not misleading. Goods presentation of information should not create
any problems at the time of using of working papers.
OWNERSHIP OF WORKING PAPER:

There is great controversy regarding the perspective or ownership of working papers i.e. who is
the owner of the working papers. Both the auditor and his client demand these working papers to
be kept with them. The logic of the owner is that the auditor has prepared audit working papers
on behalf of the company in the capacity of agent. Moreover, the auditor contracted with the
third parties of the company has collected information which has been recorded in the audit
SUJEET JHA 269 9213188188

working papers. For these, audit working papers are the assets of the company and they can
retain it.
On the other hand, the logic behind the preservation of working papers by the auditor is that he
is doing audit work on behalf of the Company but he prepares working papers for his benefits of
work. Besides these, he should keep these working papers for any charges made against him by
the company for negligence of duty or for misfeasance. Therefore, he is the real owner of the
audit working papers.
Case Laws:
(i) Stockkinsky vs. Bright Grahm & Company (1938): In this case it was held that working
papers are the property of the auditor even after the payment of his audit fees. The
judgment of the court was in favour of the auditors on the ground that during the
performance of his duties, he acts as an independent contractor and not as an agent of his
client.
(ii) Chantry Martion & Company vs. Martin: In this case, it was held that working papers for
the purpose of producing Balance Sheet are the property of the auditor and the
correspondence made between the auditor and the income tax department relating to tax
liability of the client is the property of client.
Therefore, it can be concluded that the auditor is the owner of the working papers prepared by
him so far as it relates to the examination of books of accounts.
Auditing In Depth- Its Scope And Objective
Auditing in depth: Auditing in depth is a technique of detailed examination of some selected

transactions of each class to assure the accuracy of financial data’s.
According to Taylor and Perry, “IT (Auditing in depth) implies the examination of the system
applied within a business entailing the tracing of certain transactions from the origin to their
conclusion investigating at each stage the record created and their appropriate authorization.”
Scope or applicability of auditing in depth: Generally auditing in depth is applied in the

organization which is large enough and there are huge transactions. If there is no internal control
system in the organization or the system is inefficient, this technique is not applicable. In large
organizations, if there is an efficient internal control system, the auditor can take help of auditing
in depth because detailed examinations of all transactions and records are not possible. In this
case, the auditor should determine the transactions on selective basis and should apply audit in
depth from the beginning to the conclusion of some selected transactions of each class to assure
the accuracy of financial data’s.
Objective of auditing in depth: Auditing in depth has a great importance to the auditor for
examination of books of accounts from the beginning to the conclusion of some selected
transactions of each class to assure the accuracy of financial data’s Routine checking is a
checking of books of books of original entry and ledgers as a matter of routine work to
determine the of final accounts. On the other hand, test checking is a technique the arithmetical
accuracy and to detect errors and frauds and ensures the reliability of final accounts. On the
other hand, test checking is a technique of intensive checking of some selected transactions on
random basis out of huge transactions to avoid waste of time, Labour, inaccuracy and costs. To
remove the demerits of both routine checking and test checking auditing in depth is applied.
Auditing in depth is the detailed examination of some selected transactions of each class from
the beginning to the conclusion to assure the accuracy of financial data’s.
SUJEET JHA 270 9213188188

The following are the objective of auditing in depth:

(i) Detailed checking of selective transactions
(ii) Help for test checking
(iii) Useful for verification
(iv) Easy detection of frauds
(v) Verify accuracy
Advantage of Auditing in Depth:

The following are the advantage of auditing in depth:
(i) Detailed examinations of accounts on selective basis
(ii) Saving in time, labour and costs
(iii) Manipulation of accounts can be checked
(iv) Shareholders interest protected
(v) Moral pressure on client’s staff
(vi) No monotony in work
Disadvantage of Auditing in Depth:

There are limitations of auditing in depth. These are discussed below:
(i) Not applicable in all cases:
(ii) Chances of risks
(iii) Not suitable for unskilled audit staff
AUDIT FILE AND ITS CONTENTS:
Audit file: The file which is used for preserving necessary papers and information obtained
during the course of audit is known as audit file.
Classification of audit File: Audit file may be of two types: (a) Permanent audit file and (ii)
current file.
Permanent Audit File: The document collected during the course of audit and are kept
permanently in the audit and which is required in the future years is known as permanent audit
file. The contents of permanent audit files are:
(i) Statement showing nature and objectives of the business, name of the management
people and their functions, organization structure, nature of activities i.e. manufacturing
or service, important contracts with the third parties etc.
(ii) The primary documents relating to organization i.e. Memorandum of Association,
Articles, of Association in the case of company and partnership deed in the case of
partnership firm.
(iii) List of books accounts maintained by the entry.
(iv) Check list of internal control system.
(v) Copy of correspondence between the auditors and debtors, creditors, bank, income tax,
authority and with the other third parties.
(vi) Important points of minutes of board meetings and shareholders meetings.
(vii) Copy of previous audit report.
(viii) List of all fixed assets, debtors, creditors, investments etc.
(ix) Procedure and methods of accounting maintained by the organization etc.
Current Audit File: This file prepared for the current year under audit and according to the
needs of the auditor. Generally this file is not required in the succeeding years. The contents of
current audit file are:
SUJEET JHA 271 9213188188

(i) A statement of changes made in the organization during the year on the basis of internal
control system
(ii) A statement of evaluation of internal control and internal check system.
(iii) Some important decisions taken by the auditor during the current year.
(iv) A statement of discussion with the management.
(v) A reconciliation statement of bank and petty cash account.
(vi) Relevant documents and explanatory statements during the audit period.
(vii) Copies of letter made between the organization and the third parties.
Advantage or Importance of maintaining Audit File:
Maintaining audit file gives different advantages to the auditor. These are discussed below:
(i) Help to prepare subsequent audit file
(ii) Assist to help for comparison
(iii) Gives quick and ready information
(iv) increase in efficiency
(v) Saving in time, Labour and Costs
(vi) Continuity of work
TEST CHECKING
If the organization is large enough and there are huge transactions, it is very much impracticable
and hard job for the auditor to examine and verify each transaction one by one. Detailed
checking of transactions required time, effort and money. To overcome this situation, the
technique of test checking is applied.
Test checking is a technique of intensive checking of some selected transactions on random

basis out of huge transactions to avoid waste of time, Labour inaccuracy and costs.
According to professor Meigs, “Testing and test checking means to select and examine a
representative sample from a large number of similar items.”
In the opinion of L.R,. Dicksee,, “the theoretical responsibility of the auditor extends
ultimately to every entry in the books of accounts, but it does not follow that it is likely
necessary possible to examine every entry in details.”
In case of large organizations, if there is a sound system of internal control system, the auditor
can take help of test checking.
INTERNAL CONTROL INTERNAL CHECK AND INTERNAL AUDIT
Due to increase in size and nature of activities today’s business worlds is most competitive. In
this competitive business more and more control is required or smooth running of business.
SUJEET JHA 272 9213188188

Internal control is the total control of an organization financial and other wise to
safeguard business assets, prevention and detection of errors and frauds, increase the
efficiency of the management and good system of according records and includes internal
check and internal audit.
According to Spicer and Pegler, “Internal Control is best regarded as the whole system of
controls financial and otherwise, established by the management in the conduct of a
business including internal check, internal audit and other forms of control. ”
Features of Internal Control System:
A big organization having a sound internal control system has the following characteristics:
(i) Total System of control
(ii) Fixes authority and responsibility
(iii) Integrate other subsystem
(iv) Control also non-financial activities
(v) Effectiveness depends on employees
(vi) Minimizations of errors and frauds
Objective of Internal Control in relation to an according system
As per auditing Accounting Standard (AAS)-6 of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of

India, the following are the objectives of Internal Control System in relation to an accounting
system:
(i) Authorization
(ii) Accountability
(iii) Safeguarding of assets
(iv) Comparison
Advantage of Internal Control System:

Being a total control system, internal control has many advantages. These are:
(i) Entire system of control
(ii) Use different tools for control
(iii) Early detection of Errors and frauds
(iv) A Reliable System to the External Auditor
(v) True and Fair View of Accounting
(vi) To review the effectiveness of internal check and internal audit system
(vii) Brings overall Efficiency
(viii) Increase Overall Efficiency and Profitability
Disadvantages or Limitations of Internal Control System:
In spite of many advantages, internal control system Is not free form limitations. These are:
(i) High cost
(ii) Not Flexible
(iii) Chances of Errors and Frauds
(iv) A Routine matter
INTERNAL CHECK
Internal check system is a part of Internal Control System. To execute internal control system
check is implemented. Internal Check system is such an arrangement of allocating tasks among
SUJEET JHA 273 9213188188

the employees where work of one employee is automatically checked by others i.e. no one is
allowed to do the total work of a transaction.
According to F.R.M de Paula “Internal Check means practically a continuous internal

audit carried on by the staff itself, by means of which the work of each individual is
independently checked by other members of the staff.”
Internal check has been defined by the Institute of Chartered Accountant of England and
Wales as “checks on day to day transactions which operate continuously as part of the
routine system whereby the work of one person is proved independently or is
complimentary to the work of another, the object the prevention of early detection of
errors and fraud.”
Principles or Features of Internal Check System

The following are the main principles of good system of internal check:
(i) Allocation of Duties: Under this system, duties are allocated in such a way that no one
person can be allowed to access all the transactions of a financial matter.
(ii) Checking of transactions: The system are introduced in such a way that day to day
transactions are checked and chances of errors and frauds are minimized.
(iii) Continuous service: This is a continuous built in device and a part of routine system i.e.
the system is repetitive.
(iv) Complementary: Work is complementary i.e. the total job is allocated in such a way
among the employees that the work of each person is checked by other.
(v) Encourage to take leave: To detect frauds every employees of the organization should be
encouraged to go on leave at least once in a year.
(vi) Separation of duties: Those who are in charge of assets should not be permitted to deal
books of accounts. AS a result chances of manipulation of accounts can be minimized.
(vii) Use of mechanical devices: Some mechanical devices e.g. Automatic Cash Register,
Cheque Signing Machine etc may be employed to prevent misappropriation of cash.
(viii) Sound accounting control: A sound system of accounting control should be
implemented for each important class of assets.
(ix) Sound budgetary control: A sound budgetary control system should be implemented for
each important class of assets.
(x) Rotation of jobs: Transfer of employees from one job to another is to be made for
detection of errors and frauds.
(xi) Perpetual inventory system: A good perpetual inventory system with accountability
should be implemented.
(xii) Deposit of cash: Receipts of cash should be immediately deposited in the bank.
(xiii) Effective control: Effective control should be implemented over all purchases, sales,
receipts and issue of goods.
(xiv) Periodic verification: There should be a system of periodical verification and testing go
some accounting records.
(xv) Periodical review: Periodic review of accounting procedure is a part of internal check
system.
(xvi) Others:
(a) Storekeeper giving charge of store should not be allowed to keep accounts relating to
purchase.
(b) A good internal check system should be implemented regarding payment of wages
(c) Accounting of credit sales and credit purchase should be strictly dealt with.
OBJECTIVES AND ADVANTAGES OF INTERNAL CHECK SYSTEM
SUJEET JHA 274 9213188188

Following are the objective and advantages of internal check system.

(i) Division of Work
(ii) Responsibility
(iii) Early detection of errors and frauds
(iv) Proper books of accounts.
(v) Timely preparation of Final Accounts
(vi) Dependence of Auditor
(vii) Exercising moral pressure
(vii) Increase Overall Efficiency
(viii) Overall Economy
DISADVANTAGE OR LIMITATIONS OF INTERNAL CHECK SYSTEM:
Though internal check system has numerous advantages still this is not free from limitations.
These are
(i) Costly system
(ii) Not Applicable for small organization
(iii) Chances of collusion.
(iv) Monotonous for the workers
(v) Disorder in work
DISTINCTION BETWEEN INTERNAL CONTROL AND INTERNAL CHECK

SYSTEM
Internal Control Internal Check
1. Internal Control is a total control i.e. 1. Internal Check is a part of internal
financial and otherwise to safeguard control system and is a set of rules that
assets of the business. are the part of accounting system.
2. The object of internal control is not 2. The main purpose is to maintain
only to detect errors and frauds but also accounts in such a way that errors and
to formulate management policies with frauds can easily be detected and
efficiency. prevented.
3. As internal control covers total control 3. As internal check covers accounting
of the organization its scope is wider aspect and detection of frauds and
errors, its scope is narrower.
4. AS internal control is a total system of 4. Generally, rules framed out for
control its principles are flexible and implementing internal check is not
may change according to the need of changed for a time period.
the organization.
5. As internal control is a total control i.e. 5. As work is allocated among the
financial and otherwise, the total employees in such a way the work of
responsibility is of the directors. one person is automatically checked by
others. So each employee performs his
own work and the directions do not
interfere on the job.
INTERNAL CHECK IN RESPECT OF PAYMENT OF WAGES EMPLOYING A

LARGE NUMBER OF WORKERS
Internal check system is part of Internal Control System. To execute internal control system
internal check is implemented. Internal check system is such an arrangement of allocating
checked by others i.e. no one is allowed to do the total work of a transaction.
SUJEET JHA 275 9213188188

Internal check regarding payment of wages: A sound of internal check regarding payment of
wages may avoid errors and frauds which may be revealed from time and piece wages records.
The following steps may be followed.

(i) There should be a separate Time and Pay Roll department.
(ii) A record card for each employee should be maintained where date of apportionment,
terms of employment, rate of wages, should be written.
(iii) A good time keeping system should be introduced so that time of entering and leaving of
each employee is recorded.
(iv) Actual time spent by each worker on the jobs should be properly recorded in the job card
and signed by the departmental manager.
(v) In case of piece rated workers details by the departmental manager.
(vi) Those persons who prepares wages sheet does not have access with the preparation of
attendance sheet.
(vii) There should be proper authority for grant of overtime work.
(viii) The person who is in charge for payment of wages should not have connection with the
preparation of wages sheet.
(ix) While preparing wages sheet, number of workers shown in the wages sheet should be
matched with the records of the personnel department, so that chance of inclusion of
dummy workers can be detected.
(x) Incentives and production bonus given to the workers must be based on time saved or
getting more output in standard time and the bases of calculating time saved should be
checked.
(xi) Wages should be paid in the presence of a responsible person who can intently the
employee.
(xii) Unclaimed wages should be deposited immediately into the bank.
INTERNAL CHECK WITH REGARD TO CREDIT PURCHASE OF A BIG BUSINESS

ORGANIZATION
The following are the guidelines of a sound system of internal check with regard to credit
Purchase of a big business organization.
(i) Separate department for purchase: In case of large organization there are huge
transaction regarding purchase of different goods. For this purpose, a separate
department for purchase should be established under an authorized person.
(ii) Receiving purchase requisition: Each departmental manager should prepare purchase
requisition duly authorized and signed mentioning the quantity and quality of goods
required and send it to the storekeeper or direct to the purchase department. After
receiving purchase requisition the purchase manger should like initiative for purchase of
goods.
(iii) Verify the quantity of stock: After receiving purchase requisitions the purchase
department should verify the stock in hand of different goods and determine the quantity
to be purchased.
(iv) Inquiry for purchase: After determining quantity t of goods to be purchased, the
purchase manager gives tender for purchase or make inquiry from different supplier
regarding price, quality, quantity, mode of transport, payment terms, facility of discount,
time required, to supply etc.
(v) Selection of supplier: After considering all the factors mentioned above, the purchase
department select the supplier who will supply goods at least cost with required quality.
(vi) Giving purchase order: After selecting supplier the purchase manager should place
purchase order to the supplier. Generally five copies of purchase order are prepared and
distributed as: (a) one copy sent to the selected supplier (b) one copy is retained by the
SUJEET JHA 276 9213188188

purchase department (c) one copy is sent to the stores department (d) one copy is sent to
the accounts department and (e) the last copy is sent to the department who gives
purchase requisition.
(vii) Receiving and inspecting goods: When the supplier supplies goods that should be
inspected at the factory gate by the responsible official and tested if regards quality and if
satisfied then passes it for receiving the goods.
(viii) Preparing goods received note: After receiving inspection reports, the receiving
department should records the details of goods received in a form known as “Goods
Received Note”. One copy of goods received note is to be sent to the storekeeper, one
copy to the accounts department and the last copy to the purchase department.
(ix) Return of goods purchased: If goods received is not as per quantity ordered and of
required quality or goods send by the supplier is defective then it is to be returned to the
supplier along with a debit note.
(x) Checking and passing of bill for payment: After receiving goods the purchase manger
will take initiative to make voucher for payment. The invoice must be serially numbered
and entered in the Inward Invoice Register. A final voucher is prepared on the basis of
invoice and other documents and payment is to be made as per terms of contract.
(xi) Maintaining proper records: All importance documents should be properly maintained
i.e. purchase order, goods received note, inspection report, debit/credit note, challens,
voucher etc.
INTERNAL CHECK WITH REGARD TO CASH DEPARTMENT OF A LARGE

DEPARTMENT STORE
A large departmental store generally has many departments with respect of various goods and
services. There should be a separate cash department for receiving and handling of cash and
cheques. A good system of internal check regarding cash department must have the following
gaudiness:
(i) All incoming mails should be opened in presence of a responsible officer not connected
with persons like cashier and administration department.
(ii) Receipts of all cheques and cash are to be immediately recorded in cash abstract.
(iii) All cash and cheque received should be immediately deposited into bank.
(iv) bank paying in slips should be prepared by person other than cashier.
(v) Printed receipt book with serial number to be used and all receipts must be issued to the
depositors signed by the appropriate authority.
(vi) Any defective slip should be identified and market it as cancelled with proper initials.
(vii) There should be a regular check of counterfoils of the paying-in slips with the cash book
recording the receipts of cash and cheque.
(viii) To get the better result of internal check system use of automatic cash register is
preferred.
(ix) Unused cheques and receipt book should be kept in safe custody under a responsible
person.
(x) Periodical bank reconciliation statement should be prepared to know the actual cash
balance.
INTERNAL AUDIT
A big organization has to maintain enormous books of accounts. Internal audit being a part of
internal control system is a detailed review of the books of accounts throughout the
accounting year by a specialist group of employed auditors independently within an
organization to assure management that proper accounts has been maintained, and the
system gives adequate safeguard to maintain revenue and protect misappropriation of
SUJEET JHA 277 9213188188

assets and evaluated the effectiveness of other controls and confirms that the polices given
by the management are being properly executed.
The institute of Charted Accountant of England and Wales defines internal audit as “as
review of operations and records, sometimes continuous undertaking within a business by
a special staff.”
Features of Internal Audit:

Internal audit has some fundamental features. These are discuses below:
(i) Separate identify: A separate department must have to be established for conducting
internal audit continuously monitors the accounting work throughout the accounting
year.
(ii) A sub-system of internal control: Being a part of internal control system internal audit
continuously monitors the accounting work throughout the accounting year.
(iii) Independent appraisal: Internal audit department with the help of its specialized group of
auditors group of auditors protect misappropriation of assets and evaluated the
effectiveness of other controls and confirms that the policies given by the management
are being properly executed.
(iv) Advisory function: By caucusing the weak points in the accounting system, the internal
auditor gives valuable suggestion to the top management for taking appropriate measures
to rectify it.
(v) Judge the effectiveness of internal check system: The efficiency and effectiveness of
internal check system can be verified by the internal auditor and he can inform to the
appropriate authority if there is any drawback in the system.
(vi) Review of accounting system: Continuous review and monitoring of accounting system
is the most important task of the internal audit department. For this purpose, internal
auditor applies different analytical procedure.
Objective and Advantage or Importance of Internal Audit:

The following the objectives and importance of internal audit system:
(i) Accuracy in financial accounts
(ii) Maintaining standard accounting policies
(iii) Evaluation of internal check system
(iv) Judges overall financial efficiency
(v) Detect inefficiency in production
(vi) Examines proper authority
(v) Early detection of errors and frauds
(vi) Ensure proper safeguard of frauds:
(vii) Verifies different assets
(viii) Verify efficiency of fanatical system
(ix) Constructive suggestion.
Disadvantage or Limitations of Internal Audit:

In spite of many advantages the internal audit suffers from certain limitations. These are
(i) Expensive
(ii) Expertise needed:
(iii) Lack of impartial opinion
Distinction between Internal Audit and Statutory Audit

Internal Audit: Internal audit being a part of internal control system is a detailed review of the
books of accounts throughout the accounting year by a specialist group of employed auditor
independently within an o0rganization to assure management that proper accounts has been
SUJEET JHA 278 9213188188

maintained, and the system gives adequate safeguard to maintain revenue and protect
misappropriation of assets and evaluated the effectiveness of other controls and confirms the
policies given by the management are being properly executed.
Statutory Audit: Statutory audit is compulsory audit for the companies conducted by the
qualified independent auditor as per company’s act 1956. The primary duty of a Statutory
auditor is to give onion in his report that profit and loss account and balance sheet of the
company have been drawn up as per law and whether the accounts shows a true and fair view of
he state of affairs of the company or not.
Following are the difference between Internal Audit and Statutory
Internal Audit Statutory Audit

1. Internal audit is n audit conducted by 1. Statutory audit is a compulsory audit
the employees of the company for the companies conducted by the
qualified independent auditor as per
company’s Act, 1956.
2. Internal auditors are appointed by the 2. Statutory auditor is generally appointed
management of the organization. by the shareholders in the annual
general meeting of the company.
3. No Statutory qualifications are 3. A Statutory auditor must have
prescribed in the company’s act for prescribed qualifications under Section
internal auditor. 226 of the company’s Act, 1956.
4. Generally internal audit is done 4. Generally statutory audit is done after
continuously for the whole year, the preparation of final accounts and at
the end of the financial year.
5. The scope, nature, rights and duties of 5. The scope, nature, rights and duties of
work is determined by the statutory auditor are determined by the
management. company’s Act, 1956.
6. The Primary duty of Internal auditor is 6. The Primary duty of a Statutory auditor
to find out the accuracy of the account is to give opinion in his report that
and to detect any errors and frauds profit and loss account and balance
which have been committed. sheet of the company have been drawn
up as per law and whether the accounts
shows a true and fair view of the state
of affairs of the company or not.
7. Internal auditor has to submit his report 7. Statutory auditor has to give his report
to the management, to the shareholders.
8. Internal auditor can be removed by the 8. Statutory auditor has to give his report
management. to the shareholders.
9. Remuneration of internal auditor is 9. Remuneration of statutory auditor is
fixed by the management. fixed by the shareholders in the annual
general meeting.
10. Internal auditor gibes suggestion tot eh 10. Statutory auditor is not an advisor
management regarding efficiency of except specifically requested.
business and how to prevent and frauds
11. Each and every transaction is checked 11. Statutory auditor while auditing can
by internal auditor take help of test checking.
12. Internal auditors have no right to attend 12. Statutory auditors have a right to attend
general meeting. annual general meeting.
SUJEET JHA 279 9213188188

DISTINCTION BETWEEN INTERNAL AUDIT AND INTERNAL CHECK

Internal Audit Internal Check
1. Internal audit being a part of internal 1. Internal Check system is such an
control system is a detailed review of arrangement of allocating tasks among
the books of accounts throughout the the employees where work of one
accounting year by a specialist group of employee where work of one employee
employed auditors independently us automatically checked by others i.e.
within an organization to assure no one is allowed to do the total work
management that proper accounts has of a transaction.
been maintained and the system gibes
adequate safeguards to maintain
revenue and protect misappropriation
of assets and evaluated the
effectiveness of to other controls and
confirms that the policies given by the
management are being properly
executed.
2. Internal audit is an audit conducted by 2. In case of internal check, work is so
a separate department and by the distributed that job done by one
professionally qualified employees. employee is automatically checked by
others.
3. The primary duty of internal auditor is 3. Internal check is such an efficient tool
to find out the accuracy of the accounts which protects the organization for
and to detect any errors and frauds being committing errors and frauds.
which have been committed.
4. Internal auditor gives suggestion to the 4. Internal check is being used as an
management regarding efficiency of efficient system prevails in the
business and how to prevent errors and organization and almost every
frauds. employee is covered under this system.
Hence this is not an advisory system.
5. Internal auditor had to submit his report 5. Under the system of internal check, day
to the management. to-day transactions are being reported
to the head of the department.
RELIANCE OF STATUTORY AUDITOR OR INTERNAL AUDIT SYSTEM

External Audit: Statutory audit is compulsory audit for the companies conducted by the
qualified independent auditor as per company’s act, 1956. The primary duty of a Statutory
auditor is to give opinion in his report that profit and loss account and balance sheet of the
company have been drawn up as per law and whether the accounts shows a true and fair view of
the state of affairs of the company or not.
Internal Auditt: Internal audit being a part of internal control system is a detailed review of the
books of accounts throughout the accounting year by a specialist group of employed auditors
independently within an organization to assure management that proper accounts has been
maintained, and the system gives adequate safeguards to maintain review and protect
misappropriation of assets and evaluated the effectiveness of the other controls and confirms that
the policies given by the management are being properly executed.
SUJEET JHA 280 9213188188
1. Routine checking is a process of verification 1. Vouching is the verification of accounting

of arithmetical accuracy of transaction entries recorded in the books of accounts with
recorded in the books of accounts. documentary evidences such as vouchers,
invoices, confirmation etc and to check the
genuineness, relevance, validity, authenticity
of the transactions through the help of
inspection, observation, inquiries, confirmation
etc.
2. The scope of routine checking is very 2. Vouching includes routine checking i.e. the
limited i.e. checking of arithmetical accuracy, scope is very large.
casting posting, totaling, carry, forward etc.
3. Routing checking includes casting, totaling 3. Vouching includes verification of
and balancing of books of prime entry, accounting entries with the vouchers, invoices,
checking of ledger balance, arithmetical of confirmation genuineness of the transactions
Trial balance etc. with the help of inspection, observation,
enquiries etc.
4. Only some minor errors can be detected. 4. Through the process of vouching major
errors and frauds can be detected.
5. No expertise is required for conducting 5. Expertise is required for the job of
routine checking. vouching.
CONTINGENT LIABILITY AND AUDITOR’S DUTY:

Contingent Liability: Contingent liability is not an actual liability at the end of the present year
but may become liability in the future on the happenings on certain unpredictable contingencies.
Examples are; (i) Liability for bill discounted with the bank yet to be matured. (ii) Liability for
pending case before the court. (iii) Guarntee given on behalf of others (iv) Liability regarding
party paid up shares (v) Arrear on Cumulative Preference Shares.
How it is shown in Balance Sheet? According to company’s act 1956, contingent liability
should be shown as a foot note in the Balance Sheet and state that
(i) Claims against the company not acknowledged as debts.
(ii) Uncalled liability on shares partly paid
(iii) Arrears on fixed cumulative dividend.
(iv) Estimated amount of contracts remaining to be executed on capital account and not
provided for.
(v) Other money for which the company is contingently liable.
Auditors Duty: The following points should be considered for verification of contingent
liability:
(i) Examine the minute book to ascertain the probable future contingent liability.
(ii) Examine, whether sufficient provision has been made for uncertain contingent
liability.
(iii) Examine the Bill book and confirm the amount of bills discounted before the date of
maturity;
(iv) Check the provision which has made for arrear cumulative preference dividend.
(v) Verify that all contingent liability should have correctly shown in the balance sheet
as a foot note.
SUJEET JHA 281 9213188188
(vi) Disclosure about contingent liability is to be given in the financial statement as

required by accounting standard (AS) 29.
Contingent Assets Contingent Liability

1. Contingent assets are those assets the claim1. Contingent liability is not an actual liability
for which may depend on performance and at the end of the present year but may become
activities of future period. Examples are (i) liability in the future on the happenings on
certain unpredictable contingencies. Example
Uncalled share capital of a company (ii) a legal
action taken by the company against another are; (i) liability for bill discounted with the
company for use of its patent. bank yet to be matured. (ii) Liability for
pending case before the court.
2. Indian Company’s Act does not prescribe 2. Contingent Liabilities are shown as foot
any procedure to show contingent assets in the note in the balance sheet.
balance sheet.
THE DEFFERENCE BETWEEN DEPRECIAIOTN AND OBSOLESCENCE ARE

GIVEN BELOWS:
Depreciation Obsolescence
1. Depreciation may be defined as 1. When a new technology or technical
gradual and permanent decline in the know-how captures the market and on
value of fixed assets as a result of account of that, existing assets losses its
wear and tear, obsolesce, efflux ion of value is known as obsolescence.
time, market changes or for any other l i k
reasons.
2. Provision for depreciation can be 2. Provision for obsolesce can not be
estimated beforehand So that there is estimate Accurately obsolescence is a
Lower risk for replacement of assets. Type of loss which may occur within a
Short time.
3. Generally depreciation on fixed assets 3. In case of obsolescence, a fixed amount
is made in a uniform percentage over not be determined accurately.
the years.
~
Provision or Specific Reserve General Reserve
1. Provision is a specific reserve made out 1. A general reserve is a reserve which is
for the purpose of some uncertain created out of normal profit of the
liabilities or for a known loss expected business for the purpose of meeting
at a future date. unknown future losses or for
strengthening the financial position of
the business.
2. Provision is created for meeting 2. Reserve is created for providing further
uncertain liabilities. working capital and for strengthening
the financial position of the business.
3. Provision is a charge against profit 3. Reserve is an appropriation of profit.
4. Provision is to be made to meet some 4. General reserve is created for meeting
known expenditure or loss e.g. any purpose.
provision for depreciation.
SUJEET JHA 282 9213188188

5. The amount of provision to be created 5. The amount of reserve to be created

does not depend on profit. depends upon the availability of profits.
6. Provision may be shown in the liability 6. Reserve is shown in the liability side of
side of the balances sheet or can be the balance sheet under the head
deducted from the respective assets on Reserve & Surplus.
the asset side.
7. The amount of provision which is 7. Dividend can be distributed out of free
created for meeting any particular reserve as reserve is made out of
liability cannot be used for distribution distributable profit.
of dividend.
8. Some provisions made for specific 8. Amount transferred to general reserve
purposes are a tax deductible item for out of distributable profit not
the purpose of income tax e.g. admissible expenses as per income tax
provision for depreciation as per act.
income tax act.
9. If provision is not made for known 9. A certain percentage of profit is to be
losses or for future uncertain transferred to reserve account before
contingencies the auditor should clearly declaring dividend. Except that an
mentioned it in his audit report. auditor has nothing to do if a company
does create reserve out of distributable
profit.
10. Income can not be accurately measured 10. Reserve is made out of distributable
without making provision. profit. So, reserve has no direct role for
measurement of income.
THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN RESERVE AND RESERVE FUND ARE DISCUSSED

BELOW:
Reserve Reserve Fund
1. A general reserve is a reserve which is 1. Reserve fund is a part of profit created
created out of normal profit of the out of normal business activities for the
business for the purpose of meeting purpose of investing the amount in
unknown future losses or for outside securities and to earn profit.
strengthening the financial position of
the business
2. Reserve is created for providing further 2. The purpose of creating reserve fund is
working capital and for strengthening to invest the amount outside the
the financial position of the business. business in profitable securities and to
earn profit i.e. non – trading income.
3. Reserve is shown in the liability side of 3. Reserve fund is shown in the liability
the balance sheet under the head side of the balance sheet under the head
‘Reserve & Surplus.’ ‘Reserve & Surplus’ and reserve fund
investment is shown in the assets side
of the balance sheet under the head
‘Investment’.
4. Dividend can be distributed out of free 4. Reserve fund cannot be utilized for
SUJEET JHA 283 9213188188

reserve as reserve is made out of payment of dividend except from

distributable profit. ‘Dividend Equalization Fund’.
5. A company must have to transfer a 5. No amount of profit should be
certain percentage of profit to general transferred to the reserve fund before
reserve before declaring dividend. declaring dividend.
6. Reserve is the base for providing 6. Reserve fund is not a source of
additional working capital or for additional working capital of the
strengthens financial position of the business rather it is a source of non
business trading income.
DISTINCTION BETWEEN CAPITAL RESERVE AND REVENUE RESERVE

Capital Reserve Revenue Reserve
1. The reserve which arises out of capital 1. A revenue reserve is a reserve which is
profit is known as capital reserve e.g. created out of normal profit of the
(i) Profit on revaluation of assets. (ii) business for the purpose of meeting
Profit on revaluation of assets. (iii) unknown future losses or for
Profit on re – issue of forfeited shares strengthening the financial position of
(iv) Shares or debentures are issued at a the business.
premium. (v) Profit prior to
incorporation of a company (vi)
Purchase of own debenture by
redeeming at a discount in the open
market etc.
2. Capital reserve is utilized for written 2. Revenue reserve is used for written of
off capital losses. revenue losses and also for writing of
capital losses.
3. Dividend can be declared out of this 3. Dividend can be distributed out of free
profit subject to some conditions. reserve as reserve is made out of
distributable profit.
4. Business assets increase out of capital 4. Revenue reserve is created for
reserve. providing as reserve is made capital
and for strengthening the financial
position of the business.
5. Capital reserve can arises any time 5. Revenue reserve is created out revenue
during the continuity of the business profit at the end of financial year.
Capital expenditure Revenue expenditure

1. Capital expenditure are those which are 1. Revenue expenditure is those which are
made for the purchase or acquisition of incurred for day to day operating
assets for earning revenue and the activities of the business and whose
benefit is obtained for a number of benefits are exhausted within the
years. Purchase of land and building, current accounting year. Expenses on
plant and machinery, patent, furniture material, labour and overheads etc are
etc are the examples of capital the examples of revenue expenditure.
expenditure.
SUJEET JHA 284 9213188188
2. The benefit from capital expenditure is 2. The benefits from revenue expenditure
not exhausted within the current are exhausted within the current
accounting year but also extended for accounting year. Revenue expenditure
some future years. Capital expenditure is expired costs.
is unexpired cost.
3. A large sum of money is to be paid for 3. Amount of revenue expenditure is
capital expenditure. comparatively lower than capital
expenditure.
4. Depreciation on capital expenditure is 4. Revenue expenses are fully charged
charged against revenue and is treated against revenue as expired costs.
as expenses.
5. Fixed assets made out of capital 5. Here, goods or services made from
expenditure can be sold out or revenue expenditure can be sold not.
transferred.
6. Through capital expenditure inflow of 6. Through revenue expenditure income
assets arises. generated.
SECRET RESERVE:
Secret Reserve: A Secret Reserve is a reserve, the existence of which is not disclosed on
the face of the balance sheet. Secret reserve indicates+ concealment of profit either by
means of understatement of assets or overstating its liabilities. When a company makes
secret reserve, it indicates
that the actual financial position is better than what it has been shown in the books of
accounts.
According to Spicer and Pegler, "Secret reserve is a reserve, the existence and / or
amount of which is not disclosed on the face of the Balance Sheet".
Methods of creating Secret Reserve: Secret reserve may be created in the following
ways: .
(i) By showing capital expenditure as revenue.
(ii) By showing fewer amounts on fixed assets.
(iii) By showing undervaluation of stock.
(iv) By recording fictitious expenditure in the books of accounts
(v) By making more provision for bad debt and for outstanding liabilities.
(vi) By showing the liabilities of the business at more amounts.
(vii) By showing more amount of purchase and fewer amounts of sales in the books of
accounts.
(viii) By showing excess depreciation on fixed assets.
(ix) By not considering the increase in the value of assets.
(x) By recording contingent liability as real liability.
Merits or Advantages or Benefits of creating Secret Reserve: There are some benefits
or advantages of creating secret reserve for the business because it strengths the financial
position of the company and this reserve can be utilized when situation and needs
demands. The benefits of creating secret reserve are discussed below.
(i) Sound financial structure:
(ii) To protect unexpected future losses:
(iii) Not to disclose actual financial position to the competitors:
(iv) To give lower dividend
SUJEET JHA 285 9213188188
(v) Maintaining stable rate of dividend
Auditor’s duties regarding Secret Reserve:

Secret reserve is legally prohibited as per companies act except certain companies who may create
secret reserve i.e. banking, investment, insurance and electricity companies. The duties of an auditor
regarding secret reserve are given below:
(i) The auditor should carefully examine the books of accounts and verify the assets and
liabilities to find out the existence and the amount of secret reserve if any.
(ii) The auditor should enquire the Articles of Association and find that whether any clause has
been given for creation of secret reserve.
(iii) The auditor should verify the purposes for which secret reserve has been utilized and give his
opinion regarding this in the audit report.
(iv) If excess provision has been made for bad and doubtful debt in the books of accounts that
should be clearly mentioned by him in his audit report.
(v) He should examine whether proper valuation of assets and liabilities have been made. .
(vi) He should confirm that secret reserve created is not used by the managerial personnel for
their personal purposes.
CAPITAL RESERVE AND RESERVE CAPITAL: DISTINCTION
The difference between capital reserve and reserve capital are given below:
Capital reserve Reserve capital
l. The reserve which arises out of l. This is a part of authorized capital
capital profit is known as capital which is not called except in case of
reserve. e.g. (i) Profit on revaluation liquidation of company is known as
of assets. (ii) Profit on sale of assets reserve capital.
(iii) Profit on re-issue of forfeited
shares (iv) Shares or debentures are
issued at a premium.(v) Profit prior
to incorporation of a company.(vi)
Purchase of own debenture by
redeeming at a discount in the
open market etc.
2. Capital reserve is utilized for 2. Reserve capital cannot be utilized
Written off capital / for any purposes except in cases of
winding up of a company.
3. Capital reserve is treated as 3. Capital reserve is not treated as
internal liability and is shown in liability and is not shown in the
the Balance Sheet under the head Balance Sheet.
'Reserve and
Surplus.'
4. This reserve is created out of capital 4. This reserve is created out of
profit
authorized capital.
.
5. Dividend can be declared out of 5. There is no relation between reserve
this profit subject to some Capital and dividend.
Conditions.
6. Business assets increase 'out of 6 Reserve capital does not increase the
SUJEET JHA 286 9213188188

capital reserve. liability of the business.

7. Capital reserve can arises any time 7 In case of winding up of a company
during the continuity of the reserve capital is required.
business.
London Oil Storage Company Ltd. vs. Seear Hasluck and Company (1904): In this case the
auditor was negligent to verify the existence of cash in hand. The auditor was liable for branch
of duty for not taking proper steps to verify the existence of assets shown in the balance sheet.
Arthur E. Green & company vs. The Central Advance And Discount Corporation Ltd.
(1920): In this case the auditor was guilty for negligence for not considering huge amount of bad
debt which remains unpaid for a long time and the company was not made sufficient provision
for bad debt. As a result, profit was inflated and dividend was paid on the basis of this profit.
Irish Woolen Company vs. Tyson and Others (1900): In this case, the auditor was liable for
damages of the company by reason of falsification and manipulation of accounts which might
have been discovered if he exercise reasonable care and skill during the course of his audit.
Therefore, it can be concluded that an auditor must verify the truth regarding financial
transaction and assets and liabilities which are shown in the balance sheet. He must exercise
reasonable care and skill to disclose the falsification of accounts.
The Kingston Cotton Mill Company Ltd. (1896).

Justice Lindsay told it is no part of the auditor’s duty to take stock. No one contends that it is.
He must rely on other people for details of the stock- in – trade in hand, if there are no
suspicious circumstances.
Westminister Road Construction and Engineering Company Ltd. (1932)

In this case, it was held that an auditor must take the fullest use of all materials available to him
and although he is neither a stock taker and nor a valuer of work – in – progress. He will be
guilty of misfeasance if he fails to take notice of all available evidence from which it could be
reasonable concluded that the work – in – progress was overvalued.
Le Lievere and Dennes vs. Gould (1893): In this case it was held that as there is no contractual
relationship between the auditor and the third party, the auditor is not liable.
Distinction between Audit and Investigation:
Investigation of accounts: Investigation of the accounts of business means special examination
of the books of accounts and records for some special purpose e.g. checking of books of
accounts of an existing business intended to purchase by a person or a company may conduct
investigation of audited accounts of their business:
SUJEET JHA 287 9213188188

STUDY NOTES 9
EDP AUDIT OR AUDITING FOR COMPUTERIZED
ACCOUNTING:
ITs FEATURES AND ADVANTAGES:
EDP audit or auditing for computerized accounting: EDP audit. is a process of collection
where evidences are collected and evaluated to assure that the system properly safeguards
assets, maintains data integrity, reliability and efficiency of the information system, uses
resources of the organization in an efficient manner and gives a sound reporting structure.
Features/Principles/objectives/advantages benefits of EDP audit: The following are the

advantages or principles of EDP audit:
(i) EDP audit evaluates that proper and sufficient data control, data integrating and
efficiency of the information system. .
(ii) It properly safeguards the assets and uses and also includes hardware, software,
system documentation, data files etc.
(iii) This system of audit ensures the utilization of resources in an efficient manner and
within the minimum costs.
(iv) Under this audit, proper administration and procedural controls are created and
implemented.
(v) It ,ensures that data processing of different application system are accurate.
(vi) It ensures that there is a proper system of reporting structure.
(vii) Under this system of audit, rules, regulations and statutory laws are maintained
and ensure compliance of statutory rules.
(viii) It reviews the system of scope of the organization data processing method and the
system efficiency and effectiveness and also asses the fulfillment of need of the
users.
(ix) By maintaining managerial control over the data processing system, it reduces the
chances of errors and frauds.
(x) Through the help of EDP audit, areas· can be detected where more work is to be
performed. Security programme and overall control for the risk associated with the
information system can be found out.
LIMITATIONS OF EDP OR COMPUTERIZED ACCOUNTING:
Though EDP audit has many advantages to the auditor, it is not free of limitations. The
difficulties which arise during EDP audit are discussed below:
(i) Problems to get supporting vouchers: In case of manual auditing system every
transaction has a supporting voucher and with proper authorization. But in case of
computerized accounting many transactions are directly put in to the computer
without the record of authorization e.g. purchase invoice, sales invoice, discount
allowed etc. This creates a problem to. the auditor regarding authenticity of
transactions because of non-existence of input documents. Output reports may not
give supporting details e.g. printed reports which may contain only transactions
details and total.
(ii) Easy way to fraud and manipulation of data: Accounting through computer system
may give chances of huge fraud and manipulation of data's in different ways. If
there is easy access and lack of security, frauds may leads to loss of substantial
SUJEET JHA 288 9213188188

amount.
(iii) Deficiency of visible audit trail: In conventional accounting there is a system of in
depth checking and verification of transactions from the beginning to the end
through a series of process and it is possible to get necessary documents and
supporting vouchers. But in a computerized accounting system, there is' no series
of process followed for recording of transactions as input. Therefore, there is a lack
of audit trail and as a result there is a huge chance of manipulation.
(iv) Problem of codification: In conventional accounting system transactions are
classified according to the different accounting heads. But in computerized
accounting different codes are used for the transactions which creates problem for
the auditor except expertise in this field.
(v) Effect of computer virus: This is a serious problem for computerized accounting.
This is a preplanned programme applied to destroy the area of different accounting
data, for the purpose of the employee's personal gain. The auditor has to be very
cautious regarding computer virus while auditing through computer.
MAJOR AREAS ON INTERNAL CONTROL SYSTEM IN AN

EDP ENVIRONMENT:
The main objective of EDP audit is to proper data control, data integrity, system
efficiency and
safeguarding of assets. But the objective of EDP audit would fail to get result if there is
not a
sound internal control system in the organization. The major areas of internal control
system are
discussed below:
A big organization having a sound internal control system covers the following major
areas:
(i) Total system of control: Internal control system is a whole system of control
financial and otherwise.
(ii) Integrate other subsystem: To execute the proper functioning of internal control,
internal check and internal audit are implemented.
(iii) Control all aspects: Internal control system is such a control which exercises
control over assets, . liabilities, revenue and expenses.
(iv) Control also non-financial activities: Internal control exercises not only internal
check and internal audit but also perform non-financial activities for smooth
running of business.
COMPUTER INFORMATION SYSTEM AND INTERNAL

CONTROL:
Internal control is the total control of an organization financial and otherwise to safeguard
business assets, prevention and detection of errors and frauds, increase the efficiency of
the management and good system of accounting records and includes internal check and
internal audit."
Some of the important internal control system for computer information system is:
(i) Creation of Password: There should be a system of password for authentication of
the person for processing the task. In other words, data fed into the system and
processing done by the computer is authorized.
(ii) Process of Edit Test: Financial Control and Edit Control test help in accurate data
entry and the accurate processing of computer information system.
(iii) File Libraries: This is a system which can be used as an internal control technique
to protect the computer information system from destruction anti corruption.
SUJEET JHA 289 9213188188

(iv) Audit Trails: This system helps to preserve all those records within the system
from which financial statement can be obtained.
(v) Batch Cancellation Stamp: This control helps repetition of processing of data and
only one time processing is required.
(vi) General Control: This control helps to implement overall control on all the
activities of computer information system. The sub-system of this control is (a)
Organization Control (b) System and Documentation control (c)
Hardware Control (d) Procedural Control etc.
(vii) Application Control: In addition to general control, control of application of the
computer information system is also important. The subsystem of this control is
(a) Input Control (b) Output Control and (c) Processing control.
CHARACTERISTICS OF AN EFFECTIVE SYSTEM OF

COMPUTER AUDIT PROGRAMME
The characteristics of compute~ audit programme are:
(i) The system must be simple enough for being use so that it can remember countless
details normally required in writing or changing computer programme.
(ii) The system of computer audit programme would be such so that it is easily
understandable to all.
(iii) It has the capacity for being used with different configuration of computers.
(iv) The staff should be sufficiently trained and the package must-have adequate
support at the time of installation. There should be enough flexibility for future
revision of. the programme.
(v) The package must have statistical sampling capability.
(vi) The programme should frame in such a way so that it can process different types
of applications. .
(vii) The system should be such that it can be easily executed by all users and can be
compared with the existing system.
(viii) The program must have function of report writing and is capable to prepare
multiple reports in a single program run and also can generate output report format
which is flexible as per requirement.
Steps for Auditing of Computerized Accounting:
The following steps should require before audit of computerized accounting: .
(i) Examine the fundamental features of computerized accounting. This includes:

(a) System and methods of keeping accounting
(b) Management information system
(c) Documentation of input
(d) Procedure and system of control
(e) Methods of segmentation of duties.
(ii) Evaluate the system of documentation. This includes:
(a) Contents of data
(b) Internal control system
(c) Coding procedure
(d) Formats of input
(e) System flow chart
(f) Documentation of new system software
(g) Access to system documentation.
SUJEET JHA 290 9213188188

(iii) Control over inputs. This includes:

(a) Authorization of transactions
(b) Is there any missing transactions or transactions are changed or duplicated.
(c) Rejection of incorrect transactions.
(iv) Designing of test procedure. This consists of:
(a) Choice of testing technique
(b) Processing of testing operations.
(v) Audit tools through computer. This includes:
(a) Construction of general audit programme
(b) Test dect
(c) Recovery procedure of data and computer programme.
(vi) Preparing audit programme.
(vii) Compliance audit procedure
(viii) Review of output
(ix) Timely submission of report to the management.
DISTINCTION BETWEEN FINANCIAL AUDIT AND COST AUDIT

Financial Audit Cost Audit
1. Financial audit is the audit of 1. Cost audit is the audit of cost accounting
financial accounts of an records of an organization to reflect true cost of a
organization, at the end of the product or service and pricing.
financial year to reflect true
and fair view of accounts.
2. Financial audit is compulsory 2. Cost audit is not compulsory except in certain'
for every company as per cases i.e. companies' carrying. on business of
company's manufacturing or mining and where the Central
act, 1956. government has directed to maintain cost accounts
in certain industries under Section 209(d) and
compulsory cost audit under Section
233B.
3. The purpose of financial audit 3. The objects of cost audit are to examine the cost
are to find out whether accounting records, verify it and to give report
financial accounts are regarding efficiency or inefficiency in cost of
properly maintained and production and detailed analysis of cost data's.
whether reflects true and fair
view of the state of affairs of
the company.
4. In this audit all types of 4. In case of cost audit, only expenses related to
financial transactions are costs i.e. material, labour, overheads, and stores
examined. are thoroughly
checked.
5. Financial audit is primarily 5. Cost audit is primarily conducted to protect the
conducted to protect the interest of the management, customers,
interest of the shareholders. government and of the society.
6. The first auditor of a company 6. Cost auditors are always appointed by the board
is appointed by the board of of directors with the previous approval of the
directors and subsequent Central government.
auditors are appointed by' the
shareholders in the annual
SUJEET JHA 291 9213188188

general meeting except in

certain cases.
7. The financial auditor has to 7. In addition to valuation of stock a cost
verify the value of stock and auditor has to determine the quantity
ensure that it has been correctly of stock and has to see it is excessive
valued and shown in the or inadequate.
balance sheet and can
8. A financial auditor does not 8. A cost auditor examines the cost
check the cost records in detail records in detail to find the errors and
where manipulation can be also to find manipulations in the cost
made. accounts.
9. Audited financial accounts are 9. Audited cost audit is not generally
required to give return of acceptable to the income tax
income to department.
10. The Financier auditor gives his 10. The cost auditor gives his opinion
opinion regarding true and fair regarding true position of cost
view of accounts and do act as accounting records and also gives
advice regarding increase in
an advisor. efficiency and profit in the
11. At the end of audit work the II. At the end of cost audit the cost auditor
financial auditor sends his audit sends his audit report to the company
report to the management of the as well as to the Company Law Board.
company.
SUJEET JHA 292 9213188188

MANAGEMENT AUDIT - ITs SCOPE AND OBJECTIYES

Management Audit: Management audit is a method of independent and systematic
evaluation of the management activities at .all levels of management to ascertain the
functions, efficiency and achievement of' the management (i.e. policies) as compared to
According to L. R. Howard, "Management audit is an investigation of business from the

highest level downward in order to ascertain whether sound management prevails
throughout, thus facilitating the most effective relationship with outside world and
smooth running of internal organization."
As per Taylor and Perry; "Management auditing is a method to evaluate the efficiency
of management at all levels throughout the organization, or more specifically, it
comprises the investigation of a business by an independent body from the highest
executive level downwards, in order to ascertain whether sound management prevails
through and to report as to its efficiency or otherwise with recommendations to ensure
its effectiveness where such is not the case."
Scope of management audit: The scope of management audit is much wider than
financial audit because management audit evaluates not only financial audit but also
other aspects of the business. It is the method of evaluating the total efficiency of the
management from the top level to the lowest level.
Therefore, the main scope of management audit is:
(i) Evaluate the efficiency of the management: Management· audit evaluates and
appraise the efficiency of the management at all levels.
(ii) Implementation of principles and policies of the management: Management audit
review whether principles and policies formulated by the management have been
successfully implemented or not.
(iii) Find variances: It detects the variances in efficiency with the standards set by the
management. .
(iv) Analyze the reasons for variances: Management audit analyze the reasons for
inefficiencies of the management for not fulfilling the targets.
(v) Recommend suggestions for improvement: It gives suggestions for improvement
in the areas e.g. production, sales, purchase, finance, human resources,
administration etc.
Objectives of management audit: Management audit is the total audit of the management
i.e. reviews how the policies of the management have been implemented and its
efficiency to execute the policy. Therefore, the scope is much greater than financial
audit, as it examines the all aspects of the management. Management audit has some
objectives. These are discussed below:
(i) Verifying the efficiency: Management audit aims at to asses the efficiency at all
levels of management and implementation of policies.
(ii) Gives suggestion for increase in efficiency: Management audit highlights the
SUJEET JHA 293 9213188188

inefficiencies in different areas of management and gives his valuable suggestions

and means to improve the efficiencies.
(iii) Asses the effectiveness of Planning and policies: Management audit examine and
evaluates the plans and policies and judge whether planning and policies are
properly implemented.
(iv) Helps to increase profitability: Management audit helps the management to
increase profitability by giving remedies to maximize the organization's resources
in an efficient way.
(v) Helps to co-ordinate activities: Management audit detects the interrelationship
among the activities, evaluates the authority and responsibility and gives valuable
suggestions for improvement of co- ordination among the activities and the
employees. .
(vi) Gives valuable advice: By scanning the management efficiency and detecting the
weak spots of different levels of management, the management auditor gives
valuable advice to the top management regarding different policies and future
course of action
DISTINCTION BETWEEN FINANCIAL AUDIT AND

MANAGEMENT AUDIT
Financial Audit: Financial audit is the systematic examination of the books of accounts to
give opinion regarding true and fair view of the financial position. Management audit is the
evaluation of the efficiency of the management at all levels' i.e. financial and otherwise.
Therefore, management audit is a total audit of the business and financial audit is a part of
it.
Management audit: Management audit is a method of independent and systematic

evaluation of the management activities at all levels of management to ascertain the
functions, efficiency and achievement of the management (i.e. policies) as compared to
The difference between financial audit and management audit are discussed below.
Financial Audit Management Audit
1. Financial audit is the scientific and 1. Management audit is a method of
systematic examination of the books, independent and systematic evaluation of the
accounts, vouchers and other financial management activities at all levels of
records that will help the auditor to management to ascertain the functions,
give opinion regarding true and fair efficiency . and achievement of the
view of the state of affairs of the management (i.e. policies) as compared to
business and to verify that profit and standards set by the company.
loss account reflects a true and fair
view of profit or loss for the financial
year.
2. The scope of financial audit is given 2. The scope of management audit is to asses
in the company's act, 1956. This audit the efficiency of the employees at all levers of
is only relating to financial management which is related to production,
transactions, so its scope is limited. marketing, finance, human resources, sales etc,
so its scope is larger than financial audit.
3. The person who conducts financial 3. The person who . conducts management audit
audit must have professional should have a strong background in different l
qualification, knowledge, skill, ability subjects and expertise in different fields in
and expertise in the field of financial addition to financial matters.
SUJEET JHA 294 9213188188
accounting except in some cases where

he may not be a Chartered Accountant.
4. Financial' audit generally starts 4. Management audit may be conducted
after the close of the financial year at any time depends on the needs and
and after' making all accounts circumstances.
ready.
5. Financial audit is the historical 5. Review and appraisal of
examination of books of accounts implementation of policies and
of an organization by an auditor to assessment of overall efficiency is the
assure that the books of accounts main task of the management auditor.
reflects a true and fair view of state
of affairs and profit and loss for
the vear.
6. Financial auditor gives opinion 6. Management auditor makes
regarding true and fair view of the assessment of the overall efficiency at
financial position of the all levels of management and gives
organization. suggestions for
7. The task of financial auditor ends 7. When the financial audit ends,
when he gives his report and gives management audit starts and ends
his opinion on it. when they give a report and makes
outcome of assessment and gives
suggestions for
8. Financial audit is compulsory in 8. Management audit is not compulsory
case of companies as per as per companies act, 1956. This
Companies act, depends on the needs of the
Company. 0> •
9. Financial audit report is to be given 9. Management audit report is to be
to the members of the company. given to the appointing authority.
ADVANTAGES OR IMPORTANCE OF MANAGEM'ENT

AUDIT:
There are several advantages of conducting management audit of an organization. When
an organization grows in its volume and activities, there is a need for management audit
for evaluating efficiency and effectiveness of the management at all levels of the
organization. The advantages and importance of management audit are discussed below:
(i) Evaluates efficiency of the management: Management audit is a method of
independent and 'systematic evaluation of the management activities at all levels of
management to ascertain the functions, efficiency and achievement of the
management (i.e. policies) as compared to standards set by the company.
(ii) Scrutiny of the plans, policies and procedure: Management audit helps to determine
how the management has implemented their plans, policies and procedure to reach
the organizations goal.
(iii) Helps for correction of plans, policies and procedure: Through management audit,
it is possible to change or revise the plans, policies and procedure as per needs of
the company.
(iv) Aids for decision making: Management audit asses the ability of the managers to
take important decisions and helps them to rectify the defects.
(v) Helps to get loan: Financial institutions who gives huge loan to the organizations
are interested to know the efficiency of the management and the profitability.
Management audit certainly gives a guide to them.
(vi) Helps to get subsidy: Before granting subsidy by the government, to any entity
they are interested to know the efficiency and functioning of the management.
Management audit helps in this matter.
(vii) Helps to increase profitability: Management audit helps the management to
SUJEET JHA 295 9213188188
increase profitability by giving remedies to maximize the organization's resources

in an efficient way.
(viii) Gives valuable advice: By scanning the management efficiency and detecting the
weak spots of different levels of management, the management auditor gives
valuable advice to the top management regarding different policies and future
course of action.
Limitation or disadvantages of Management Audit:

Though management audit has a high value for the organization to evaluate overall
efficiency of the management, still there are some limitations of this audit. These are
discussed below:
(i) Reluctant to accept: The management people are not very interested to conduct
such audit because of their weaknesses and inefficiency which may be revealed.
(ii) High costs: Conducting management audit of a company is a costly matter.
Therefore, except large organizations small businesses can-not afford the cost of
doing management audit.
(iii) Unavailability of experienced auditor: Management audit is a complex task
because of its nature and large scope. The person who conducts such audit must
have professional qualifications, expertise, skill, ability, and other qualities. But
there are scare human resources in this field.
(iv) Not a regular audit: As management audit is conducted according to needs and
circumstances of the management and is not a regular audit, the benefit of this
audit can be achieved for short period.
PROPRIETY AUDIT .... ITs SCOPE AND OBJECTIVES

Propriety audit: Propriety audit is a method of audit which verifies the reasonableness of
expenditure incurred by an organization and is not detrimental to public interest. This
audit is generally applicable to the government organizations.
According to E. L. Kohler, " Propriety means that which meets the test of public interest,
commonly accepted customs and standards of conduct. Propriety audit is an audit in
which various actions and decisions are examined to find out whether they agree in
public interest and whether they meet the standards of conduct."
Scope and objectives: Propriety audit not only determines the accuracy of books of
accounts but also justify the expenditure in term of propriety and reasonableness.
Therefore, this audit tests the public interest and evaluates its financial propriety in
relation to standards or commonly accepted customs. Propriety audit is generally
applicable to the government organizations as it involves a huge public money. So,
public accountability is the main criteria of propriety audit. It evaluates the efficiency
and prudence of government department and its propriety in relation to public money.
The scope and objectives are:
(i) Confirm collection of revenue: Propriety audit helps to assess whether revenue
are properly collected and recorded in the books of accounts.
(ii) Helps to detect fraud and misrepresentation: This audit helps to judge whether
there is any fraud and misrepresentation of funds.
(iii) Wastage of funds: With the help of propriety audit wastage of public funds can be
determined and also its utilization can be verified.
(iv) Verify justification of expenditure: Verify Justification of expenditure in relation
to generally accepted standards and customs.
(v) Not detrimental: It verifies that the contracts made by the organization with the
third parties are not detrimental to the public interest.
SUJEET JHA 296 9213188188

(vi) Finds misuse of power: Whether there is any misuse of power at the top level of
management regarding appropriation of funds.
(vii) Evaluates internal control system: This audit evaluates whether internal control
system is effective and well performing.
ADVANTAGES OF PROPRIETY AUDIT

There are many advantages of conducting propriety audit. These are discussed below:
(i) Review of plans, policies and procedure: Propriety audit helps to determine how
the management has implemented their plans, policies and procedure regarding
utilization of funds.
(ii) Scanning of activities of the directors: Propriety audit helps to measure the
efficiency of the directors regarding justification and propriety of expenditure
made by them.
(iii) Evaluates internal control system: This audit evaluates whether internal control
system is effective and "Yell performing. If there is any weaknesses in the system
that may be located and remedial measures can be taken.
“AN AUDITOR IS A WATCH DOG BUT NOT A BLOOD

HOUND".
The remark was made by Justice Lopes in a famous case law, The Kingston Cotton Mill
Company Ltd (1896). The contents of the case are given below.
Facts of the case: Stock was overvalued for several years fraudulently '0 inflate profit
and dividend was paid out of that profit which results in erosion of capital. The auditor
took the value of stock certified by the manager and the value was agreed by the auditor
without applying reasonable care and skill and entered in the balance sheet with a note
"as per manager's certificate."
Judgment: In this case Justice Lopes observed, "It is the duty of an auditor to bring to
bear on the work he has to perform that skill, care and caution which a reasonably
competent, careful and cautious auditor would use. What is reasonable skill, care and
caution must depend on the particular circumstances of each case. An auditor is not bound
to be a detective, or, as was said, to approach his work with suspicion or with a foregone
conclusion that there is something wrong. He is a watch-dog but not a bloodhound. He
is justified in believing tried servants of the company in whom confidence is placed by the
company. He is entitled to assume that they are honest, and to rely upon their
representations, provided he takes reasonable care. If there is anything calculated to excite
suspicion he should prove it to the bottom, but in the absence of anything of that kind, he
is only bound to be reasonably cautious and careful.
SUJEET JHA 297 9213188188

Q. What is Pre and Post audit?

Ans. Pre-Audit: Before payments are made by the business entities, proper verification
should be made. This is known as pre-audit. For example, payments made for
salaries, medical bills, conveyance expenses etc. In this case payment should be
made after proper scrutiny of the expenses by the employees of the organization.
Post-Audit: The payments which are incurred within a very short period and it is
not possible to scrutiny of the payments by the employees of the organization e.g.
festival bonus is to be paid by a large organization to their employees within a
day, then payment is made immediately. After making payment, verification can
be made. This is known as post-audit.
Q. Give two point of difference between continuous audit and periodical audit.
Ans.
Continuous Audit Periodical Audit
1. In this audit detailed 1. This audit starts after completing books
examination of books of accounts of a accounts and after the close of the
are continuously made throughout financial year.
the whole year.
2. More expensive and applicable 2. Less expensive and applicable for all
for large organization. organization.
Q. What is audit risk?

Ans. Audit risk is the risk of giving inappropriate opinion on financial information
given by the auditor in his audit report. Therefore, before giving opinion regarding
any matters the auditor should consider risk at each level of activity.
Q. What are collateral vouchers? .

Ans. A voucher which is produced instead of original voucher is called collateral
voucher.
Q. What is cut-off procedure?

Ans. Cut-off procedure is a process of examination of transactions of a particular period
and that would be separate from those in the forthcoming period. In other words,
Cut-off procedure means separation of transactions of on period from other period.
Q. State the sources of payment of dividend in case of a company limited by

shares.
Ans. As per Section 205 of the company's Act, 1956, the sources of payment of
dividend are: (i) Out of current years distributable profit (ii) Undistributed profit
of the past years (ii) Moneys provided by the Central or State Government under
guarantee
Q. What do you mean by Audit Trail?

Ans. Audit trail refers to a system of designing of an information system in a manner
that the previous data and information may be find out at any stage to verify the
SUJEET JHA 298 9213188188
source, correctness, authenticity, flow and destination including the stages of

security procedures for establishment of integrity of data and information.
Q. What is Fictitious Assets?

Ans. Fictitious assets are those assets which has no real physical existence i.e. assets
having any realized value but whose benefit may be extended for some years. E.g.
preliminary expense, profit and loss (Dr.), discount on issue of shares etc.
Q. Why Auditing is called a dynamic Social Science?

Ans. Like a social science audit has also some social objectives and social
responsibilities toward the business and to the society. With the passage of time
complexities and volume of business has increased substantially and increased. As
a result there is a major change in its scope and responsibility Audited accounts
protect the interest of the business owners, employees, customers, creditors,
financial institutions, Debenture holders, Preference shareholder, Tax department,
government and the others. For this auditing is called a dynamic social science.
Q. Can dividend be paid out of pre – incorporation profit?

Ans. Legally, a company has no existence before incorporation. So the profit earned at
that time is not a legal profit. Therefore, a company can not declare dividend out
of profit made prior to incorporation.
Q. Give the meaning of capital profit. Give examples.

Ans. Profit which should not arise normal business activities or day to day activity is
known as capital profit. In other words profit arises out of non – trading activity is
capital profit.
Q. What is operational audit?

Ans. Operational audit is the audit of examination of all operations and activities of an
organization. It evaluates the efficiency of the departments which are in
conformity with standards set by the entity and also determine how much
economy and efficiency has been achieved.
Q. What is inherent risk with reference to the relevant Auditing and Assurance
Standard?
Ans. As per AAS 6 inherent risk is the susceptibility of an account balance or class of
transactions to misstatement that could be material either individually or, when
aggregated with misstatements in other balances or classes, assuming there were
no related internal controls.
Q. Distinguish between Audit and Investigation. (give two points).

Ans.
Audit Investigation
1. Audit is the scientific and systematic 1. Investigation is a process through which
examination of the books, accounts, an investigator on behalf of his client
vouchers and other financial records that investigates different matters as per need of
will help the auditor to give opinion the client and gives report to him.
regarding true and fair view of the state of
affairs of the business and to verify that
profit and loss account reflects a true and
fair view of profit or loss for the financial
year.
SUJEET JHA 299 9213188188
2. A person must be Charted Accountant 2. There is no prescribed qualification in

for conducting audit of a company. the company’s act for conducting
investigation.
Q. What is Surprise Check?

Ans. Some times the auditor makes a surprise check to ascertain the effectiveness of
Internal Control system and to examine whether transactions are promptly
recorded in the books of accounts. E.g. verification of cash balance, stock etc.
Q. Is there any distinction between Intangible assets and Fictitious assets?

Ans.
Intangible Assets Fictitious Assets
1. Intangible assets are those assets which 1. Fictitious assets are those assets which
can not be touched or seen but whose has no real physical existence i.e. assets
existence can be realized through some having any realized value but whose
producing ability e.g. Patent, Trade Mark, benefit may be extended for some years.
and Goodwill etc. E.g. preliminary expenses, profit and loss
(Dr.) discount on issue of shares etc.
2. These assets are generally shown in the 2. These assets are written off over the
Balance Sheet at cost price. years and unadjusted amount is shown in
the assets side of the Balance Sheet.
Q. Distinguish between Net Profit and Divisible profit.

Ans.
Net Profit Divisible Profit
1. The excess of current income over 1. The part of profit which can be legally
current expenditure is net profit. distributed as dividend among the
shareholders is known as divisible profit.
2. As per companies act 1956, a company 2. The company is not bound to give the
can not distribute its whole net profit as whole net profit (after making depreciation
dividend among the shareholders without and amount set aside for reserve) if the
providing depreciation of the current years directors thinks it prudent to use profit for
and also the previous year or years and the development of the company.
without setting aside ascertain percentage
of profit to the reserve
Q. Give two advantages of Statistical Sampling in Auditing.

Ans. The advantages of statistical sampling are (i) This method helps to estimate the
minimum sample size considering the risk and precision and (ii) It gives a good
description of a large population of data than a detailed examination of all the
data.
Q. Give two example of deferred revenue expenditure.

Ans. Examples are: (i) Preliminary expenses for formation of Company (ii) Discount on
issue of Debentures.
Q. Distinguish between Depreciation and Fluctuation in Value.

Ans.
Depreciation Fluctuation in Value
1. Depreciation may be defined as gradual 1. Fluctuation is a temporary decrease and
and permanent decline in the value of fixed increase in the value of an asset due to rise
assets as a result of wear and tear, and fall in market price of an asset.
SUJEET JHA 300 9213188188
obsolesce, efflux ion of time, market

changes or for any other reasons.
2. Provision for depreciation can be 2. No depreciation is provided for
estimated beforehand so that there is lower fluctuation of assets because earning
risk for replacement of assets. capacity or working life of assets does not
affected due to fluctuation in value of
assets.
3. Generally, depreciation is made on fixed 3. Fluctuation in value may be on fixed
assets. assets or current assets.
Q. Is valuation included in verification?

Ans. Verification means checking of physical existence of assets and liabilities and
confirmation and accuracy of actual ownership and liabilities shown in the balance
sheet. The scope of verifications larger than valuation i.e. valuation is a part of
verification. Therefore valuation is included in verification.
Q. What is meant by preliminary expenses?

Ans. When a company wants to form its business, some expenses are required for
formation which is called preliminary expenses e.g. expenses relating to
Memorandum and Articles of Association, Lawyers fees, expenses for preparing
project report, prospectus etc.
Q. What is the meaning of window dressing?

Ans. Window dressing is a process of showing the state of affairs in a Balance Sheet in
such a way that reflects a better position than its actual position to fulfill some
objectives.
Q. Distinguish between Interest and Dividend.

Ans.
Interest Dividend
1. Interest is paid on loan capital such as 1. Dividend is calculated and paid on
Debentures, loan from financial institution subscribed share capital such as equity
etc. share capital and Preference share capital.
2. Interest is treated as expenses of the 2. Dividend is treated as appropriation of
company and charged to Profit and Loss profit and charged to Profit and Loss
account. Appropriation account.
3. Payment of interest is a tax deductible 3. Payment of dividend is not a tax
item. deductible item.
4. Irrespective of profit or losses of the 4. If there is no profit the question of
entity interest has to be paid. payment of dividend does not arises subject
to some exception.
Q. What is CRR?
Ans. Capital Redemption Reserve is a reserve which is created out of undistributed
profit equal to the nominal vale of redemption of Preference Share out of profit.
Q. Give two example of asset, “Intangible but not fictitious assets.”

Ans. Patent, Goodwill.
Q. What are wasting assets? Give examples.

Ans. Wasting assets are those assets which are continuously depleted and losses its
SUJEET JHA 301 9213188188
value at the end of a particular time period for earning revenue. Examples are Oil
Well, Quarry, Mines etc.
Q. Preksha, a member of the ICAI, does not hold a Certificate of practice. Is her
appointment as an auditor valid?
Ans. To be an auditor a person must be chartered accountant of India within the
meaning of the chartered Accountants Act, 1949 and also a member of the
institute holding a certificate of practice. In the given case, Preksha does not have
Certificate of Practice. Hence she is not eligible to be appointed as an auditor of a
company.
SUJEET JHA 302 9213188188

Reference Book On Contract Act Foundations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Book On Contract Act Foundations

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Book On Contract Act Foundations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MS EDUCONZ PVT. LTD.

Why Should One Know Law?

English Indian Status Judicial Customs and

STUDY NOTE – 1 : INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872

Section 1:- Commencement and applicability:-

Short Title Extent and commencement

The Indian Applicable to First day of

¾ Prior to this English law of contract was followed in India.

Contracts as Defined by Eminent Jurists

3. Promise 2(b) :- A Proposal when accepted becomes a promise. In simple words,

7. Contract 2(h) :- An agreement enforceable by Law is a contract.

8. Void agreement 2(g):- An agreement not enforceable by law is void.

9. Voidable contract 2(i):- An agreement is a voidable contract if it is enforceable by Law

SUJEET JHA 2 9213188188

ESSENTIALS OF A VALID CONTRACT

“All agreements are contracts, if they are made –

ESSENTIALS OF VALID CONTRACT

Offer + acceptance = Promise

2. Lawful consideration :- consideration must not be unlawful, immoral or opposed to

SUJEET JHA 3 9213188188

said to be free when it is not caused by coercion, undue influence, fraud,

8. Not declared Void

9. Necessary legal formalities

The various agreements may be classified into two categories:

Any essential of All essentials of

SUJEET JHA 4 9213188188

Contracts = Agreement + Enforceability by Law

Distinction between Contract & Agreement

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(b) Implied contract:- A contract inferred by

SUJEET JHA 5 9213188188

(d). Quasi Contracts are contracts which are created -

Example: An agreement which is required to be stamped will be unenforceable if the

SUJEET JHA 7 9213188188

Difference between Void and illegal Agreement

Contract under Seal:

SUJEET JHA 8 9213188188

“When one person signifies to another his willingness –

Essentials elements of an offer:-

(2) The offer must be communicated to the offeree.

(5) A statement made jokingly does not amount to an offer.

(6) An offer may involve a positive act or abstinence by the offeree.

(7) Mere expression of willingness does not constitute an offer.

Legal Rules as to valid offer:-

SUJEET JHA 9 9213188188

4. Offer may be express and implied

5. Communication of complete offer

6. Counter offer – A counter offer amounts to rejection of the original offer

7. Cross offer do not conclude a contract

8. An offer must not thrust the burden of acceptance on the offeree.

9. Offer must be distinguished from invitation to offer.

SUJEET JHA 10 9213188188

11. An answer to a question is not a offer.

Offer Invitation to offer

¾ Purpose of entering contract ¾ Purpose of enter offer

¾ Results in a contract ¾ Results in offer.

Express Implied Specific General Cross offer Counter Standing

III. Specific:- It means an offer made in

SUJEET JHA 11 9213188188